Mechanical Specifciation - Rev 01 PDF

Nudra Beach Villas A3, A4
Abu Dhabi ‐ Saadiyat Island
Volume 2: Specification
Part 3 of 4: Mechanical Specification
Rev 01
Nudra Beach Villas, Plots A3, A4, Saadiat, Abu Dhabi
Division 00 Special instruction to bidders
00 22 12 Mechanical Works Requirements
00 22 13 Further Instruction to Mechanical Work Bidders
Division 01 Commissioning
01 91 00 00 40 Commissioning
Division 21 Fire Fighting System
21 13 000 Fire Fighting System-01
Division 22 Plumbing
22 00 00 Plumbing
22 05 48 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control
22 08 00 Commissioning of the Plumbing
22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
22 14 29 Sump Pumps
22 51 00 Swimming Pools & Fountains Specifications
Division 23 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
23 00 00 Air Supply, Distribution,Ventilation And Exhaust Systems

23 05 41 Noise And Vibration Control
23 05 48.00 40 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 06 00 Piping Accessories
23 07 00 Thermal Insulation
23 08 00.00 10 Commissioning of HVAC System
03 09 13.34 40 Valves
23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System
23 09 33.00 40 Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC
23 25 00 Chemical Treatment of Water for Mechanical System
23 31 13.00 40 METAL DUCTS-1
23 31 14.00 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS
23 37 13.00 40 Diffusers, Registers and Grills
Mechanical Specifications Div.00,01,21,22,23,33 /Page - 1 Table of Content

23 73 13.00 40 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units-01
23 81 00 00 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment-1
23 81 43 Pool Heat Pump
23 8129 Variable Refrigerant Flow
Division 33 Utilities
33 30 00-1 Sanitary Sewers
33 50 00 SNG -NG Project Specification
33 56 10 Fuel Oil System
Mechanical Specifications Div.00,01,21,22,23,33 /Page - 2 Table of Content

Division 00 Special instruction to bidders
00 22 12 Mechanical Works Requirements
00 22 13 Further Instruction to Mechanical Work Bidders
Mechanical Specifications Div.00 /Page - 1 Table of Content

SECTION 00 22 12
GENERAL MECHANICAL WORKS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 General Conditions
Refer to the Main Contract General Conditions of the specification, together with the additional particular clauses
applicable to the Building Services.
The documentation and work under this Section shall be carried out in accordance with codes and procedures
defined in the General Conditions and complimented with details in this Section of Particular Specifications, all to
the ENGINEERS approval.
Where a particular specification is not defined refer to MEW General Construction Specification, together with
the additional particular clauses applicable to the Building Services
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor, has by careful examination of the plans and Specifications, and
the site where appropriate, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the works, and all conditions that
must be met in order to carry out the works under this section of the Contract.
1.2 Standard of Work
1. The Contractor shall install equipment, air conditioning ducts, conduit and piping in a workmanlike manner to
present a neat appearance and to function properly to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Air conditioning ducts and
pipes shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to the building planes. All piping and ductwork shall be
concealed in chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in unfinished areas. All exposed systems shall be
installed neatly and be grouped to present a neat appearance.
2. All gauges, thermometers, etc., shall be installed in such a way as to facilitate easy observance.
3. All equipment and apparatus, which requires maintenance, adjustment or eventual replacement, shall be installed
making due allowance for access as per ASHRAE Guide line 0-2005.
4. Control sensors shall be installed to guarantee proper sensing. Elements shall be shielded from direct radiation and
shall avoid being placed behind obstructions.
5. All panels and boards, etc., shall be installed to remit easy operation.
6. The Contractor shall include in the work all the requirements of the manufacturer’s as shown on their drawings.
7. The Contractor shall replace all work not performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer without extra cost and to
the standard required by the Engineer. This applies to any item that is found to be defective in service during the
maintenance period, or extended maintenance period as appropriate.
8. Where height dimensions are given, the installation shall be reasonably expected to be within 13 mm of actual
position.
9. Items displaying horizontal dimension or edge must be plumbed with a level and must be to the Engineer’s
satisfaction. Any apparent discrepancy between “level” electrical and mechanical items and adjacent items MUST
be reported immediately to the Engineer.
Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 1 General Conditions

10. All work shall be coordinated with other works so as not to obstruct equipment and apparatus which requires
maintenance, adjustment or eventual replacement.
11. Manufacturers and subcontractors shall operate an ISO 9000 approved quality system or equivalent in house
system. If requested, details of the quality system shall be submitted to the engineer.
12. Equipment shall conform to the requirements of the Project Documentation and reference standards and
ESTIDAMA 1 pearl Requirement .
13. Water monitoring and Leak detection system shall be Comply with PW-R2 Estidama Requirement
14. All equipment furnished shall be new, and where feasible shall be a standard product of an experienced or
approved manufacturer, and assembled from standard components readily available.
15. the flush out of system shall be for 9 consecutive days prior to building operation
1.3 Data to be supplied with Tender
1. Initial technical submissions are to accompany the bid including full technical details of every item of equipment
proposed for the Project, with the appropriate figures and details highlighted in marker pen or similar in standard
manufacturer’s catalogues.
2. After final checking of sizing after award of contract, re-submission shall be made with any changes specifically
noted.
3. Technical submissions shall be submitted for all equipment as specified in the Project Documentation.
4. In the event that the Engineer requires further information on any of the proposed items the .Contractor shall
arrange visits to similar units that he has installed. In an event, all equipment proposed for the Project shall be
currently installed and working satisfactorily locally. The Contractor must be able to provide references of at least
three satisfied Owners and Engineer with equipment of the particular size and model proposed.
1.4 External Design Conditions

The design environmental conditions for Abu Dhabi - UAE are as follows:
Summer
Month August
Average Monthly Maximum Dry Bulb Temperature 46C
Wet Bulb Temperature 29 C
Absolute Maximum Temperature 50C
Average daily range 12C
Winter
Average Monthly Minimum Dry Bulb Temperature 10 C
Average Annual Minimum Dry Bulb Temperature 8 C
R.H. at 03.00 hours Sat
Absolute Min. Temp. 5C
Rainfall (max) 75 mm in 24 hours

1.5 Codes and Standards
All materials, design, fabrication, and erection shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of all codes,
standards or regulations having jurisdiction over the work. In the event of conflict between codes, standards or regulations,
the conflict shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. Works will also adhere to the standards listed below or the
standards resulting from their possible amendment:
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.

AISC 89 American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI 68 American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
ADDC Abu Dhabi distribution company
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
UBC Uniform Building Code
UFAS Universal Feed Assurance Scheme
UL Underwriters Laboratories
NSF National Sanitation Fund
IPC: International Plumbing Code
SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National association
IBC International Building Code
IMC International Mechanical Code
IPC International Plumbing Code
Estidama PBRS (1 Pearl)
ADSSC. Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company
Department of Municipal Affairs (DMA)
Urban Planning Council (UPC)
Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA)
Town Planning Department (TPD)
Uniform Plumbing Code of Abu Dhabi Emirate

UAE Guide to Water Supply Regulations 2017 (RSB)

UAE Fire & Life Safety Code Of Practice 2017
Water Authority Regulations
Estidama PW-R2 Water monitoring & Leak detection
Local Codes, standards and Specifications
In case of any contradictions among the above codes and standards. The local codes and standards shall supersede and
prevail
1.6 Equipment
All equipment to be installed under this contract shall be manufactured by a worldwide well known
manufacturers, and the quality of the product shall be of an approved standard.
The Contractor must give details of type and manufacturer and the manufacturer must have local
representative capable of supplying spare parts, and giving technical support throughout the working life
span of the equipment.
The Contractor shall name each material or equipment he proposes to supply for the purpose of this
project, supported by all details and technical data. The Engineer reserve the right to reject any
equipment in favor of his choice, and with no obligation for justification of his selection
All equipment and mechanical items shall have QCC approval and kit mark
1.7 Equipment Ratings
All equipment selected for use on this Contract shall be suitable for continuous and reliable operation under the
external design conditions stated. In addition, items of equipment installed in enclosed spaces may be subject to
temperatures in excess of those prevailing externally and this shall be taken into account. Where ratings are
given in this Specification and/or shown on the Drawings, they are the actual ratings to be achieved after the
application of all de-rating factors.
Except where otherwise stated, all equipment shall be constructed and sealed as to prevent damage by the
ingress of windblown sand and other matter. All equipment shall be suitable for operation over the ambient
temperature range 0 °C to 55 °C.
Except where otherwise stated in the Project Documentation, the declared ratings for all equipment shall be for
continuous operation in final service position for the following environmental criteria.
(a) Maximum daily average ambient temperature of 50 °C
(b) Relative humidity of 80 %
(c) Altitude 20 m above sea level.
All equipment and enclosures that may be subject to internal condensation shall be fitted with suitably
rated electrically operated thermostatically controlled anti-condensation heaters.
1.8 Pretender Requirements
1.8.1 Familiarization
Visit the site, acquaint to the site conditions to familiarize with the status and progress of the construction of the
site, review all contract documents, and the documents for other trades, highlight and raise queries with the

Engineer for any possible ambiguities as is necessary to accurately price the work. No item, which could have
been clarified in this manner, will later form the basis of a variation to the Contract.
1.8.2 Clarification
If interpretation of the Tender Documents is unclear obtain clarification from the Engineer.
If clarification is not obtained prior to close of Tenders, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater
quantity, or higher cost shall be deemed to be included.
1.8.3 Interpretation
The tender documents are intended to be complimentary and where any items are repeated it is intended to call
particular attention to them or to qualify them; it is not intended that any other part shall be assumed to be
omitted if not repeated. Items may be covered in the specification or the drawings or both.
If interpretation of the Contract Documents is unclear, obtain clarification from the Consultant, during tendering.
Upon awarding the contract any interpretation of specification or other tender documents will be, solely; to the
engineer's discretion.
Documents of later date will govern over documents of earlier date. All documents in any set (e.g. Tender Set)
will be deemed to be of the date of issue of that set for purposes of establishing precedence.
Within any set, the particular will govern over the general as in the following examples: Specific details will
govern over general layout.
1.9 Co-Ordination with Other Trades
Co-ordinate the layout with the Main Contractor and all other trades, and if so directed by the Engineer shall
prepare composite working drawings and sections at 1:50 and 1:20 scale clearly showing how his work is to be
installed in relation to the work of other trades. Set out all equipment and services to suit actual space
conditions.
Locate all equipment for convenient operation, maintenance and future replacement.
1.10 Co-Ordination with Other contractors
Co-ordinate and liaise with other contractors and subcontractors. This shall include but not limited to the
refrigeration, HVAC, steam, civil, plumbing and firefighting supplier, process equipment suppliers. Control
system, utility billing systems, landscape, irrigation, kitchen and laundry, water features, interior & lighting, fixed
furniture and equipment, and the tenants’ subcontractors. The coordination shall include the verification of the
equipment specifications and their requirement based on the actual site conditions,
Set up the tie in connections of all required services, and liaise with the engineer to consider the impact of such
the service requirement on the main services and plants.
1.11 Hand Over Works from Other Subcontractors
Where the scope of works includes continuation of works, which were carried by other contractors, such as first
fix pipes, below ground drainage, puddle flanges, sleeves. etc. the contractors shall , in coordination with the
engineer, test inspect and report all defects and damages as he shall take over the other completed works
before commencement his works.
It is considered the contractor’s responsibility to hand over the complete operational and sound system upon the
taking over the other submitted works.

Indexing, formatting, binding in robust standard covers all hard copy/soft copy documentation associated
required data for handover to EMPLOYER.
All Maintenance records shall be kept by the CONSULTANT for equipment storage and operation from date of
delivery to date of acceptance by EMPLOYER
1.12 Tender Drawings
Tender drawings show general arrangement but are not fully dimensioned and are in places drawn for clarity of
intent rather than dimensional accuracy. Information will not necessarily be shown in both the Specification and
Drawings. Any items shown in one or the other forms part of this contract.
Do not scale the tender drawings. Verify all dimensions from the architectural drawings and by site
measurement. Obtain formal approval from the Engineer before making any fundamental changes from the
conceptual layout.
Submit all shop drawings and technical data in accordance with the Main Contractor's schedule and sufficiently in
advance of Building work to allow sufficient time for checking and possible amendment and re-submission.
1.13 Drawings and Technical Data
1.13.1 DRAWING MATERIAL AND SIZE
a. Prepare drawings for review submittals, bidding and construction in accordance with instructions of the
engineer. Submit record drawings on bond paper, full size one copy and on standard format DVD, two copies.
Each of the two electronic copies shall contain .dwg and .pdf files of each drawing, and .doc and .pdf files of each
project manual document. Each DVD will be labeled as to station #, project #, date, etc.
b. Standard sheets are size A0, 1069 mm (42 in.) long by 762 mm (30 in.) wide.
c. Electronic files shall conform to ISO CAD and Guidelines.
1.13.2 DRAWING FORMAT:
Computer aided design and drafting (CAD) is required for presenting drawings. The format to be used in creating
the CAD drawings (i.e. layer/level structure, fonts, font sizes, file naming conventions, etc.) shall be the latest
edition of the ISO l CAD Standard.
1.13.3 SIZE AND SCALE:

Use minimum lettering height of 3 mm. Computer generated or typewritten notes is a must. Hold screening,
shading, crosshatching and other indications of materials or locations to a minimum. Place symbols and lettering
so that they are not confused with dimension lines, arrowheads, or other indications.
1.13.4 TITLE BLOCK
a. Use the Standard design Title Block for CAD drawings.
b. Identify drawings above the title block in large font stating as appropriate either "Schematics ONLY" or
"Design Development ONLY", and in small font "NOT for Construction".

1.13.5 GENERAL INFORMATION
a. Organize and number drawings into technical classifications as listed in the design drawings
b. Indicate scales by note for each plan, section and detail on each drawing. Provide graphic scales.
c. Show north arrow indicators on plan sheets.
d. Orient plans with North toward the top of the drawing.
e. Note section symbol on the referenced sheet location.
f. Indicate the relationship of details, plans, elevations, and sections, other than standard details, by
cross-reference. Note the sheet number and drawing location of detailed feature on details and
sections. Provide key plans on stair-section sheets to indicate the location of the stairs in the
buildings.
g. Provide a key plan to show the location of a portion of a plan or elevation with respect to the total
project.
h. Use legends, abbreviations, and symbols that conform to the design standard.
i. Do not write specification information on contract drawings. Show notes or dimension information
on the 1:100 (1/8 in.) scale drawings or 1:50 (1/4 in.) scale drawings, but not on both. Do not
repeat drawing information on plans, elevations or details.
j. Clearly distinguish between new, existing, and replacement items of work.
k. Locate room names and room numbers within the spaces to which they apply and locate equipment
symbols or names adjacent to the equipment shown on the floor plans.
l. Indicate all smoke barriers and fire-rated partitions on architectural, heating, ventilating, and air-
conditioning (HVAC), plumbing, and electrical 1:100 (1/8 in.) scale floor plans.
m. Show future expansions (both vertical and horizontal) by dotted lines on site plans, architectural
floor plans, engineering floor plans, and in elevations and sections.
n. For buildings which are to be fully sprinklered, place the note "FULLY SPRINKLERED" above the title
block, close to the right margin, on each architectural, structural, HVAC, plumbing, and electrical
floor plan.
1.13.6 IDENTIFICATION OF DRAWINGS

a. General. Bind all drawings into sets and identify drawing classification, relative order of issue,
amendment, and change order by symbols placed on drawing title blocks as described below:
i. Building number shall precede the classification identification (Building No. 20 as example) 20-BI
1, 20-GS 1, 20-AS 1, 20-SS 1. When a drawing reflects work that is associated with several
buildings or the station in general, such as details sheets and exterior utility distributions
systems, no building number will precede the symbol which identifies the classification.
ii. Number the drawings in sequence within each classification, for example 1-SS 1, first structural
sheet Building No. 1; 1-SS 2, second structural sheet, etc. Directly below the drawing number,
show the position within the series that each drawing occupies, for example, sheet 1 of 30
(structural sheets), sheet 2 of 30 (structural sheets), etc.
iii. Drawings for each new project shall begin with number one. Distinguish the drawings by their
project titles and dates.
iv. The preferred method for classifying drawings is by identification of technical information shown
on drawing, for example, Architectural or Electrical. However, an exception is made when one
design discipline has limited work. Show this limited work on a drawing with another
classification. The drawing number shall show the symbol for the major work classification;
indicate that other work is shown on the same drawing by a description, such as "Plumbing",
above the title block.
v. When work including two or more buildings is described on a single drawing, the sheet shall bear
the number of the building involving the work of the major magnitude; indicate that work on
other buildings is shown on the same drawing by a note above the title block.

b. Amendment Construction Drawings
i. Issue a drawing which is produced to supersede an original working drawing as a corrected plot
of the CAD file or as a photocopy reproduction of the original drawing, on vellum or mylar.
Identify the number of this amendment drawing with the number of the sheet it replaces plus
the suffix "R". Identify additional replacements of the same drawing as - "R2"-"R3", etc. Note
the revisions dates. Place the words "Amendment Drawing" above the Title block with a
statement of the original drawing which it supersedes.
ii. Give a drawing, which supersedes a portion of an original working drawing, a new number in
sequence with other drawing numbers. Place the notation "Amendment Drawing" above the
title block with a statement of the drawing number of the original drawing it modifies. Insert the
date of the amendment on the drawing. Place a cross reference note, on the superseded
drawing, calling attention to the amendments.
c. Reissue Construction Drawings
i. When a complete set of working drawings is to be reissued without change, remove the original
date and insert the new date of the reissue.
ii. When a complete set of working drawings is to be reissued with changes, re-plot the changed
drawings, or provide a photocopy vellum or mylar reproduction of the original drawings, where
feasible, with changes incorporated. These reproductions (or drawings) shall retain original dates
and drawing numbers with the suffix - "R", but the reissue date shall appear in the Revision
column.
iii. When some drawings only of an entire set are changed, the entire set shall retain original dates
and drawing numbers with the suffix "R" added; and the reissue date shall appear in Revision
column of the changed drawings only.
d. Completion Item Construction Drawings. Completion Items are additional work required beyond the
original contract and after its completion.
iv. Provide drawings prepared to describe Completion Items with drawing numbers in sequence
with last working drawing of a series.
v. In the title blocks of Completion Item drawings, show the same project titles and project
numbers as the original working drawings
1.13.7 Shop Drawings
Prepare shop drawings for the installation. These shall be based upon the actual equipment to be installed,
according to manufacturers subsequently approved by the Engineer.
Make all adjustments to the design as are necessary to accommodate the technical and physical, requirements
of the selected equipment in the preparation of the shop drawings .Such adjustments shall at all times ensure
that the final performance of the completed installations is achieved as intended.

Check and coordinate with the work of all trades involved before submission for the approval of the Engineer and
shall bear the Contractor's stamp of confirmation as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings
submitted without this stamp of confirmation will be returned to the Contractor for re-submission.
Drawings shall be initially submitted in 3 sets of prints accompanied by a letter of transmittal. After return of the
"Engineer approved for construction" print, the Contractor will furnish the number of additional prints (not to
exceed ten in number) specified by the Engineer.
Prepare dimensioned construction drawings for the following sections of the installation to a standard at
least equal to the tender drawings. Each drawing shall have a blank area of 18 cm. x 12 cm. located
adjacent to the title black and reserved for the comments of the Engineer. The title block shall display
the following: -
a) Number and title of drawing (s),

b) Date of drawing or revision,
c) Name of project and employer,
d) Name of consultant,
e) Name of contractor and sub-contractor submitting the drawing(s),
f) Clear identification of contents and location of work,
g) Specification title and number,
h) Scale of drawings.
The Contractor shall submit all drawings sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to permit
not less than fifteen working days for the Engineer's checking and appropriate action.
 Floor plans 1:50

 Plant room Layouts (minimum 1:20)
 Duct and equipment layouts including control element locations
 Pipe work layout and details with all valves clearly shown and numbered
 Switchboard and control panel diagrams
 Electrical and control schematics
 A valve schedule which when read in conjunction with the pipe work layout details the function of each
valve.
 Any sections of the installation requiring detailed spatial co-ordination with other trades
 Any section of the work containing equipment differing from the design base in dimension or
configuration.
The purpose of this review is to minimize the likelihood of inconvenience to the Principal which would result
from rejection of unsatisfactory equipment or work following installation.
The review is in no way intended to relieve the Contractor’s responsibility to check the shop drawings and
technical data and to meet the contract requirements especially where some items have been missed out or
substituted. In this instance, the Contractor shall be responsible for installing the original items specified.
Ensure that equipment offered are compatible (e.g. speed controllers and motors, actuators, control system) and
that when combined, such systems meet the noise criteria specified. Generally, checking of technical data by the
consultant should be considered for information purposes only and final lengths, sizes, ratings and any critical
factors are the Contractor’s responsibility.

Sign all shop drawings and technical data to certify that they have been checked in detail, are fully understood,
meet the specification and are considered suitable for the purpose intended. Draw any specific areas of doubt to
the Consultant's attention for resolution.
Specific requirements for a piece of equipment will govern over general requirements for a type of equipment.
1.14 Complete & Finished Work
Complete and commission all work within the contract.
Provide any incidental materials, components or service, which may be necessary to make the work complete in
all respects and ready for operation. All such materials and components shall conform to the same standard and
be of the same making as similar items specified herein.
1.15 Changes and Variations
Changes resulting from the detailed co-ordination and layout of equipment and services by the Contractor shall
not be the basis of a variation to the contract. Offsets of piping and ducts resulting from the Contractor's co-
ordination of equipment, services and structure shall not constitute a variation.
Provision of equipment other than the design base shall not lead to a variation. The Contractor shall be
responsible for costs to other trades resulting from provision of such equipment.
1.16 Record Drawings and Manuals
Within thirty days of the Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall provide 3 sets of fully detailed "as
installed record drawings" of the whole Contract Works together with full installation operating and maintenance
instructions to be checked and approved by the Engineer. Temporary manuals and record drawings shall be
made available at least one month before to enable the Employer's staff to familiarize themselves with the
installation. These should preferably be the final manuals with temporary insertions for the items which cannot
be finalized until the Works are completed and tested.
The drawings shall comprise general arrangement drawings of all installations; detail drawings of plant rooms
and similar areas; single line diagrams of all services; line diagrams of control systems and electrical circuit
diagrams.
The drawings shall indicate the color coding, labelling and identification of all the services as previously
described, and shall give full working details of size, load, duty and capacity of each item of plant. The drawings
shall also clearly indicate the location of all vents, drains, dampers, valves and test points. The line diagram shall
indicate the type, location and function of each component and, together with the interconnecting wiring and
piping, the terminal connection reference numbers or letters on the actual equipment.
The drawings shall:
a) Indicate sizes and positions of all plant, equipment pipes conduits.
b) Indicate the circuit reference for all equipment and each outlet shown. All references shall agree with the
chart and labels in distribution boards fixed to the switchgear.
In addition to the Record Drawings, the Contractor shall obtain and provide two sets of the manufacturer's
detailed drawings of all items of plant, suitably titled and with drawing reference numbers added.

The Record Drawings shall be specially prepared and shall not be modified Working Drawings. The preparation of
these drawings shall be processed during the installation of the Contract Works, as each section is completed. To
ensure that this requirement is met, the Engineer shall be all to inspect the drawings on request.
The operating and maintenance instructions shall be prepared as soon as the working drawings are in hand and
shall take the form of a manual in which is described the layout and function of the system, schedules of
components comprising each and every item of equipment including manufacturer's name, reference and serial
number and operating maintenance instructions based on the manufacturer's standard amplified where
necessary. An overall maintenance schedule shall be prepared by the Contractor on a system basis, listing out in
simple terms the plant, nature of attention and intervals due. This shall be cross-referenced with the
manufacturer's standard instructions.
Drawings shall be arranged to fold out from their position and be entirely visible when any part of the manual
read. They shall be printed on linen backed paper.
The manuals shall be encased in loose leaf binders.
The Operating and maintenance manuals of equipment to be provided by equipment VENDORS
The Operating and maintenance manuals of installation system to be provided by Contractor.
The Contractor shall include for the preparation and supply of four copies of the manuals and drawings after all
details have been approved by the Engineer. Also the supply of two sets of reproducible, one set to be handed to
the Client and one set to be kept with the Engineer.
The contractor shall be submit the QA/QC hand-over records.

1.17 Operations & Instructions Boards
The operating instructions board shall be prepared & installed at each plant room. The board shall describe the
layout and function of the system within the plant room. It shall contain schedules of each and every equipment
within the plant room including operating & maintenance instructions based on the manufacturer's standard.
Another board shall indicate a schematic diagram of the systems within the plant room.
The board shall be plastic with engraved text and drawings.

1.18 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
The Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be prepared by a specialized, third party firm, with a minimum of
(5) years experience in this field, and on similar projects.
The Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be of standard formats and bound in eight volumes as
following:
a- Vol. (1) Register including manufacturer's name and address ,trade or brand name, local
supplier's name and address
b- Vol. (2) Factory Inspection and test certificates
c- Vol. (3) Testing and Commissioning Reports
d- Vol. (4) Statutory approvals, guaranties and warranties
e- Vol. (5) Operation Manuals, Instruction / System Start up and shutdown Procedures
f- Vol. (6) Maintenance Instructions

g- Vol. (7) Supplementary information regarding trouble shooting, spare parts and tools
h- Vol. (8) As Built Drawings
These specifications are applicable for all the relevant plant systems and equipment, especially the mechanical
and electrical disciplines.
The Contractor shall submit instruction manuals covering all mechanical and plumbing and firefighting equipment
and machinery installed in the Works as specified under sections dealing with mechanical and electrical work.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit two (2) copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer
for review. The Engineer will mark up one copy and return it to the Contractor for correction if necessary.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of approved manuals in hard cover bind incorporating all of Engineer’s
comments and corrections.
The Contractor shall submit two copies of each CD, one marked “Master” the other marked “Back-up”. Drawing
files shall not be compressed. Each CD shall carry a manufacturers’ lifetime warranty and be virus checked
before submission.
The Manuals in CD contents format shall be prepared as a “Portable Document Format” (PDF) using Adobe
Software. Non electronic documents shall be scanned and converted to PDF image files. The CD shall be self-
executing and the software for the operation of the CD is Adobe Acrobat Reader which shall be delivered as part
of the CD operating system. The Adobe Acrobat Reader shall allow the PDF files to be viewed, printed and
navigated.
A table of contents shall be incorporated on the CD and shall open automatically upon the insertion of the CD
and this shall be the key documents for the structure of the CD. All volumes, sections and chapters of the
Manuals shall be addressed from this document and every entry in the table of contents shall contain hypertext
links to the corresponding volume, section or chapter of the Manuals. The user shall be able by one keystroke to
return to the table of contents from any page of the Manuals. The index system shall be based on the list of
contents and its sub-division and link to a master index and search facility.
The electronic Manuals on CD shall be an exact copy of the hard copy version and once a section is opened it
must be capable of being read or printed page by page. Each CD shall include an electronic database index listing
all the files. The Contractor shall also submit a hard copy of the database index with the CD’s.
The contractor shall also submit an index binder for referencing all documents
The contractor shall be submit the QA/QC hand-over records.
1.19 Workmanship
1.19.1 Cleaning
1. Each day as the work proceeds, and on completion, the Contractor shall clean up and remove from the
premises all rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other items used in
the performance of the work. The Contractor shall clean out dirt and debris and leave the buildings
broom clean with no stains and in a condition acceptable to the Engineer.
2. Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, the Contractor shall protect them
from over-painting, etc. and shall give all items a final cleaning before handing over.

1.19.2 Accessibility
1. Each item of equipment shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or repair without
removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other ducts, or other materials. For large air
handling units the Contractor shall ensure that these can be assembled on site from components taken
into the area.
2. Clean outs shall be located to permit rodding of all drain lines. These shall be located wherever possible
external to occupied areas, and to minimize spillage problems during rodding.
1.19.3 Construction Loads
Ensure that movement and installation of equipment and materials under this Contract does not impose loads on
the Building, which are either unsafe or likely to damage any part of the Building.
1.19.4 Fixings
Wooden, plastic or fiber plugs will not be permitted as fixings into concrete, masonry and similar construction.
Fixings shall be approved metal expansion devices such as Loxen, Hilti or other approved manufacture, installed
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Hangers and fixings connected to any metal structure shall be of Caddy manufacture or equal approved.
1.19.5 Cutting and Patching
1. The Contractor shall inform all other Divisions in time concerning required openings. Obtain the
approval of the Engineer before doing any cutting.
2. In existing work and in work already finished as part of this contract, all cutting and patching will be
carried out at the expense of this Contractor. Where finishing work is involved, this will only be
reinstated by the Contractor responsible for the original work. The Contractor shall obtain the approval
of the Engineer before doing any cutting. Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building
structure shall only be cut and in such a manner as approved by the Engineer. All reinstatement work
must be done to the same standard as the original work.
1.19.6 Inserts, Sleeves, Escutcheons and Curbs.
A. Inserts
1. Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports and anchors, properly
sized for the load to be carried. The inserts shall be place only in portions of the main structure and not
in any finishing material.
2. Use factory made expansion shields where inserts cannot be placed, but only where approved by the
Engineer and for light weights.
3. Do not use powder activated tools except with the written permission of the Engineer.
4. Supply and locate all inserts, holes anchor bolts, and sleeves in good time when walls, floors, and roof
are erected.

5. Ensure that insulation is unbroken where pipe or duct is insulated. Size sleeves shall be sized to provide
adequate clearance all around.
B. Sleeves
The following materials shall be used for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24-gage (0.70 mm) or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, having plain ends and
integral water stop, except where other features are specified.
4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with 1
mechanical-joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe-sleeve end.
a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage.
b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having water stop and anchor ring, with ductile-iron gland, steel
studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of housing and gasket size as
required to fit penetrating pipe.
c. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe.
d. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of manufacturer's design.
5. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with clamping
ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.
6. Pack all sleeves between the insulated pipe and the sleeve or where uninsulated between the pipe and
the sleeve with polyurethane insulation. Seal the annular space as follows:
i- For all horizontal sleeves in through fire rated walls , Use a seal equal or .better fire rated
than the wall to be sealed
j- For horizontal concealed sleeves through fire walls and through walls separating areas of
different air pressure, use a permanently resilient silicone based sealing compound.
k- For all vertical sleeves through roofs, janitor’s closets, equipment rooms, use permanently
resilient silicone based sealing compound, non-inflammable and waterproof.
7. Ensure that the seal is compatible with the floor and ceiling finishes. The room finishing schedules shall
be checked for further details and clarified if necessary with the Engineer.

8. The following sleeving shall be used for ducts:
a- The minimum thickness of duct material passing through a sleeve shall be 1.3 mm.
b- For rectangular duct openings through walls and floors a removable hardwood fare faced box-
out shall be provided of the required size, soft wood or plywood will not be acceptable
c- . Through fire walls, build fire dampers into wall, or make detailed fixing in accordance with
Engineer’s instruction.
d- Through floors where ducts are not furred in or enclosed in a duct shaft, provide 100 mm high
and 100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs, with 25 mm chamfered edges all around. Extend
sleeves where used flush to top of curb. Concrete works shall be done in accordance with
Section Concrete.
e- Through floors where duct is enclosed in a duct shaft or furred in, provide the watertight curbs
at the extreme top and bottom only. Cover exposed floor and wall pipe sleeves in finished
areas with satin finish chrome or nickel plated solid brass or with satin finished stainless steel
escutcheons with non-ferrous set screws. Split cast plates of the screw locking type may not
be used. Do not use stamped steel friction type split plates.
f- Through roofs, provide curbs and sleeves as shown on drawings and to suit flashing
requirements.
9. After ducts are installed, the openings shall be packed and sealed as follows:-
a- Fiberglass insulation for packing except through curbed concrete floors where a fiber proof
packing must be used
b- Fiber proof packing shall be sealed in openings through floors with permanently resilient
silicone base non-inflammable waterproof compound; duct supports shall be pressed firmly
down into caulking before bolting it down to curb
c- Through all vertical walls, seal the fiberglass packing using permanently resilient silicone based
sealant.
10. Duct sleeves and box-outs shall be braced to retain their position and shape during the
a- Pouring of concrete and other work.
b- Bracing for each duct at ever passage through structure shall be provided to prevent sagging.
c- Exposed duct sleeves and openings shall be covered in exposed areas. 100 mm long galvanized
steel escutcheons shall be used in the form of a duct collar. Over curbs, the collar shall be
extended 30 mm down the side of the curb, similar to counter flashing. The collar shall be fixed
in place with Cadmium plated screws.
1.19.7 Access Panels and Doors
a- The Contractor shall install all concealed mechanical equipment requiring adjustment or
maintenance in locations easily accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and
components to result in a minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as-
built drawings.

b- The Contractor shall prepare drawings showing the location and type of all access doors in co-
ordination with other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the
Engineer to obtain approval. On smaller Projects, the Contractor shall indicate on the ceiling
plans access required at the discretion of the engineer.
c- All access doors shall be sized to provide adequate access commensurate with the type of
structure and architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, a minimum,
opening of 600 x 450 mm shall be provided.
d- Proper fire rating of access doors shall be ensured in fire separations.
e- Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.
f- The Contractor shall provide panels in glazed tile walls of 2.6 mm thick 304 alloy stainless steel, with no.
4 finish, with the recessed frame secured with stainless steel, countersunk flush-headed screws.
g- Panels in plaster surfaces shall be provided with dish shaped door and welded metal lath, ready to take
plaster. A plastic grommet shall be provided for door key access.
h- Details of other types of access doors shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
1.19.8 Flashing
a- The Contractor shall provide flashing to all mechanical and electrical parts passing through or built into
a roof, outside wall, or waterproof floor.
b- 49 kg/m2 sheet lead flashing shall be provided for cast iron sleeves passing through roof. Factory
manufactured flange plates shall be provided to flash PVC-U pipes passing through roofs.
c- 7 kg/m2 copper flashing shall be provided for copper sleeves passing through roof where copper
sleeves are used for copper pipework
d- All flashing shall suit the roof angle and shall extend a minimum of 400 mm on all sides.
e- The Contractor shall build the flashing into the roofing system to render a completely watertight
connection.
f- Counter flashing shall be provided on all stacks, ducts, and pipes passing through roofs to fit over the
flashing or curb.
g- Pipes through waterproof floors shall be flashed as per approved details.
h- Provide pipes and sleeves passing through outside walls with lead or copper flashings and as directed
by the Engineer. All visual aspects of such sleeves to be approved by the Engineer. All sleeves shall be
installed according to the relevant standard and shall be suitable for local ambient conditions.
i- The Contractor shall pay special attention to the waterproof conditions of basements and walls and
floors that may exist. The Contractor shall ensure co-ordination at all times with the waterproofing trade
to prevent damage to any water proofing seal. The Contractor shall provide piping sleeves passing
through waterproof walls which shall be sealed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.20 Warranty
Contractor shall provide a minimum one year manufacturer warrantees for all equipment.

All Warrantees for equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner regardless of whether the Contractor who
supplied the equipment is still associated with the Project or not.
Warranty shall be full warranty and shall include all overhead, profit, incidental charges and sundries.
Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item warranted then the warranty shall also
include the costs incurred in rectifying the damage.
1.21 Preventative Maintenance
Maintain all systems and equipment installed under this contract in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations, the maintenance manual and this specification. The maintenance period starts after Practical
Completion of the facility as a whole and as per contract conditions
Carry out maintenance of each component at least as frequently as recommended by the Manufacturer.
Record and submit details of maintenance to the Principal and the Main Contractor at the end of the
maintenance period in a format acceptable to the Engineer.
1.22 Inspection Testing and Maintenance
This contract shall also include for all necessary inspection, testing and maintenance of the services, during the
Defects Liability Period.
1.23 Services for Testing
All fuel, oil, gas, water and electricity for the purposes of testing and commissioning shall be provided by the
Contractor up to the date of the issue of the Certificate of Temporary Acceptance. This shall include the initial
charging of all systems and equipment with water, oil and refrigerants, etc.
1.24 Spare Parts and Tools
After completion of the Works and during the specified maintenance period the Contractor shall be
responsible for the supply and installation at the fixed time recommended by the manufacturers of all
spare parts and components, required for the ideal running of all engineering services installation.
In addition the contractor shall coordinate with the client for the procurement of the following
recommended spare parts needed for proper preventive maintenance program.
1.25 Spare Parts Information & Tools
1. Spare Parts information: The Contractor shall furnish spare parts information for all equipment
furnished under this contract. The information shall be complete, legible, organized, and
submitted by system in two (2) copies, and shall include:
1.1 A list of spare parts, special tools, and supplies, for each item of equipment, which are
either normally furnished a no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or
specified hereinafter to be furnished as part of the contract.
1.2 A complete list of spare parts and supplies recommended by the manufacturer to assure
efficient and continuous operation of each item of equipment for a period of two (2)
years after completion and acceptance of entire work under this contract.
1.3 The contractor shall be submit all spare parts to EMPLOYER
1.4 The list shall show the recommended minimum stockage level for reordering and shall
identify all long lead items. A long lead item is defined as any item of equipment, which
cannot be ready for delivery in less than six months after receipt of order. The lists shall
include the following information for each recommended spare part:

Manufacturer's Part Name

Manufacturer's Name and Address
Manufacturer's Part Number
Manufacturer's Drawing Number Showing Part
Next Higher Assembly
Equipment Symbol Keyed to Contract Drawings
Recommended Number of Spares
Net Unit Price
Quantity installed per Assembly
Lead Time
Shelf Life
Peculiar Life
Peculiar cleaning, calibration, packaging and preservation requirements.
Name and address of the authorized spare parts representative and spare parts stocking source
nearest to the project site.
Alternate sources of procurement.
1.26 Special tool and test Equipment List:
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer two (2) copies of recommended list of all special tools and
test equipment. The special tools and test equipment shall cover all items required for the successful
operation and maintenance during a ten year equipment life. In compiling the special tools and test
equipment list, the Contractor shall indicate all special tools and test equipment items that require
calibration, including frequency and method. Necessary standards shall be listed immediately after each
item that requires calibration, and they must be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or other
reference satisfactory to the Engineer. Tool lists shall include all tools required. Test equipment lists shall
include all equipment required for acceptance testing and calibration. The Contractor shall supply two (2)
copies of all vendor-supplied catalogues and instructions for operation and maintenance of the tools and
test equipment furnished under this contract.
Submission of Preliminary Parts List:
The Contractor shall submit one (1) copy of his preliminary parts list with recommendations for spares
within the time frame set forth above. This list is subject to the Engineer review and written approval.
The Consultant may revise the listing as to quantities of recommended spares as a condition of approval.
The Consultant reserves the right to order all, none or any portion of additional spare parts from the
manufacturer's complete parts list and the preliminary Parts List.
Re submittals: Any re submittals or additional submittals of equipment lists, spare parts lists or
associated information shall be made within thirty (30) calendar days from notice by the Engineer and all
costs associated with the submissions shall be borne by the contractor.
Final Parts List: The final list shall be submitted not later than one hundred twenty (120) calendar days
prior to contract completion date, in five (5) copies and shall be annotated "Final" on each sheet.
The Contractor shall submit the All Special tools, keys and loose items needed for
operation/maintenance of equipment/systems to be handed over to EMPLOYER.
1.27 Test
All equipment shall be test by approved third party .
1.28 As built drawing

The Contractor shall submit the as built drawing as electronic format to the Engineer at the time of handing over
the project.

1.29 Training of Engineering Staff
The Contractor shall provide training for the employees of the employer. Such training shall cover all
aspects of using, running, commissioning and maintaining of all Engineering services.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 00 22 13
FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS TO MECHANICAL WORK BIDDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PRODUCT LISTING
A. Prepare a listing of major mechanical products to be purchased for the project, including operational
equipment, valves, controls, isolation units, insulation, fixtures, drains, tanks, coils, filters, accessories,
outlets, louvers, diffusers, gages, meters, devices of all kinds and similar products. Pipe, sheet metal and
similar materials supplied from Contractor's stock need not be listed. For each product listed, show
generic name, model number, manufacturer, related specifications section number, schedule (network, if
any) identification number and projected delivery period.
1.2 GENERAL MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATION
A. Production Experience: For operable equipment (products with moving parts), manufacturer is to be a firm
with not less than five years successful production experience. For power driven equipment (products with
moving parts which are mechanically/electrically operated), manufacturer is to be a firm with not less than
ten years successful production experience. Experience means the production of units similar to those
required, as judged by the Engineer. Comply with longer-period experience requirements specified in other
division 15 sections of these specifications.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance
labels and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged or protected to
prevent deterioration during shipment, storage and handling. Store in a well-ventilated indoor space, with
concrete slabs and lockable doors, except where prepared and protected by the manufacturer specifically
for exterior storage.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 as applicable to mechanical products.
B. Analysis of Substitutions: The Contractor shall prepare an analysis of any proposed mechanical products
substitution for the Engineer’s approval, including details of plant, compatible to the specification, and also
cost reductions applicable.
C. Acceptance: The Client or Engineer's written approval is mandatory, for the acceptance of any proposed
substitution of specified items.
Mechanical Specifications 00 22 13 - 1 Further Instruction to Mechanical Work Bidders

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MECHANICAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Products: Provide not less (quality) than the approved manufacturer’s products, as specified by
their published product data.
Notwithstanding the indication that a particular product/model number is acceptable, comply with the
specified requirements. Do not assume that the available off-the-shelf condition of a product complies
with the requirements; as an example, a specific finish or color may be required.
An alternative offer from other manufacturers may be submitted, provided that full substantiating data of
the compliance with specifications and in compliance with the approved manufacturer's features. The
alternative manufacturer’s offers may be accepted or rejected at the sole discretion of the Engineer. The
engineer’s decision shall be final with no obligation to explain his decision.
Submit the compliance form with the Tender indicating the proposed manufacturers for major equipment.
Treat all equipment for which data submissions are required as major equipment for this purpose. Changes
from the equipment offered at Tender will not be permitted unless the Engineer is satisfied that there is
significant advantage in Principle
B. Purchasing: Do not purchase specific mechanical materials and equipment for the project until completion
of submittals which might affect the acceptance.
C. Condition of Products: Provide new mechanical products, free of defects and harmful deterioration at the
time of installation. Do not use units which have been subjected to destructive testing, or other high-limits
testing except where pre-tested products are specified. Provide each product complete with trim,
accessories, finish, guards, safety devices and similar components specified or recognized as integral parts of
the product, or required by governing regulations.
D. Assembly Testing: To the greatest extent possible and unless otherwise indicated, complete the
fabrication, assembly, finishing and testing of products prior to delivery to the project. Notify the Engineer
not less than one week in advance of pre-installation testing to be performed in response to project
requirements. The Engineer reserves the right to be present at tests of mechanical products; however,
neither the Engineer’s absence nor presence relieves the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
the requirements.
E. Uniformity: Where multiple units of a generic product are required for a single major system of the
mechanical work, provide identical products by the same manufacturer, without variations except for size
and similar variations as indicated.
F. Limitations: Product/manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe tube,
fittings (except flanged and grooved types), insulation, sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, welding rods,
solder, paint, fasteners, motors for various manufacturers equipment, and similar items used in the work,
except as otherwise indicated.

G. Product Compatibility, Options: Where more than one product selection is specified, either generically, or
proprietarily, selection is Contractor's option, except do not provide products which are not compatible with
previously purchased or installed products which must interface with the selections.
H. Provide Equipment Nameplates: Contractor shall provide a permanent data nameplate on each item of
power operated mechanical equipment, indicating the manufacturer, product name, model number, serial
number, speed, capacity, power characteristics, labels of tested compliances and similar essential operating
data. Nameplates shall be located in easily-read locations; except where product is visually exposed in
occupied areas of the building, locate nameplate in a concealed position (where possible) which is
accessible for reading by service personnel.
I. Guarantees and Warranties: Provide for all equipment original manufacturers guarantees valid, unless
otherwise specifically stated, for a minimum period of two years. The guarantee shall commence after
installation and acceptance of the Company's Representative, as being in conformity to the specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's
installation instructions and recommendations, including handling, anchorage, assembly, connections,
cleaning, testing, charging, lubrication, start-up, test operation, and shut-down of operating equipment.
Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives who are recognized as the technical experts, for
specific instructions on unique project conditions and unforeseen problems.
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS, SUPPLIERS AND VENDORS
1. The list of Manufacturers, Suppliers and VENDORS intended for use in the performance of the WORKS by
CONTRACTOR. In case of any change either in the type of WORKS or in the name of the Manufacturers,
Suppliers and VENDORS to be used, CONTRACTOR shall advise Engineer and obtain written approval of the
new WORKS or the new Manufacturers, Suppliers and VENDORS to be hired.
2. Manufacturers, Suppliers and VENDORS shall, unless approved by Engineer prior to award, only be selected
from a "List of Manufacturers, Suppliers and VENDORS" prepared by CONTRACTOR in respect of each supply
of GOODS and approved by Engineer, with a technical analysis/comparison of the Manufacturers, Suppliers
and VENDORS listed being performed in co-ordination with Engineer.
3. Based on Engineer's prior approval, additions and deletions may be made to or from the list. Attached is a
list of VENDORS which are acceptable to the Engineer. For the avoidance of doubt, the CONTRACTOR may
select from this list but is not restricted to the list and may propose alternatives, at his option, for Engineer's
approval.
4. CONTRACTOR shall detail and submit with his tender, the GOODS it proposes to be supplied and the
Manufacturers, Suppliers and VENDORS proposed in each instance, together with the approximate value of
those GOODS, for each of the proposed Manufacturers, Suppliers and VENDORS, as a percentage (%) of
CONTRACTOR's total Lump Sum Fixed and Firm Tender Price.
5. The mere inclusion of a make in the list of VENDORS does not imply acceptance/approval. All equipment
material proposed for use on the project must comply with the Specifications and must be approved by the
Engineer (irrespective of make being mentioned in these documents).
END OF SECTION

Division 01 Commissioning
01 91 00 00 40 Commissioning

DIVISION 01 91 00.00 40
COMMISSIONING
11/12
PART 1 - GENERAL
The requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component part of, each section of the specifications.
This Section includes:
a. Building commissioning of the following systems:
(1) HVAC components and equipment
(2) HVAC system: interaction of cooling, heating, and comfort delivery systems
(3) Building Automation System (BAS): control hardware and software, sequence of operations, and
integration of factory controls with BAS
(4) Lighting Control System and interface with daylighting
(5) Domestic hot water systems
(6) Renewable energy generation systems
b. Building commissioning activities and documentation in support of the Estidama Pearl rating program.
Commissioning activities and documentation include the section on "Energy and Atmosphere" prerequisite
of "Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning" and the section on "Additional Commissioning."
The Client, Green Consultant, Architect/Engineer, or Commissioning Agent are not responsible for
construction means, methods, job safety, or management function related to commissioning on the job site.
The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers or
installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.
The following Sections are an integral part of this project Commissioning:
a. Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
b. Section 01 45 00.00 40 QUALITY CONTROL
c. Section 01 75 00.00 40 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
d. Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
e. Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
f. Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
g. Section 26 05 00.00 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Mechanical Specifications 01 91 00.00 40- 1 Commissioning

1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D6245 (2012) Using Indoor Carbon Dioxide Concentrations to Evaluate

Indoor Air Quality and Ventilation
ASTM D6345 (2010) Selection of Methods for Active, Integrative Sampling of

Volatile Organic Compounds in Air
GREEN BUILDING INITIATIVE (GBI)
GBI Green Globes for NC (2013) Green Globes(tm) for New Construction Technical
Reference Manual
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED BD+C (2009; R 2010) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm)

Building Design and Construction (LEED-NC)
LEED GBDC Ref Guide (2009; R 2010) LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design,
Construction and Major Renovations of Commercial and
Institutional Buildings including Core & Shell and K-12 Projects
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Basis of Design - The basis of design is the documentation of the primary thought processes and assumptions
behind design decisions that were made to meet the Project Requirements. The basis of design describes the
systems, components, conditions and methods chosen to meet the intent. Some reiterating of the Project
Requirements may be included.
b. Commissioning - Commissioning is a comprehensive and systematic process to verify that the building systems
perform as designed to meet the requirements. Commissioning during the construction, acceptance, and
warranty phases intends to achieve the following specific objectives:
(1) Verify and document that equipment is installed and started per manufacturer's recommendations,
industry accepted minimum standards, and the Contract Documents.
(2) Verify and document that equipment and systems receive complete operational checkout by the
installing contractors.
(3) Verify and document equipment and system performance.
(4) Verify the completeness of Operations and Maintenance materials.
(5) Ensure that the operating personnel are adequately trained on the operation and maintenance of the
building equipment.

c. Commissioning Agent - develops the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates,
oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor.
Functional Performance Tests are performed after pre-functional checklists and startup are complete.
d. Commissioning Plan - an overall plan that provides the structure, schedule and coordination planning for the
commissioning process.
e. Deficiency - a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is
not in compliance with the Contract Documents, does not perform properly, or is not complying with the
Project Requirements.
f. Project Requirements - a dynamic document that provides the explanation of the ideas, concepts and criteria
that are considered to be very important to the Client. It is initially the outcome of the programming and
conceptual design phases.
g. Functional Performance Test - test of the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems using
manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems
(rather than just components) under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the
chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint).
Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component
failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run
through all the control system's sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the
sequences state. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not functional testing, in the
commissioning sense of the word.
h. Manual Test - using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct observation to verify
performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the "observation").
i. Monitoring - the recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using
data loggers or the trending capabilities of control systems.
j. Pre-functional Checklist - a list of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct to verify proper
installation of equipment, provided by the Commissioning Agent to the contractor. Pre-functional checklists
are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g.,
belt tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.). However, some pre-
functional checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system
(such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three-phase pump motor of a chiller system). The word "pre-
functional" refers to before functional testing. Pre-functional checklists augment and are combined with the
manufacturer's start-up checklist.
k. Seasonal Performance Tests - Functional Performance Test that are deferred until the system(s) will
experience conditions closer to their design conditions.
l. Warranty Period - warranty period for entire project, including equipment components. Warranty begins at
Substantial Completion and extends for at least one year, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract
Documents and accepted submittals.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Perform commissioning services for the system. Expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays,
while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. The commissioning requires cooperation of the
Contractor, subcontractors, vendors, Architect/Engineer, Commissioning Agent, Green Consultant, and Client.

1.3.1 Co-ordination
Provide a Commissioning Agent for overall co-ordination and management of the commissioning program. The
commissioning team comprises the following groups:
a. Contractors Project Manager and Test Engineer
b. Sub-contractor for the system being commissioned
c. Commissioning Agents Project Manager and Project Engineers
d. Client’s Representative
e. Green Consultant
f. Architect/Engineer and Specialty Consultant
Coordinate with IAQ baseline evaluation in conformance with ASTM D6245, and ASTM D6345.
1.3.2 Progress Meetings
Plan and co-ordinate meetings as required to monitor construction and commissioning progress the work.
Notify the Engineer of construction job-site meetings to address co-ordination, deficiency resolution and
planning issues.
1.3.3 Functional Testing Co-ordination
Do not "temporarily" start equipment for commissioning. Do not conduct functional performance testing until
a pre-functional, start-up and TAB is completed for a given system. Do not functionally test the controls system
and equipment it controls until all points have been calibrated and the pre-functional checklists are completed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Commissioning Plan
Commissioning Schedule
SD-05 Design Data
Basis of Design
SD-06 Test Reports
Functional Performance Testing Results
Seasonal Testing

Short-Term Diagnostic Testing
Deficiency Report and Resolution Record
SD-07 Certificates
Commissioning Agents Qualifications
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operations and Maintenance Manuals
Training Plan
Operations and Maintenance Database
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Final Commissioning Report
Estidama Documentation
Warranty
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
Commissioning Agents Qualifications: Engage commissioning service personnel, that specialize in the types of
inspections and tests to be performed.
Inspection and testing service agencies that are members of the Building Commissioning Association (BCA)are
preferred.
1.6 DESIGN REVIEW AND DOCUMENTATION
Document basis of design and Project Requirements as they relate to environmentally responsive characteristics,
including:
a. Functionality
b. Energy performance
c. Water efficiency
d. Maintainability
e. System cost
f. Indoor environmental quality
g. Local environmental impacts

Review design documents to verify that each commissioned system meets the Project Requirements, including
conformance with ASTM D6245, ASTM D6345, and Estidama and LEED GBDC Ref Guide for new construction.
Review construction documents to verify that commissioning is adequately specified, that each commissioned
system can be commissioned and is likely to meet the Project Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
Ensure instrumentation used for testing meets the following standards:
a. Sufficient quality and accuracy to test and measure system performance within the tolerances required to
determine adequate performance.
b. Calibrated on the manufacturer's recommended intervals with calibration tags permanently affixed to the
instrument being used.
c. Maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration of use on this project.
Provide all standard testing equipment required for performing startup and initial checkout and required
functional performance testing for the system. Datalogging equipment or software required to test equipment
will be provided by the Commissioning Agent, and not become the property of the Client.
2.2.1 Commissioning Plan
Develop a commissioning plan to identify how commissioning activities will be integrated into general
construction and trade activities. The commissioning plan identifies how commissioning responsibilities are
distributed. The intent of this plan is to evoke questions, expose issues, and resolve them with input from the
entire commissioning team early in construction.
The Plan identifies who is responsible for producing the various procedures, reports, forms, and notifications. It
will include the commissioning schedule and describe the test/acceptance procedure.
2.3 START-UP/PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS
Coordinate start-up plans and documentation formats, including pre-functional checklists to be completed during
the startup process. Manufacturer's start-up checklists and other technical documentation guidelines can be used
as the basis for pre-functional checklists.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING PROCESS
The Commissioning Agent coordinates all activities. The following activities outline the commissioning tasks and
the general order in which they occur.
a. Design Review and documentation consisting of:
(1) Documentation of Basis of Design and Project Requirements
(2) Design Development Review
(3) Construction Document Review
b. Commissioning Scoping Meeting
c. Commissioning Plan
d. Submittals Review
e. Start-Up/Pre-Functional Checklists
f. Functional Performance Testing
g. Short-Term Diagnostic Testing
h. Deficiency Report and Resolution Record
i. Operations and Maintenance Training
j. Record Documents Review
k. Final Commissioning Report and LEED™ / Estidama Documentation
l. Deferred testing due to unforeseen deferred tests, seasonal testing or end of Warranty review.
3.2 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
Fully describe system test procedures identifying configuration and steps required for each test. Provide
appropriate documents so that another party can repeat the tests with virtually identical results.
Submit documentation to the Engineer verifying conformance with the following standards:

3.2.1 Functional Performance Test Procedures
Develop functional performance test procedures for equipment and systems. Identify specific test procedures
and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Coordinate test
procedures with the contractor for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection.
Include the following information on the functional performance test forms:
a. System and equipment or component name(s)
b. Equipment location and ID number
c. Date
d. Project name
e. Participating parties
f. Instructions for setting up the test, including special cautions, alarm limits, etc.
g. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute the test
h. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with a Yes / No check box
i. Comment section
3.2.2 Test Methods
Methods for functional performance testing and verification include direct manipulation of system inputs (i.e.
heating or cooling sensors), manipulation of system inputs with the building automation system (i.e. software
override of sensor inputs), trend logs of system inputs and outputs using the building automation system, or
short-term monitoring of system inputs and outputs using stand alone data loggers. The Commissioning Agent
determines which method, or combination of methods, is most appropriate.
3.2.3 Setup
Perform each test procedure under conditions that simulate normal operating conditions as closely as possible.
Where equipment requires integral safety devices to stop/prevent equipment operation unless minimum safety
standards or conditions are met, have functional performance test procedures demonstrate the actual
performance of safety shutoffs in a real or closely-simulated conditions of failure.
3.2.4 Sampling
The Commissioning Agent develops a sampling strategy when multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or non-
critical equipment may be functionally tested. If, after three test attempts at testing the specified sample
percentage, failures are still present, then test all remaining units at the contractors' expense.
3.2.5 Functional Performance Testing Results
Coordinate, observe and record the results of the functional performance testing. Coordinate retesting as
necessary until satisfactory performance is verified. Verify the intended operation of individual components and
system interactions under various conditions and modes of operation.

3.3 SHORT-TERM DIAGNOSTIC TESTING
After initial occupancy, perform short-term diagnostic testing, using data acquisition equipment or the building
automation system, if exists, to record system operation over a three week period.
Investigate the dynamic interactions between components in the building system. Evaluate the scheduling, the
interaction between heating and cooling, and the effectiveness of the HVAC and Plumbing system in meeting the
comfort requirements.
3.4 DEFICIENCY REPORT AND RESOLUTION RECORD
Document items of non-compliance in materials, installation or operation.
3.4.1 Non-Conformance
Immediately address observed non-conformance and deficiencies in terms of notification to responsible parties,
and provide recommended actions to correct deficiencies.
Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the Commissioning
Agent. In such cases document the deficiency and resolution on the procedure form.
3.4.1.1 Identified Deficiencies Correction Procedure
If there is no dispute on the deficiency and the responsibility to correct it:
a. The Commissioning Agent documents the deficiency and the adjustments or alterations required to correct
it. The Contractor corrects the deficiency and notifies the Commissioning Agent that the equipment is ready
to be retested.
b. The Commissioning Agent reschedules the test and the test is repeated.
If there is a dispute about a deficiency or who is responsible:
a. The deficiency is documented on the non-compliance form and a copy given to the Green Consultant.
b. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Additional parties are brought into the
discussions as needed. Contractor has responsibility for resolving construction deficiencies. If a design
revision is deemed necessary and approved by the Client, the Architect/Engineer has responsibility for
providing a design revision.
c. The Commissioning Agent documents the resolution process.
d. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency
and notifies the Commissioning Agent that the equipment is ready to be retested. The Commissioning
Agent reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
The Contractor is responsible for retesting costs.

3.5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
Provide complete operations and maintenance manuals, a training plan and an operations and maintenance
database.
Coordinate and review with the Client’s representative the training program[s] for O&M personnel.
Develop the database from the O&M manual containing the information required to start a preventative
maintenance program.
Provide additional materials as necessary to stress and enhance the importance of system interactions,
troubleshooting, and long-term preventative maintenance and operation.
3.6 FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT AND ESTIDAMA/ LEED™ DOCUMENTATION
Compile and submit a Final Commissioning Report. Summarize all of the tasks, findings, conclusions, and
recommendations of the commissioning process.
Compile and submit ESTIDAMA /LEED™ Documentation. Format as required by the Awarding Agency for submittal
under the referenced green building rating system.
3.7 DEFERRED TESTING
3.7.1 Unforeseen Deferred Tests
If a test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy condition, or other deficiency,
the functional testing may be delayed upon recommendation of the Commissioning Agent
and the approval of the Engineer. Conduct these tests in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as
possible.
3.7.2 Deferred Tests
Schedule, coordinate, observe, and document additional testing for seasonal variation in operations and control
strategies during the opposite season to verify performance of the HVAC system and controls. Complete testing
during the warranty period to fully test all sequences of operation.
3.7.3 End-of-Warranty Review
Conduct end of warranty review prior to the end of the warranty period. Review the current building operation
with the facility maintenance staff. Include in the review all outstanding issues from original or seasonal testing.
Interview facility staff to identify concerns with building operation. Provide suggestions for improvements and
assist Engineer in developing reports or documentation to remedy problems.
Update O&M manuals and Record Documents as necessary due to the testing.
3.8 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM SCHEDULE
Commission the following equipment in this project.

System Equipment Check
HVAC System Variable Refrigerant Flows
Pumps
Variable frequency drives
Packaged AC units
Terminal units
Unit heaters
Heat exchangers
Kitchen Hoods
Exhaust fans
Supply fans
Sweep or scheduled lighting

Lighting Controls
controls
Day light dimming controls
Lighting occupancy sensors
BAS System
Domestic Hot Water
Solar energy electrical power

Renewable Energy
generation
END OF SECTION

Division 21 Fire Fighting System
21 13 000 Fire Fighting System-01

DIVISION 21 13 00
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description
Firefighting systems shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the “Jordanian Fire Fighting
Codes and Civil Defense Department Requirements”.
1.2 Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of fire protection materials and
equipment of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years. Spare parts for the fire protection equipment shall be readily
available locally.
B. Design and Approvals: The design, layout and installation details shall conform to the drawings and as
stated herein. The Contractor shall make detail shop drawings and obtain approval from the Engineer.
C. Local Fire Service Headquarters: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire protection
systems.
D. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection systems work stating
that the work has been completed and tested in accordance with Civil Defense requirements and that
there are no defects in the system and it is operational.
E. Fire Protection Devices: Fire protection devices shall meet the requirements of the NFPA.
1.3 Submittals
A. Submit manufacturer's data of fire protection system equipment and accessories.
B. Operating and maintenance instruction for equipment and systems.

All materials, design, fabrication, and erection shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of all
codes, standards or regulations having jurisdiction over the work. In the event of conflict between codes,
standards or regulations, the conflict shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. Works will also adhere to
the standards listed below or the standards resulting from their possible amendment:
Local Codes, standards and Specifications.
Mechanical Specifications 21 13 000 - 1 Fire Fighting System

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
2.1.A GENERAL
The fire extinguishers shall be of the rechargeable type and shall be supplied complete with the
operating charge from the factory.
All portable fire extinguishers shall be mounted by suitable wall bracket or in recessed cabinets as
instructed by the Representative Engineer. The bracket and cabinet shall be specifically supplied for
the extinguisher type and size concerned.
The fire extinguishers shall be manufactured from robust aluminum cylinder, or from high quality 1.4
mm gauge steel, inert gas welded and finished externally in color in accordance with the B.S.
54231985 as follows:
CO2 Fire Extinguisher : Color Code Black 5 Kg
Water Fire Extinguisher : Color Code Blue 9 Liters

ABC Fire Extinguisher : Color Coded 9 Kg
The fire extinguishers shall be operated by pulling the safety pin and squeezing the lever. This action
shall open a valve in the head allowing the element of extinguisher to be expelled under its own
pressure to the horn through siphon and nozzle.
All the extinguishers shall be clearly marked with the operating instructions.
Fire extinguishers shall be located near escape exits, as marked in drawings and in general as per the
requirements of British standards.
2.1.B Type FE-1

FE-1 fire extinguishers shall be of the ABC type with a rugged all brass operating valve, large size
operating lever, full vision pressure gauge, discharge hose and heavy duty drawn aluminum cylinder
with hard, scratch resistant finish dry chemical extinguishers shall be of 9 kg
2.1.C Type FE-2

Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall be of the pull pin, squeeze handle type with double braided
hose; non-conducting discharge horn and heavy-duty drawn steel cylinder with hard, scratch
resistant finish carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall be of 5 kg.
2.1.D Type FE-3

Fire extinguisher with sprinkler, located above burner of each boiler, ABC type 5 kg.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation Of Fire Protection Systems
A. Portable Fire Extinguishers: Provide fire extinguishers of the type and at the locations indicated based
on the area fire protection requirements.
END OF SECTION

Division 22 Plumbing
22 00 00 Plumbing
22 05 48 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control
22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
22 14 29 Sump Pumps
22 51 00 Swimming Pools & Fountains Specifications
Mechanical Specifications Div. 22/Page - 1 Table of Content

DIVISION 22 00 00
PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. General specification

This section covers plumbing equipment, sanitary fixtures, pipe works and fittings, drainage m sewage,
storm water drainage PIPE, fitting and FIXTURES AND the requirements of the local Construction
Specifications
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Authorities Approvals and No Objection certificates
Submit all authorities, Government, and utilities provider approval before commence of works.
1.2.2. Codes and Standards

standards or regulations having jurisdiction over the work. In the event of conflict between codes, standards or
regulations, the conflict shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. Works will also adhere to the standards listed below
or the standards resulting from their possible amendment:
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
UFAS Universal Feed Assurance Scheme
Mechanical Specifications 22 00 00 - 1 Plumbing


Town Planning Department (TPD)
prevail
1.2.3. Shop Drawings
Plumbing System
Submit all shop drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams, and other
information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing
Code. Shop drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of
connections; dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams and wiring
diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required
for maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated,
details shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Mechanical drawing plans, elevations, views,
and details, shall be drawn to scale.
1.2.4. Product Data
Fixtures; (LEED NC)

List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate.
Flush valve water closets
Flush valve urinals
Flush tank water closets
Wall hung lavatories
Countertop lavatories
Kitchen sinks
Service sinks
Drinking-water coolers
Plastic bathtubs
Plastic shower stalls
Plastic bathtub liners
Plastic bathtub wall surrounds
Water heaters
Pumps
Backflow prevention assemblies
Shower Faucets
Swimming Pool and Spa
Pool Water Pump safety vacuum release system

Welding- A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders
and welding operators.
Vibration-Absorbing Features
Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan, dimensions and

specifications.
Plumbing System
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. Manufacturer's recommendations for the
installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.
1.2.5. Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests
performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the
installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.
Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies
Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an

individual certified by the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, the Contractor shall
have the manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and
performing as intended. The Contractor shall provide written documentation of the tests performed and
signed by the individual performing the tests.
1.2.6. Certificates
Materials and Equipment

Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the
design, fabrication, and installation shall conform to the code.
1.2.7. Bolts
Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the specified
requirements.
1.2.8. Operation and Maintenance Data
Plumbing System
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.3. STANDARD PRODUCTS

Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall
have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2 year period.

1.3.1 ALTERNATIVE QUALIFICATIONS

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of
satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or
laboratory tests, can be shown.
1.3.2 SERVICE SUPPORT
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified
permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and
qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and
able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty
period of the contract.
1.3.3 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number,
and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not
be acceptable.
1.3.4 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though
the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these
publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Owners
Representative.
1.3.5 DEFINITIONS
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions
shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code
official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Owners Representative
1.4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Owners Representative.
Replace damaged or defective items.
a. Stacking of materials shall be done in such a manner as to prevent to the pipe or coatings to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
b. Plastic pipes and fittings shall be stored under cover and out of direct sunlight at all times. Pipes shall be
supported throughout their entire length and free flow of air around them maintained. Generally, all
pipes shall be handled using canvas slings not less than 250mm wide. The use of chains or wire slings will
not be permitted.
c. All valves and fittings shall be stored under cover on hard standing until required for fixing. Uncrated
valves and fittings shall not be stacked.
d. Pipes and fittings damaged during handling or storage shall be set aside and the Engineer informed. If in
the Engineer’s opinion the damage is such that the pipe or fitting has been permanently impaired it shall
be removed from site.
e. No repairs shall be started without the approval of the Engineer.
f. Fixtures shall not be allowed to drop or strike objects, which may damage the pipe, but shall be lifted or
lowered by suitable approved equipment. Hoister and buildings of approved type shall be used on all
vehicles used for the transport of pipe.
g. All fixtures shall be properly protected in factory assembled timbers with bedding of straw bags or
similar approved by the Engineer.

1.5. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 WELDING
Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and
welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX.
Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer,
may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The Owners Representative shall be notified 24 hours in
advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding
operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record. Structural
members shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL. Welding and
nondestructive testing procedures are specified in Section 40 05 13.96 WELDING PROCESS PIPING.
1.5.2 CATHODIC PROTECTION AND PIPE JOINT BONDING
Cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems shall be in accordance with Section 26 42 14.00 10
CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM SACRIFICIAL ANODE.
1.6. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC. Energy consuming
products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109-58, ASHRAE 90.1 – SI and local codes and
standards.
1.7. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the
Owners Representative of any discrepancy before performing any work.
1.8. INSTRUCTION TO OWNER PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the
designated owner personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts
of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance
work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been
accepted and turned over to the owner for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of
instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of
instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for
instruction with the equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the
contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or
modifications.
1.9. ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily
accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. Plumbing Pipe Works

2.1.1. General:
All Products Shall Comply With Estidama PVRS Requirements, Performance Characteristics For All Sanitary
Wares Shall Comply With The Table Below:-
Plumbing Fixture or Fixture

Flow rate Units Reference Pressure
Fitting
Bath Tub 6 l / min 413.7 kPa

Bidet 6 l / min 413.7 kPa
Bathroom Taps/Ablution Fixtures 6 l / min 413.7 kPa
Kitchen Sink 6 l / min 413.7 kPa
Hose Bib 6 l / min 413.7 kPa
Shower 9.5 l / min 551.6 kPa
Toilets (Dual Flush) 6/4 Liters per full flushing cycle
(Full/Low)
Laundry Equipment 8.5 l / min 413.7 kPa
Dishwashers 1.3 l/Place 413.7 kPa
Setting
All external water demands to be monitored by meters
2.1.2. Piping Materials
Provide pipe and tube of the type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or quality) indicated
for each service. Where type, weight or quality is not indicated, provide proper selection as
recommended by manufacturer for installation requirements, and comply with governing regulations and
industry standards.
A. CPVC Pipes
Pipes shall be manufactured in accordance to ASTM 441 Schd-80 and / or to DIN 8079 PN 20 and PN 25 (
as specified).Pipes shall be tested in accordance to DIN 8080.
All pipe work and fittings shall be procured from the same manufacturer
Pipes shall be suitable for potable water use as they shall be NSF approved.
All CPVC fittings shall be assembled by in accordance to ASTM F493 and ASTM F402. This shall include
utilizing proper cleaner primer as to ASTM F-656 and solvent cement ASTM 2564, all in accordance to the
manufacturer recommendations.
Pipes shall withstand a continuous elevated temperature and pressure up to 90ºC at 5.5 Bar for at least 25
years.
A certificate of the materials resin and the performed tests quality control for the procured batch shall be
presented to the engineer.
A random sample of each size shall be tested by an approved third party lab. Tests shall include the VICAT
softening test, compression and burst tests.
B. Polypropylene (PPR-CT) pipes.
PP-RCT Class (1) S4 & SDR 9 and shall be joined by thermo fusion fittings for pipe diameter 32 and less
Electro fusion joints for and joints for pipe > 32mm
Pipes shall be suitable for potable water use as they shall be DVGW and NSF approved.

C. Mild Steel Pipe work

Where the table of pipe work materials requires the use of galvanized mild steel pipe work, this shall be
straight, cleanly finished, round in cross section, free from cracks, surface flaws, lamination and other
defects and shall be free from rust and scale.
Steel pipe work for welding shall be supplied with plain ends, beveled for butt-welding.
Where pipes are required for screwed joints, they shall be provided with screwed taper threads to B.S.21,
Part 1.
Steel pipes, which are to be used 'black', shall be varnished externally throughout their length after
manufacturer. Where steel pipes are to be installed underground, they shall be double wrapped in special
tape suitable for the application.
2.1.3. Pipe Fittings
A. Unless otherwise specified or directed, provide pipe fittings that are of the type and class of material as
that of the pipes where such fittings are installed.
B. Pipes and Fittings - Joints
The jointing of polypropylene pipe work shall be by means of dezincification resistant threaded fittings for
pipe diameter equal to or less than 80mm and flanged joints for larger sizes. All threaded fittings and
flanges shall be jointed to pipes by means of thermofusion.
2.1.4. Piping Schedules:
Pipe
Service Pipe Material Fittings
Range
Main Domestic Up to 50 PP-RCT Class (2 ) S4 & SDR 7.4 With Thermo fusion joints and fitting for
& softened hot water aluminum layer and UV protection pipe diameter 32 and less
Running in Mechanical Electro fusion joints Electro fusion fittings and joints for
Plan rooms, Pumps pipe > 32mm
rooms or Exposed on
roof and car park
Main Domestic All PP-RCT Class (1 ) S4 & SDR 7.4 Thermo fusion joints and fitting for
& softened Electro fusion joints pipe diameter 32 and less
hot water Electro fusion fittings and joints for
Running in Ceiling pipe > 32mm
Voids , or shafts
Domestic Water & All Cross linked polyethylene plastic pipes, DZR Brass compression , Press Fittings
softened Branch pipes manufactured to ASTM F 876 -84 , ASTM or Quick & easy joints
Under tiles F877-84 a. Pressure rating 20 bar.
Or chased in walls
Irrigation Up - 50 UPVC to BS 3505 Heavy weight UPVC to BS 3505 with solvent joints
Or UPVC pipe to Din 8062 - 16 Bar Or UPVC solvent cement
65- Up UPVC to BS 3505 Heavy weight UPVC to BS 3505 with threaded joints
Or UPVC pipe to Din 8062 - 16 Bar Or UPVC solvent cement joints
Up To Black mild steel seamless to BS 1387 Malleable iron pipe to BS 143 and
50mm medium Weight or DIN 2440 1256 (welded where permanently
concealed)
Fuel Pipes
65 - 125 Black mild steel seamless to BS 1387 Butt welding fittings to BS 1965: Part
medium Weight or DIN 2440 1 (with flanges where required, to BS
4504 and appropriate pressure rating)

Pipe
Service Pipe Material Fittings
Range
Main Up to 50 Black steel to ANSI B 16.3 seamless schedule Black steel, screwed malleable iron ,
Above ground 40 ANSI B16.3
NG
65-200 Black steel to ANSI B 16.3 seamless schedule Steel of the seamless, butt welded
40 type with 37 degree beveled ends to
ANSI B16.5 & ANSI B16.11
15-& Phosphorous de-oxidized non-arsenical Phosphorous de-oxidized non-
NG
over copper to BS 2871 arsenical
& auxiliary
manufactured to EN1057 , table Y copper to BS 6017 grade C106.
Gas
protected by polyethylene coating manufactured to 864 , Part 2
2.1.5. Water Leak Detection System

The Domestic Water monitoring and Leak Detection System shall be installed as per Estidama monitoring and Leak
detection ,PW-R2 Exterior water Mentoring requirements.
The system shall be able to detect leaks within the domestic water system, the system shall comprise of flow meters, flow
switches and low flow detectors.
2.1.6. External Water monitoring System
Provide External water consumption monitoring System, in accordance with Estidama PW-R2 requirements. The system
shall comprise of flow meters, communication network and a monitoring software,
The system shall be capable of monitoring all water consumption such as irrigation, pools etc. and as shown in drawings.
2.2. Drainage PIPES AND FITTINGS – MATERIALS

2.2.1. ABOVE GROUND SOIL, WASTE, OVERFLOW AND VENTING SYSTEMS
A. All above ground Soil, Waste Overflow, Venting and rain water pipe work, complete with all drains, traps, gullies,
cleanouts, vents and all accessories, which run inside buildings and located as follows:-
- Above floor slab

- Under tiles
- Chased In walls and through shafts
- Ceiling Voids
- High level and low level ( concealed)
- All vertical pipes (risers)
B. All Above Ground Soil, Waste, Overflow and Venting Systems pipes, traps and fittings shall be of
polypropylene Silent type. Manufactured in accordance to DIN EN14511 ( Plastic piping Systems Soil Discharge
within the Building Structure ) Quality system and shall comprise the whole range of integrated system of same
manufacturer allowing the easy plumbing of an installation.
C. The system shall comply with appropriate European standards for acoustic and where applicable shall be tested
and approved he EN ISO /EC 17035 and DIN /EN 14366 standards(Laboratory measurement of noise from waste
water installations).
D. Pipes and fittings shall meets the requirements of building material and component according to DIN 4102, Fire
Classification B2.
E. Pipes and fittings shall be resistant to hot water effluent for long performance up to 95C.
F. Applicable sub-sections Construction Specification shall be applied to all drainage works:

1. DIN EN14511 ( Plastic piping Systems Soil Discharge within the Building Structure
2. DIN 19560 Polypropylene PP pipes and fittings of hot water resistant waste and Soil Discharge systems
inside buildings
3. Dim 4109 Sound Insulation in buildings requirements and testing
4. DIN 14366 Laboratory measurement of noise from waste water installations.
5. DIN 4102 Requirements of fire behaviour of building material and building components
G. Socketed fittings shall Jointed by Push Fit with plain-ended pipes. Seal ring expansion joints shall be provided.
Adjustable, plastic coated steel holder bats shall be used to support pipes or secure fittings. Galvanised mild
steel support bracket with packing piece shall be used for horizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and fittings shall
be secured to wall by zinc-plated steel brackets.
2.2.2. Below Ground Drainage and Sewerage System
A. The below ground drainage and Sewerage shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings and shall comply with BS
4660, 5481– EN-1401-1:1998, and where appropriate shall bear the Kitemark.
B. Materials and Colours: buried drain system pipes and fittings shall be UPVC with polypropylene seal
retaining caps. Underground fittings shall be coloured golden brown. Seal retaining caps and seal rings
are black. Rodding eyes shall be provided where required.
C. UPVC solvent weld socket seal/lip and lip seal/lip seal shall be used.
D. Where necessary, lip seal/lip seal slip couplings shall be used.
E. Transition from higher dia. to lower one shall be made by using level invert taper. Special adaptors and
caulking bush shall be used to join UPVC channels in manhole connections to drainage system.
F. UPVC Puddle flanges shall be provided where pipe work passes through the walls or roofs or structural
slabs.
G. Solvent Cements
H. Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non-pressure pipe work or BS 4346: Part 3 for
pressure pipe work.
I. Sealing Rings
A. Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS2494.
2.2.3. Pumped Drainage and Sewerage System
A. All pumped drainage and Sewerage system shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings and shall comply with BS
3505 , 3506 class “E” or to DIN 8061, 8062 PN-16, and where appropriate shall bear the Kitemark.
C. UPVC rubber seal or solvent type.

slabs.
G. Solvent Cements
H. Solvent cements should comply with BS 4346: Part 3 for pressure pipe work.
I. Sealing Rings
J. Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS2494.
2.3. Floor Drain

2.3.1. Floor Drain Type (FD-1)
Floor-Drain body manufactured from ABS; with 3 Ø 2" inlets and a Single Ø 3" outlet; removable
odour trap; 75mm water seal height; to DIN EN 1253, complete with 100x100mm Upper section in ABS, with
recessed polymer cover for on-site tiling with stainless steel Rim and locking system.
System to Kessel model 373001 and 27211 cover or approved equal, Final selection as per Arch .
Floor-Drain body manufactured from ABS; with 3 Ø 2" inlets and a Single Ø 3" outlet; removable
odour trap; 75mm water seal height; to DIN EN 1253, complete with 145x145mm Upper section in ABS, with
recessed polymer cover for on-site tiling with stainless steel Rim and locking system.
System to Kessel model 373001 and 27211 cover or approved equal, Final selection as per Arch
200x200mm heavy duty floor drain, with removable odour trap, with 110mm lateral outlet, and heavy duty stainless
steel cover as to J.R. Smith or approved equal Final selection as per Arch
300x300mm heavy duty floor drains of 110mm outlet with sealed cover as per Kessel Eclogues or approved
equal for parking and roadways areas and Plant room ,final selection as per arch .
2.3.5. SHOWER DRAIN

Selection as Per ID ,
2.3.6. CHANNELS WITH OUTLETS, GULLIES AND GRATINGS (Ky)
Channel outlets shall be provided in kitchen areas, laundry and where shown on drawing. Channels, gullies
outlets shall be manufactured from stainless steel. All edges shall be finished to acceptable levels. The channel
shall be provided with:-
- End plates to terminate channel units

- Fully welded flanges and neoprene gaskets to provide watertight seal between components.
- Fixing ties and leveling feet to level channels with floor finishing.
- P trap stainless steel outlet 110mm dia.
- Gully tops to provide bottom outlets to P trap fixed to channel unit via invert dependent connector
plates.
- Stainless steel non slip ladder shaped grating of 300mm wide and 25mm height.

The required openings for the channel inlets (factory fabricated).
2.3.7. Roof Vent Cowl (VC)

Roof vent cowl shall be provided for all vent pipes as shown on the drawings.
Roof vent cowl shall be galvanized wire basket to fit snugly inside open end of vent pipes extending above
roof.
2.4. Cleanout
2.4.1. General
Install cleanouts to provide access to waste and soil pipes for inspection or cleaning. At locations as shown on
the drawings, at or near the foot of every vertical stack and no long horizontal pipe runs at every 15-meter
intervals.
Cleanouts on horizontal and vertical pipes shall be made by access pipe with 100mm. diameter, opening for
access and sealed with screwed cover.
All fittings used for the connection between horizontal pipe and vertical pipe (not buried) shall be fitted with
access doors secured by two zinc plated screws and captive nuts.
2.4.2. Cleanout – Type (FCO)
Recessed bronze NPT threaded plug is for use in conjunction with the standard pipe fittings forming cleanout
branch at each change in direction, greater than 45 or near the foot of every vertical stack and on long
horizontal pipe runs at 12m intervals. Clean out shall have ac heavy duty cover as to Zurn 1457 ZANB or
approved equal.
The clean out shall be installed such that it opens opposite to the direction of the flow of the drainage system
or at right angles thereto.
2.4.3. Wall Cleanout – Type (WCO)
Recessed NPT threaded plug for use in conjunction with the standard pipe fitting forming cleanout branch at
each change in direction, greater than 45 or near the foot of every vertical stack and on long horizontal pipe
runs at 15m intervals. The clean out shall be covered with nickel bronze polished top and frame access cover
as to Zurn Z1462.
The clean out shall be installed such that it opens opposite to the direction of the flow of the drainage system
or at right angles thereto.
2.5. Air Admittance Valve
One-way valve designed to allow air to enter the plumbing drainage system when negative pressures develop
in the piping system. The device shall close by gravity and seal the vent terminal at zero differential pressure
(no flow conditions) and under positive internal pressures.
The purpose of an air admittance valve is to provide a method of allowing air to enter the plumbing drainage
system without the use of a vent extended to open air and to prevent sewer gases from escaping into a
building.
Air Admittance Valve shall be A1 approved in accordance with BS EN 12380.
Valves shall be tested and approved for use in installations varying between -20° & +60°C.

Air Admittance Valves shall be kitemark licensed in accordance with BS EN 12380:2002.
Valve shall have a PVC-U body, cap, diaphragm seal carrier and reducer when needed.
2.6. Storm Water System
PIPE WORK AND FITTINGS

Pipe work and fittings for storm water system shall be UPVC to B.S. 4514 –EN-1329-1. All pipe work, fittings
and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations. The
Contractor shall ensure that the UPVC used is of a sufficiently high temperature rating to withstand the
environmental conditions.
RAIN WATER OUTLETS (RW01)

UPVC roof drain, of a 110 mm socket outlet complete with removable circular grating screw and
polypropylene washers and screw fixed to roof slabs. The outlet shall be fitted with P-trap for sediment
cleaning and foul air trapping.

For Balcony and Terraces, Drain body in ABS with lateral outlet Ø 110, complete with removable odour trap
(50 mm) and fixed lip seal, with 130x130mm Stainless Steel cover. To Kessel model 40170 or approved equal

Used for Planters. Duco Cast Iron Body, bronze flashing clamp, secured bronze Dome with Stainless Steel
Mesh Screen and 50mm Bottom angled Outlet, to Jay R. Smith Model 2673 or approved equal.
RAIN WATER YARD GULLY (YG)

Storm Water Street outlets shall be of concrete cast in situ or block work of dimensions as shown on
drawings.
The cover shall be heavy duty ductile iron grating curved in to form a sunk in point.
A bottom or side outlet, with internal sediment trap and cleanout shall be installed.
A cleanout strainer basket and sediment pan shall be provided with slit pan with holding and arm shall be
provided.
RAIN WATER GUTTER

Storm Water floor outlets shall be of cast iron coated body with side outlet, internal trap with bronze
cleanout, RG shall be provided with seepage pan and membrane flashing clamp.
RG frame to accommodate cast iron hinged extra heavy duty slotted Grate, with suspended sediment bucket.
2.6 Submersible Pumps (SMP)
Submersible pumps shall be of the open vortex non clog shrouded type. The pump shall have cast iron body,
cast iron motor housing, stainless steel shaft and highly wear resistant cast iron impeller.

Pump shall be firmly connected to the discharge connection , guided by not less than two stainless steel
guided bars extending from the top of the station to the discharge connection,
Pump motors a squirrel cage non-overloading throughout the entire performance induction type, Motors
protection shall be IP 68 at (20m). Stators windings shall be F insulated and rated for 150ºC. Pumps shall be
protected with overload thermistor. Motor shall be suitable for the building electrical supply and submerged
operation. The type of starter for motor shall be star delta
Cables shall be water tight and sealed. Epoxies silicones or other secondary sealing systems shall both be
considered.
Each pump shall be provided with an adequately designed cooling system. The cooling system shall provide
for continuous pump operation in liquid up to 40ºC.
Each set of pumps consisted of single or multiple vortex impeller pump (submersible type/explosion proof)
configured as duty/standby. Duty & stand by pumps shall alter in operation sequentially. Standby pumps shall
operate by very high-level switch.
All studs, bolts, nuts, screws and washers shall be of stainless steel. Each set of pumps shall be complete with
adjustable level controller, control panel, non-return valve in each discharge line and lifting handle and chain.
The control panel shall be complete with the following: -
 Normal housing
 Start/stop buttons
 Individual pump run lights
 Individual pump stop lights
 Individual pump trip lights
 Supply on lights
 Minimum run timers
 Hand auto/On/Off switch
 Volt free "fault" contact
The control panel shall incorporate thermal overload protection with automatic reset provision and
connected to the BMS system.
The submersible pumps shall be located within the dry section in the pumping chamber.
The sump shall be provided with level controls for operation of the pump units as well as at very high and
very low level alarms indication relayed to the BMS.
The sump shall be provided with access covers, step cast iron and sump vents. Local isolators shall be located
adjacent to the sump for isolation of units during maintenance. Pump isolating valves and test points shall be
added to each set of pumps.
2.7 Electric Water Heaters
A. The electric water heater shall be of storage type with heating capacity and storage capacity on schedule
of equipment. Heater shall be rated at 240 volt single phase, 50 HZ. Heaters shall have a maximum
working pressure of 10 bars. And an energy factor of 0.95 or greater.

B. The tank shall be of double skin injected with insulation foam of R21 insulation value. The jacket shall full
size compartments for the performance of service and maintenance through front panel openings and
enclose the tank with foam insulation.
C. The internal surfaces of the cylinder shall be of glass lined with an alkine borosilicate composition fused
to steel and guarantied corrosion proof.
D. The outer surface shall be treated cleaned and bake enamel paint finished for extra protection against
corrosion
E. The tank shall be provided with 20mm tapping and temperature pressure relief valve and with a
sacrificial anode rod for maximum cathodic protection. The tanks shall also be provided with two
isolating valves, vacuum breaker, non-return valves, drain cock and thermometer.
F. The controls shall include a thermostat with each element and high temperature cut out switch.
2.8 Multi-Media Filters
Multi-media filters shall be provided for removal of both heavy sediment and suspended matter from water.
The filter shall be supplied with a number of media distinctly layered with the coarsest layer at the top and
the finest layer at the bottom. The specific gravity and size of various layers shall be selected so that the
layers cannot mix but will always stratify in the same order upon backwashing.
The filtration rate shall be 20m3/hr/m2 and capable of 10 micron effluent water quality. The backwash rate
shall be 36.7 m3/hr/m2
2.9 Cold Water Storage Sectional Tank
A. Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and to comply strictly with the British
Water Department’s Regulations
B. GRP sectional storage tanks complete with bolted manhole inspection cover and all connections as shown
on the drawings. The sectional tanks shall be external bolted type and suitable for ultra violet light and
comply with the standards of the National Water Council of the United Kingdom and/or the Water
Department of the MOPW. All tanks shall be from one metre square plate.
C. The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the drawings.
D. The Contractor shall submit full specification of the tanks and procedural methods of installation including
plans and drawings.
E. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which will support the whole of the tank. The details of the tank base
are to be approved by the Engineer before any installation work begins.
F. Each tank shall be fitted with the following:
Ball valve with stopcock
Overflow pipe on size larger than the ball valve.
Drain valve provided at the bottom of the tank
Cold water outlets as shown on the drawings.
Close fitting openings in cover for water heater vents.

Manhole cover adjacent to ball valve.
75 mm vent with gooseneck and wire mesh.
Level Switches to control pumps operation
Level Indicator
External ladders.
G. Connections of 54mm and larger shall be flanged, 54mm and below shall be screwed BSP thr
H. After installation, tanks shall be filled with water for testing for 24 hours. No leakage shall be observed at
joints.
I. Tanks shall be guaranteed for minimum 10 years.
2.10 Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products
A. Insulating (Dielectric) Unions: Provide standard products recommended by the manufacturer for use in
the service indicated, and which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical
conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
B. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials that comply with installation
requirements.
C. Soldering Materials: Provide jointing materials as required to comply with installation requirements.
D. Brazing Materials: For pipe size of 54 mm and above provide brazing materials that comply with BS 1845.
E. Solvent Cemented Joints: Solvents for jointing PVC piping shall comply with BS 4346, Part 3.
2.11 Pipe work Supports
A. All pipe work shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free movement due to
expansion, contractions, vibration or other changes in the system.
B. Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes of direction. Spacing of supports shall
comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS 5572: 1978. Vertical rising pipes particularly in
shafts shall be adequately supported at the base to withstand the total weight of the riser. Under no
circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical pipe work.
C. Pipe work up to and including 65mm diameter shall be supported clear of the structure with brackets.
Where exposed to view, bright finish brass rackets shall be used with rawl plugs and brass screws.
D. Where pipe work is concealed, a single pipe ring with BSP female screwed end and back plate with male
screwed end shall be used and fixed to wall using brass screws and rawl plugs.
E. All multi runs of pipe work within false ceilings or service shafts shall be supported on purpose designed
proprietary brackets shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering.
F. Where rollers and chairs are required, these shall be performed as manufactured by a specialist approved
by the Engineer, and where used singularly, they shall have restraining “U” bolts formed over the
diameter of the pipe and bolted to the base support of the chair. The “U” bolts shall be fitted to allow
movement of the pipe without binding.
G. Pipe work support shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction.
H. The Contractor shall include for the supply of all necessary supports and brackets complete with all bolts,
screws and inserts or plug fastenings.
I. Particular importance must be attached to the design and method of supports and brackets for pipe work

and equipment. Care should be exercised regarding strength of material, construction, method of fixing,
practicability and appearance when designing brackets. Drawings of all brackets and supports shall be
forwarded to the Engineer for approval before manufacture is commenced. Details of all patents fixing to
the fabric shall also be submitted to the Engineer for prior approval.
J. Softwood plugs will not permitted.
K. Branch circuit pipes shall not be used as a means of support for the riser main.
L. Brackets and support shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valve flanges or fittings
requiring maintenance.
M. Pipes shall be spaced in relation to one another and to the structure so as not to interfere with any other
service and to allow for the required thickness of thermal insulation as specified later.
N. Pipes shall not be supported from each other, but, where there is no alternative, the Engineer’s written
approval must be obtained. The brackets so installed shall not prevent the removal of any individual pipe
where necessary and provision shall be made for any unequal expansion.
O. Pipes shall not be supported from any item of equipment.
P. All high level pipe work is to be carried on neat galvanized swivel hangers with GM split rings or steel
glands suitably spaced to prevent sagging and to allow expansion and contraction.
Q. Brackets, hangers and supports shall be of hot dipped galvanized after manufacture steel sections and are
to be as follows:
a. Brackets:
1. Brackets to walls: -
Flat iron with fish tail end, minimum size 40 mm.x6 mm.
2. Brackets to walls: -
Angle iron with fish tail, minimum size 32 mm. x 32 mm. x 6 mm.
3. Brackets to R.C. Beams:-
Rag bolt with eye built in, minimum size 15 mm. dia.
4. Brackets to R.S.J.:
Girder clips.
5. Brackets suspended from flat roofs:
Rod with eye (minimum size 9 mm. dia.) on underside with back plate and lockout on topside.
6. Brackets in trenches and tunnel:
Channel iron, minimum size 100 mm. x 50 mm. x 6mm.
b. Hangers:
1. Rods (minimum size 9 mm. dia.) with purpose-made hook and/or eye.
2. Tubes (minimum bore 6 mm.) with chandelier hooks or, ring sockets.
c. Supports:
1. Purpose-made mild steel band (minimum size 25 mm. x 3 mm. strap) with nut and bolt or
malleable iron split ring with socket for all mild steel pipe work.
2. Purpose-made heavy gauge brass strip with nut and bolt or gunmetal split ring with socket for all
copper pipe work.

3. Purpose-made mild steel stirrup (minimum size 32 mm. x 3 mm.) with roller and chair sized to
manufacturer's recommendation for steel and copper pipe work where required to allow for
expansion. Bronze rollers shall be used for copper pipe work.
Any combination of the above will be allowed, providing that uniformity to type is adopted throughout the
various sections of the building.
All hangers and supports, except at necessary fixed points, must be allowed to swing freely to make up
expansion and contraction. All low level pipe work to be supported by munzening ring and tube secured into
walls by brass anchor fixings.
All brackets, hangers and supports, except supports for copper pipe work, are to be hot dip galvanized after
manufacture to B.S.729.
The spacing distance between brackets and support to be as the tables attached below
All sizes of copper piping 2.0 m. apart.
In addition to the centers given, support shall be provided adjacent all valves, flanged joints and other special
components to prevent undue strain on the adjoining pipe work and so that the equipment or sections of
pipe work may be removed, leaving the adjoining pipe work adequately supported at the ends.
Main walls and partition walls etc. where pipes pass through sleeves, shall not be considered as pipe
supports.
Pipe Supports Spacing – Steel & Copper Pipes
The following table indicates the recommended spacing for pipe supports and guides:
Steel Piping (Temperatures up to 100 °C).
Hanger Rod
Distance Between Distance between Supports
Pipe Size Diameter
Alignment Guide
Horizontal Vertical
in mm (meters) Bare Insulated in mm
(meters) (meters) (meters) in mm
15 3.0 1.8 1.8 2.4 10
20 3.0 2.4 2.4 2.4 10
25 3.0 2.4 2.4 2.4 10
32 3.0 2.7 2.4 3.0 12
40 3.0 3.0 2.4 3.7 12
50 4.0 3.0 2.7 3.7 12
65 4.6 3.4 2.7 3.7 16
80 5.8 3.7 3.0 4.3 16

Hanger Rod
Distance Between Distance between Supports
Pipe Size Diameter
Alignment Guide
Horizontal Vertical
100 7.6 4.0 3.0 4.6 16
125 9.0 4.6 3.7 5.5 16
150 10.6 4.9 4.5 5.5 16
200 13.7 5.5 6.0 8.5 16
250 18.0 6.0 6.5 9.0 20
300 21.2 6.4 7.0 10.0 24
For temperatures above 100 °C use rod sizes given in Table (8) of BS 3974.

The following table indicates the recommended spacing for pipe supports and guides:
Copper Piping (Temperatures up to 100 °C).
Pipe Size Distance Between Distance between Support Hanger Rod Dia
Alignment Guide
Horizontal Vertical
Bare Insulated in mm
in mm (meters) (meter (meters) (meters) in mm

s)
15 2.0 1.8 1.8 2.4 10
20 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.4 10
25 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.4 10
32 3.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 12
40 3.0 2.5 2.0 3.7 12
50 4.0 2.5 2.5 3.7 12
65 4.6 3.0 2.5 3.7 16
80 5.8 3.0 3.0 4.3 16
100 7.6 3.0 3.0 4.6 16
125 9.0 3.5 3.5 5.5 16
150 10.6 4.0 4.0 5.5 16
200 13.7 5.0 5.0 8.5 16
250 18.0 6.0 6.0 9.0 20
300 21.2 6.4 7.0 10.0 24
For temperatures above 100 °C use rod sizes given in Table (8) of BS 3974

Polymer Pipes including:

CPVC, UPVC, ABS, Polypropylene, Polyethylene Pipes
The following table indicates the recommended spacing for pipe supports and guides: Acrylonitrile
Butadiene Styrene (ABS) (Temperatures up to 70 °C).
Distance between Pipe Support In Meters @
Max Temp 20 °C 50 °C 70 °C
Pipe Size
20 mm 1.3 1.0 0.7
25 mm 1.3 1.0 0.7
32 mm 1.3 1.0 0.7
40 mm 1.3 0.9 0.7
50 mm 1.3 1.0 0.7
63 mm 1.4 1.1 0.8
75 mm 1.5 1.2 0.8
90 mm 1.6 1.2 0.9
110 mm 1.8 1.3 1.0
125mm 1.9 1.4 1.0
140 mm 2.0 1.5 1.1
160 mm 2.1 1.6 1.2
200 mm 2.2 1.7 1.3
225 mm 2.3 1.8 1.5
250 mm 2.5 2.0 1.7
General Notes:
Vertical piping should have been supported at each floor and should have a midstory guide, unless thermal
expansion design calls for other provisions.
Piping should not be anchored tightly by the support, but secured in a manner to allow for a degree of
movement caused by thermal expansion. Hangers or strapping with rough edges should not be used.
2.12 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces.
Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces. Provide
paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.

2.13 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Sleeves are not required
where supply drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade,
except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
SLEEVES IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves are not required where drain,
waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry
and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely
grouted smooth.
SLEEVES NOT IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.14 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as specified or
indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W
or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with
Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with
drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled
expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping.
2.15 Nameplates
Provide 3.2 mm thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white center core, for
equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 6.4 mm high normal block lettering into the white core.
Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by 63 mm. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system.
Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of
each chart and schedule.
2.16 Labels
Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following information on each
label:
a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with graphic and written description.
b. Range of the sensor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Piping located in shafts that
constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A.
Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA Fire
Man. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and
accessories. Water and drainage piping shall be extended 1.5 m outside the building, unless otherwise
indicated. A gate valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building
approximately 150 mm above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior service
lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in
separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 300 mm
below the average local frost depth or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are
otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing
utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower
than the valve body.
3.2 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
3.2.1 UTILITIES
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot-water and cold-water piping
system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or
fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be
equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without
interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants,
shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.
3.2.2 CUTTING AND REPAIRING
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided.
Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics
skilled in the trade involved.
3.2.3 PROTECTION OF FIXTURES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT

Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly
covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the
work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety
guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment.

3.2.4 MAINS, BRANCHES, AND RUNOUTS

Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing
or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run
parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be
taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation
conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other
services to permit not less than 12 mm between finished coverings on the different services. Bare and
insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to
the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under
floors unless specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings.
Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated
components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in direction
shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 100 mm and smaller will be permitted, provided a
pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not less
than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will
not be acceptable.
3.2.5 PIPE DRAINS
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 20 mm hose bibb with renewable seat and full port ball valve ahead
of hose bibb. At other low points, 20 mm brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the
supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.2.6 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPING
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each hot-water and hot-
water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction,
etc., where indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as required or where indicated to
force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to
avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 15 m in length shall be
anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly
divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers
to provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more
turns in the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If mechanical
grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the deviation from design requirements for expansion and
contraction may be allowed pending approval of .
3.2.7 THRUST RESTRAINT
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or horizontally, in
waterlines 100 mm in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent
movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and
having a compressive strength of not less than 14 MPa after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between
solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust
bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block
not subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking shall be
placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by
galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity
thrust blocks.
3.2.8 COMMERCIAL-TYPE WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and cold-water supplies and shall be
located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201.
Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable
panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe
columns will not be permitted.
3.2.9 JOINTS
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints
shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended.

3.2.10 COPPER TUBE AND PIPE

a. Brazed.
Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M, ASME B16.50, and CDA A4015 with flux
and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or
copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or
brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver
brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered.
Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 50 mm and smaller. Soldered
joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air
piping between the air compressor and the receiver.
c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint.

Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC.
d. Press connection.
Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions for manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the
manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements.
3.2.11 PLASTIC PIPE
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement. PVC and CPVC pipe
shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is
allowed only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not
allowed), or mated flanged.
3.2.12 GLASS PIPE
Joints for corrosive waste glass pipe and fittings shall be made with corrosion-resisting steel compression-
type couplings with acrylonitrile rubber gaskets lined with polytetrafluoroethylene.
3.2.13 CORROSIVE WASTE PLASTIC PIPE
Joints for polyolefin pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint or electrical fusion coil method in
accordance with ASTM D2657 and ASTM F1290. Joints for filament-wound reinforced thermosetting resin
pipe shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unions or flanges shall be used where
required for disconnection and inspection.
3.2.14 POLYPROPYLENE PIPE
Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by heat fusion welding socket-type or butt-fusion
type fittings and shall comply with ASTM F2389.
3.2.15 DISSIMILAR PIPE MATERIALS

Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or
flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater
than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited
to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically
designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance
requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic
pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.
3.2.16 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS

Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating. Additionally,
ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding.
The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint bonding for cathodically protected
pipe shall be in accordance with Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL

ANODE) Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as
otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness
testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For
tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent
overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
3.3 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.
3.3.1 SLEEVE REQUIREMENTS
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass
through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange
and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking
synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using
galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a
continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the
seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing
elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly
shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved. Rectangular and
square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof, and
shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in
wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas
shall extend a minimum of 100 mm above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 25 mm clearance between
bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing
walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or
ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or
plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over
insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C920 and with a
primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The
annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over
insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 12 mm from wall surfaces on
both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the
joint between the pipe and concrete masonry wall as specified above. Sealant selected for the earth side of
the wall shall be compatible with damp proofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the
joint sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.3.2 FLASHING REQUIREMENTS
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 4.9 kg per square meter copper flashing, each within
an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less
than 200 mm from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of
bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 250 mm. For cleanouts, the

flashing shall be turned down into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate
size to extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a
watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the
metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down
into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 250 mm in diameter, passing through
roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess,
anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted into
the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as
described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.
3.3.3 WATERPROOFING
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing guard from soft-
tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 40
mm to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the cast-iron or steel
pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of
approximately 40 mm; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard
and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 200 mm from the drainpipe
and shall be lapped between the floor membranes in a solid coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron
water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with
sealant and the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 40 mm to fit the outside diameter of the
drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted
into the floor flange shall be sealed.
3.3.4 OPTIONAL COUNTERFLASHING
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the annular space
between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be
accomplished by utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 150 mm in diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.

3.4 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors, except
at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements
and Waterproofing, a groove 6 to 13 mm wide by 6 to 10 mm deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting
or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.4.1 PIPE PENETRATIONS
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air,
insects, and vermin.
3.4.2 FIRE SEAL

Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase walls or floors above grade, a fire
seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.5 Supports
3.5.1 GENERAL
Hangers used to support piping 50 mm and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after
erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping
subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be
supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of
multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the
base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support
spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be
formed or bent.
3.5.2 PIPE SUPPORTS AND STRUCTURAL BRACING, SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 13
48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and Section 22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL
SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL. Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly
support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material used for supports
shall be as specified in Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.5.3 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as
modified herein.
a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which
allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have both locknuts and retaining
devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not
acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel
plate or adapter.

f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the
medium is 15 degrees C or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.
h. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 100 mm.

(2) Be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15
degrees C or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a density of 128 kg per
cubic meter or greater.
i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not
over 300 mm from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be
spaced not over 1.5 m apart at valves. Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or
CPVC pipe shall be 49 degrees C for PVC and 82 degrees C for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include
allowances for expansion and contraction.
j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 4.5
m nor more than 2 m from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include
allowances for expansion and contraction.
k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided
to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating
temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be
provided as needed. Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may
be used:
(1) On pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or higher, a
Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 100 mm a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a
steel plate.
(3) On pipe 100 mm and larger carrying medium less that 15 degrees C a Type 40 shield, attached to
the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation. The
insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.
m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the type 35 guide
shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe
shall be separated from the slide material by at least 100 mm or by an amount adequate for the
insulation, whichever is greater.
n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall
allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.
3.5.4 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in
anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than
5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of
concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors
for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.

3.5.5 WELDED INSTALLATION

Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of piping shall be made with welding
fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not
be permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings.
Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and
reinforced against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall
conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints
shall be entirely removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its original package, it
shall be protected or stored so that its characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes
that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.
3.5.6 PIPE CLEANOUTS

Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 100 mm will not be
required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with
countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with
the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch
drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs
shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 100 mm. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall
be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to
building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the
building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade
construction or where less than 450 mm of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe
concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or
stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs
with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and
cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the
finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-
plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with
the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts
are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron.
3.6 3WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
3.6.1 RELIEF VALVES

No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank. The P&T relief
valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater.
Whenever possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank or heater; otherwise,
the P&T valve shall be installed in the hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on
the cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and within
150 mm above the top of the tank or water heater.
3.6.2 HEAT TRAPS

Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be routed horizontally and
downward a minimum of 600 mm before turning in an upward direction.
3.6.3 CONNECTIONS TO WATER HEATERS

Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges.
3.6.4 EXPANSION TANK

A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the water heater inlet
and the cold water supply shut-off valve. The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as
recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.

3.7 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Angle stops,
straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops
for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures.
Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a
beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps
and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall,
unless otherwise specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified. Drain lines
and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished
chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
Refer to architectural and ID specification for all sanitary fixture .
3.7.1 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS

Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast-iron floor flange, special
short-radius fittings shall be provided. Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe
shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of
natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper
distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and
fixture used.
3.7.2 HEIGHT OF FIXTURE RIMS ABOVE FLOOR

Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 775 mm above finished floor. Wall-hung drinking fountains and
water coolers shall be installed with rim 1020 mm above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted
with rim 700 mm above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in
accordance with ICC A117.1.
3.7.3 SHOWER BATH OUTFITS

The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon plate shall be
made watertight by caulking or gasketing.
3.7.4 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar size, design,
and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the
fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to
locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair
carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair
carrier to the floor slab.
3.7.4.1 SUPPORT FOR SOLID MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a
suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall.
3.7.4.2 SUPPORT FOR CONCRETE-MASONRY WALL CONSTRUCTION
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a
suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.
3.7.4.3 SUPPORT FOR STEEL STUD FRAME PARTITIONS
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty design; and feet
(bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of floor-

anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to
support a wall plate bolted to these studs.
3.7.4.4 SUPPORT FOR WOOD STUD CONSTRUCTION
Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be used. Where entire construction is
wood, wood crosspieces shall be installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs shall
be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 6 mm thick minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with
nut. The wood crosspieces shall extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.
3.7.4.5 WALL-MONTED WATER CLOSET GASKETS
Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated felt, or neoprene gaskets shall be
provided. The type of gasket furnished shall be as recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer.
3.7.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES

Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a
potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where
indicated and in accordance with ICC at all other locations necessary to preclude a cross-connect or
interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance. In addition backflow
preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the
equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance.
Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers
shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow
of any nonpotable substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around
backflow preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a
standard commercial unit.
3.7.6 ACCESS PANELS

Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring inspection or
maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be
serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS
METAL FABRICATIONS
3.7.7 SIGHT DRAINS

Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 50 mm above the flood rim of the
funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.
3.7.8 TRAPS
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be double-trapped. Traps
installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be
recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to
ASTM D3311. Traps for acid-resisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.
3.7.9 SHOWER PANS

Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as nail heads or rough edges of
aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down, clamping-ring type with weep holes, installed so the lip of the sub
drain is flush with subfloor.
3.7.9.1 GENERAL
The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination shower and drying room, and
the entire shower and drying room where the two are not separated by curb or partition, shall be made
watertight with a shower pan fabricated in place. The shower pan material shall be cut to size and shape
of the area indicated, in one piece to the maximum extent practicable, allowing a minimum of 150 mm for
turn-up on walls or partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of 1/4 of curb
height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or partition finish. Subflooring shall be smooth and

clean, with nail heads driven flush with surface, and shall be sloped to drain. Shower pans shall be clamped
to drains with the drain clamping ring.
3.7.9.2 METAL SHOWER PANS

When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal pieces shall be joined with a
flintlock seam and soldered or burned. The corners shall be folded, not cut, and the corner seam shall be
soldered or burned. Pans, including upstands, shall be coated on all surfaces with one brush coat of
asphalt. Asphalt shall be applied evenly at not less than 1 liter per square meter. A layer of felt covered
with building paper shall be placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining surfaces of metal
pan and drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan is connected to the drain.
3.7.9.3 NONPLASTICIZED CHLORINATED POLYETHYLENE SHOWER PANS
Corners of nonplasticized chlorinated polyethylene shower pans shall be folded against the upstand by
making a pig-ear fold. Hot-air gun or heat lamp shall be used in making corner folds. Each pig-ear corner
fold shall be nailed or stapled 12 mm from the upper edge to hold it in place. Nails shall be galvanized
large-head roofing nails. On metal framing or studs, approved duct tape shall be used to secure pig-ear
fold and membrane. Where no backing is provided between the studs, the membrane slack shall be taken
up by pleating and stapling or nailing to studding 12 mm from upper edge. To adhere the membrane to
vertical surfaces, the back of the membrane and the surface to which it will be applied shall be coated with
adhesive that becomes dry to the touch in 5 to 10 minutes, after which the membrane shall be pressed
into place. Surfaces to be solvent-welded shall be clean. Surfaces to be joined with xylene shall be initially
sprayed and vigorously cleaned with a cotton cloth, followed by final coating of xylene and the joining of
the surfaces by roller or equivalent means. If ambient or membrane temperatures are below 4 degrees C
the membrane and the joint shall be heated prior to application of xylene. Heat may be applied with hot-
air gun or heat lamp, taking precautions not to scorch the membrane. Adequate ventilation and wearing of
gloves are required when working with xylene. Membrane shall be pressed into position on the drain
body, and shall be cut and fit to match so that membrane can be properly clamped and an effective gasket-
type seal provided. On wood subflooring, two layers of 0.73 kg per square meter dry felt shall be installed
prior to installation of shower pan to ensure a smooth surface for installation.
3.7.9.4 NONPLASTICIZED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SHOWER PANS
Nonplasticized PVC shall be turned up behind walls or wall surfaces a distance of not less than 150 mm in
room areas and 75 mm above curb level in curbed spaces with sufficient material to fold over and fasten to
outside face of curb. Corners shall be pig-ear type and folded between pan and studs. Only top 25 mm of
upstand shall be nailed to hold in place. Nails shall be galvanized large-head roofing type. Approved duct
tape shall be used on metal framing or studs to secure pig-ear fold and membrane. Where no backing is
provided between studs, the membrane slack shall be taken up by pleating and stapling or nailing to
studding at top inch of upstand. To adhere the membrane to vertical surfaces, the back of the membrane
and the surface to which it is to be applied shall be coated with adhesive that becomes dry to the touch in
5 to 10 minutes, after which the membrane shall be pressed into place. Trim for drain shall be exactly the
size of drain opening. Bolt holes shall be pierced to accommodate bolts with a tight fit. Adhesive shall be
used between pan and sub drain. Clamping ring shall be bolted firmly. A small amount of gravel or porous
materials shall be placed at weep holes so that holes remain clear when setting bed is poured. Membrane
shall be solvent welded with PVC solvent cement. Surfaces to be solvent welded shall be clean (free of
grease and grime). Sheets shall be laid on a flat surface with an overlap of about 50 mm. Top edge shall be
folded back and surface primed with a PVC primer. PVC cement shall be applied and surfaces immediately
placed together, while still wet. Joint shall be lightly rolled with a paint roller, then as the joint sets shall be
rolled firmly but not so hard as to distort the material. In long lengths, about 600 or 900 mm at a time shall
be welded. On wood subflooring, two layers of 0.73 kg per square meter felt shall be installed prior to
installation of shower pan to ensure a smooth surface installation.

3.8 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES
Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by
approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an
adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation
fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed load
rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors. Isolation
unit installation shall limit vibration to 10 percent of the lowest equipment rpm.
3.8.1 TANK- OR SKID-MOUNTED COMPRESSORS

Floor attachment shall be as recommended by compressor manufacturer. Compressors shall be mounted
to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT.
3.8.2 FOUNDATION-MOUNTED COMPRESSORS

Foundation shall be as recommended by the compressor manufacturer, except the foundation shall weigh
not less than three times the weight of the moving parts. Compressors shall be mounted to resist seismic
loads as specified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
3.9 WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER
The remote readout register shall be mounted at the location indicated or as directed by the Contracting
Officer.
3.10IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.10.1 IDENTIFICATION TAGS

Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating
service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing
fixtures. Tags shall be 35 mm minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations
shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-
plated beaded chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.10.2 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.10.3 COLOR CODING SCHEME FOR LOCATING HIDDEN UTILITY COMPONENTS

Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The color coding scheme shall
identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable components which are not visible
from the finished space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling. The operable
components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages and thermostats. The color coding scheme
shall consist of a color code board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be approximately
12 mm in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted
into the ceiling panels so that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be manually
removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from
ceiling height. Installation of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on which
the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the approximate dimensions of 1 m width,
750 mm height, and 12 mm thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under
glass or 1.6 mm transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed, the color code symbols shall be
approximately 20 mm in diameter and the related lettering in 12 mm high capital letters.
3.11ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to view, passes
through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be
fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished

chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-
piece or split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.
3.12PAINTING
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is
specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.12.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and
provided under each individual section.
3.12.1.1 FACTORY PAINTING SYSTEMS
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory
painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located
outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with
ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of
the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the
specimen shall show no signs of rust creep
age beyond 3 mm on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film
thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed
for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 50 degrees C, the factory painting system shall be
designed for the temperature service.
3.12.1.2 SHOP PAINTING SYSTEMS FOR METAL SURFACES
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply
coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire
brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to
temperatures in excess of 50 degrees C shall be cleaned to bare metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is
thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of
finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 50 Degrees C: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to
temperatures less than 50 degrees C shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.0076 mm, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.0255 mm; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm per
coat.
b. Temperatures between 50 and 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 50 and
205 degrees C shall receive two coats of 205 degrees C heat-resisting enamel applied to a total
minimum thickness of 0.05 mm.
d. Temperatures Greater Than 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than
205 degrees C shall receive two coats of 315 degrees C heat-resisting paint applied to a total
minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
3.13 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

3.13.1 PLUMBING SYSTEM

The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with ICC, except that the
drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform
a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor must submit a
testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.
a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.
b. Building Sewers Tests.
c. Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.13.1.1 SHOWER PANS
After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be temporarily plugged below the weep
holes. The floor area shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 25 mm for a period of 24 hours.
Any drop in the water level during test, except for evaporation, will be reason for rejection, repair, and
retest.
3.14Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as
necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials.
Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
3.15System Flushing
3.10.3.1 DURING FLUSHING
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with potable water.
Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris
in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common
branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 1.2 meters per second through all
portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting
Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during
flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure
that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor shall be
responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until
entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no
discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any device considered as an end point
device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 1 L per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14
day period.
3.10.3.2 AFTER FLUSHING
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced. After
flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean,
fresh potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of
the building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the
Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform
circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation
according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - SI for minimum efficiency
requirements. Unless more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits
established by 40 CFR 141.80 (c)(1). The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure

that any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed
inside the building.
3.15.1 3.10.4 OPERATIONAL TEST

Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the Contractor shall subject the
plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for
each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of
the system:
a. Time, date, and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
e. Pump suction and discharge pressures.
f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.
h. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
i. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including pump start pressure and stop
pressure.
j. Compressed air readings at each compressor and at each outlet. Each indicating instrument shall be read
at 1/2 hour intervals. The report of the test shall be submitted in quadruplicate. The Contractor shall
furnish instruments, equipment, and personnel required for the tests; the Government will furnish the
necessary water and electricity.
3.15.2 3.10.5 DISINFECTION

After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and
cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material,
entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt and other foreign materials have
been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652 as modified and
supplemented by this specification. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at
least 50 parts per
Million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypo
chlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump
until the entire system is completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a continuous period of 24 hours. If at the
end of a 6 hour interval, the chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping including
tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination procedures. During the chlorination period,
each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated
system. The 24 hour chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual
remains in the treated system.

Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be flushed with potable water until
the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each
valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial examination, at locations specified
by the Contracting Officer
Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other
bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be EPA approved for drinking
water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean
coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted
until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.15.3 3.10.6 OPTIONAL DISINFECTION METHOD

Disinfect new potable water piping and affected portions of existing potable water piping with geothermal
water. Geothermal water shall be not less than 90 degrees C and contact time shall be not less than 30
minutes. After disinfection, thoroughly flush new portable water piping and affected portions of existing
potable water piping with the chlorinated base water supply for a minimum of two hours.
3.16WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil
soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly
used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate
temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous
waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place
in designated areas for reuse.
3.17POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the
complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation,
and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as
specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed
instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.
3.18PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
Standard rating condition terms are as follows:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 38.9 degree C temperature difference between stored
water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)

3.18.1 DRAIN AND STORM WATER PIPE TEST

A. All drainpipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and the requirements of
the local authorities having jurisdictions. . Tests shall be in accordance with British Standards BS 6700:
1987.
B. The test shall demonstrate: -
a. That equipment provided complies with the Specification in all particulars and is of adequate
capacity for its full rates of duty.
b. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite sufficiently to meet the specified requirements.
c. That all instruments, protection and control devices, etc., are correctly calibrated and accurate.
d. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.
3.18.2 PROVING TESTS

A. All under slab, underground drainage, soil and waste system shall be cleaned down and thoroughly
flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipe work system.
B. After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the drainage soil and waste
system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow. Particular attention shall be given to groups of
sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory flow when a number of fittings are flushed and air not drawn
into the system via any trap.
3.18.3 WATER TEST
A. All drains shall be tested before backfilling, immediately after the drain has been properly laid on the
correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to set. A water test pressure of 1.3m head
above the soffit of the drain shall be applied at the high end, but not more than 2.4m head at the low
end. The test shall be carried out on lengths of drain not less then half the distance between
manholes, all to be agreed with the Engineer on site. The lower end of the drain shall be plugged and
the higher end shall have a standpipe not less than 1.2m high. The drain shall be filled, taking care to
eliminate trapped air. After repair of leakage due to defective pipes, joints and plugs, the drain under
test shall be left for one hour to allow water absorption by pipe and fittings.
B. The loss of water over a period measuring vessel at intervals of ten minutes and noting the quantity
of water required maintaining the original level in the standpipe. For drains up to 300mm diameter,
the water quantity added shall not exceed 0.06 liter per hour per 100 linear meters per millimeter of
nominal bore of the drain under test.
C. All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct bedding cover and
selected backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface complete.
3.18.4 AIR TEST

A. A gauge in the form of a “U” tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of the length to be
tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall be plugged. Air shall then be
pumped in from the other end of the drain under test until a pressure equal to 100mm of water is
indicated on the gauge. Without further pumping, the pressure shall not fall more than 25mm during
a period of five minutes.
B. Air tests shall be carried out after 3 pm and all pipe work shall be shaded from the sun at all times.
Should an air test fail, a water test shall be carried out as described in this Specification.

3.18.5 PROFILE TEST

A. A hardwood ball, of an approved profile, shall be drawn through all foul drains from manhole to
manhole and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and W.C.’s are filled. The diameter
of the ball or profile shall differ from the nominal internal diameter of the pipe by not more than
6mm or by not more than 4% of the nominal internal diameter of the pipe, whichever is the greater
difference.
B. During commissioning, all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall be carried out
to ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and that they are free of debris.
3.19Disinfection
After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and
cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material,
entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt and other foreign materials have
been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652 as modified and
supplemented by this specification. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorite or liquid chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at
least 50 parts per million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system
with a hypo chlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and
booster pump until the entire system is completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a continuous period of 24 hours. If at the
end of a 6 hour interval, the chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping including
tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination procedures. During the chlorination period,
each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated
system. The 24 hour chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual
remains in the treated system.
Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be flushed with potable water until
the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each
valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial examination, at locations specified
by the Owners Representative
Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other
bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be EPA approved for drinking
water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean
coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted
until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.20WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil
soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly
used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate
temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous
waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place
in designated areas for reuse.

3.21POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the
complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation,
and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as
specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed
instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.
3.22PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
Standard rating condition terms are as follows:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 45 degree C temperature difference between stored
water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 22 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 575 (2008) Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment

Space
ANSI/AHRI 370 (2011) Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Equipment
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 360 (2010) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2012; Errata 2011) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASTM A123/A123M (2012) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A36/A36M (2012) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A653/A653M (2011) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C94/C94M (2013) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM D2240 (2005; R 2010) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer
Hardness
ASTM D471 (2012a) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids
Mechanical Specification 22 05 48 - 1 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control

ASTM E84 (2012c) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (SMACNA)
SMACNA 1403 (2008) Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction, 2nd
Edition
SMACNA 1793 (2012) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 7th Edition
SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd
Edition
SMACNA 1981 (2008) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems,
3rd Edition
prevail
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
The provisions of Section BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS apply to this section.
1.4.1 SPRING ISOLATOR DATA
For each type and size of spring isolator, submit the spring outside diameter, deflection, operating spring
height, unloaded spring height, solid spring height, the ratio of the outside diameter to the operating spring
height, the load to deflection ratio of the springs, and weight and sizes of structural steel members.
1.4.2 MACHINERY MANUFACTURER'S SOUND DATA
For each piece of indicated machinery to be vibration isolated, the calculated sound power test data or sound
pressure test data as levels in dB in the eight octave bands between 63 and 8,000 Hz. Refer sound power
levels to one pW and sound pressure levels to 20 uPa. Submit the overall "A" weighted scale sound pressure
level in dB. Submit the standard test procedure used to obtain the sound power or pressure data for the
applicable vibration isolation equipment size.
1.4.3 MACHINERY
For each item of machinery, compare spring static deflections with the specified minimum static deflection, to
show that the calculated spring static deflections are not less than the minimum static deflections specified.
Rated spring static deflections are not acceptable in lieu of calculated spring static deflections. When seismic
protection is required, substantiating calculations are required.

1.4.4 MACHINERY OVER 136 KILOGRAMS
For machinery items over 136 kg, provide calculations for shear, pull-up, primary overturning, and secondary
overturning.
1.4.5 MACHINERY VIBRATION CRITERIA
TABLE 1A
Vibration Isolator Types and Minimum Static Deflection
(MSD, mm) for 100-200 mm slab on grade and column supported.
Slab on earth and 0-

Column Spacing 9.1-12 meters 12.1-15 meters
9 meter
Type MSD Type MSD Type MSD
Equipment (Note) (Note) (Note) (Note) (Note) (1) (Note)
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Absorption Refrigeration Machines SV-R 25.40 SV-R 44.45 SV-R 69.85
Heat Pumps
Hermetic Type SV-B 44.45 SV-B 63.50 SV-B 88.90
Open Type SV-1 44.45 SV-I 63.50 SV-I 88.90
Reciprocating Air or Refrigeration Compressors
500 to 750 rpm S-R 44.45 S-R 63.50 S-R 88.90
751 rpm and up S-R 38.10 S-R 63.50 S-R 88.90
Reciprocating Chillers or Heat Pumps
500 to 750 rpm SV-R 44.45 SV-R 63.50 SV-R 88.90
751 rpm and up SV-R 38.10 SV-R 63.50 SV-R 88.90
Packaged Boilers SV 25.40 SV 63.50 SV-R 88.90
Closed Coupled Pumps
Up to 5 1/2 kW S-I 25.40 S-I 25.40 S-I 25.40
Over 5 1/2 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 63.50
Base Mounted Pumps

TABLE 1A

9 meter
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Up to 15 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 63.50
15 to 56 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 88.90
Over 56 kW S-I 63.50 S-I 88.90 S-I 88.90
SV with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers when

springs are supported on beams. Use deflection listed for
Cooling Towers and Evaporative Condensers column supported floors with up to 9 meters column
spacing when springs are located on columns or bearing
walls.
Factory Assembled Air Handling Equipment AH, AC and HV Units (Note (2))
Suspended Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW H 25.40 H 25.40 H 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm H 44.45 H 44.45 H 44.45
Over 401 rpm H 25.40 H 38.10 H 63.50
Floor Mounted Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW S 25.40 S 25.40 S 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm S-R 44.45 S-R 44.45 S-R 63.50
Over 401 rpm S-R 25.40 S-R 38.10 S-R 63.50
Centrifugal Blowers
175 - 224 rpm S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65

TABLE 1A

9 meter
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
225 - 299 rpm S-B 95.25 S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65
300 - 374 rpm S-B 69.85 S-B 114.30 S-B 120.65
375 - 499 rpm S-B 63.50 S-B 88.90 S-B 114.30
Over 500 rpm S-B 44.45 S-B 63.50 S-B 88.90
Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans (Note (2))

Suspended H with deflection specified for centrifugal blowers
Floor Mounted Arrangements 1 & 9 S-B with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers
Utility Fans (Note (2))

H with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers but
Suspended
not to exceed 69.85 mm
S-R with deflections not specified for centrifugal blowers

Floor-Mounted
but not to exceed 69.85 mm
High Pressure Fans (Over 1494 Pa Static

HR recommended for minimizing undesirable thrust
Pressure) and Other Machineries Producing
effects
Thrust (Note) (2)
Internal Combustion Engines and Engine Driven Equip
750 rpm and over S 38.10 S 63.50 S 88.90
Dimmer Banks and Transformers
Up to 454 kg NM 8.89 NM 8.89 NM 88.90
Over 454 kg SV 25.40 SV 25.40 SV 25.40
NOTES:

TABLE 1A

9 meter
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
(1) Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule Designations (Hyphenated designations are combinations of the
following :)
B - Welded structural steel bases.
H - Spring isolators (suspended equipment and piping). Where required, provide with adjustable preloading
devices.
HR - Thrust restraints
I - Concrete inertia bases with steel forms.
NM - Neoprene mounts.
NP - Neoprene pads.
R - Structural steel rail for equipment mounts.
S - Freestanding spring isolators (floor-mounted equipment).
SV - Freestanding spring isolators (floor-mounted equipment).
SX - Freestanding spring isolators with adjustable cushioned vertical stops and cushioned horizontal stops
(floor-mounted equipment. Protected spring isolators SX may be substituted wherever S or SV is
specified and shall meet all requirements.
(2) Fans
a. When fan motors are 56 kW or larger, use the deflection requirements for the next wider column spacing.
Except for building slab on grade a minimum of 63.50 mm should be used unless larger deflections are
specified in the centrifugal blower table.
b. Provide sway brace isolators for tubular centrifugal and axial fans when the fan pressure exceeds 996 Pa.
c. Provide inertia bases for all fans in lieu of structural steel bases or rails specified above when the fan
pressure exceeds 996 Pa.
d. With attaching brackets, suspension spring isolators bridge between the structure and the thrust-producing
machinery such as high-pressure fan. Both types H and HR normally provide reaction in tension, while
types S, SV, and SX normally provide reaction in compression. Thrust restraints are low-cost and effective
components available from manufacturers. Use thrust restraints to eliminate the need for or reduce the
magnitude of inertia mass when the mass is only used to reduce the displacement effects of the thrust.

TABLE 1B
Class II Vibration Isolator Types and Minimum Static Deflection
(MSD, mm) for basements below grade and floor slabs on earth
Type
Equipment MSD
(Note) (1)
NP 6.35
Absorption Refrigeration Machines
NM 8.89
Centrifugal Chillers or Heat Pumps
NP 6.35
Hermetic Type
NM 8.89
Open Type NM-I 8.89

500 to 750 rpm S 25.40
751 rpm and up S 25.40
500 to 750 rpm SV 25.40
751 rpm and up SV 25.40
NP 6.35
Packaged Boilers
NM 8.89
Pumps
Closed Coupled NP 6.35
Up to 5 1/2 kW NM 8.89
Over 5 1/2 kW S-I 25.40
Base Mounted
Up to 15 kW S-I 25.40
15 to 56 kW S-I 25.40
Over 56 kW S-I 25.40

NP 6.35
Cooling Towers and Evaporative Condensers
NM 8.89
Suspended Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW H 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW

Up to 400 rpm H 44.45

Over 401 rpm H 25.40
Floor Mounted Units
NP 6.35
Up to 3 3/4 kW
NM 8.89
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm NM 8.89
Over 401 rpm NM 8.89
Centrifugal Blowers
175 - 224 rpm NM-B 8.89
225 - 299 rpm NM-B 8.89
300 - 374 rpm NM-B 8.89
375 - 499 rpm NM-B 8.89
Over 500 rpm NM-B 8.89

H with deflections specified for
Suspended
centrifugal blowers
NM 8.89
Floor Mounted Arrangements 1 & 9
Suspended and centrifugal H with deflections specified for

Floor-Mounted NM 8.89
HR recommended
High Pressure Fans (Over 1494 Pa Static Pressure) and Other Machineries for minimizing
Producing Thrust (Note) (2) undesirable thrust
effects
750 rpm and over S 25.40
NP 6.35
Up to 454 kg
NM 8.89
Over 454 kg SV 25.40
NOTES: Note (1) and Note (2) are same as for TABLE 1A.
Provide vibration isolators and seismic snubbers for mechanical and electrical machinery and associated piping
and ductwork, to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure borne noise to the building structure or
spaces or from the building structure to the machinery. Comply with the following vibration schedule.

1.4.6 MACHINERY AIRBORNE SOUND LEVEL CRITERIA
TABLE 2A
Sound Data Schedule
Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)
Equipment Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air Handling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79
Make-Up Air Fan 91 91 80 84 82 76 71 65
Air Conditioning Unit 100 96 90 89 86 80 75 72
Boiler 75 72 72 75 76 63 55 50
Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Cooling Tower 110 110 105 102 98 95 92 87
Air Compressor 90 89 92 93 92 92 90 81
Pump 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72
Fan 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37
1.4.6.1 Basic Criteria
For each piece of machinery in the human work environment, do not exceed the maximum airborne sound
levels 84 dB A-weighted scale, continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB peak sound pressure-level, impact or
impulse, noise.

1.4.6.2 SOUND DATA SCHEDULE
TABLE 2A
Sound Data Schedule
Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)
Equipment Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air Handling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79
Make-Up Air Fan 91 91 80 84 82 76 71 65
Air Conditioning Unit 100 96 90 89 86 80 75 72
Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Pump 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72
Fan 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37
1.4.7 SEISMIC PROTECTION CRITERIA
Use a Horizontal Force Factor minimum 60 percent 100 percent of the machinery weight considered passing
through the machinery center of gravity in any horizontal direction. Unless vibration isolation is required to
protect machinery against unacceptable structure transmitted noise or vibration, protect the structure or
machinery from earthquakes by rigid structurally sound attachment to the load-supporting structure. Protect
each piece of vibration-isolated machinery with protected spring isolators or separate seismic restraint devices.
Determine by calculations the number and size of seismic restraints needed for each machinery. Verify seismic
restraint vendor's calculations by a registered professional engineer. Provide seismic snubbers and protected
spring isolators rated in three principle axes. Verify ratings by independent laboratory testing, by analysis of an
independent licensed structural engineer , or by R-number ratings by California State.
1.4.8 WELDING
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation
are for Contractor Quality Control approval for information only. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Inertia bases
Machinery bases
Platforms
Rails
Saddles
SD-03 Product Data
Isolators
Flexible connectors
Flexible duct connectors
Pipe guides
Seismic snubbers
Vertical stops
Thrust restraints
Inertia bases
Machinery bases
Machinery foundations and subbases
Platforms
Rails
Saddles
Machinery manufacturer's sound data
SD-05 Design Data
Inertia bases
Machinery bases
Platforms
Rails
Saddles

Each item of machinery
Each item of machinery over 136 kilograms
Submit design calculations for inertia bases , machinery bases , platforms , rails , and saddles , either by
the machinery manufacturer for the recommended machinery mounting or by the vibration-isolation
equipment manufacturer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Seismic snubbers
Equipment vibration tests
Equipment sound level tests
Protected spring isolators
Submit seismic protection rating in three principal axes certified by an independent laboratory or analyzed by
an independent licensed structural engineer.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Vibration and noise isolation components Seismic protection components
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR PROCUREMENT
For each piece of machinery to be isolated from vibration, supply the inertia base, machinery base, platform,
rails, saddles, vibration isolators, seismic snubbers, and other associated materials and equipment as a
coordinated package by a single manufacturer or by the machinery manufacturer. Select isolators that provide
uniform deflection even when machinery weight is not evenly distributed. This requirement does not include
the flexible connectors or the hangers for the associated piping and ductwork.
1.6.2 UNITIZED MACHINERY ASSEMBLIES
Mounting of unitized assemblies directly on vibration isolation springs is acceptable if machinery manufacturer
certifies that the end supports of the assemblies have been designed for such installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL PARTS
ASTM A123/A123M ASTM A653/A653M hot-dipped galvanized, or equivalent manufacturer standard

coatings. Where steel parts are exposed to the weather, provide galvanized coating of at least 0.61 kg of zinc
per square meter of surface. Coat springs with neoprene.
2.2 NEOPRENE
ASTM D471 and ASTM D2240, Grade Durometer 40, 50, or 60, and oil resistant.
2.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED ISOLATORS
2.3.1 NEOPRENE ISOLATION PADS
Provide pads at least 6 mm thick with cross-ribbed or waffle design. For concentrated loads, provide steel
bearing plates bonded or cold cemented to the pads.
2.3.2 NEOPRENE ISOLATORS
Provide molded neoprene isolators having steel base plates with mounting holes and, at the top, steel
mounting plates with mounting holes or threaded inserts. Provide elements of type and size coded with
molded letters or color-coded for capacity identification. Embed metal parts completely in neoprene.
2.4 SPRING ISOLATORS AND PROTECTED SPRING ISOLATORS
Provide spring isolators or protected spring isolators that are adjustable and laterally stable with free-standing
springs of horizontal stiffness at minimum 80 percent of the vertical (axial) stiffness. For machine-attached
and floor-attached restraining elements, separate from metal-to-metal contact by neoprene cushions 3 mm
thick minimum. Provide neoprene acoustic friction pads at least 6 mm thick.
2.4.1 SPRINGS
Provide springs with base and compression plates, to keep spring ends parallel during and after deflection to
operating height. Provide outside coil diameters at least 0.8 of the operating height. At operating height,
springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid) compression equal to at least 50 percent of the
operating deflection.
2.4.2 MOUNTING AND ADJUSTMENT
Provide base and compression plates with mounting holes or threaded fittings. Bolt leveling adjustment bolts
to machinery or base.

2.5 SUSPENSION ISOLATORS
Provide hangers with suspension isolators encased in open steel brackets. Isolate hanger rods from isolator
steel brackets with neoprene-lined opening.
2.5.1 SUSPENSION NEOPRENE ISOLATORS
Provide double-deflection elements with minimum 10 mm deflection.
2.5.2 SUSPENSION SPRING ISOLATORS
Provide hangers with springs and molded neoprene elements in series. Provide isolators with adjustable
spring-preloading devices where required to maintain constant pipe elevations during installation and when
pipe operational loads are transferred to the springs.
2.6 MACHINERY BASES , PLATFORMS , RAILS SADDLES
ASTM A36/A36M and AISC 360.
2.7 INERTIA BASES
ASTM A36/A36M steel, ASTM C94/C94M (20 MPa concrete.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR PIPING
Straight or elbow flexible connectors rated for temperatures, pressures, and fluids to be conveyed. Provide
flexible connectors with the strength 4 times operating pressure at highest system operating temperature.
Provide elbow flexible connectors with a permanently set angle.
2.8.1 ELASTOMERIC FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Fabricated of multiple plies of tire cord fabric and elastomeric materials with integral reinforced elastomeric
flanges with galvanized malleable iron back up rings.
2.8.2 METAL FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Fabricated of Grade E phosphor bronze, monel or corrugated stainless steel tube covered with comparable
bronze or stainless steel braid restraining and pressure cover.
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS
Provide flexible duct connectors fabricated in accordance with SMACNA 1403 SMACNA 1966.

2.10 SEISMIC SNUBBERS FOR EQUIPMENT
Factory-fabricated, omni-directional with factory set air gaps between 3 mm minimum and 6 mm maximum.
Load capacity of each snubber at 50 percent neoprene element deflection shall be 0.5g 1.0g minimum.
Provide replaceable neoprene elements 19 mm minimum thickness.
2.11 PIPE GUIDES
Factory-fabricated. Weld steel bar guides to the pipe at a maximum radial spacing of 60 degrees. The outside
diameter around the guide bars shall be smaller than the inside diameter of the guide sleeve in accordance
with standard field construction practice. For pipe temperatures below 16 degrees C, provide metal sleeve,
minimum 16 kg per cubic meter density insulation.
2.12 THRUST RESTRAINTS
Adjustable spring thrust restraints, able to resist the thrust force with at least 25 percent unused capacity. The
operating spring deflection shall be not less than 50 percent of the static deflection of the isolation supporting
the machinery.
2.13 SEISMIC PROTECTION COMPONENTS FOR PIPING AND DUCTWORK
Section 23 03 00.00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 VIBRATION AND NOISE ISOLATION COMPONENTS
Install vibration-and-noise isolation materials and equipment as indicated and in accordance with machinery
manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.2 SUSPENSION VIBRATION ISOLATORS
Provide suspension isolation hangers for piping, suspended equipment, and suspended equipment platforms
in mechanical equipment rooms, as indicated and as specified. For operating load static deflections of 6 mm
or less, provide neoprene pads or single deflection neoprene isolators. For operating load static deflections
over 8 to 10 mm, provide double-deflection neoprene element isolators. For operating load static deflections
over 10 mm, provide isolators with spring and neoprene elements in series.
3.1.3 VERTICAL STOPS
For machinery affected by wind pressure or having an operational weight different from installed weight,
provide resilient vertical limit stops which prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Provide vertical
stops for machinery containing liquid, such as water chillers, evaporative coolers, boilers, and cooling towers.
Spring isolated or protected spring isolated machinery must rock and move freely within limits of stops or
seismic restraint devices.
3.1.4 THRUST RESTRAINTS
Where required, provide pairs of thrust restraints, symmetrically installed on both sides of the steady state
line of thrust.
3.1.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND DUCT CONNECTORS
Install flexible connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. When liquid pulsation
dampening is required, flexible connectors with spherical configuration may be used. Provide restraints for
pipe connectors at pumps to prevent connector failure upon pump startup.
3.1.6 SEISMIC SNUBBERS
Provide snubbers as close as possible to each vibration isolator as indicated. After installing and leveling of the
machinery, adjust snubbers in accordance with the snubber manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.7 MACHINERY
Provide vibration isolators, flexible connectors and seismic snubbers in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Machinery with spring isolators or protected spring isolators shall rock or move freely
within limits of stops or seismic snubber restraints.
3.1.7.1 STABILITY
Isolators shall be stable during starting and stopping of machinery without traverse and eccentric movement
of machinery that would damage or adversely affect the machinery or attachments.
3.1.7.2 LATERAL MOTION
The installed vibration isolation system for each piece of floor or ceiling mounted machinery shall have a
maximum lateral motion under machinery start up and shut down conditions of not more than 6 mm.
Restrain motions in excess by approved spring mountings.
3.1.7.3 UNBALANCED MACHINERY
Provide foundation suspension systems specifically designed to resist horizontal forces for machinery with
large unbalanced horizontal forces. Vibration isolator systems shall conform to the machinery manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.7.4 NONROTATING MACHINERY
Mount nonrotating machinery in systems which includes rotating or vibrating machinery on isolators having
the same deflection as the hangers and supports for the pipe connected to.
3.1.7.5 UNITIZED MACHINERY ASSEMBLIES
TABLE 3A
Slab on earth and
0-9 meter
Equipment
(Note) (1) (Note) (1) (Note) (1) (Note) (1) (Note) (1) (Note) (1)
Absorption Refrigeration Machines SV-R 25.40 SV-R 44.45 SV-R 69.85
500 to 750 rpm S-R 44.45 S-R 63.50 S-R 88.90
751 rpm and up S-R 38.10 S-R 63.50 S-R 88.90
500 to 750 rpm SV-R 44.45 SV-R 63.50 SV-R 88.90
Up to 5 1/2 kW S-I 25.40 S-I 25.40 S-I 25.40
Over 5 1/2 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 63.50
Base Mounted Pumps

TABLE 3A
Slab on earth and
0-9 meter
Equipment
Up to 15 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 63.50
15 to 56 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 88.90
Over 56 kW S-I 63.50 S-I 88.90 S-I 88.90
SV with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers when springs are
Cooling Towers and Evaporative supported on beams. Use deflection listed for column supported floors
Condensers with up to 9 meters column spacing when springs are located on columns
or bearing walls.
Suspended Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW H 25.40 H 25.40 H 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm H 44.45 H 44.45 H 44.45
Over 401 rpm H 25.40 H 38.10 H 63.50
Floor Mounted Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW S 25.40 S 25.40 S 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm S-R 44.45 S-R 44.45 S-R 63.50
Over 401 rpm S-R 25.40 S-R 38.10 S-R 63.50
Centrifugal Blowers
175 - 224 rpm S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65
225 - 299 rpm S-B 95.25 S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65
300 - 374 rpm S-B 69.85 S-B 114.30 S-B 120.65
375 - 499 rpm S-B 63.50 S-B 88.90 S-B 114.30
Over 500 rpm S-B 44.45 S-B 63.50 S-B 88.90
Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans (Note) (2)
Floor
S-B with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers
Mounted Arrangements 1 & 9
Suspended H with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers but not to exceed
69.85 mm
S-R with deflections not specified for centrifugal blowers but not to exceed
Floor-Mounted
69.85 mm
High Pressure Fans (Over 1494 Pa
Static Pressure) and Other
HR recommended for minimizing undesirable thrust effects
Machineries Producing Thrust
(Note (2))
750 rpm and over S 38.10 S 63.50 S 88.90
Up to 454 kg NM 8.89 NM 8.89 NM 88.90
Over 454 kg SV 25.40 SV 25.40 SV 25.40
NOTES:

TABLE 3A
Slab on earth and
0-9 meter
Equipment
following :)
devices.
NP - Neoprene pads.
SX - Freestanding spring isolators with adjustable cushioned vertical stops and cushioned horizontal stops (floor-
mounted equipment. Protected spring isolators SX may be substituted wherever S or SV is specified and shall
meet all requirements.
(2) Fans
c. Provide inertia bases for all fans in lieu of structural steel bases or rails specified above when the fan pressure
exceeds 996 Pa.
machinery such as high-pressure fan. Both types H and HR normally provide reaction in tension, while types
S, SV, and SX normally provide reaction in compression. Thrust restraints are low-cost and effective
components available from manufacturers.
Use thrust restraints to eliminate the need for or reduce the magnitude of inertia mass when the mass is only
used to reduce the displacement effects of the thrust.
Unitized assemblies such as chillers with evaporator and condenser, and top mounted centrifugal compressor
or unitized absorption refrigeration machines, structurally designed with end supports, may be mounted on
steel rails and springs in lieu of steel bases and springs. Where the slab or deck is less than 100 mm thick,
provide spring isolation units with the deflection double that of the vibration isolation schedule, up to a
maximum static deflection of 127 mm.

3.1.7.6 ROOF AND UPPER FLOOR MOUNTED MACHINERY
TABLE 3A
Slab on earth and
0-9 meter
Equipment Type MSD Type MSD Type MSD
Absorption
SV-R 25.40 SV-R 44.45 SV-R 69.85
Refrigeration Machines
500 to 750 rpm S-R 44.45 S-R 63.50 S-R 88.90
751 rpm and up S-R 38.10 S-R 63.50 S-R 88.90
500 to 750 rpm SV-R 44.45 SV-R 63.50 SV-R 88.90
Up to 5 1/2 kW S-I 25.40 S-I 25.40 S-I 25.40
Over 5 1/2 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 63.50
Base Mounted Pumps
Up to 15 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 63.50
15 to 56 kW S-I 38.10 S-I 63.50 S-I 88.90
Over 56 kW S-I 63.50 S-I 88.90 S-I 88.90
Cooling Towers and Evaporative Condensers SV with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers when
springs are supported on beams. Use deflection listed for
column supported floors with up to 9 meters column spacing
when springs are located on columns or bearing walls.
Suspended Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW H 25.40 H 25.40 H 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm H 44.45 H 44.45 H 44.45
Over 401 rpm H 25.40 H 38.10 H 63.50
Floor Mounted Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW S 25.40 S 25.40 S 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm S-R 44.45 S-R 44.45 S-R 63.50
Over 401 rpm S-R 25.40 S-R 38.10 S-R 63.50
Centrifugal Blowers
175 - 224 rpm S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65
225 - 299 rpm S-B 95.25 S-B 120.65 S-B 120.65
300 - 374 rpm S-B 69.85 S-B 114.30 S-B 120.65
375 - 499 rpm S-B 63.50 S-B 88.90 S-B 114.30
Over 500 rpm S-B 44.45 S-B 63.50 S-B 88.90

TABLE 3A
Slab on earth and
0-9 meter
Equipment Type MSD Type MSD Type MSD
Floor Mounted Arrangements 1 & 9 S-B with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers
Suspended H with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers but not
to exceed 69.85 mm
Floor-Mounted S-R with deflections not specified for centrifugal blowers but
not to exceed 69.85 mm
High Pressure Fans (Over 1494 Pa Static HR recommended for minimizing undesirable thrust effects
Pressure) and Other Machineries Producing
Thrust (Note (2))
750 rpm and over S 38.10 S 63.50 S 88.90
Up to 454 kg NM 8.89 NM 8.89 NM 88.90
Over 454 kg SV 25.40 SV 25.40 SV 25.40
NOTES:
following:)
devices.
NP - Neoprene pads.
SX - Freestanding spring isolators with adjustable cushioned vertical stops and cushioned horizontal stops (floor-
mounted equipment. Protected spring isolators SX may be substituted wherever S or SV is specified and shall
meet all requirements.
(2) Fans
c. Provide inertia bases for all fans in lieu of structural steel bases or rails specified above when the fan pressure
exceeds 996 Pa.
machinery such as high-pressure fan. Both types H and HR normally provide reaction in tension, while types
S, SV, and SX normally provide reaction in compression. Thrust restraints are low-cost and effective
components available from manufacturers. Use thrust restraints to eliminate the need for or reduce the
magnitude of inertia mass when the mass is only used to reduce the displacement effects of the thrust.

TABLE 1B
Equipment Type (Note) (1) MSD
Absorption NP 6.35
Refrigeration Machines NM 8.89
NP 6.35
Hermetic Type
NM 8.89
Open Type NM-I 8.89
500 to 750 rpm S 25.40
751 rpm and up S 25.40
500 to 750 rpm SV 25.40
751 rpm and up SV 25.40
NP 6.35
Packaged Boilers
NM 8.89
Pumps
Closed Coupled NP 6.35
Up to 5 1/2 kW NM 8.89
Over 5 1/2 kW S-I 25.40
Base Mounted
Up to 15 kW S-I 25.40
15 to 56 kW S-I 25.40
Over 56 kW S-I 25.40
Cooling Towers and Evaporative NP 6.35
Condensers NM 8.89
Suspended Units
Up to 3 3/4 kW H 25.40
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm H 44.45
Over 401 rpm H 25.40
Floor Mounted Units
NP 6.35
Up to 3 3/4 kW
NM 8.89
Over 3 3/4 kW
Up to 400 rpm NM 8.89
Over 401 rpm NM 8.89
Centrifugal Blowers
175 - 224 rpm NM-B 8.89
225 - 299 rpm NM-B 8.89
300 - 374 rpm NM-B 8.89
375 - 499 rpm NM-B 8.89
Over 500 rpm NM-B 8.89
Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans (Note) (2)
Suspended H with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers
Floor Mounted Arrangements 1 & 9 NM 8.89

TABLE 1B
Equipment Type (Note) (1) MSD
Utility Fans (Note) (2)
Suspended and centrifugal H with deflections specified for
Floor-Mounted NM 8.89
High Pressure Fans (Over 1494 Pa Static Pressure) and Other Machineries HR recommended for minimizing
Producing Thrust (Note) (2) undesirable thrust effects
750 rpm and over S 25.40
NP 6.35
Up to 454 kg
NM 8.89
Over 454 kg SV 25.40
NOTES: Note (1) and Note (2) are same as for TABLE 3A.
On the roof or upper floors, mount machinery on isolators with vertical stops. Rest isolators on beams or
structures designed and installed in accordance with the SMACNA 1793, Plate 61.
3.1.8 PIPING AND HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
Provide vibration isolation for piping and high pressure ductwork with over 1494 Pa water column. The
isolator deflections shall be equal to or greater than the static deflection of the vibration isolators provided
for the connected machinery as follows:
3.1.8.1 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
For a distance of 15 meters from fans, exhausters and blowers.
3.1.8.2 PIPING CONNECTED TO VIBRATION ISOLATED MACHINERY
For a distance of 15 meters or 50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater.
3.1.8.3 STEAM PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
Connected piping for a distance of 15 meters or 50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater.
3.1.8.4 CONDENSER WATER
For the full length of the piping.
3.1.8.5 CHILLED, HOT, AND DUAL TEMPERATURE PIPING
For risers from pumps and for the first 6 meters of the branch connection of the main supply and return
piping at each floor.
3.1.9 WATER AND STEAM DISTRIBUTION PIPING APPLICATION
Resiliently support piping with combination spring and neoprene isolation hangers. Provide spring elements
with 16 mm static deflection; install the hanger with spacing so that the first harmonic natural frequency is
not less than 360 Hz. Provide double-deflection neoprene elements. For the first two isolation hangers from

the rotating equipment of 90 mm and smaller piping systems, ensure a deflection equal to the equipment-
isolation static deflection. For the first four piping isolation hanger supports from rotating equipment of 100
mm and larger piping systems, use resilient hanger-rod isolators at a fixed elevation regardless of load
changes. Incorporate an adjustable preloading device to transfer the load to the spring element within the
hanger mounting after the piping system has been filled with water.
3.1.10 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
3.1.10.1 PIPE HANGERS
Provide eye-bolts or swivel joints for pipe hangers to permit pipe thermal or mechanical movement without
angular misalignment of hanger vibration isolator.
3.1.10.2 HIGH TEMPERATURES
Where neoprene elements of vibration isolator may be subjected to high pipe temperatures, above 71
degrees C, provide metal heat shields or thermal isolators.
3.1.10.3 VALVES
Provide vibration isolation hangers and supports at modulating, pressure reducing, or control valves which
will induce fluid pulsations. When required or indicated, isolate valves with flexible connectors.
3.1.10.4 MACHINERY WITHOUT FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
When piping is not connected to vibrating machinery with flexible connectors, provide the first four hangers
with isolation elements designed for deflections equal to equipment vibration isolator deflections (including
static, operating, and start-up).

3.1.10.5 300 MILLIMETERS AND LARGER PIPE
Suspend 300 mm and larger pipe vibration hangers from resilient hanger rod isolators. Resilient hanger rod
isolators shall be capable of supporting pipe during installation at a fixed elevation regardless of load
changes. Provide an adjustable preloading device to transfer the load to isolation element after operational
load is applied. Provide 300 mm and larger pipe supports with unrestrained stable springs for 25 mm
deflection and with built-in leveling device and resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring elongation when
partial load is removed. Provide isolators capable of providing rigid anchoring during erection of piping so
that it can be erected at a fixed elevation.
3.1.10.6 PIPE RISERS
Provide pipe riser supports with bearing plates and two layers of 6 mm thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad
loaded to not more than 345 kPa. Separate isolation pads with 6 mm steel plate. Weld pipe riser clamps at
anchor points to the pipe and to pairs of vertical acoustical pipe anchor mountings which shall be rigidly
fastened to the steel framing.
3.1.10.7 SUPPORTS AT BASE OF PIPE RISERS
Piping isolation supports at the base of risers shall be two layers of 13 mm thick heavy-duty neoprene pad
separated by 6 mm thick steel plate. Use bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of not more than 3447
kPa. Weld the stanchion between the pipe and isolation support to the pipe and weld or bolt to the isolation
support. Bolt isolation support to the floor slab with resilient sleeves and washers. Where supplementary
steel is required to support piping, provide a maximum deflection of 2 mm at the mid-span of this steel under
the load. Rigidly support piping from the supplementary steel with the supplementary steel isolated from
the building structure with isolators.
3.1.10.8 PIPE ANCHORS
Attach each end of the pipe anchor to an omni-directional pipe isolator which in turn shall be rigidly fastened
to the steel framing or structural concrete. Provide a telescoping pipe isolator of two sizes of steel tubing
separated by a minimum 13 mm thick pad of heavy-duty neoprene or heavy-duty neoprene and canvas.
Provide vertical restraints by similar material to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The load on the
isolation material shall not exceed 3447 kPa.
3.1.11 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Provide ductwork with vibration isolation hangers and supports where required or indicated. Connect
ductwork to equipment with flexible duct connectors. Segment ductwork with flexible duct connectors.

3.1.11.1 DUCT RISERS
Provide duct riser supports within shafts with suitable bearing plates and two layers of 6 mm thick ribbed or
waffled neoprene pad loaded to not more than 345 kPa. Separate isolation pads with 6 mm steel plate.
3.1.11.2 Supports at Base of Duct Risers
For duct isolation supports at the base of risers, provide two layers of 13 mm thick heavy-duty neoprene pad
separated by 6 mm thick steel plate. Use bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of not more than 3447
kPa. Weld the stanchion between the duct and isolation support to the pipe, and weld or bolt to the
isolation support. Bolt isolation support to the floor slab with resilient sleeves and washers. Where
supplementary steel is required to support ducts, provide a maximum deflection of 6 mm at the midspan of
this steel under the supported load. Rigidly support duct from the supplementary steel and the
supplementary steel isolators.
3.1.11.3 DUCT ANCHORS
Attach each end of the duct anchor to an omni-directional isolator which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to
the steel framing or structural concrete as indicated. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material
arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The load on the isolation material shall not exceed
3447 kPa.
3.1.12 EQUIPMENT ROOM SOUND ISOLATION
Do not allow direct contact between pipe or ducts and walls, floor slabs, roofs, ceilings or partitions of
equipment rooms.
3.1.12.1 PIPE PENETRATIONS
Provide galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeves and tightly pack annular space between sleeves and pipe with
insulation having a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more than 50
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, maximum effective temperature 538 degrees C, bulk density 96
kg/cu. meter minimum. Provide uninsulated pipe with a 25 mm thick mineral fiber sleeve the full length of
the penetration and seal each end with an interior or exterior and weather resistant non-hardening
compound. Provide sealant and mineral-fiber sleeve of a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke
developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3.1.12.2 DUCT PENETRATIONS
Pack openings around ducts with mineral fiber insulation the full length of the penetration having a flame
spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84. At each end of duct opening provide sealing collars and seal with an interior or exterior and
weather resistant non-hardening compound.

3.1.12.3 DUCTS PASSING THROUGH EQUIPMENT ROOMS
Provide with sound insulation equal to the sound attenuation value of the wall, floor, or ceiling penetrated.
3.1.13 MACHINERY FOUNDATIONS AND SUBBASES
Provide cast in place anchor bolts as recommended by the machinery manufacturer.
3.1.13.1 MACHINERY SUBBASES
Provide concrete subbases at least 102 mm high for floor mounted equipment except elevators . Rest
subbases on structural floor and reinforce with steel rods interconnected with floor reinforcing bars by tie
bars hooked at both ends. Provide at least 50 mm clearance between subbases and inertia bases, steel
bases, and steel saddles with machinery in operation.
3.1.13.2 COMMON MACHINERY FOUNDATIONS
Mount electrical motors on the same foundations as driven machinery. Support piping connections, strainers,
valves, and risers on the same foundation as the pumps.
3.1.13.3 FOUNDATION AND SUBBASE CONCRETE
Cast concrete foundations and subbases of ASTM C94/C94M 20 MPa concrete reinforced with steel bars as
indicated or recommended by machinery manufacturer.
3.1.13.4 ANCHOR BOLTS AND GROUT
Secure machinery to foundations and inertia bases with anchor bolts. Grout equipment with baseplates, the
full area under baseplates with premixed non-shrinking grout. After grout has set, remove wedges, shims,
and jack bolts and fill spaces with grout.
3.1.14 INERTIA BASES
Install inertia bases in accordance with the recommendations of the machinery manufacturer or inertia base
manufacturer, as applicable.
3.1.15 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR PIPING AND DUCTWORK
Provide seismic restraints in accordance with SMACNA 1981.
3.1.16 SUSPENDED MACHINERY PLATFORMS
Provide with vibration-isolation hangers.

3.1.17 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Provide flexible conduit or multiple conductor cable connections for machinery with sufficient extra length to
permit 50 mm minimum displacement in any direction without damage.
3.1.18 SYSTEMS NOT TO BE VIBRATION ISOLATED
Do not provide vibration isolation for electrical raceways and conduits or for fire protection, storm, sanitary,
and domestic water piping systems which do not include pumps or other vibrating, rotating, or pulsating
equipment including control and pressure reducing valves.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Provide equipment and apparatus required for performing inspections and tests. Notify Contracting Officer
14 days prior to machinery sound vibration seismic testing. Rebalance, adjust, or replace machinery
with noise or vibration levels in excess of those given in the machinery specifications, or machinery
manufacturer's data.
3.2.1 FIELD INSPECTIONS
Prior to initial operation, inspect the vibration isolators and seismic snubbers for conformance to drawings,
specifications, and manufacturer's data and instructions. Check for vibration and noise transmission through
connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Check connector alignment before and after filling of
system and during operation. Correct misalignment without damage to connector and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2.2 SPRING ISOLATOR INSPECTION
After installation of spring isolators or protected spring isolators, and seismic restraint devices, the machinery
shall rock freely on its spring isolators within limits of stops or seismic restraint devices. Eliminate or correct
interferences.
3.2.3 TESTS
Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.
3.2.3.1 EQUIPMENT VIBRATION TESTS
Perform vibration tests to determine conformance with vibration isolation schedule specified indicated.

3.2.3.2 EQUIPMENT SOUND LEVEL TESTS
Measure continuous or intermittent steady state noise with a sound level meter set for low response.
Measure impact or impulse noise as dB peak sound pressure level (20 uPa) with an impact noise analyzer.
Measure work distance from person to machinery noise center. Perform sound level tests to determine
conformance with sound level schedule specified indicated.
a. Interior Machinery Sound
In accordance with AHRI 575, measure the sound data for air conditioning and refrigeration machinery, such
as fans, boilers, valves, engines, turbines, or transformers. Measure the sound pressure levels around
mechanical and electrical machinery located in equipment spaces, one meter horizontally from the edge
closest to the acoustical center of the machinery at points one meter and 1.68 meter above floor. Take
measurements at the center of each side of the machinery. Locate the microphone at least one meter from
the observer and measuring instruments. Observer shall not be between the machinery and the measuring
instrument.
b. Exterior Machinery Sound
Measure sound data in accordance with ANSI/AHRI 370 for machinery radiating noise outside the building
in such applications as grade installations, area-ways, wall and roof installations for cooling towers,
refrigerant condensers, engine driven generator sets, fans, air conditioning machinery, heat pumps,
evaporative coolers, exhaust silencers, and air intakes.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 22 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 22.

B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned. The complete list of equipment and
systems to be commissioned are specified in Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING
REQUIREMENTS. The commissioning process, which the Contractor is responsible to execute, is defined
in Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS. A Commissioning Agent (CxA)
appointed by the Department of Veterans Affairs will manage the commissioning process.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.
C. Section 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning plumbing systems, subsystems and equipment.
This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 01 91 00 General Commissioning
Requirements.
B. Refer to Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for more specifics regarding

processes and procedures as well as roles and responsibilities for all Commissioning Team members.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for definitions.
1.5 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS
A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in Division 22 is part of the construction process.

Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the VA’s Operation and Maintenance
personnel in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 91 00 and of Division 22, is required in
cooperation with the VA and the Commissioning Agent.
B. The Plumbing systems commissioning will include the systems listed in Section 01 19 00 General
Commissioning Requirements:
Mechanical Specification 22 08 00 - 1 Commissioning of Plumbing System

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals. The Commissioning Agent will
provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be reviewed
and approved by the VA prior to forwarding to the Contractor. Refer to Section 01 33 23 SHOP
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES for further details.
B. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review. Specific
submittal requirements related to the commissioning process are specified in Section 01 91 00 GENERAL
COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTIONS
A. Commissioning of the Building Plumbing Systems will require inspection of individual elements of the
Plumbing construction throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall coordinate with the
Commissioning Agent in accordance with Section 01 91 00 and the Commissioning Plan to schedule
inspections as required to support the commissioning process.
3.2 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS
A. The Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to verify systems, subsystems, and equipment
installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Performance Testing. The
Commissioning Agent will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists to be used to document equipment
installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be submitted to
the VA and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot check a sample
of completed checklists. If the Commissioning Agent determines that the information provided on the
checklist is not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor
for correction and resubmission. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of
completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will select a
broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant
number of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of
equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. Refer to SECTION 01 91
00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for submittal requirements for Pre-Functional Checklists,
Equipment Startup Reports, and other commissioning documents.
3.3 CONTRACTORS TESTS
A. Contractor tests as required by other sections of Division 22 shall be scheduled and documented in
accordance with Section 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. . All testing shall be incorporated into the
project schedule. Contractor shall provide no less than 7 calendar days’ notice of testing. The
Commissioning Agent will witness selected Contractor tests at the sole discretion of the Commissioning
Agent. Contractor tests shall be completed prior to scheduling Systems Functional Performance Testing.

3.4 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING:
A. The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test
systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to changes in
operating conditions, and system performance under emergency conditions. The Commissioning Agent
will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for review and approval by the
Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the tests prior to approval. The
Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the test
procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will witness and document the testing. The
Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were performed. See Section 01 91 00 GENERAL
COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS, for additional details.
3.5 TRAINING OF VA PERSONNEL
A. Training of the VA operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Resident
Engineer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide
instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and
troubleshooting of the installed systems. Contractor shall submit training agendas and trainer resumes
in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 19 00. The instruction shall be scheduled in
coordination with the Resident Engineer after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer
to Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS and Division 22 Sections for additional
Contractor training requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description
A. The extent of pump work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section.
Belt-driven pumps are not to be used, unless a direct drive unit cannot meet the design parameters.
B. The types of pumps specified in this section include the following:
1. Base-Mounted, end suction horizontal single stage pumps.
2. Multistage Booster pumps.
C. Refer to appropriate Division - 40 for vibration isolation bases and flexible pipe connectors for pumps.
All materials, design, fabrication, and erection shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of all codes, standards
or regulations having jurisdiction over the work. In the event of conflict between codes, standards or regulations, the
conflict shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. Works will also adhere to the standards listed below or the standards
resulting from their possible amendment:
Mechanical Specifications 22 11 23 - 1 Domestic Water Pumps

prevail
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general-use centrifugal pumps with

characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Compliance: Pump and motor shall comply with the requirements of BS 3829, BS 5257, BS 3456, Section
2.35 or the requirements of HI, AWWA, ASTM A48, A 493 and A 666, ANSI, AISI 316 and 1117, and NEMA.
C. All pumping units shall be designed and built for twenty-four hour continuous service at any and all points
within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, without excessive
vibration or strain and requiring only that degree of maintenance generally accepted as normal for the
specific type of pump required. Pumps not meeting the specified requirements shall be rejected.
1.4 Submittals
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications installation and startup instructions, and
current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. (Total
Dynamic Head, Pump Efficiency, Brake Horse Power expressed in KW, Net Positive Suction Head, Power
Input).

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit drawings and information necessary for final design of foundations, structural supports,
connected piping and valves electrical connections, starting and protective equipment and auxiliary
equipment.
2. Submit for all pumping units, a dimensioned and scaled assembly outline drawing or drawings of the
complete pump, drive and all associated equipment furnished. Such drawing or drawings shall show
plan, elevation and any other view or section requested.
3. For all pumping units a scaled cross-sectional drawing of the assembled pump showing full details and
materials of construction shall be submitted for approval.
a. Certification, Provide Pump Performance for pumps under specified conditions, certified by the
manufacturer.
b. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of pump. Include
this data in operation and maintenance manual.
1.5 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
a. Deliver and store pump products in factory-wrapped packages, which properly protect pumps against
weather, dirt and damage.
b. Handle pumps carefully to avoid damage to motors, components, enclosures and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pumps
General: Provide factory assembled and tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel
prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump are listed in pump schedule. The Contractor shall calculate the
head for all pumps based on his actual layouts as approved shop drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s
approval. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer, where possible. Select pumps to operate at an efficiency of
70% or higher, product shall be comply with Estidama Pearl Rating (1 Pearl).
a. Pumps shall be manufactured and installed in such a way that pump suction is always flooded.
b. Pump system shall have duplex or triplex pumps to provide 100% capacity with one pump out of service.
c. Pumps shall be designed to permit disassembly without piping disconnections.
2.2 Base-Mounted Centrifugal Pumps
a. General: Provide frame-mounted horizontal end suction pumps, where indicated and of characteristics as
scheduled, and complying with BS 5257.
b. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Cast iron complying with the requirements of DD38 "draft for development for cast materials
for use in the pump industry", designed for 16 Bars working pressure, flanged connections to BS 4504,
Class 16, tapings for gage and drain connections to BS 2779. Pump shall be of the back pullout design.
2. Impeller: Bronze to BS 1400 enclosed type, statically and dynamically balanced, key locked to the
shaft.
3. Case Wearing Ring: Bronze to BS 1400.
4. Shaft: Stainless Steel to BS 970, designed for minimum deflection not to exceed 0.05mm at the sealing
face at maximum load.
5. Seal: Mechanical seals with all metal parts to 303 stainless steel, with "Viton" elastomers, Ni-Resist slat
and carbon washer.
6. Bearings: Heavy duty type ball bearing, permanently lubricated, sealed for lift (externally) and
renewable phosphor bronze sleeve bearing internally. Bearing shall be for 200,000 hours average life.
7. Base: Pump and motor shall be flexibly coupled as indicated in the equipment schedule and mounted
on a common heavy base plate of fabricated steel. Pump and motor must be factory aligned.
8. Motor: Motor enclosure shall be of TEFC in all cases and totally enclosed fan cooled for outdoor
installation of voltage, phase, Hertz and speed as indicated. Motor shall have Class F insulation and
regreasable ball bearings. Motors shall be rated for not less than 50°C ambient temperature. Motors
shall also comply with relevant section of electrical specification.

2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMPS
A. General: Provide where indicated in-line Circulating pumps, of capacities as scheduled.
B. Pump Construction:
1. Type: Canned Rotor Type complete with ceramic shaft and Radial Bearing
2. Stainless Steel Rotor can and Bearing plate
3. Body: Electro coated Cast Iron Casing.
4. Impeller: Corrosion Resistant material.
5. Motor: The motor is a 2- or 4-pole, asynchronous, squirrel-cage motor in conformity with the EMC
directive. Insulation class: F.
2.4 Packaged Variable Speed Booster Pumpset
The booster pumpset shall be completely automatic, factory assembled skid mounted unit.
The pump set shall maintain constant delivery pressure by means of a frequency converter to control speed of
pumps. This shall be accomplished by distributing the demand load to all pumps by a microprocessor controller.
The processor shall be adjusted for friction loss compensation
Pump set shall include the following features:-
1. Centrifugal in-line pumps with high efficiency motors and drives, total number as indicated on schedule
2. Variable frequency invertor driver with set point controller ,digital readout
3. Galvanized steel frame
4. Galvanized steel suction and delivery manifolds with flanged connections
5. Isolating valves and flexible connections on suction and delivery
6. Check valves on delivery
7. Strainer on suction
8. Pressure gauges, pressure switches and pressure relief valves
9. Control panel
The pumps impellers, gaud vanes, shafts and outer sleeves shall be stainless steel.
The pump motor shall be squirrel cage induction type and rated for continuous operation at ambient
temperature not less than 50C.
The motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with insulation class (F) and IP54 protection and rated for
400 volt, 3-phase and 50 cycle.
The control panel shall be constructed of 1.5 mm thickness sheet steel and IP54 protection.
The control panel shall include the following features:-

1. Door interlocked main fuse switch
2. Contactors, overload thermal protection, and timer
3. Transformer 230/400/110
4. Ammeter
5. Hour meter for each pump

6. Push button start/stop for each pump with indicating lamps
7. Selecting switch hand/off/auto

8. Programmer for sequence operation of the pumps due to the demand, and pressure loss in the system.
9. Automatic shutdown device for dry running protection
10. Separate visible alarms and a common audible alarm for:

- Power failure
- Phase failure
- Low water level in the water supply tank

11. Sets of volt-free changeover contacts for remote alarm monitoring.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation Of Pumps
A. General:
1. Install pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions,
with recommended clearance provided for service and maintenance.
2. Ensure that pump units are wired properly, with rotation in correct direction, and that pump and motor
grounding have been provided. Refer to Division 16 for power wiring.
3. The pumps to be checked for correct rotation and meet the specified details regarding performance
duty.
4. Install gate or butterfly valve and strainer on suction side of pump and a pressure gauge piped to read
both suction and discharge. On the discharge side install silent check valve and double regulating valve.
Flexible connections shall be installed on both sides of pump. Inlet piping shall be arranged to prevent
the possibility of cavitation.
B. Base-Mounted Pumps: Unless otherwise indicated, install on minimum of 100 mm high concrete base
equal or greater than 3 times total weight of pump and motor, with anchor bolts poured in place. Set
and level pump, grout under pump base with non-shrink grout.
1. Pump and motor must be checked for alignment after the pump base has been installed and grouted
in place. There shall be no strain transmitted to the pump. The concrete support shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer and detailed on drawings. Provide cast supports in the lower half
for securely bolting the pump body to the base plate. Suitable lifting lugs shall be provided to lift each
part individually. Suitable instruments drain and vent connections, and other accessories shall be
provided.
2. Anchor Bolts - Pump Bolts: Anchor bolts and nuts shall be steel and shall be furnished by pump
manufacturer. Acceptable special washer and nuts to be furnished on the lower ends of the bolts unless
pockets provided for access to the nuts. Expansion bolts shall not be used for anchoring pumping
equipment.
3. Pump Connections: Pumps shall be provided with flanged inlets and outlets that are compatible with
the pipeline to which it is connected.
4. Suction and Discharge Elbows: Provide each pump with a suction elbow enclosed by the base or
foundation. A reducing elbow shall be provided where suction pipe is larger than the suction flange.
The suction and discharge connections shall be of the same pressure ratings as the adjoining pipes and
fittings and shall be of such sizes that the velocity of each opening shall not exceed 3.6 m/sec.
C. In-line Pumps: Support from piping system, and locate for access to oil cups, service, and maintenance.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Description
A. The extent of pump work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this
section. Belt-driven pumps are not to be used, unless a direct drive unit cannot meet the design
parameters.
B. The types of pumps specified in this section include the following:
1. Sewage Submersible Pumps.

2. N-Line Pumps.
C. Pumps furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of the equipment
assembly in other Division - 23 sections.
D. Refer to appropriate Division - 26 sections for motor starters, disconnects, and wiring of pump motors.
E. Refer to appropriate Division - 23 sections for insulation of pump housing.
F. Refer to appropriate Division - 23 sections for vibration isolation bases and flexible pipe connectors for
pumps.
Mechanical Specifications 22 14 29 - 1 Sump Pumps

prevail

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general-use centrifugal pumps with

characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Compliance: Pump and motor shall comply with the requirements of BS 3829, BS 5257, BS 3456,
Section 2.35 or the requirements of HI, AWWA, ASTM A48, A 493 and A 666, ANSI, AISI 316 and 1117,
,NEMA and Estidama Pearl Rating (1 Pearl).
C. All pumping units shall be designed and built for twenty-four hour continuous service at any and all
points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, without
excessive vibration or strain and requiring only that degree of maintenance generally accepted as
normal for the specific type of pump required. Pumps not meeting the specified requirements shall be
rejected.

1.3 Submittals
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications installation and startup instructions, and
current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. (Total
Dynamic Head, Pump Efficiency, Brake Horse Power expressed in KW, Net Positive Suction Head,
Power Input).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit drawings and information necessary for final design of foundations, structural supports,
connected piping and valves electrical connections, starting and protective equipment and auxiliary
equipment.
2. Submit for all pumping units, a dimensioned and scaled assembly outline drawing or drawings of the
complete pump, drive and all associated equipment furnished. Such drawing or drawings shall show
plan, elevation and any other view or section requested.
3. For all pumping units a scaled cross-sectional drawing of the assembled pump showing full details
and materials of construction shall be submitted for approval.
a. Certification, Provide Pump Performance for pumps under specified conditions, certified by the
manufacturer.
b. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of pump.
Include this data in operation and maintenance manual.
1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Deliver and store pump products in factory-wrapped packages, which properly protect pumps against
weather, dirt and damage.
B. Handle pumps carefully to avoid damage to motors, components, enclosures and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Submersible Pumps
a. Submersible pumps shall be of the open vortex non clog shrouded type. The pump shall have cast iron
body, cast iron motor housing, stainless steel shaft and highly wear resistant cast iron impeller.
b. Pump shall be firmly connected to the discharge connection, guided by not less than two stainless steel
guided bars extending from the top of the station to the discharge connection.
c. Pump motors a squirrel cage non overlading throughout the entire performance induction type, Motors
protection shall be IP 68 at (20m). Stators windings shall be F insulated and rated for 150ºC. Pumps shall
be protected with overload thermistor. Motor shall be suitable for the building electrical supply and
submerged operation. The type of starter for motor shall be star delta.
d. Cables shall be water tight and sealed. Epoxies silicones or other secondary sealing systems shall not be
considered.
e. Each pump shall be provided with an adequately designed cooling system. The cooling system shall
provide for continuous pump operation in liquid up to 40ºC.
f. Each set of pumps consisted of single or multiple vortex impeller pump (submersible type/explosion
proof when handling Sewage) configured as duty/standby. Duty & stand by pumps shall alter in
operation sequentially. Standby pumps shall operate by very high-level switch.
g. All studs, bolts, nuts, screws and washers shall be of stainless steel. Each set of pumps shall be complete
with adjustable level controller, control panel, isolating valve, non-return valve in each discharge line and
lifting handle with guide rails and chain.
h. The control panel shall be complete with the following: -
 Normal housing
 Start/stop buttons
 Individual pump run lights
 Individual pump stop lights
 Individual pump trip lights
 Supply on lights
 Minimum run timers
 Hand auto/On/Off switch
 Volt free "fault" contact
The control panel shall incorporate thermal overload protection with automatic reset provision.
The sump shall be provided with level controls for operation of the pump units as well as at very high and very
low level alarms indication.
The pumps shall have dry run protection
The sump shall be provided with access covers, step cast iron and sump vents.
Local isolators shall be located adjacent to the sump for isolation of units during maintenance.
Pump isolating valves and test points shall be added to each set of pumps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Startup and testing
A. Make tests as recommended by product manufacturer and listed standards and under actual or
simulated operating conditions and prove full compliance with design and specified requirements. Tests
of the various items of equipment shall be performed simultaneously with the system of which each
item is an integral part.
B. The tests shall include system capacity and all control and alarm functions.
C. When any defects are detected, correct defects and repeat test.
D. The commissioning Agent will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate
the startup and contractor testing schedules with the Resident Engineer and Commissioning Agent.
Provide a minimum of 7 days prior to notice.
3.2 Commissioning
A. Provide commissioning documentation accordance with the requirements of Section 22 08 00,

COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS for all inspection, startup, and contractor testing required
above and required by the System Readiness Checklist provided by the Commissioning Agent.
B. Components provided under this section of the specification will be tested as part of a larger system.
Refer to Section 22 08 00, COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS and related sections for contractor
responsibilities for system commissioning.
3.3 Demonstration and training
A. Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct Employer
Personnel in operation and maintenance of units.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 22 51 00
SWIMMING POOLS & FOUNTAINS SPECIFICATIONS
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1 Description
Swimming pool equipment furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, are part of the equipment assembly in
other relevant sections.
1.2 References
I. CPVC Pipes for cold & hot water systems.
II. ASME SEC 8D - Pressure Vessels.
III. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
IV. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
V. ANSI B36.10 & B36.19 SCHD-40 - Seamless Black Steel Pipe work for all heating pipe work.
VI. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 or DIN 8062 pressure
-16 bar.
VII. ASTM D2467 - Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 or DIN 8062
pressure 16 bars.
VIII. ADSSC. Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company

IX. ADDC Abu Dhabi distribution company
X. Department of Municipal Affairs (DMA)
XI. Urban Planning Council (UPC)
XII. Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA)
XIII. Uniform Plumbing Code of Abu Dhabi Emirate
XIV. UAE Guide to Water Supply Regulations 2017 (RSB)
XV. Local Codes, standards and Specifications.
XVI. Water Authority Regulations
XVII. Estidama PW-R2 Water monitoring & Leak detection
XVIII. Estidama Pearl Rating (1 Pearl)
XIX. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
XX. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
XXI. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
XXII. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
XXIII. NSF 50 - Circulation System Components for Swimming Pools, Spas, or Hot Tubs.
Mechanical Specifications 22 51 00-1 Swimming Pools & Fountains Specifications

XXIV. UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters.
XXV. UL 1081 - Swimming Pool Pumps, Filters, and Chlorinators.
XXVI. UL 1261 - Electric Water Heaters for Pools and Tubs.
XXVII. UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.
In case of any contradictions among the above codes and standards. The local codes and standards shall
supersede and prevail
1.3 Project Record Documents
A. Submit as in general contract conditions.

B. Record actual locations of all equipment controlling devices and under floor piping.
1.4 Operation and Maintenance Data
I. Submit as per general conditions of the contract.
II. Operation Data: Include installation instructions, lubrication instructions, and assembly views.
III. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers and
availability, service depot location and telephone number.
A. Perform work in accordance with local health department regulations.

B. Work and components shall conform to NSF 50.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 Qualifications
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with
minimum ten years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years
documented experience in similar projects with similar facilities.
1.7 Regulatory Requirements
A. Conform to applicable code for installation of swimming pool systems.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

installation.
1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Delivery, store, protect and handle products to site.
B. Accept equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect equipment from damage and elements by maintain shipping packaging in place until
installation. Maintain temporary inlet and outlet caps in place until installation.

1.9 Warranty
I. Provide three years warranty for all swimming pool & Fountains equipment and fittings.
II. Warranty: Include coverage of water storage tanks circulating pumps, water treatment
systems.
1.10 Maintenance Service
As per the general conditions of the contract,
1.11 Maintenance Materials
I. Provide one test kit for manually testing.
1. Chlorine Residual.
2. PH Level.
3. Total Alkalinity.
4. Redox
5. Temperature
1.12 Extra Materials
I. Provide one each of water treatment systems test and measuring probes, indicator bulbs, and
surge fuses.
II. Provide spare parts for ideal running of all equipment including pumps, filters, and motors as
recommended by manufacturers.
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES and FITTINGS
A. CPVC Pipe work

Pipes: DIN8062 PN 20 for all domestic water pipe work.
B. UPVC Pipe works :
1. Pipes to ASTM D1785, Schedule 80 or DIN 8062 and DIN 8063 pressure 16 bars. .
C. Fittings:
1. UPVC to ASTM D2467 or to.
DIN 8062 and DIN 8063 pressure 16 bars for sizes up to 160mm
DIN8063 and DIN8062 pressure 10 bars for sizes above 160mm.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.

3. Unions for Pipe Sizes 2 inch (50 mm) and Under: UPVC for plastic piping.
4. Flanges for Pipe Sizes over 2 inches (50 mm): UPVC for plastic piping.

D. Ball Valves: 2 1/2 inch (50 mm) and Under UPVC plastic body and ball, double lever
handle, double union, Piston seals, Teflon seats.
E. Butterfly Valves: over 2 inch (50 mm): Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat
for service to 82 degrees C wafer style, 10 position lever handle.
2.2 Centrifugal Pumps
A. Performance:
1. (Refer to schedule of equipment).
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, high efficiency, low noise, direct connected, with motor, oil
lubricated, with casing, integral hair and lint strainer, renewable wear ring, impeller, mechanical
seal.
B. Casing: Glass reinforced plastic resin, self-primary, double volute rated for 860 KPA working
pressure, with pipe flanges.
C. Impeller: Fiberglass filled plastic resin, closed with casing wearing.
D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and stainless steel sleeve.
E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
F. Strainer: Hair and lint basket built into casing with 12:1 ratio of free area to pipe inlet area,
removable cover.
G. Motor: The pump motor shall be of squirrel cage induction type rated for continuous operation
at ambient temperature not less than 55C. The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type
with insulation class F and IP54 protection. Motor shall have heavy duty grease lubricated ball
bearings, completely adequate for the maximum load for which the motor is designed. The motor
shall be OF 1450 RPM and rated for 400 volt, 3 phase and 50 cycle
2.3 Fittings and Equipment
A. Bottom Drain (BD): stainless steel body, 300 x 300 mm square frame and grate, anti vortex type, 284 sq cm
open area, PVC outlet coupling, 110 mm bottom connections with plugs.
B. Hydrostatic Relief Valve: NSF approved ABS body, spring loaded, and self-cleaning, O ring sealed, non-
corrosive, and nonconductive.
C. Wall and Floor Inlets (AIL): stainless steel , nominal 50 mm diameter, with internal spinner adjustable valve
disc.
D. Skimmers (SK,) NSF approved ABS molded body with 250mm diameter cover wide hinged weir with
automatic level adjustment of 140mm of 140mm thermoplastic strainer with 0.260 Cu. m capacity and 3.3
L/s

E. Skimmers (SK-a ) NSF approved ABS molded body with 250mm diameter cover wide hinged weir with
automatic water level control adjustment, with a diaphragm type float valve with a built in siphon breaker,
central, PVC housing, 32 mm equalizing tubes of 140mm thermoplastic strainer with 0.260 Cu. m capacity
of 3.3 L/s and 25 mm potable water make up let connection and molded ABS plastic desk cap
F. Gutter Drain outlet : approved ABS White plastic, nominal 50 mm diameter with 100x100mm ABS or
stainless steel strainers.
G. Automatic Water Level Controller: NSF approved ABS molded body with 250mm diameter cover, comprising
of a diaphragm type float valve with a built in siphon breaker, central vertical float, PVC housing, 32 mm
equalizing tubes, 25 mm potable water make up inlet connection and molded ABS plastic desk cap. The
water level controller shall maintain a predetermined water level within the 32mm. All parts which are in
contact shall be stainless steel, PVC, or brass.
2.4 SAND FILTERS
A. Performance: Hi Flow Rate of 9 -11.60 L/sec/sq m of filter area with total effective area and filtering
capacity as indicated by schedule of equipment.
B. Assembly: pressure sand-and-gravel type consisting of filter tanks, face piping with butterfly valves, and
gauge panel.
C. Filter Tank: Fabricated from one piece extra thick Polyethylene suitable for working pressure of 4 bars.
Equip with 20 mm automatic air vent and tubing for connection to manual air vent on gauge panel.
D. Influent Distribution System: PVC to DIN 8062 pressure 16 bar pipe consisting of head and laterals with
orifices directed upwards, designed for maximum 2.44 m/s velocity of water in laterals at rated filter
capacity.
E. Under drain System: Schedule PVC to DIN 8062 pressure 16 bar , consisting of header and laterals with
orifices pointed downwards, designed for maximum 3.05 m/s velocity of water in laterals at rated filter
capacity. Space laterals and orifices to ensure uniform water flow through filter bed during filter and
backwash operations.
F. Face Piping: Class PVC to DIN 8062 pressure 16 bar flange-connected to tank. Piping shall be designed for
maximum 3.05 m/s velocity of water at rated filter capacity, incorporating line size butterfly valves.
Provide sight glass at waste connection.
G. Gauge Panel: Mount on tank and provide with 100 mm diameter influent and effluent pressure gauges
connected by tubing to nipples on tank nozzles; with NSF stainless steel name plate.
H. Differential Pressure Sensor: Mount on tank and provide influent and effluent pressure readout Pressure
sensor shall be connected to BMS to indicate filters fouling.
I. Provide Concrete fills in bottom of tank to within 25 mm of underside of effluent header.
J. Filter Support Media: Clean, hard rounded gravel with minimum average specific gravity of 2.5, free from
shale, mica, clay sandstone, loam, and other impurities. Screen to sizes specified with maximum 2 % by
weight of thin, flat, or elongated pieces. Filter support media shall be of four grades of gravel laid in level
layers, each 100 mm deep as follows:
1. Coarse gravel 20 - 38 mm
2. Medium gravel 13 - 20 mm
3. Fine gravel 3 - 6 mm
4. Buckwheat gravel 1.5 - 3 mm

K. Filter Sand: Hard, durable grains of rounded or sub-angular silica sand, free from clay, loam, dirt and
organic matter, maximum 1% by weight flat or micaceous particles, effective size of 0.44 mm and
uniformity coefficient of 1.35. Place upon filter support media in level bed minimum 510 mm deep.
L. Compressed Air Fittings. Provide compressed air fittings complete with pressure gauges and isolation
valves.
2.5 Surge Tank
A. Tank: concrete.
B. Size: AS Shown On Drawings.
C. FLOAT VALVE
PVC flange body with wafer type disc on stainless steel shaft and two stainless steel float rods and
polyethylene floats. Disc shall be 20 percent open with float up and full open with float down.
D. Remote Control Valve: hydraulically operated with flanged connections, and float actuated sensors
(probes), multi-port, two position pilot valve.
E. Level switches: electrode type with low voltage wiring and conduits, install level switch at :-
1. Lowest level of tank for pump protection against dry running
2. High level switch at the overflow outlet
F. Water level indicator: Girded Plexiglas with brass protector and two isolating valves.
G. Automatic water level controller ABS of 300 mm size with cap, 40mm equalizing line and level switch
controllers for the make-up.
H.
2.6 Regulating Valves:
PVC flange body diaphragm type disc on stainless steel shaft and two stainless steel
2.7 Plate Heat Exchanger (Water - Water)
A. Plates: 316 L Stainless steel corrugated channel plate with high temperature resistant EPDM
The exchanger shall be constructed of stainless steel herringbone pattern corrugated sheets with primary
and secondary fluid ports, packed together with ring gaskets, and plate sealing filled gaskets, mounted on
a frame having end support plate m rack and clamped together by means of long bolts and tube washers
acting on a loose end pressure plate.
End plates shall carry screwed connections for piping up to 65mm size and flanged connections for piping
80mm size and above.
Gasket materials shall be entirely suitable for the fluids to be used.
Plate materials shall be stainless steel to AISI 316L having 2.5% minimum molybdenum contents.

The assembly and frame members shall be set on concrete plinth and located as specified.
Heat exchangers surface area shall be for sufficient duties.
Adequate space shall be maintained for removal of plates for cleaning.

Fluid connections shall be arranged to allow isolation and plate withdrawal by pining one joint on each
pipe line only.
B. Accessories:
1. Wells for temperature regulator sensor and high limit sensor at water outlet.
2. ASME rated pressure and temperature relief valve on water outlet.
3. ASME rated pressure relief valves from tapping on heated water side, set at 820 kPa.
4. ASME rated pressure relief valve on water inlet on downstream side of control valve.
5. Thermometers and pressure gauge tapings in water inlet and outlets.
6. Vacuum breaker and pressure gauge tapping with pigtail siphon in shell.
2.8 Swimming Pools & Fountains Water Treatment
Swimming Pool Controller/ Monitor:
The swimming pool controller/monitor shall incorporate a microprocessor with factory presetting for PH, chlorine
and with self tuning adjusting feature.
The controller/monitor shall control and monitor all dosing station sets of acid and chlorine via separate sets of
sensors, each set comprise of PH, chlorine and Redox sensors.
The swimming pool controller/monitor shall be flat wall and panel housing includes monitoring and control
instrumentation for PH, Chlorine concentration in “ppm”, Redox in “mV” and Temperature in “Deg. C”. The
controller shall comply with DN 19643.
The monitor/ controller should have the following features:
 Color display: Large color display

 Integrated screen recorder
 LAN interface: Simple to connect to a PC or PC network
 Intelligent control with dosing time limiting: Processes comprehensive feed forward controls and
reliably prevents overdosing
 Intelligent sensors: with CAN-open-Bus using binary system, store the sensor data and are always within
the optimum measurement range thanks to AUTO Ranging
 In connection with metering pumps with CAN open Bus (BETA 4 ) using binary system provide
information about operating parameters such as: chemical levels and feed rate as well feed quantity
display, determines the amount of chemicals used
 Calibration/maintenance timer: prevent forgetting calibration or maintenance
 Bound chlorine: is reliably minimized by control output and corresponding systems
 OPC server: simple connection to super ordinate visualization systems
 Alarm: via SMS or email over facility LAN
 Multi Media Card : simple to transfer measurement data's to PC
 Eco - Mode : saves energy by reducing circulation rate

Probes and probes housing shall include the following
a. PH SENSOR: gel-filled, non-refillable electrode with glass shaft ceramic diaphragm.

Measurement range PH 1 - 12, The sensor should be pressure type PHEP for 6 bar
operating,
b. TOTAL CHLORINE SENSOR: Sensor shall have built in 4 - 20 mA transducer to read total
available chlorine. Sensor shall be membrane covered (no open cell) and insensible to
water flow 30 - 60 l/h and other water contents. The chlorine sensor should not require
zero calibration. Also, the chlorine sensor must have internal temperature compensation
with built in 4 – 20 mA transducer,
c. REDOX SENSOR: gel-filled, non-refillable electrode with platinum pin, with glass shaft and
ceramic diaphragm. The sensor should be pressure type RHEP for 6 bar operating pressure.
d. TEMPERATURE SENSOR: none refillable electrode integrated in a glass shaft Temp. Range 0 -
100 deg. C.
e. Flow-sensor: the measuring flow rate up to 80 l/h (indicating 25 - 80 l/h). Recommended

flow 40 l/h. The flow sensor can be pulled by up to 175 mm out of the flow module.
Switching hysteresis flow monitor approx. 20 %. The enclosure rating is IP 65. The switch in
the flow sensor is a potential free reed switch, change over contact. Reed contact max.
Switching power 3 W, max. Switching voltage 175 V, max. Switching current 0.25 A, max.
Permanent current 1.2 a, max. Constant resistant 150 m.
f. In-line housing based on modular design must be suitable to accept the above PH, Redox,
Chlorine, Temperature and flow sensors.
2.8.1 Motor Driven Chemical Dosing Pumps:
The motor dosing pumps shall be made of high strength metal-lined housing which gives the pump the
stiffness and protect it from mechanical loads and additional plastic housing to protect the pump against
corrosion. Its capacity is adjustable by varying the stroke length (5 mm) in 0.5% steps via a self-locking
adjusting knob.
The pump shall be made of corrosion resistant metal and plastic housing is rated IP65. The pump can be
externally controlled either by contact free signal or analogue signal (e.g. 0/4-20 mA).
The motor driven dosing pumps must be equipped with adequate protection against electrical overload.
The Motor dosing pump must have LCD control panel must have a protection standard of IP 65. The
microprocessor control with optimum combination of variable AC frequency combined with digital stroking
frequency; ensure exact metering even in the lower minimum range due to individual stroke control.
The pump should have Ablaclit LCD indicate the current operating status, LEDs function as operation or fault
indicators and fault indicator or packing relays monitor the pump function.
Liquid ends shall be PVDF which suitable for Sodium Hypochlorite and Acid.
2.8.2 Chemical Tanks and Accessories for Chlorine Dosing:
Chemical tank should be made of transparent U.V. stabilized polyethylene with scale for liters integral
sintered threaded bushes for assembly of metering pumps, and its mounting flange with integral sintered
threaded bushes for two electronic stirrer.

Chemical resistant electronic stirrer specification, chemical tank:

The mixer shall be suitable for the tank capacity and for batching and mixing of liquids of up to max. 500
MPAS viscosity. Intermittent operation via time switch clock.
The motor shall be 1450 rpm, insulation class F, suitable for tropic, stainless steel
1.4571 shafts with PVDF coating, polypropylene (PP) turbine or PVDF.
The motor shall be 0.75 kW fitted with condensers and are operated by a single phase 230 V/50 Hz AC
power supply.
A motor safety switch is to be fitted on site for the motor.
Suction assembly shall comprise of foot/suction valve, suction tube and two-stage level switch. Material of
construction should be of PVC which resist Sodium hypochlorite..
Dosing valves and tubes must be PVC for hypochlorite media.
2.8.3 Chemical Tanks and Accessories for Acid Dosing:
sintered threaded bushes for assembly of metering pumps, tanks each tank shall serve three acid dosing
pumps.
Suction assembly shall comprise of foot/suction valve, suction tube and two-stage level switch. Material of
construction should be of PVC which resists Sodium hypochlorite.
Dosing valves PP and tubes shall be PE for acid media.
2.8.4 Chemical Tanks and Accessories for Aluminum Sulfate Dosing:
sintered threaded bushes for assembly of metering pumps, tanks each tank shall serve (1) one Aluminum
sulfate dosing pump.
Suction assembly shall comprise of foot/suction valve, suction tube and two-stage level switch. Material
of construction should be of PP which resists Aluminum Sulfate.
Dosing valves PP and tubes shall be PE for acid media.
All above chemical dosing systems shall be from the same manufacturer and shall comply with the above
specifications.

Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, not interfere with the use of space and other work.
C. Route piping in an orderly manner, and maintain gradient. Group whenever practical at common
elevations.
D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment. Provide access to valves and fittings.
E. Pipe relief valve outlet and backwash to nearest floor drain.
F. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
G. Pumps.
1. Provide Air Cock And Drain Connection On Horizontal Pump Casings.
2. Provide all trimmings and accessories as described under section 4 and as shown on
drawings.
3. Decrease from line size, with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under
elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 100mm and over.
H. Filter Tanks
1. Provide support for tanks independent of building structural framing members.
2. Clean and flush tank after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made.
END OF SECTION

Division 23 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
23 00 00 Air Supply, Distribution,Ventilation And Exhaust Systems

23 05 41 Noise And Vibration Control
23 05 48.00 40 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 06 00 Piping Accessories
23 08 00.00 10 Commissioning of HVAC System
03 09 13.34 40 Valves
23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System
23 09 33.00 40 Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC
23 25 00 Chemical Treatment of Water for Mechanical System
23 31 13.00 40 METAL DUCTS-1
23 31 14.00 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS
23 37 13.00 40 Diffusers, Registers and Grills
23 73 13.00 40 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units-01
23 81 00 00 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment-1
23 81 43 Pool Heat Pump
Mechanical Specifications Div. 23/Page - 1 Table of Content

DIVISION 23 00 00
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S12.51 (2012) Acoustics Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise

Sources using Sound Pressure Precision Method for Reverberation
Rooms
AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA (ACCA)
ACCA Manual 4 (2001) Installation Techniques for Perimeter Heating and Cooling;
11th Edition
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 201 (2002; R 2011) Fans and Systems
AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic

Performance Rating
AMCA 220 (2005) Test Methods for Air Curtain Units
AMCA 300 (2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans
AMCA 301 (1990; INT 2007) Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from
Laboratory Test Data
AMCA 500-D (2012) Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating
AHRI 260 (2011) Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning
Equipment
AHRI 350 (2008) Sound Rating of Non-Ducted Indoor Air-Conditioning

Equipment
AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 1 2002; Addendum 2 2005; Addendum 3 2011)

Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
Mechanical Specifications 23 00 00 - 1 Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation, And Exhaust Systems

AHRI 430 (2009) Central-Station Air-Handling Units
AHRI 440 (2008) Room Fan-Coils and Unit Ventilators
AHRI 880 I-P (2011) Performance Rating of Air Terminals
AHRI 885 (2008; Addendum 2011) Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space
Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets
AHRI DCAACP (Online) Directory of Certified Applied Air-Conditioning Products
AHRI Guideline D (1996) Application and Installation of Central Station Air-Handling

Units
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
ABMA 11 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
ABMA 9 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2010; Addenda A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N and O; Errata 2011;

INT 1 2012; Errata 2012; Addenda AD, SD, AE and AF 2013)
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems
and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and Safety Classification
of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013) Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-
Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
ASHRAE 62.1 (2010; Errata 2011; INT 3 2012; INT 4 2012; INT 5 2013) Ventilation
for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
ASHRAE 68 (1997) Laboratory Method of Testing to Determine the Sound Power

In a Duct
ASHRAE 70 (2006; R 2011) Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air
Outlets and Inlets
ASHRAE 84 (2013) Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers
ASHRAE 90.1 - SI (2010; Errata 1-2 2011; INT 2-12 2011; Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O,
P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 3-9 2012; INT 13-16 2012;
Errata 10-14 2013; INT 17 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

ASTM A123/A123M (2012) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A924/A924M (2013) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel
Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B152/B152M (2013) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and
Rolled Bar
ASTM B209M (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate (Metric)
ASTM B280 (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service
ASTM B766 (1986; R 2008) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings

of Cadmium
ASTM C1071 (2012) Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation
(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
ASTM C553 (2011) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM C916 (1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal
Insulation
ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to

Corrosive Environments
ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D2466 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D2855 (1996; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented

Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3359 (2009; E 2010; R 2010) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment

ASTM E2016 (2011) Standard Specification for Industrial Woven Wire Cloth
ASTM E84 (2012c) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
ASTM F1040 (1987; R 2007) Standard Specification for Filter Units, Air
Conditioning, Viscous - Impingement and Dry Types, Replaceable
INSTITUTE OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY (IEST)
IEST RP-CC-001 (2009) HEPA and ULPA Filters
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2011) Enclosures
NEMA MG 1 (2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of
Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction
Motors
NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of
Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2011; Errata 2 2012) National Electrical Code
NFPA 701 (2010) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of
Textiles and Films
NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
NFPA 96 (2011) Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of

Commercial Cooking Operations
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS Scientific Certification Systems (SCS)Indoor Advantage
SMACNA 1403 (2008) Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction,
2nd Edition
SMACNA 1819 (2002) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for
HVAC Systems, 5th Edition
SMACNA 1884 (2003) Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards, 7th Edition

SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd
Edition
SMACNA 1972 CD (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual - 2nd Edition
SMACNA 1981 (2008) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems,
3rd Edition
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-STD-101 (1970; Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for Compressed Gas
Cylinders
UFC 4-010-01 (2012) DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
UL ENVIRONMENT (ULE)
ULE Greenguard UL Greenguard Certification Program
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 181 (2005; Reprint Oct 2008) Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
UL 1995 (2011) Heating and Cooling Equipment
UL 555 (2006; Reprint May 2012) Standard for Fire Dampers
UL 555S (1999; Reprint May 2012) Smoke Dampers
UL 586 (2009) Standard for High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units
UL 6 (2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 705 (2004; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for Power Ventilators
UL 723 (2008; Reprint Sep 2010) Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
UL 900 (2004; Reprint Feb 2012) Standard for Air Filter Units
UL 94 (2013) Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for

Parts in Devices and Appliances
UL Bld Mat Dir (2012) Building Materials Directory
UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory

UL Fire Resistance (2012) Fire Resistance Directory


In case of any contradictions among the above codes and standards. The local codes and standards shall supersede
and prevail
Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to provide a complete installation.
Coordinate the work of the different trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and
electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other
components, required to install the work as indicated and specified.
1.2.1 Mechanical Equipment Identification
The number of charts and diagrams shall be equal to or greater than the number of mechanical equipment rooms.
Where more than one chart or diagram per space is required, mount these in edge pivoted, swinging leaf,
extruded aluminum frame holders which open to 170 degrees.
1.2.1.1 Charts
Provide chart listing of equipment by designation numbers and capacities such as flow rates, pressure and
temperature differences, heating and cooling capacities, horsepower, pipe sizes, and voltage and current
characteristics.
1.2.1.2 Diagrams
Submit proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related testing. provide neat mechanical drawings
provided with extruded aluminum frame under 3 mm glass or laminated plastic, system diagrams that show the
layout of equipment, piping, and ductwork, and typed condensed operation manuals explaining preventative
maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely
starting and stopping the system. After approval, post these items where directed.
1.2.2 Service Labeling
Label equipment, including fans, Outdoor Units, terminal units, etc. with labels made of self-sticking, plastic film
designed for permanent installation. Labels shall be in accordance with Drawings and Equipment Schedules and as
shown in Drawings.
Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures. Where pressures could exceed 860 kilopascal,
include the maximum system pressure in the label. Label and arrow piping in accordance with the following:
a. Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.
b. Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.
c. In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point required to clarify service or indicated
hazard.
d. In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight of each other not to exceed 22 meter. All
labels shall be visible and legible from the primary service and operating area.

For Bare or Insulated Pipes
for Outside Diameters of Lettering
13 thru 35 mm 13 mm
40 thru 50 mm 25 mm
65 mm and larger 25 mm
1.2.3 Color Coding
Color coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Metallic Flexible Duct

Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Duct Connectors
Duct Access Doors
Fire Dampers
Manual Balancing Dampers
Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers
Automatic Smoke Dampers
Sound Attenuation Equipment
Acoustical Duct Liner
Diffusers
Registers and Grilles
Louvers
Air Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks
Centrifugal Fans
In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Axial Flow Fans
Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators
Propeller Type Power Roof Ventilators
Air-Curtain Fans
Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Air Handling Units
Room Fan-Coil Units
Coil Induction Units
Constant Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units
Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units
Variable Volume, Single Duct, Fan-Powered Terminal Units

Dual Duct Terminal Units

Ceiling Induction Terminal Units
Reheat Units
Unit Ventilators
Energy Recovery Devices
Test Procedures
Diagrams
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests
Damper Acceptance Test
SD-07 Certificates
Certification
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions

Operation and Maintenance Training
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Fire Dampers
Manual Balancing Dampers
Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers
Automatic Smoke Dampers
Centrifugal Fans
In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Axial Flow Fans
Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators
Propeller Type Power Roof Ventilators
Air-Curtain Fans
Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Air Handling Units
Room Fan-Coil Units
Coil Induction Units
Constant Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units
Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units
Variable Volume, Single Duct, Fan-Powered Terminal Units
Dual Duct Terminal Units
Ceiling Induction Terminal Units
Reheat Units
Unit Ventilators
Energy Recovery Devices

Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based on manufacturer's published data.
a. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the standards of the Underwriters
Laboratories, the label of or listing with reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as sufficient
evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories requirements. In lieu of such label or listing,
submit a written certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately equipped and
competent to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and that the units conform to
the specified requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the specified agencies.
b. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the
standards of the ASTM International (ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other standards, a
manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is acceptable as proof of compliance.
c. Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from compliance with other
requirements of these specifications.
1.4.1 Prevention of Corrosion
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide rust-inhibiting treatment and standard
finish for the equipment enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected to
dissimilar metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as
anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers, and
miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance with ASTM B766
for interior locations. Provide written certification from the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply
with the requirements of this specification. Include illustrations of product markings, and the number of each
type of bolt to be furnished in the certification.
1.4.2 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings showing equipment layout, including assembly and installation details and electrical
connection diagrams; ductwork layout showing the location of all supports and hangers, typical hanger details,
gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and static pressure and seal classifications.
Include any information required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and functions properly as
a unit on the drawings and show equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances required
for operation and maintenance. Submit drawings showing bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts prior to
concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations. Submit
function designation of the equipment and any other requirements specified throughout this Section with the
shop drawings.
1.4.3 Test Procedures
Submit proposed test procedures and test schedules for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests of
systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or
other contaminants. Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide components and equipment that are "standard products" of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of products that are of a similar material, design and workmanship. "Standard products" is defined
as being in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years before bid opening, including applications of
components and equipment under similar circumstances and of similar size, satisfactorily completed by a product
that is sold on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Provide
equipment items that are supported by a service organization. Where applicable, provide equipment that is an
ENERGY STAR Qualified product.
Except for the fabricated duct, plenums and casings specified in paragraphs "Metal Ductwork" and "Plenums and
Casings for Field-Fabricated Units", provide components and equipment that are standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. This requirement applies to all equipment, including diffusers, registers, fire dampers, and
balancing dampers.
a. Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use in similar applications of similar size for at least five years before bid opening.
b. Prior to this five year period, these standard products shall have been sold on the commercial market using
advertisements in manufacturers’ catalogs or brochures. These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures shall
have been copyrighted documents or have been identified with a manufacturer's document number.
c. Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization. Where applicable, provide
equipment that is an ENERGY STAR Qualified product.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION PLATES
In addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide engraved laminated phenolic identification
plates for each piece of mechanical equipment. Identification plates are to designate the function of the
equipment. Submit designation with the shop drawings. Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-
black, engraved to show white letters on black background. Letters shall be upper case. Identification plates 40
mm high and smaller shall be 1.6 mm thick, with engraved lettering 3 mm high; identification plates larger than 40
mm high shall be 3 mm thick, with engraved lettering of suitable height. Identification plates 40 mm high and
larger shall have beveled edges. Install identification plates using a compatible adhesive.
2.4 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts
exposed to personnel contact according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with insulation of a type
specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a potential
fire hazard.
2.5 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of
equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment,
including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide

manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and
control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown. For packaged equipment, include
manufacturer provided controllers with the required monitors and timed restart.
b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors,

including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral size motors shall be
the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a
system, and that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance with NEMA MG 10.
d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified
capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous duty
with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for maximum frequency start-stop operation
and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of accelerating
the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals
during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other
necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the
enclosure.
e. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers are allowed
to accomplish the same function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 7.45 kW or
less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.
2.6 ANCHOR BOLTS
Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the
size and number recommended by the equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates.
Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.
2.7 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE
Anchor equipment in accordance with applicable seismic criteria for the area and as defined in SMACNA 1981
2.8 PAINTING
Paint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's standards unless specified
otherwise. Field retouch only if approved. Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.
2.9 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent
requirements are specified herein.
2.10DUCT SYSTEMS
Refer to section 23 31 13.00 40

2.10.1.1 Metallic Flexible Duct
a. Provide duct that conforms to UL 181 and NFPA 90A with factory-applied insulation, vapor barrier, and end
connections. Provide duct assembly that does not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed.
Provide ducts designed for working pressures of 497 Pa and 373 Pa. Provide flexible round duct length that
does not exceed 1525 mm. Secure connections by applying adhesive for 51 mm over rigid duct, apply
flexible duct 51 mm over rigid duct, apply metal clamp, and provide minimum of three No. 8 sheet metal
screws through clamp and rigid duct.
b. Inner duct core: Provide interlocking spiral or helically corrugated flexible core constructed of zinc-coated
steel, aluminum, or stainless steel; or constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized spring steel wire
helix fused to continuous, fire-retardant, flexible vapor barrier film, inner duct core.
c. Insulation: Provide inner duct core that is insulated with mineral fiber blanket type flexible insulation,
minimum of 25 mm thick. Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard fire
retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.
2.10.1.2 Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Use flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated on the drawings, and is not to exceed
1.5 m. Provide runouts that are preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181.
Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier. Provide not less than 0.60 L glass fabric duct connectors
coated on both sides with neoprene. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with vertical air
inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose.
Provide a die-stamped elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other than the vertical
air inlet type. Insulated flexible connectors are allowed as runouts. Provide insulated material and vapor barrier
that conform to the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Do not
expose the insulation material surface to the air stream.
2.10.1.3 General Service Duct Connectors
Provide a flexible duct connector approximately 150 mm in width where sheet metal connections are made to
fans or where ducts of dissimilar metals are connected. For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material by
stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For rectangular ducts, install the flexible material
locked to metal collars using normal duct construction methods. Provide a composite connector system that
complies with NFPA 701 and is classified as "flame-retardant fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.
2.10.1.4 High Temperature Service Duct Connections
Provide material that is approximately 2.38 mm thick, 1.2 to 1.36 kg per square meter weight, plain weave fibrous
glass cloth with, nickel/chrome wire reinforcement for service in excess of 650 degrees C.
2.10.1.5 Aluminum Ducts
ASTM B209M, alloy 3003-H14 for aluminum sheet and alloy 6061-T6 or equivalent strength for aluminum
connectors and bar stock.
2.10.1.6 Copper Sheets
ASTM B152/B152M, light cold rolled temper.

2.10.1.7 Corrosion Resisting (Stainless) Steel Sheets
ASTM A167
2.10.2 Duct Access Doors
Provide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and plenums where indicated and at all air
flow measuring primaries, automatic dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats, and other apparatus requiring
service and inspection in the duct system. Provide access doors upstream and downstream of air flow measuring
primaries and heating and cooling coils. Provide doors that are a minimum 375 by 450 mm, unless otherwise
shown. Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors as large as practicable. Equip doors
600 by 600 mm or larger with fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct. Use insulated type doors in
insulated ducts.
2.10.3 Fire Dampers
Use 1.5 hour rated fire dampers unless otherwise indicated. Provide fire dampers that conform to the
requirements of NFPA 90A and UL 555. Perform the fire damper test as outlined in NFPA 90A. Provide a pressure
relief door upstream of the fire damper. If the ductwork connected to the fire damper is to be insulated then
provide a factory installed pressure relief damper. Provide automatic operating fire dampers with a dynamic
rating suitable for the maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it is subjected. Provide fire
dampers approved for the specific application, and install according to their listing. Equip fire dampers with a
steel sleeve or adequately sized frame installed in such a manner that disruption of the attached ductwork, if any,
does not impair the operation of the damper. Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attached
on both sides of the wall or floor opening. Construct ductwork in fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly
systems with air ducts that pierce the ceiling of the assemblies in conformance with UL Fire Resistance. Provide
curtain type with damper blades out of the air stream or multi-blade type fire dampers. Install dampers that do
not reduce the duct or the air transfer opening cross-sectional area. Install dampers so that the centerline of the
damper depth or thickness is located in the centerline of the wall, partition or floor slab depth or thickness.
Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the installation details given in SMACNA 1819 and in manufacturer's
instructions for fire dampers. Perform acceptance testing of fire dampers according to paragraph Fire Damper
Acceptance Test and NFPA 90A.
2.10.4 Manual Balancing Dampers
a. Furnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating mechanisms. Use chromium plated operators
(with all exposed edges rounded) in finished portions of the building. Provide manual volume control
dampers that are operated by locking-type quadrant operators.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, provide opposed blade type multileaf dampers with maximum blade width of
300 mm. Provide access doors or panels for all concealed damper operators and locking setscrews. Provide
access doors or panels in hard ceilings, partitions and walls for access to all concealed damper operators and
damper locking setscrews. Coordinate location of doors or panels with other affected contractors.
c. Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters not less than the thickness of the insulation when
the locking-type quadrant operators for dampers are installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, to provide
clearance between the duct surface and the operator. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the
operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.

2.10.4.1 Square or Rectangular Dampers
a. Duct Height 300 mm and Less
(1) Frames
Width Height Galvanized Steel Thickness Length
Maximum 483 mm Maximum 300 mm Minimum 0.91 mm Minimum 75 mm
More than 483 mm Maximum 300 mm Minimum 1.6 mm Minimum 75 mm
(2) Single Leaf Blades
Width Height Galvanized Steel Thickness Length
Maximum 483 mm Maximum 300 mm Minimum 0.91 mm Minimum 75 mm
More than 483 mm Maximum 300 mm Minimum 1.6 mm Minimum 75 mm
(3) Blade Axles: To support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized steel shafts supporting the
blade the entire duct diameter frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket and
hand quadrant.
Width Height Material Square Shaft
Maximum 483 mm Maximum 300 mm Galvanized Steel Minimum 10 mm
More than 483 mm Maximum 300 mm Galvanized Steel Minimum 13 mm
(4) Axle Bearings: Support the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings. Shaft bearings
configuration shall be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.
Width Height Material
Maximum 483 mm Maximum 300 mm solid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic,

or oil-impregnated bronze
More than 483 mm Maximum 300 mm oil-impregnated bronze

(5) Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant: Provide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand
quadrant operators.
Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the locking-type quadrant operators on
dampers installed on ducts to be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 50
mm 2 inches off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator
or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
(6) Finish: Mill Galvanized
b. Duct Height Greater than 300 mm
(1) Provide dampers with multi-leaf opposed-type blades.
(2) Frames: Maximum 1200 mm in height; maximum 1200 mm in width; minimum of 1.6 mm
galvanized steel, minimum of 1.38 mm long.
(3) Blades: Minimum of 1.6 mm galvanized steel; 150 mm nominal width.
(4) Blade Axles: To support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized square steel shafts
supporting the blade the entire duct diameter frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through
standoff bracket and hand quadrant.
(5) Axle Bearings: Support the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings constructed of oil-
impregnated bronze, or solid nylon, or a solid plastic equivalent to nylon. Shaft bearings
configuration shall be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.
(6) Blade Actuator: Minimum 50 mm diameter galvanized steel.
(7) Blade Actuator Linkage: Mill Galvanized steel bar and crank plate with stainless steel pivots.
(8) (7) Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant: Provide dampers with accessible locking-type control
shaft/hand quadrant operators.
Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the locking-type quadrant operators on
dampers installed on ducts to be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 50
mm 2 inches off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator
or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
(9) Finish: Mill Galvanized
2.10.4.2 Round Dampers
a. Frames
Size Galvanized Steel Thickness Length
100 to 500 mm Minimum 0.91 mm Minimum 250 mm

Size Galvanized Steel Thickness Length
b. Blades
Size Galvanized Steel Thickness
100 to 500 mm Minimum 0.91 mm
c. Blade Axles: To support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized steel shafts supporting the
blade the entire duct diameter frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket and
hand quadrant.
Size Shaft Size and Shape

100 to 500 mm Minimum 10 mm square
d. Axle Bearings: Support the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings constructed of oil-
impregnated bronze, or solid nylon, or a solid plastic equivalent to nylon. Shaft bearings configuration
shall be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.
Size Material
100 to 500 mm solid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or oil-impregnated
bronze
550 to 750 mm solid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or oil-impregnated
bronze
775 to 1000 mm oil-impregnated bronze, or stainless steel sleeve bearing
e. Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant:

Provide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand quadrant operators.
Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the locking-type quadrant operators on dampers
installed on ducts to be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 50 mm off the metal
duct surface. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of the
damper manufacturer.
f.Finish: Mill Galvanized

2.10.5 Automatic Balancing Dampers
Provide dampers as specified in paragraph SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES, subparagraph CONTROLS.
2.10.6 Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers
Multiple blade type, 82 degrees C fusible fire damper link; smoke damper assembly to include electric damper
operator. UL 555 as a 1.5 hour rated fire damper; further qualified under UL 555S as a leakage rated damper.
Provide a leakage rating under UL 555S that is no higher than Class II at an elevated temperature Category B ( 121
degrees C for 30 minutes ). Ensure that pressure drop in the damper open position does not exceed 25 Pa with
average duct velocities of 13 m/second.
2.10.7 Automatic Smoke Dampers
UL listed multiple blade type, supplied by smoke damper manufacturer, with electric damper operator as part of
assembly. Qualified under UL 555S with a leakage rating no higher than Class II at an elevated temperature
Category B (121 degrees C for 30 minutes). Ensure that pressure drop in the damper open position does not
exceed 25 Pa with average duct velocities of 13 m/second.
2.10.8 Air Supply and Exhaust Air Dampers
Where outdoor air supply and exhaust air dampers are required they shall have a maximum leakage rate when
tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D as required by ASHRAE 90.1 - SI, including maximum Damper Leakage for:
a. Climate Zones 1,2,6,7,8 the maximum damper leakage at 250 Pa for motorized dampers is 20 L/s per square
m of damper area and non-motorized dampers are not allowed.
b. All other Climate Zones the maximum damper leakage at 250 Pa is 50 L/s per square m and for non-
motorized dampers is 100 L/s per square m of damper area.
Dampers smaller than 600 mm in either direction may have leakage of 200 L/s per square m.
2.10.9 Air Deflectors and Branch Connections
Provide air deflectors at all duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff or extension collars to supply outlets, at duct
branch takeoff connections, and at 90 degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the drawings or
otherwise specified. Conical branch connections or 45 degree entry connections are allowed in lieu of deflectors
for branch connections. Furnish all air deflectors, except those installed in 90 degree elbows, with an approved
means of adjustment. Provide easily accessible means for adjustment inside the duct or from an adjustment with
sturdy lock on the face of the duct. When installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, provide external
adjustments with stand-off mounting brackets, integral with the adjustment device, to provide clearance between
the duct surface and the adjustment device not less than the thickness of the thermal insulation. Provide factory-
fabricated air deflectors consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades designed to provide uniform air
distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence or pressure loss. Provide factory or field
assembled air deflectors. Make adjustment from the face of the diffuser or by position adjustment and lock
external to the duct. Provide stand-off brackets on insulated ducts as described herein. Provide fixed air
deflectors, also called turning vanes, in 90 degree elbows.

2.10.10 Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units
2.10.10.1 Plenum and Casings
Fabricate and erect plenums and casings as shown in SMACNA 1966, as applicable. Construct system casing of not
less than 1.6 mm galvanized sheet steel. Furnish cooling coil drain pans with 25 mm threaded outlet to collect
condensation from the cooling coils. Fabricate drain pans from not lighter than 1.6 mm steel, galvanized after
fabrication or of 1.3 mm corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304, welded and
stiffened. Thermally insulate drain pans exposed to the atmosphere to prevent condensation. Coat insulation with
a flame resistant waterproofing material. Provide separate drain pans for each vertical coil section, and a
separate drain line for each pan. Size pans to ensure capture of entrained moisture on the downstream-air side of
the coil. Seal openings in the casing, such as for piping connections, to prevent air leakage. Size the water seal for
the drain to maintain a pressure of at least 500 Pa greater than the maximum negative pressure in the coil space.
2.10.10.2 Casing
Terminate casings at the curb line and bolt each to the curb using galvanized angle, as indicated in SMACNA 1966.
2.10.10.3 Access Doors
Provide access doors in each section of the casing. Weld doorframes in place, gasket each door with neoprene,
hinge with minimum of two brass hinges, and fasten with a minimum of two brass tension fasteners operable
from inside and outside of the casing. Where possible, make doors 900 by 450 mm and locate them 450 mm
above the floor. Where the space available does not accommodate doors of this size, use doors as large as the
space accommodates. Swing doors so that fan suction or pressure holds doors in closed position, airtight. Provide
a push-button station, located inside the casing, to stop the supply.
2.10.10.4 Factory-Fabricated Insulated Sheet Metal Panels
Factory-fabricated components are allowed for field-assembled units, provided all requirements specified for
field-fabricated plenums and casings are met. Provide panels of modular design, pretested for structural strength,
thermal control, condensation control, and acoustical control. Seal and insulate panel joints. Provide and gasket
access doors to prevent air leakage. Provide panel construction that is not less than one mm galvanized sheet
steel, assembled with fasteners treated against corrosion. Provide standard length panels that deflect not more
than 13 mm under operation. Construct details, including joint sealing, not specifically covered, as indicated in
SMACNA 1966. Construct the plenums and casings to withstand the specified internal pressure of the air systems.
2.10.10.5 Duct Liner
A. General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TIMA Standard AHC-101.
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II, with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 25 mm (1 inch).
2. Density: 32 kg per cubic meter (2 pounds per cubic foot).
3. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to 0.28 or better, at a mean temperature of 24 deg C (75
deg F).
4. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without evidence of continued
progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 411.
5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916.

6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment,
or welding attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when applied as
recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in the duct, and will indefinitely
sustain a 23 kg (50-pound) tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.
i. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting more
than 3 mm (1/8 inch) into the airstream.
ii. Adhesive for Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard
Classification" of duct liner system.
2.10.11 Sound Attenuation Equipment
a. For systems with total pressure above 1 kPa: Provide sound attenuators on the discharge duct of each
fan operating at a total pressure above 1 kPa, and, when indicated, at the intake of each fan system.
Provide sound attenuators elsewhere as indicated. Provide factory fabricated sound attenuators,
tested by an independent laboratory for sound and performance characteristics. Provide a net sound
reduction as indicated. Maximum permissible pressure drop is not to exceed 157 Pa. Construct traps
to be airtight when operating under an internal static pressure of 2.5 kPa. Provide air-side surface
capable of withstanding air velocity of 50 m/s. Certify that the equipment can obtain the sound
reduction values specified after the equipment is installed in the system and coordinated with the
sound information of the system fan to be provided. Provide sound absorbing material conforming to
ASTM C1071, Type I or II. Provide sound absorbing material that meets the fire hazard rating
requirements for insulation specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS. For connection to ductwork, provide a duct transition section. Factory fabricated double-
walled internally insulated spiral lock seam and round duct and fittings designed for high pressure air
system can be provided if complying with requirements specified for factory fabricated sound
attenuators, in lieu of factory fabricated sound attenuators. Construct the double-walled duct and
fittings from an outer metal pressure shell of zinc-coated steel sheet, 25 mm thick acoustical blanket
insulation, and an internal perforated zinc-coated metal liner. Provide a sufficient length of run to
obtain the noise reduction coefficient specified. Certify that the sound reduction value specified can be
obtained within the length of duct run provided. Provide welded or spiral lock seams on the outer
sheet metal of the double-walled duct to prevent water vapor penetration. Provide duct and fittings
with an outer sheet that conforms to the metal thickness of high-pressure spiral and round ducts and
fittings shown in SMACNA 1966. Provide acoustical insulation with a thermal conductivity "k" of not
more than 0.0389 W/m-K at 24 degrees C mean temperature. Provide an internal perforated zinc-
coated metal liner that is not less than 0.7 mm with perforations not larger than 6.35 mm in diameter
providing a net open area not less than 10 percent of the surface.
b. For system with total pressure of 1 kPa and Lower: Use sound attenuators only where indicated.
Provide factory fabricated sound attenuators that are constructed of galvanized steel sheets. Provide
attenuator with outer casing that is not less than 0.85 mm. Provide fibrous glass acoustical fill. Provide
net sound reduction indicated. Obtain values on a test unit not less than 600 by 600 mm outside
dimensions made by a certified nationally recognized independent acoustical laboratory. Provide air
flow capacity as indicated or required. Provide pressure drop through the attenuator that does not
exceed the value indicated, or that is not in excess of 15 percent of the total external static pressure of
the air handling system, whichever is less. Acoustically test attenuators with metal duct inlet and
outlet sections while under the rated air flow conditions. Include with the noise reduction data the
effects of flanking paths and vibration transmission. Construct sound attenuators to be airtight when
operating at the internal static pressure indicated or specified for the duct system, but in no case less
than 500 Pa.

c. For acoustical duct liner: Flexible elastomeric duct liner for lining ductwork and conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C1071, Type I and II. Provide uniform density, graduated density, or dual
density liner composition, as standard with the manufacturer. Provide not less than 25 mm thick
coated lining. Where acoustical duct liner is used, provide the thermal equivalent of the insulation
specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS for liner or
combination of liner and insulation applied to the exterior of the ductwork. Increase duct sizes shown
to compensate for the thickness of the lining used.
2.10.12 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Provide factory-fabricated units of aluminum that distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space
intended without causing noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 0.25 m/s in occupied zone, or dead spots
anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as required for
specified performance. Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound rated and certified inlets and
outlets according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound power level as indicated. Provide diffusers and registers with
volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the manufacturer, an
automatically controlled device is acceptable. Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers and
registers, except linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers with round or elliptical balancing dampers.
Where the inlet and outlet openings are located less than 2m above the floor, protect them by a grille or screen
according to NFPA 90A.
2.10.12.1 Diffusers
Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit
minimizes ceiling smudging through design features. Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type indicated.
Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling diffusers conforming to the requirements of UL
Electrical Construction for the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply diffusers or return air units.
Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling. Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and
surface mounted diffusers for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim for flush mounted diffusers. For
connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that is airtight and does not interfere with volume controller.
Provide return or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.
2.10.12.2 Perforated Plate Diffusers
Provide adjustable or four-way air pattern controls as indicated. Provide diffuser faceplates that do not sag or
deflect when operating under design conditions.
2.10.12.3 Linear Diffusers
Make joints between diffuser sections that appear as hairline cracks. Provide alignment slots for insertion of key
strips or other concealed means to align exposed butt edges of diffusers. Equip with plaster frames when
mounted in plaster ceiling. Do not use screws and bolts in exposed face of frames or flanges. Metal-fill and
ground smooth frames and flanges exposed below ceiling, diffuser shall be with adjustable throw(horizontal
/vertical).
Linear diffusers to be provided with 25mm thick acoustically lined and insulated galvanized steel plenum. The
plenum to be integrated with cylindrical air pattern stabilizer and volume control damper
Linear diffusers shall be complete with end caps on end sections and one-piece diffusers, grid pattern air
straightness and concealed mounting brackets for easy installation without need for special tools.

2.10.12.4 Security Ceiling Diffusers
Provide diffusers that are steel with faceplate, fixed diffusion louvers, with flat surface margin, and an opposed
blade damper. Provide faceplate that is 1.9 mm minimum with 13 by 13 mm holes on 5 mm spacing and a
minimum free area of 45 percent.
2.10.12.5 Registers and Grilles
Provide units that are four-way directional-control type, except provide return and exhaust registers that are fixed
horizontal or vertical louver type similar in appearance to the supply register face. Furnish registers with sponge-
rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling. Install wall supply registers at least 150 mm below the ceiling
unless otherwise indicated. Locate return and exhaust registers 150 mm above the floor unless otherwise
indicated. Achieve four-way directional control by a grille face which can be rotated in 4 positions or by
adjustment of horizontal and vertical vanes. Provide grilles as specified for registers, with volume control damper.
2.10.12.6 Registers
Double-deflection supply registers. Provide manufacturer-furnished volume dampers. Provide volume dampers of
the group-operated, opposed-blade type and key adjustable by inserting key through face of register. Operating
mechanism shall not project through any part of the register face. Automatic volume control devices are
acceptable. Provide exhaust and return registers as specified for supply registers, except provide exhaust and
return registers that have a single set of nondirectional face bars or vanes having the same appearance as the
supply registers. Set face bars or vanes at angles reflected on drawings.
2.10.13 Louvers
Provide louvers for installation in exterior walls that are associated with the air supply and distribution system as
specified in Section 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL AND DOOR LOUVERS.
2.10.14 Air Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks
Fabricate air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks from galvanized steel or aluminum sheets with galvanized or
aluminum structural shapes. Provide sheet metal thickness, reinforcement, and fabrication that conform to
SMACNA 1966. Accurately fit and secure louver blades to frames. Fold or bead edges of louver blades for rigidity
and baffle these edges to exclude driving rain. Provide air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks with bird screen.
2.10.15 Bird Screens and Frames
Provide bird screens that conform to ASTM E2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or stainless steel. Provide "medium-
light" rated aluminum screens. Provide "light" rated stainless steel screens. Provide removable type frames
fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.
2.11AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
2.11.1 Fans
Test and rate fans according to AMCA 210/Eurovent. Calculate system effect on air moving devices in accordance
with AMCA 201 where installed ductwork differs from that indicated on drawings. Install air moving devices to
minimize fan system effect. Where system effect is unavoidable, determine the most effective way to

accommodate the inefficiencies caused by system effect on the installed air moving device. The sound power
level of the fans shall not exceed 85 dBA when tested according to AMCA 300 and rated in accordance with AMCA
301. Provide all fans with an AMCA seal or Eurovent Stamp. Connect fans to the motors either directly or indirectly
with V-belt drive. Use V-belt drives designed for not less than 150 percent of the connected driving capacity.
Provide variable pitch motor sheaves for 11 kW and below, and fixed pitch as defined by AHRI Guideline D (A
fixed-pitch sheave is provided on both the fan shaft and the motor shaft. This is a non-adjustable speed drive.).
Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the fan at a speed which can produce the specified capacity when set at the
approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. When fixed pitch sheaves are furnished, provide a replaceable
sheave when needed to achieve system air balance. Provide motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or
bases. Provide removable metal guards for all exposed V-belt drives, and provide speed-test openings at the
center of all rotating shafts. Provide fans with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends,
except that the screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated, where ducts are connected to the fan.
Provide fan and motor assemblies with vibration-isolation supports or mountings as indicated. Use vibration-
isolation units that are standard products with published loading ratings. Select each fan to produce the capacity
required at the fan static pressure indicated. Provide sound power level as indicated. Obtain the sound power
level values according to AMCA 300. Provide standard AMCA arrangement, rotation, and discharge as indicated.
Provide power ventilators that conform to UL 705 and have a UL label.,All fans are to have a maximum fan power
of 0.5 W/l/s.
2.11.1.1 Centrifugal Fans
Provide fully enclosed, single-width single-inlet, or double-width double-inlet centrifugal fans, with AMCA
Pressure Class I, II, or III as required or indicated for the design system pressure. Provide impeller wheels that are
rigidly constructed and accurately balanced both statically and dynamically. Provide backward-inclined airfoil
design fan blades in wheel sizes up to 750 mm. Provide backward-inclined airfoil design fan blades for wheels
over 750 mm in diameter. Provide open-wheel radial type booster fans for exhaust dryer systems, and fans
suitable for conveying lint and the temperatures encountered. Equip the fan shaft with a heat slinger to dissipate
heat buildup along the shaft. Install an access (service) door to facilitate maintenance to these fans. Provide fan
wheels over 900 mm in diameter with overhung pulleys and a bearing on each side of the wheel. Provide fan
wheels 900 mm or less in diameter that have one or more extra long bearings between the fan wheel and the
drive. Provide sleeve type, self-aligning and self-oiling bearings with oil reservoirs, or precision self-aligning roller
or ball-type with accessible grease fittings or permanently lubricated type. Connect grease fittings to tubing for
serviceability from a single accessible point. Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as
defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide steel, accurately finished fan shafts, with key seats and keys for
impeller hubs and fan pulleys. Provide fan outlets of ample proportions, designed for the attachment of angles
and bolts for attaching flexible connections. Provide automatically operated inlet vanes on suction inlets. Provide
automatically operated outlet dampers. Unless otherwise indicated, provide motors that do not exceed 1450 rpm
and have totally enclosed or explosion-proof, if indicated, enclosures. Provide reduced-voltage-start type motor
starters with watertight enclosure. Provide remote manual switch with pilot indicating light where indicated.
2.11.1.2 In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Provide in-line fans with centrifugal backward inclined blades, stationary discharge conversion vanes, internal and
external belt guards, and adjustable motor mounts. Mount fans in a welded tubular casing. Provide a fan that
axially flows the air in and out. Streamline inlets with conversion vanes to eliminate turbulence and provide
smooth discharge air flow. Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air stream. Provide
precision, self-aligning ball or roller type fan bearings that are sealed against dust and dirt and are permanently
lubricated. Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.
Provide motors with totally enclosed fan cooled or explosion-proof, if needed, enclosure. Provide magnetic motor
starters across-the-line with weather-resistant enclosures. Provide remote manual switch with pilot indicating
light where indicated.

2.11.1.3 Axial Flow Fans
Provide axial flow fans complete with drive components and belt guard, with steel housing, cast fan wheel, cast or
welded steel diffusers, fan shaft, bearings, and mounting frame as a factory-assembled unit. Provide fan wheels
that are dynamically balanced and keyed to the fan shaft, with radially projecting blades of airfoil cross-section.
Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air stream. Permanently lubricate fan bearings or
provide them with accessible grease fittings. Provide precision self-aligning ball or roller type fan bearings that are
sealed against dust and dirt. Provide fan bearings that have a L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours
of operation as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide fan inlets with an aerodynamically shaped bell and an
inlet cone. Install diffuser or straightening vanes at the fan discharge to minimize turbulence and provide smooth
discharge air flow. Furnish fan unit with inlet and outlet flanges, inlet screen, and automatic operation adjustable
inlet vanes. Unless otherwise indicated, provide motors that do not exceed 1450 rpm and have totally enclosed
fan cooled enclosure. Provide magnetic motor starters across-the-line with weather-resistant enclosure. Provide
remote manual switch with pilot indicating light where indicated.
2.11.1.4 Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators
Provide propeller type fans, assembled on a reinforced metal panel with venturi opening spun into panel. Provide
direct or V-belt driven fans with wheels less than 600 mm in diameter and provide V-belt driven fans with wheels
600 mm in diameter and larger. Provide fans with wall mounting collar. Provide lubricated bearings. Equip fans
with wheel and motor side metal or wire guards which have a corrosion-resistant finish. Provide totally enclosed
fan cooled type motor enclosure. Install motor operated backdraft dampers.
2.11.1.5 Centrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators
Provide direct or V-belt driven centrifugal type fans with backward inclined, non-overloading wheel. Provide
removable and weatherproof motor housing. Provide unit housing that is designed for sealing to building surface
and for discharge and condensate drippage away from building surface. Construct housing of heavy gauge
aluminum. Equip unit with an aluminum or plated steel wire discharge bird screen, disconnect switch, anodized
aluminum wall grille, manufacturer's standard motor-operated damper, an airtight and liquid-tight metallic wall
sleeve. Provide totally enclosed fan cooled type motor enclosure. Use only lubricated bearings.
2.11.1.6 Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators
Provide direct/V-belt driven centrifugal type fans with backward inclined, non-overloading wheel. Provide hinged
or removable and weatherproof motor compartment housing, constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Provide
fans with birdscreen, disconnect switch, motorized dampers, roof curb, and extended base. Provide totally
enclosed fan cooled type motor enclosure.
Provide centrifugal type kitchen exhaust fans according to UL 705, fitted with V-belt drive, round hood, and
windband upblast discharge configuration, integral residue trough and collection device, with motor and power
transmission components located in outside positively air ventilated compartment. Use only lubricated bearings.
2.11.1.7 Propeller Type Power Roof Ventilators
Provide direct/V-belt driven fans. Provide hinged or removable weathertight fan housing, fitted with framed
rectangular base constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel. Provide totally enclosed fan cooled type motors.
Furnish motors with nonfusible, horsepower rated, manual disconnect mount on unit. Furnish fans with motor
operated dampers, birdscreen roof curb. Use only lubricated bearings.

2.11.1.8 Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Provide centrifugal type, direct driven suspended cabinet-type ceiling exhaust fans. Provide fans with acoustically
insulated housing. Provide chatter-proof backdraft damper. Provide egg-crate design or louver design integral face
grille. Mount fan motors on vibration isolators. Furnish unit with mounting flange for hanging unit from above.
2.11.2 Air Filters
List air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent
efficiency by the DOP Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.11.2.1 Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters
Provide 50 mm depth, sectional, disposable type filters of the size indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested
according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide initial resistance at 2.54 m/s that does not exceed 0.09 kPa. Provide UL Class 2
filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat media. Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a
moisture resistant fiberboard frame. Bond all four edges of the filter media to the inside of the frame to prevent
air bypass and increase rigidity.
2.11.2.2 Extended Surface Nonsupported Pocket Filters
Provide 750 mm depth, sectional, replaceable dry media type filters of the size indicated with a MERV of 13 when
tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide initial resistance at 2.54m/s that does not exceed 0.1125 kPa. Provide
UL Class 1 filters. Provide fibrous glass media, supported in the air stream by a wire or non-woven synthetic
backing and secured to a galvanized steel metal header. Provide pockets that do not sag or flap at anticipated air
flows. Install each filter with an extended surface pleated panel filter as a prefilter in a factory preassembled, side
access housing or a factory-made sectional frame bank, as indicated.
2.11.2.3 Sectional Cleanable Filters
Provide 50 mm thick cleanable filters. Provide viscous adhesive in 20 L containers in sufficient quantity for 12
cleaning operations and not less than one L for each filter section. Provide one washing and charging tank for
every 100 filter sections or fraction thereof; with each washing and charging unit consisting of a tank and single
drain rack mounted on legs and drain rack with dividers and partitions to properly support the filters in the
draining position.
2.11.2.4 Holding Frames
Fabricate frames from not lighter than 1.6 mm sheet steel with rust-inhibitor coating. Equip each holding frame
with suitable filter holding devices. Provide gasketed holding frame seats. Make all joints airtight.
2.11.2.5 Filter Gauges
Provide dial type filter gauges, diaphragm actuated draft for all filter stations, including those filters which are
furnished as integral parts of factory fabricated air handling units. Gauges shall be at least 98 mm in diameter,
with white dials with black figures, and graduations with a minimum range of 0.25 kPa beyond the specified final
resistance for the filter bank on which each gauge is applied. Provide each gauge with a screw operated zero
adjustment and two static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two molded plastic vent valves, two 1.5
m minimum lengths of 6.35 mm diameter aluminum tubing, and all hardware and accessories for gauge mounting.

2.15 FACTORY PAINTING
Factory paint new equipment, which are not of galvanized construction. Paint with a corrosion resisting paint
finish according to ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A924/A924M. Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external
ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according to ASTM B117, ASTM D1654, and ASTM
D3359. Submit evidence of satisfactory paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be installed
indoors and 500 hours for units to be installed outdoors. Provide rating of failure at the scribe mark that is not less
than 6, average creepage not greater than 3 mm. Provide rating of the inscribed area that is not less than 10, no
failure. On units constructed of galvanized steel that have been welded, provide a final shop docket of zinc-rich
protective paint on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have burned through from the interior according to
ASTM D520 Type I.
Factory painting that has been damaged prior to acceptance by the Engineer shall be field painted in compliance
with the requirements of paragraph FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Engineer of
any discrepancy before performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
a. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of the contract drawings and
approved manufacturer's installation instructions. Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this
type of work. Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the designed fire ratings of walls,
partitions, ceilings, and floors.
b. No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to any existing machine or system.
Install all hinged doors to swing open a minimum of 120 degrees. Provide an area in front of all access
doors that clears a minimum of 910mm. In front of all access doors to electrical circuits, clear the area
the minimum distance to energized circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333 (Electrical-
Safety Related work practices)and an additional 910mm.
c. Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and alarms in conspicuous locations. Mount
all indicators, to include gauges, meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in the area.
3.2.1 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide water seals in the condensate drain from all units. Provide a depth of each seal of 50 mm plus 0.1 mm for
each Pa, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to which the drain is connected. Provide water seals that are
constructed of 2 tees and an appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged. Provide pipe cap or plug
cleanouts where indicated. Connect drains indicated to connect to the sanitary waste system using an indirect
waste fitting. Insulate air conditioner drain lines as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.2.2 Equipment and Installation
Provide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and
other similar items requiring supports. Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated. Anchor and
fasten as detailed. Set floor-mounted equipment on not less than 150 mm concrete pads or curbs doweled in
place unless otherwise indicated. Make concrete foundations heavy enough to minimize the intensity of the

vibrations transmitted to the piping, duct work and the surrounding structure, as recommended in writing by the
equipment manufacturer. In lieu of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete pedestal block with isolators
placed between the pedestal block and the floor. Make the concrete foundation or concrete pedestal block a
mass not less than three times the weight of the components to be supported. Provide the lines connected to the
pump mounted on pedestal blocks with flexible connectors. Submit foundation drawings as specified in
paragraph DETAIL DRAWINGS. Provide concrete for foundations as specified in Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-
PLACE CONCRETE.
3.2.3 Access Panels
Install access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and items requiring inspection or
maintenance of sufficient size, and locate them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or
completely removed and replaced. Provide access panels as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
FABRICATIONS.
3.2.4 Flexible Duct
Install pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure
a vapor tight joint. Provide hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the duct
manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.
3.2.5 Metal Ductwork
Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct supports for sheet metal ductwork
according to SMACNA 1966, unless otherwise specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in SMACNA
1966. Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to
thermal expansion. Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the duct. Attach supports
only to structural framing members and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means
is provided and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are
required between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are
used, provide retainer clips.
3.2.5.1 Underground Ductwork
Provide PVC plastisol coated galvanized steel underground ductwork with coating on interior and exterior surfaces
and watertight joints. Install ductwork as indicated, according to ACCA Manual 4 and manufacturer's instructions.
Maximum burial depth is 2 m.
3.2.5.2 Light Duty Corrosive Exhaust Ductwork
For light duty corrosive exhaust ductwork, use PVC plastisol coated galvanized steel with PVC coating on interior
surfaces and epoxy wash primer coating on exterior surfaces.
3.2.6 FRP Ductwork
Provide fibrous glass reinforced plastic ducting and related structures that conform to SMACNA 1403. Provide
flanged joints where indicated. Crevice-free butt lay-up joints are acceptable where flanged joints are not
indicated. When ambient temperatures are lower than 10 degrees C, heat cure joints by exothermic reaction heat
packs.

3.2.7 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork
3.2.7.1 Ducts Conveying Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors
Provide ducts conveying smoke and grease laden vapors that conform to requirements of NFPA 96. Make seams,
joints, penetrations, and duct-to-hood collar connections with a liquid tight continuous external weld. Provide
duct material that is a minimum 1.3 mm, Type 304L or 316L, stainless steel. Include with duct construction an
external perimeter angle sized in accordance with SMACNA 1966, except place welded joint reinforcement on
maximum of 600 mm centers; continuously welded companion angle bolted flanged joints with flexible ceramic
cloth gaskets where indicated; pitched to drain at low points; welded pipe coupling-plug drains at low points;
welded fire protection and detergent cleaning penetration; steel framed, stud bolted, and flexible ceramic cloth
gasketed cleaning access provisions where indicated. Make angles, pipe couplings, frames, bolts, etc., the same
material as that specified for the duct unless indicated otherwise.
3.2.7.2 Exposed Ductwork
Provide exposed ductwork that is fabricated from minimum 1.3 mm, Type 304L or 316L, stainless steel with
continuously welded joints and seams. Pitch ducts to drain at hoods and low points indicated. Match surface
finish to hoods.
3.2.7.3 Concealed Ducts Conveying Moisture Laden Air
Fabricate concealed ducts conveying moisture laden air from minimum 1.3 mm, Type 300 series, stainless steel.
Continuously weld, braze, or solder joints to be liquid tight. Pitch ducts to drain at points indicated. Make
transitions to other metals liquid tight, companion angle bolted and gasketed.
3.2.8 Acoustical Duct Lining
Apply lining in cut-to-size pieces attached to the interior of the duct with nonflammable fire resistant adhesive
conforming to ASTM C916, Type I, NFPA 90A, UL 723, and ASTM E84. Provide top and bottom pieces that lap the
side pieces and are secured with welded pins, adhered clips of metal, nylon, or high impact plastic, and speed
washers or welding cup-head pins installed according to SMACNA 1966. Provide welded pins, cup-head pins, or
adhered clips that do not distort the duct, burn through, nor mar the finish or the surface of the duct. Make pins
and washers flush with the surfaces of the duct liner and seal all breaks and punctures of the duct liner coating
with the nonflammable, fire resistant adhesive. Coat exposed edges of the liner at the duct ends and at other
joints where the lining is subject to erosion with a heavy brush coat of the nonflammable, fire resistant adhesive,
to prevent delamination of glass fibers. Apply duct liner to flat sheet metal prior to forming duct through the
sheet metal brake. Additionally secure lining at the top and bottom surfaces of the duct by welded pins or
adhered clips as specified for cut-to-size pieces. Other methods indicated in SMACNA 1966 to obtain proper
installation of duct liners in sheet metal ducts, including adhesives and fasteners, are acceptable.
3.2.9 Dust Control
To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during construction, perform temporary dust
control protection. Protect the distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all inlets and
outlets at the end of each day's work. Keep temporary protection in place until system is ready for startup.
3.2.10 Insulation
Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork, piping, and equipment according to Section
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and
plenums up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit.

3.2.11 Duct Test Holes
Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and plenums as indicated or where necessary for
the use of pitot tube in balancing the air system. Plug insulated duct at the duct surface, patched over with
insulation and then marked to indicate location of test hole if needed for future use.
3.2.12 Power Roof Ventilator Mounting
Provide foamed 13 mm thick, closed-cell, flexible elastomer insulation to cover width of roof curb mounting
flange. Where wood nailers are used, predrill holes for fasteners.
3.2.13 Power Transmission Components Adjustment
Test V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension prior to operation and after 72 hours of operation at
final speed. Uniformly load belts on drive side to prevent bouncing. Make alignment of direct driven couplings to
within 50 percent of manufacturer's maximum allowable range of misalignment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT PADS
Provide equipment pads to the dimensions shown or, if not shown, to conform to the shape of each piece of
equipment served with a minimum 75 mm margin around the equipment and supports. Allow equipment bases
and foundations, when constructed of concrete or grout, to cure a minimum of 14 calendar days before being
loaded.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting and patching of the building structure is
required. Make holes in exposed locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by sanding. Use of
a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically approved. Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate
sleeves with an iron pipe masonry core saw.
3.5 CLEANING
Thoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered with dirt, plaster, or other material
during handling and construction before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed within
the building structure. Before final acceptance, clean mechanical equipment, including piping, ducting, and
fixtures, and free from dirt, grease, and finger marks. When the work area is in an occupied space such as office,
laboratory or warehouse, protect all furniture and equipment from dirt and debris. Incorporate housekeeping for
field construction work which leaves all furniture and equipment in the affected area free of construction
generated dust and debris; and, all floor surfaces vacuum-swept clean.
3.6 PENETRATIONS
Provide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other penetrating items, and install during
the construction of the surface to be penetrated. Cut sleeves flush with each surface. Place sleeves for round duct
380 mm and smaller. Build framed, prepared openings for round duct larger than 380 mm and square, rectangular
or oval ducts. Sleeves and framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers are installed at
the openings. Provide 25 mm clearance between penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers,
and diffusers. Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct insulation with mineral fiber conforming
with ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2.

a. Sleeves: Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated, from 1 mm thick mill galvanized sheet
metal. Where sleeves are installed in bearing walls or partitions, provide black steel pipe conforming with
ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 20.
b. Framed Prepared Openings: Fabricate framed prepared openings from 1 mm galvanized steel, unless
otherwise indicated.
c. Insulation: Provide duct insulation in accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations.
Terminate duct insulation at fire dampers and flexible connections. For duct handling air at or below 16
degrees C, provide insulation continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which
are exposed to unconditioned air.
d. Closure Collars: Provide closure collars of a minimum 100 mm wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed
ducts and items on each side of penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install collar tight
against the surface and fit snugly around the duct or insulation. Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent
damage to penetrating surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts 380 mm in diameter or less from 1 mm
galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum
dimension over 380 mm from 1.40 mm galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts
with a maximum side of 380 mm or less from 1 mm galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a
maximum of 150 mm on center. Attach to collars a minimum of 4 fasteners where the opening is 300 mm
in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners where the opening is 500 mm in diameter or less.
e. Firestopping: Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire partitions, and fire rated chase walls, seal the
penetration with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.7 FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to
clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent
degreasing prior to application of paint, except clean to bare metal on metal surfaces subject to temperatures in
excess of 50 degrees C. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding
coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Provide
aluminum or light gray finish coat.
a. Temperatures less than 50 degrees C: Immediately after cleaning, apply one coat of pretreatment primer
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0076 mm, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.0255 mm; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm
per coat to metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 50 degrees C.
b. Temperatures between 50 and 205 degrees C: Apply two coats of 205 degrees C heat-resisting enamel
applied to a total minimum thickness of 0.05 mm to metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 50 and
205 degrees C.
c. Temperatures greater than 205 degrees C: Apply two coats of heat-resisting paint applied to a total
minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm to metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 205 degrees
C.
3.7.1 Finish Painting
The requirements for finish painting of items only primed at the factory, and surfaces not specifically noted
otherwise, are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.7.2 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Use scheme in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. Provide color coding scheme that identifies points of
access for maintenance and operation of components and equipment that are not visible from the finished space
and are accessible from the ceiling grid, consisting of a color code board and colored metal disks. Make each
colored metal disk approximately 13 mm diameter and secure to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. Insert
each fastener into the ceiling panel so as to be concealed from view. Provide fasteners that are manually
removable without the use of tools and that do not separate from the ceiling panels when the panels are dropped
from ceiling height. Make installation of colored metal disks follow completion of the finished surface on which
the disks are to be fastened. Provide color code board that is approximately 1 m wide, 750 mm high, and 13 mm
thick. Make the board of wood fiberboard and frame under glass or 1.6 mm transparent plastic cover. Make the
color code symbols approximately 19 mm in diameter and the related lettering in 13 mm high capital letters.
Mount the color code board in the mechanical or equipment room. Make the color code system as indicated
below:
System Color Stripe
Water, Air Cond. Chilled Blue Green
Heating Green White / Crimson
Refrigerants Purple
Fuel Oils No. 3 to 6 Yellow
Boiler Blow Down Green Yellow& White
Domestic Cold Water Green White/Blue/White
Hot Water Green White/Grimson /White
Fire Protection Service White Red
Fire Extinguishing Green Safety Red
Compressed Air Light Blue White
Fuel Oil, Diesel, Kerosene No. 2 Yellow Black
Town Gas Yellow Ochre Emerald/Green
Steam, Low Pressure Orange White

(under 137.6 kPa/20 psi)
Steam, Medium Pressure - Orange Green
(137.6-668 kPa/20-100 psi)
Steam, High Pressure - Orange Black
(over 688 kPa/100 psi)
Gasoline Yellow Orange & Black

3.8 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating
service and item number on all valves and dampers. Provide tags that are 35 mm minimum diameter with
stamped or engraved markings. Make indentations black for reading clarity. Attach tags to valves with No. 12
AWG 2 mm diameter corrosion-resistant steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or plastic straps
designed for that purpose.
3.9 DUCTWORK LEAK TEST
Perform ductwork leak test for the entire air distribution and exhaust system, including fans, coils, filters, etc.
Provide test procedure, apparatus, and report that conform to SMACNA 1972 CD. Complete ductwork leak test
with satisfactory results prior to applying insulation to ductwork exterior.
3.10DUCTWORK LEAK TESTS
The requirements for ductwork leak tests are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC.
3.11DAMPER ACCEPTANCE TEST
Submit the proposed schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of test. Operate all fire dampers and smoke
dampers under normal operating conditions, prior to the occupancy of a building to determine that they function
properly. Test each fire damper equipped with fusible link by having the fusible link cut in place. Test dynamic
fire dampers with the air handling and distribution system running. Reset all fire dampers with the fusible links
replaced after acceptance testing. To ensure optimum operation and performance, install the damper so it is
square and free from racking.
3.12TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
The requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC. Begin testing, adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and distribution,
including controls, has been completed, with the exception of performance tests.
3.13PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test each system as a whole to see that all items
perform as integral parts of the system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the
building. Record the testing during the applicable season. Make corrections and adjustments as necessary to
produce the conditions indicated or specified. Conduct capacity tests and general operating tests by an
experienced engineer. Provide tests that cover a period of not less than 2 days for each system and demonstrate
that the entire system is functioning according to the specifications. Make coincidental chart recordings at points
indicated on the drawings for the duration of the time period and record the temperature at space thermostats or
space sensors, the humidity at space humidistats or space sensors and the ambient temperature and humidity in a
shaded and weather protected area.
Submit test reports for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests in booklet form, upon completion of testing.
Document phases of tests performed including initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and final test
results in the reports.

3.14CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Provide a temporary bypass for water coils to prevent flushing water from passing through coils. Inside of all units
thoroughly clean ducts, plenums, and casing of debris and blow free of small particles of rubbish and dust and
then vacuum clean before installing outlet faces. Wipe equipment clean, with no traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint
spots. Provide temporary filters prior to startup of all fans that are operated during construction, and install new
filters after all construction dirt has been removed from the building, and the ducts, plenums, casings, and other
items specified have been vacuum cleaned. Maintain system in this clean condition until final acceptance.
Properly lubricate bearings with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper
tension. Adjust control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment to setting indicated or
directed. Adjust fans to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. Maintain all
equipment installed under the contract until close out documentation is received, the project is completed and
the building has been documented as beneficially occupied.
3.15OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
3.15.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit 3 manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit data complying with the requirements specified
in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 3 for the items/units listed under
3.15.2 Operation and Maintenance Training
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as designated by the Engineer. Make the
training period consist of a total of 48 hours of normal working time and start it after all work specified herein is
functionally completed and the Performance Tests have been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all
of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations of routine
maintenance operations. Submit the proposed On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 05 41
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description
A. Extent of Work: The extent of the noise and vibration control work is as described in this section. The
types of vibration isolation work specified in this section include the following:
1. Support isolation control for motor-driven mechanical equipment, i.e. air-cooled condensing units,
chillers, air handling units, fans, pumps, air compressors, blowers, etc.
2. Support isolation of ductwork.
3. Support isolation of piping.
4. Flexible connections for piping at equipment.
5. Flexible ductwork connections.
B. Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment hangers, sealants, gaskets and other work
related to vibration isolation work as well as the noise criteria, "MECHANICAL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE".
regulations, the conflict shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. Works will also adhere to the standards listed
below or the standards resulting from their possible amendment:
prevail
Mechanical Specifications 23 05 41 - 1 Noise And Vibration Control

A. Product Qualification: Provide vibration isolation units produced by specialized manufacturers, with not
less than 5 years' successful experience in the production of units similar to those for the project.
B. Except as otherwise indicated obtain support isolation units from a single manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Certification: Where vibration isolation support units are indicated for a minimum static
deflection, provide manufacturer's certification that units have been tested and comply with the indicated
requirements.
1.3 Submittals
A. Manufacturer's Data, Vibration Isolation: For information only, submit manufacturer's specifications,
detailed drawings, performance characteristics data and installation instructions for each type of unit
required.
1. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency
and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment.
2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height mounted, solid-compression height,
operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness.
3. Include performance certifications where required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Isolation Materials And Support Units
A. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, of high strength, heat-treated, spring alloy
steel; with outside diameter not less than 0.8 times operating height; with lateral stiffness not less than
vertical stiffness; and designed to reach the solid height before exceeding the rated fatigue point of the
steel.
B. Spring Isolators, Free-Standing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation spring
between top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type isolator bonded to bottom of bottom loading
plate. Include studs or cups to ensure centering of spring on plates. Include a leveling bolt with lock nuts
and washers, centered in top plate, arranged for leveling and anchoring supported equipment as
indicated. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate as indicated.
C. Spring Isolator, Housed: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation spring telescoping steel
housings with top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type isolator bonded to bottom of loading
plate. Include resilient inserts to separate and guide telescoping housings.
D. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression
isolators of the type indicated. Design brackets for 5 times the rated loading of units. Fabricate units
to accept misalignment of suspension members and for use with either rod or strap type members, or
including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.
2.2 Flexible Connectors
A. Duct Connectors: Provide flexible duct connectors wherever ductwork connects to vibration-isolated
equipment. Construct flexible connectors of laminated flexible sheet of cotton duct and sheet elastomer
(butyl, neoprene or vinyl), flame proof, reinforced with steel wire mesh where required for strength to
withstand duct pressure indicated. Form connectors with full-faced flanges and accordion bellows to
perform as flexible isolation unit, and of manufacturer’s standard
Length for each size unless otherwise indicated. Equip each unit with galvanized steel retaining rings for
airtight connection with ductwork.
2.3 Acoustic duct

Lining shall be 25 mm thick Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber Open Cell Foam with minimum density of 140 kg/m3.
It shall be fungi resistant. The minimum sound-absorbing coefficient shall be as follows:
Thickness/mm NRC No. 6 Rating Sound Absorbing Coefficient at Frequencies

25 0.70 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
0.12 0.31 0.64 0.83 0.95 0.99
Sound attenuators, dedicated and approved for medical uses where required, shall be used to attenuate
sound on air-handling units and exhaust fans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Performance of Isolators
A. General: Comply with the minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, including the definitions of critical and non-critical locations,
for the selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.
Vibration control is to be incorporated in ductwork runs by means of anti-vibration couplings, hangers and
supports as necessary.
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's

recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units.
3.2 Application
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, apply the following types of vibration isolators at the indicated
locations or for the indicated items of equipment. The Contractor to provide details of the vibration
isolators, within the Contract, in line with the specification details.
B. Floor Mounted Equipment: Floor mounted equipment such as fans, compressors, shall be provided with
spring isolators, resilient pads, inertia bases or a combination of above items as recommended by the
ASHRAE Systems Handbook.
C. Isolation Hangers: Install where the following suspended equipment is indicated.
1. Air handling units, fans, etc.
2. Pipe over 25 mm diameter and each run connected to vibration-isolation mounted equipment for a
distance of 100 diameter but not less than 15 meters.
3. Ductwork and each run connected to vibration-isolation-mounted equipment for a distance of 15

meters.
D. Flexible Duct Connectors: Install at the following ductwork connections:
1. Connections with vibration-isolation-mounted air handling equipment.

2. Connections with fixed wall louvers for air intake and exhausts.
3. Where ductwork, 0.10 sq. meters and greater, changes directions in critical locations.
E. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install in piping systems at the following locations:
1. Connections, 22 mm diameter and larger, with vibration-isolation mounted equipment.

3.3 Installation
A. General:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for the installation and load
application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated
operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or
bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection
against overloading during installation.
2. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
3. Adjust leveling as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators.

Shim units as required when leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly.
4. Locate isolation hangers for suspended equipment as near the overhead support structure as possible.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 05 48.00 40
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S2.40 (1984; R 2001) Mechanical Vibration of Rotating and Reciprocating

Machinery - Requirements for Instruments for Measuring Vibration
Severity
ASA S2.71 (1983; R 2006) Guide to the Evaluation of Human Exposure to Vibration
in Buildings
ASHRAE HVAC APP SI HDBK (2011) HVAC Applications Handbook, SI Edition
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB (Testing, Adjusting and Balancing)
Environmental Systems
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Engineers.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to work specified
in this section to the extent applicable.
Section 23 05 15 COMMON PIPING FOR HVAC applies to work specified in this section to the extent
applicable.
Ensure all vibration-control apparatus is the product of a single manufacturing source, where possible.
Human exposure levels should be considered using ASA S2.71 and NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS.
Mechanical Specifications 23 05 48.00 40 - 1 Vibration And Seismic Controls For

HVAC Piping And Equipment
Scheduled isolation mounting is in millimeter and is a minimum static deflection.

Spans referred to in Part 2, "Vibration-Isolation Systems Application," means longest bay dimension.
Determine exact mounting sizes and number of isolators by the isolator manufacturer based on equipment
that will be installed. Check equipment revolutions per minute (rpm) and spring deflections to verify that
resonance cannot occur.
Five working days prior to commencement of installation, submit installation drawings for vibration isolator
systems including equipment and performance requirements.
Indicate within outline drawings for vibration isolator systems, overall physical features, dimensions, ratings,
service requirements, and weights of equipment.
Within ten working days of Contract Award, submit equipment and performance data for vibration isolator
systems including equipment base design; inertia-block mass relative to support equipment weight; spring
loads and free, operating, and solid heights of spring; spring diameters; nonmetallic isolator loading and
deflection; disturbing frequency; natural frequency of mounts; deflection of working member; and
anticipated amount of physical movement at the reference points.
Ensure data includes the following:
a. Mountings
b. Bases
c. Isolators
d. Floor-Mounted Piping
e. Vertical Piping
1.3 SUBMITTALS
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings
Outline Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance Data
Isolators
SD-06 Test Reports
Type of Isolator
Type of Base
Allowable Deflection
Measured Deflection

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE OF VIBRATION-ISOLATION PROVISIONS
Design for vibration isolation using ASHRAE HVAC APP SI HDBK, Chapter 48, as applicable to the following
sections.
Submit test reports for testing vibration isolation for each type of isolator and each type of base, and meet
referenced standards contained within this section. Include in test reports allowable deflection and
measured deflection also meeting referenced standards within this section.
2.1.1 Materials
Ensure rubber is natural rubber and elastomer is chloroprene. Shore A durometer measurement of both
materials and range between 40 and 60.
Inorganic materials such as precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass encased in a resilient moisture-
impervious membrane may be used in lieu of specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this
substitution is made, ensure specified deflections are modified by the manufacturing source to accommodate
physical characteristics of inorganic materials and to provide equal or better vibration isolation.
Ensure weather-exposed metal vibration-isolator parts are corrosion protected. Chloroprene coat springs.
2.1.2 Mountings
Provide the following mountings:
Type A: Composite pad, with 6.3 millimeter thick elastomer top and bottom layers, molded to contain a
pattern with nonslip characteristics in all horizontal directions. Elastomer loading is not to exceed 275
kilopascal. Ensure minimum overall thickness is 25 millimeter. Maximum deflections up to 6.3 millimeter are
allowed.
Type B: Double rubber-in-shear with molded-in steel reinforcement in top and bottom. Maximum
deflections up to 12.7 millimeter are allowed.
Type C: Free-standing laterally stable open-spring type for deflections over 12.7 millimeter, with built-in
bearing and leveling provisions, 6.3 millimeter thick Type A base elastomer pads, and accessories. Ensure
outside diameter of each spring is equal to or greater than 0.9 times the operating height of the spring under
rated load.
Type D: Partially housed type, containing one or more vertically restrained springs with at least 12.7
millimeter clearance maintained around springs, with adjustable limit stops, 6.3 millimeter thick Type A base
elastomer pads, and accessories.
Type E: Pendulum-suspension configuration with free-standing stable spring with resilient horizontal and
vertical restraints to allow maximum movements of 6.3 millimeter in each direction, 6.3 millimeter thick Type
A base elastomer pads.
Type F: Combination spring and rubber-in-shear steel framed for hanger-rod mounting, with minimum total
static deflection of 25 millimeter.

Type G: Air spring with body constructed of reinforced elastomer specifically suitable for application
environment. Select air spring to provide a natural frequency equal to 127 millimeter of deflection of
conventional specified steel springs. Provide facilities for dead-level adjustment and height-control of
supported equipment.
2.1.3 Bases
Provide the following bases:
Type U: Unit isolators without rails, structural-steel bases, or inertia blocks.
Type R: Rails, connected mill-rolled structural steel, of sufficient dimension to preclude deflection at
midpoint of unsupported span in excess of 1/1,440th of the span between isolators, power transmission,
component misalignment, and any overhung weight. Where Type R bases are specified and the equipment
proposed requires additional base support, use a Type S base.
Type S: Structural-steel bases common to a supported assembly, made from welded-joint mill-rolled
structural steel with closed-perimeter configuration, isolators attached to outrigger supports.
Ensure height of steel members is sufficient to provide stiffness required to maintain equipment
manufacturer's recommended alignment and duty efficiency of power-transmission components. Ensure
height of steel member does not result in member deflection at midpoint of unsupported span of more than
1/1,440th of the span between isolators. Minimum height is 127 millimeter.
Type CIB: Provide concrete inertia blocks common to the entire assembly, with welded-joint construction,
mill-rolled structural-steel perimeters, welded-in No. 4 reinforcing bars 200 millimeter on center each way
near the bottom of the block, outrigger-isolator mounting provisions, anchor bolts, and be filled with20.68
Megapascal cured-strength concrete.
Configure rectangular inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
Ensure minimum thickness of inertia base, in addition to providing suitable mass, is sufficient to provide
stiffness to maintain equipment manufacturer's recommended alignment and duty efficiency of power-
transmission components, and is sufficient to result in base deflection at midpoint of unsupported span of
not more than 1/1,440th of the span between isolators. Verify minimum thickness, the preceding
requirements notwithstanding, is 8 percent of the longest base dimension.
Ensure pumps with flexible couplings does not have inertia bases less than 200 millimeter thick, and the
minimum mass of concrete inertia block is equal in weight to supported equipment.
2.2 VIBRATION-ISOLATION SYSTEMS APPLICATION
Vibration isolation design per ASHRAE HVAC APP SI HDBK, Chapter 37.
2.2.1 Centrifugal Water Chiller Package Locations
ON/ABOVE ON/ABOVE ON/ABOVE

GRADE GRADE GRADE
BASEMENT 6096 MM 9144 MM 12192 MM
TYPE BELOW-GRADE FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Hermetic A-U-6.3 B-U-13 D-S-44.5 D-S-63
Open Type B-U-9.7 D-U-25 D-CIB-44.5 D-CIB-63
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN MILLIMETER

2.2.2 Reciprocating Water Chiller Package Locations

GRADE GRADE GRADE
500 to
750 rpm D-U-25 D-U-38 D-S-63 D-CIB-69
750 rpm
and over D-U-25 D-U-25 D-R-50 D-CIB-63
2.2.3 Absorption Water Chiller Package Locations

GRADE GRADE GRADE
Standard A-U-6 D-U-25 D-U-38 D-U-69
2.2.4 Reciprocating Compressor/Condenser Locations
ON\ABOVE ON\ABOVE ON\ABOVE

GRADE GRADE GRADE
500 to
750 rpm D-U-25 D-U-38 D-U-63 D-CIB-69
750 to
and over D-U-25 D-U-25 D-U-50 D-CIB-63

2.2.5 Reciprocating Refrigeration Compressor Locations

GRADE GRADE GRADE
500 to
750 rpm C-U-25 C-U-38 C-U-63 C-CIB-69
750 rpm
and over C-U-25 C-U-25 C-U-50 C-CIB-63
2.2.6 Centrifugal Pump Locations

GRADE GRADE GRADE
Close-
Couple
Through
3728 watt None -R-8.9 C-S-25 C-S-25
Bedplate-
mounted
through
3728 watt None C-CIB-25 C-CIB-38 C-CIB-44.5
5592 watt None C-CIB-25 C-CIB-44.5 C-CIB-44.5

2.2.7 Air-Cooled Condensing Unit Locations
6096 MM 9144 MM 12192 MM

ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN
TYPE EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Through 5 hp
over 900 rpm B-U-13 D-U-25 D-U-44.5
Over 5 hp
to 500 rpm B-U-13 D-U-44.5 D-U-63
500 rpm and over B-U-13 D-U-25 D-U-44.5

2.2.8 Low-Pressure Suspended Air-Handling Unit (AHU) Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to ceiling-suspended Air Moving and Conditioning Association Class A
packaged central-station units.
6096 MM 9144 MM 12192 MM

Through 3728 watt F-U-25 F-U-25 F-U-25
5592 watt and over

250 to 500 rpm F-U-44.5 F-U-44.5 F-U-44.5
500 rpm and over F-U-25 F-U-31.8 F-U-39.4
2.2.9 Low-Pressure AHU Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to floor-mounted Air Moving and Conditioning Association Class A
packaged central-station units.

GRADE GRADE GRADE
Through
3728 watt B-U-8.9 C-U-25 C-U-25 C-U-25
5592 watt
and over
250 to
500 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-44.5 C-U-44.5 C-U-44.5
500 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-25 C-U-38

2.2.10 Medium- And High-Pressure AHU Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to floor-mounted Air Moving and Conditioning Association Classes B and
C packaged central-station units.

GRADE GRADE GRADE
Through
3728 watt B-U-8.9 C-U-25 C-U-25 C-U-25
5592 watt
and over
250 to
500 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-44.5 C-U-44.5 C-U-44.5
500 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-25 C-U-38
2.2.11 Air-Moving Device Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to housed, unhoused free-standing fans of any pressure rating, located in
field-erected factory-fabricated and unhoused return-air and supply-air service.

GRADE GRADE GRADE
Through
14.9
kilowatt
250 to
300 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-63 C-U-63 C-U-89
300 to
500 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-44.5 C-U-44.5 C-U-63
500 rpm
and over B-U-8.9 C-U-25 C-U-25 C-U-44.5
Over 14.9
kilowatt
250 to
300 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-63 C-CIB-89 C-CIB-89
300 to

500 rpm B-U-8.9 C-U-63 C-CIB-63 C-CIB-89
500 rpm
and over B-U-8.9 C-U-25 C-CIB-44.5 C-CIB-63
2.2.12 Cross-Flow Cooling Tower Locations
6096 MM 9144 MM 12192 MM

Package under
tower base
to 500 rpm B-U-8.9 D-U-50 D-U-63
500 rpm and over B-U-8.9 D-U-25 D-U-44.5
Field erected
under tower
base; all rpm
Under mechanical-
equipment
supporting
frame to 500 rpm
500 rpm and over
2.2.13 Blow-Through Cooling Tower Locations
6096 MM 9144 MM 12192 MM

Under tower base

to 500 rpm B-U-8.9 C-S-63 C-S-89
500 rpm and over B-U-8.9 C-S-25 C-S-44.5

2.3 PIPE AND DUCT VIBRATION ISOLATION
Type G: Provide isolators with in-series contained steel springs and preformed fibrous-glass or chloroprene-
elastomer elements for connecting to building-structure attachments. Load devices by supported system
during operating conditions to produce a minimum spring and elastomer static deflection of 25 millimeter
and 10 millimeter, respectively.
Type H: Provide isolators with contained chloroprene-elastomer elements for connecting to building-
structure attachments. Load devices by supported system during operating conditions to produce a
minimum elastomer static deflection of 10 millimeter.
Type J: Provide isolators with elastomers mounted on floor-supported columns or directly on the floor. Load
devices by supported system during operating conditions to produce a minimum elastomer static deflection
of 10 millimeter.
2.3.1 Floor-Mounted Piping
Type K: Provide isolators with springs mounted on floor-supported columns or directly on the floor. Load
devices by supported system during operating conditions to produce a minimum spring static deflection of 25
millimeter.
2.3.2 Vertical Piping
Type L: Provide isolators which are pipe base-support devices with one or more contained steel springs. Load
devices by supported system during operating conditions to produce a minimum static deflection of 25
millimeter. Equip devices with precompression and vertical-limit features, as well as a minimum 6.4
millimeter thick elastomer sound pad and isolation washers, for mounting to floor.
Type M: Provide isolators which are elastomer mounted baseplate and riser pipe-guide devices, with
contained double acting elastomer elements which under rated load have a minimum static deflection of 10
millimeter. Size isolator to accommodate thermal insulation within the stationary guide ring.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Ensure rails, structural steel bases, and concrete inertia blocks are raised not less than 25 millimeter above
the floor and are level when equipment supported is under operating load.
Ensure vibration-isolation installation and deflection testing after equipment start-up is directed by a
competent representative of the manufacturer.
3.2 TESTS AND REPORTS
Ensure vibration-isolation devices are deflection tested. Submit test reports in accordance with paragraph
entitled, "Submittals," substantiating that all equipment has been isolated as specified and that minimum
specified deflections have been met. Make all measurements in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 07 00
PIPING ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description
A. Extent of Work: The requirements of this section apply to the piping work specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Only manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of piping products of types
and sizes required, and which have been in satisfactory use for not less than five year in similar service
are to be selected.
1.3 Submittals
A. Manufacturer's Data: For information only, submit selected manufacturer's product data and
installation instructions for the required piping accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufactured Products
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping accessories as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein
for use in the service indicated. Provide products of the type and pressure-rating indicated for each
service or, if not indicated, provide proper selection as required to comply with installation
requirements. Provide sizes and connections matching pipe, tube, valve and equipment connections.
B. Flexible Joints: Changes in the character of the subsoil such as the moisture content, the bedding and
compaction conditions, and the nature of the subsoil itself may cause differential settlement in any
buried drains. Flexible joints should be used to provide flexibility, longitudinal travel and ease of jointing.
They are available for all types of pipe and the pipe maker's recommendations regarding the making of
the joints should be closely followed. It is important that the joint should be made with the sealing ring
supplied by the manufacturer and that the manufacturer's recommendations should be followed where
a lubricant is required. The jointing surface and sealing rings should be clean and dry prior to any
application of recommended lubricant.
C. Escutcheon Plates: Metal split-ring type units, with nickel or chrome plated finish except primed-for-
painting finish where painted finish is indicated for adjoining surface. Provide units sized to fit closely
outside of pipe insulation (or bare pipe where no covering is indicated). Where sleeves extend above
floor finish, provide units with sufficient depth to conceal sleeves.
D. Fire Stops: Provide fire stops collars for all pipe-work crossing fire rated walls or slabs. Provide in
tumescent collars for plastic pipes above 50 mm diameter. If in tumescent fire collars are not available
for small diameter PVC pipes, fire sealant and mastic shall be used to seal around such pipes when
crossing fire rated walls.
Mechanical Specifications 23 06 00 - 1 Piping Accessories

E. Strainers: Y-pattern configuration with removable monel or stainless-steel basket; maximum pressure
drop 1.2 meters of water in clean strainer and 1.5 meters of water when two-thirds of perforations are
blocked. Perforations shall be as follows:
Perforation Size No. of Perforation
Up to 32 mm pipe 0.4 150
40 mm to 100 mm 0.8 65
100 mm and above 1.2 25
2.2 Fabricated Accessories
A. Drip Pans: Provide drip-pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, and
with edges turned up 63 mm and reinforced either by structural angles or by rolling over 6.3 mm steel
rod; provide flanges for drain connections.
B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
C. Cast Iron Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from cast-iron pipe; remove burrs.
D. Sheet Metal Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal closed with lock-seam joints. For
following pipe sizes provide gauge indicated: 80 mm diameter pipe, and smaller, 20 gauge; 100 mm to
150 mm diameter pipe, 16 gauge; over 150 mm diameter pipe, 14 gauge.
2.3 Miscellaneous Materials
A. Pipe sleeve caulking by means of oakum and lead, except where another caulking system or material is
indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Manufactured Products
A. Expansion Compensators: Install expansion compensators where indicated and at all building expansion
joints for adequate expansion of the piping system. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Install escutcheon plates at pipe sleeves where piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces of the
building, on the exterior, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.2 Installation of Fabricated Products
A. Drip Pans: Install drip pans under pipes which pass over or close to electrical equipment, operating
rooms, recovery rooms, and intensive care rooms. Support with bars or angles and brace to prevent
sagging or swaying. A drain to be taken from the pan to discharge away from electrical equipment, but
be visible, so that rectification can be implemented.
B. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of the types indicated wherever piping passes through walls, floors
ceilings, roofs and structural members of the work. Provide sleeves of adequate size, accurately
centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation will have free movement in the sleeve,
including allowance for thermal expansion. Where insulation includes a vapour-barrier covering provide
sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation of vapour barrier, but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger
than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, except extend
floor sleeves 6.3 mm above floor finish and, where floor surface drains to a floor drain, extend floor
sleeve 19 mm above floor finish. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and
other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from
entering pipe sleeves.
1. At interior partitions and ceilings install sheet metal sleeves.

2. At exterior penetrations install iron-pipe sleeves, both above and below grade.
3. Except as otherwise indicated, install steel-pipe sleeves.
4. Caulk pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations and at other locations where indicated. Provide sufficient
quantities of oakum and lead to make permanent weather tight closure between sleeve and piping,
slightly recessed at exposed surface.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
02/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to
within the text by the basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the manufacturer of any material
supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the
standard or standards referenced in this specification.
ASHRAE 90.1 - SI (2010) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings
ASHRAE 90.2 (2007; Addendum B 2010) Energy Efficient Design of Low-Rise Residential
Buildings
ASTM A167 (2011) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A240/A240M (2016) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications
ASTM A580/A580M (2016) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM B209M (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate (Metric)
ASTM C1126 (2014) Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1136 (2012) Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1710 (2011) Standard Guide for Installation of Flexible Closed Cell Preformed
Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form
ASTM C195 (2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating
Cement
ASTM C450 (2008) Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers
for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging
ASTM C533 (2013) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C534/C534M (2014) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
Mechanical Specification 23 07 00 - 1 Thermal Insulation

ASTM C547 (2015) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C552 (2016a) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
ASTM C585 (2010) Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing
ASTM C592 (2016) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and
Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type)
ASTM C610 (2015) Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C612 (2014) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
ASTM C647 (2008; R 2013) Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes for
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C795 (2008; R 2013) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in
Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C916 (2014) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
ASTM C920 (2014a) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing
Materials for Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2863 (2013) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-
Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
ASTM D5590 (2000; R 2010; E 2012) Standard Test Method for Determining the
Resistance of Paint Films and Related Coatings to Fungal Defacement by
Accelerated Four-Week Agar Plate Assay
ASTM D882 (2012) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting

ASTM E2231 (2015) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation
Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics
ASTM E2336 (2016) Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure
Systems
ASTM E84 (2016) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM E96/E96M (2016) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 2758 (2014) Paper - Determination of Bursting Strength

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-58 (1993; Reaffirmed 2010) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards
NFPA 90A (2015) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems
NFPA 90B (2015) Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems
NFPA 96 (2014) Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations
TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)
TAPPI T403 OM (2010) Bursting Strength of Paper
MIL-A-24179 (1969; Rev A; Am 2 1980; Notice 1 1987) Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-

Plastic Thermal Insulation
MIL-A-3316 (1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation
MIL-PRF-19565 (1988; Rev C) Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire- and Water-
Resistant, Vapor-Barrier
UL 723 (2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
UL 94 (2013; Reprint Mar 2016) UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of
Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
prevail

1.2.1 General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein; factory-applied insulation is
specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated. Insulation of heat distribution systems outside of buildings
shall be as specified in Section 33 61 13 PRE-ENGINEERED UNDERGROUND HEAT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, Section 33 63
13.19 CONCRETE TRENCH HYDRONIC AND STEAM ENERGY DISTRIBUTION, Section 33 60 02 ABOVEGROUND HEAT
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, and Section 33 61 13.13 PREFABRICATED UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC ENERGY DISTRIBUTION.
efficiency of, insulation etc. This shall be in compliance with ASHRAE 90.1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the
same time for each system.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
MICA Plates;
Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Duct Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Equipment Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems;

Duct Insulation Systems;
Equipment Insulation Systems;
SD-04 Samples
Thermal Insulation;
Display Samples;
Pipe Insulation Systems;

Duct Insulation Systems;
Equipment Insulation Systems;
Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for Caulking, Sealant and Adhesive Materials; S
Recycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials;
1.4.1 Installer Qualification
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years.

Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and placed in storage shall
be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Engineer may reject
insulation material and supplies that become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or
standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use, and samples
required for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand,
and a description of the material, date codes, and approximate shelf life (if applicable). Insulation packages and
containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Thermal Insulation in Plant Rooms,

i) Pipe work:
All pipe work, as listed above, shall be individually insulated with plain performed rigid sections in accordance with B.S.
5422, as applicable.
The sections shall be applied in 1,200 mm. lengths, cut longitudinally into halves and securely attached - to the pipe
work, without gaps, by self-adhesive circumferential bands at 300 mm. centers.
Whenever possible, the longitudinal seams shall be of an interlocking 2 type, to ensure a satisfactory joint.
Where the sections are cut and metered around bends, branches, etc., they shall be fully taped to ensure they are held
rigidly on to the pipe.
The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with the Appendix at the end of this Section of the Specification.
All insulated pipe work fittings and valves shall then be enclosed in fabricated stucco embossed aluminium cladding. The
aluminum cladding shall be not less than 1.0 mm. thick on pipes of 150 mm. dia. and above, and not less than 0.8 mm.
thick on smaller dia. Pipe work.
Cladding shall be applied to bends and branch pipe connections prior to straight lengths as follows:
Riveted 45° metered joints shall clothe bends on pipes up to 50 mm. dia.
Bends on pipes above 50 mm. dia. but below 100 mm. dia. shall be clad by riveted 3 segment lobster back bends.
1) Bends on pipes of 100 mm. dia. and above shall be clad by riveted 5 segment lobster back bends.
2) Branch pipe connections shall be clad by cutting a serrated edge opened out against the main pipe. A profiled
hole to suit in branch pipe shall then be cut in the main pipe straight cladding.
3) Straight pipe cladding shall be rolled to suit the overall insulated pipe dia. and aluminium riveted at 100 mm
centers. The cladding shall be fitted tight to the insulation to ensure a rigid finish. Seams shall be positioned so
as not to be generally visible.
4) All cladding terminations at valves etc. shall be fitted with aluminium end cappings.
ii) Pipe work Fittings:
All valves, flanges, unions, pump casings and other items requiring access for maintenance, shall be insulated
and finished by means of removable 1.0 mm. thick stucco embossed aluminum casings.
The casings shall be fully lined with rigid insulation of the same thickness as that applied to the pipe, securely
fixed to the internal surfaces of the box.
The casings shall be split in two halves with one joint suitably hinged and the other securely fixed by quick
release toggle fasteners. The casing edges shall be folded so as to give double thickness of aluminum on which
to rivet the hinges and fasteners.
Heat bridges between the hot surface and aluminum casings will not be accepted.
Insulation shall be installed to the valve, flange, etc., as detailed under 'Pipe work', to give a continuous vapor
seal and then fitted with a vapor sealed insulated casing.

Where thermostats, gauges, etc., are fitted the cladding shall be neatly cut and fitted with plain aluminum
masking plates.
iii) Ductwork:
Rectangular Ductwork:
All supply and re-circulation, ductwork and fittings, etc. shall be insulated with 50 mm. thick closed cell slabs
insulation with a minimum density of 64 kgs per m3, self-Adhesive Alu-Glass on both sides. All edges shall be
reinforced with 0.6 mm. thick 60 x 60 mm. aluminum angle. Insulation shall then be enclosed in fabricated
stucco embossed aluminum cladding. The aluminum cladding shall be not less than 0.8 mm. thick.
All cladding terminations at valves etc. shall be fitted with aluminum end capping. Fittings on ductwork shall be
insulated as follows: -
1) Supports:
Ductwork supports for insulated ducts shall be as detailed in Section 5.18.6 of DW144, incorporating a rigid
insulator between the -support and ductwork, with the insulation vapour seal being continuous through the
insulator support and NOT over the bracketing.
2) Access Doors:
Access doors shall be of double skin construction incorporating 40mm thick isocyanurate foam insulation,
secured into a frame in the duct by hand-operated cam latches seated on a rubber gasket.
The doors shall stand proud from the ductwork with the insulation abutted and secured with 0.8 mm thick
aluminium angles with mitered corners.
3) Specialized Fittings:
Where test holes, damper arms, thermostats, etc., are installed in the ductwork, the insulation shall be
trimmed to give access and edges shall be vapour sealed and protected from mechanical damage.
4) Flexible Connections:
Ductwork flexible connections to air handling units, fans, Fan Coil Units etc., where a continuation of a vapor
seal is required shall be insulated with approved neoprene flexible connection , bonded with resin and faced
with closed cell insulation. The insulation material shall have a thickness of 40 mm. in plant rooms and 40 mm.
in ceiling voids etc. The insulation shall be arranged to be easily removable and joints shall be sealed with 100
mm. wide with self Adhesive Alu-Glass to form a vapor seal.
2.2 Thermal Insulation Externally Exposed
Where pipes and ducts are installed and exposed externally on roof tops , wall ,site or in other wet areas
internally, (i.e. showers, bath areas, etc.) and in any other positions otherwise shown on the tender drawings,
they shall be insulated as follows:
i) Pipe work:
All pipe work, carrying hot or cold water, shall be individually insulated with plain performed closed cell
sections.
water pipe work shall be individually insulated with closed cell rigid performed sections with all
longitudinal and circumferential joints secured with an approved adhesive.
Self-adhesive tape bands shall be applied to all insulation at approx. 300 mm. centers.
Where bends and offsets occur, insulation shall be tailored to suit.

The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with the Appendix at the end of this Section of the
Specifications.
All insulated pipe work shall then be covered with 0.8mm thick Polyiso-butylene (PlB) or polyethylene
sheeting with 50 mm. overlaps on all circumferential and longitudinal joints. And shall be finally cladded
with 1.2 mm stucco embossed aluminum cladding.
ii) Pipe work Fittings:
All valves, flanges, unions, etc., on all pipe work carrying hot or cold water and steam shall be insulated as
detailed in Plant Rooms, Car Parks And Service Tunnels.
iii) Ductwork (Air Conditioning):

All externally exposed supply, and re-circulation ductwork shall be insulated with 50mm thick, 65 kg/m3 closed
cell insulation rigid slabs of thermal conductivity not more than .037W/mºC. Slabs shall be cut and shaped
carefully and secured to the ductwork with an approved adhesive material of high quality to the entire surface
of both the duct work and insulation slabs and fixed in place immediately.
On bends, branches and changes of direction, the slabs shall be cut into strips, each strip mitered along its edge
and assembled onto the outside and inside contour of the fittings to ensure full coverage of the metal surface.
Where flanges or stiffeners are encountered, these shall be covered by 40 mm. thick half sections of suitable
radius.
All Ductwork shall be finally cladded with 1.2 mm stucco embossed aluminum cladding.
iv) Ductwork Fittings:
All Ductwork shall be finally cladded with 1.2 mm stucco embossed aluminum cladding.
2.3 Thermal Insulation Exposed internally
Where pipes and ducts are exposed and run internal and in any other positions otherwise shown on the tender
drawings, they shall be insulated as follows:
i) Pipe work:
All pipe work, carrying Hot or cold water, shall be individually insulated with plain performed closed cell
insulation sections with all longitudinal and circumferential joints secured with an approved adhesive.
Self-adhesive tape bands shall be applied to all insulation at approx. 300 mm. centers.
Where bends and offsets occur, insulation shall be tailored to suit.
The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with the Appendix at the end of this Section of the
Specifications.
All insulated pipe work shall then be cladded with 0.8mm steel Sheets shall be satin finished. Cladding shall be
prime painted with suitable base primer and finished decoratively with glossy spray paint.
iii) Ductwork (Air Conditioning):

All internally exposed supply, and re-circulation ductwork shall be insulated with 50mm thick, closed cell
blankets of thermal conductivity not more than .037W/mºC. Blankets shall be cut and shaped carefully and
secured to the ductwork with an approved adhesive material of high quality to the entire surface of both the
duct work and insulation slabs and fixed in place immediately.
The insulation shall be fixed by an approved adhesive

All insulated duct works works shall then be cladded with 0.8mm steel Sheets. Steel cladding shall be jointed
by proper spot welding, as they shall be neatly finished. Cladding shall be properly brushed, prime painted
with suitable base primer and finished decoratively with glossy spray paint.
Colors shall be as per engineers instructions.

Cladding shall be applied to all ducts bends and branch connections prior to straight lengths as follows:
i. Bends on ducts up to 150 mm. dia. shall be clad by riveted 5 segment lobster back bends.
ii. Bends on ducts of 200 mm. dia. and above shall be clad by riveted 7 segment lobster back bends.
iii. Branch duct connections shall be clad by cutting a serrated edge opened out against the main
duct. A profiled hole to suit in branch pipe shall then be cut in the main pipe straight cladding.
iv. Straight duct cladding shall be rolled to suit the overall insulated pipe dia. and riveted at 100
mm. centers . The cladding shall be fitted tight to the insulation to ensure a rigid finish. Seams
shall be positioned so as not to be generally visible.
Duct Liner
A. General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TIMA Standard AHC-101.
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II, with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 25 mm (1 inch).
2. Density: 32 kg per cubic meter (2 pounds per cubic foot).
3. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to 0.28 or better, at a mean temperature of 24 deg C (75 deg F).
4. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without evidence of continued
progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 411.
5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or
welding attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when applied as
recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in the duct, and will indefinitely sustain a
23 kg (50-pound) tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.
a. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting more than 3 mm (1/8
inch) into the airstream.
b. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard Classification" of duct
liner system.
SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact
surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness is prohibited.
B. Apply a coat of adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to assure butted edge overlapping.
E. Longitudinal joints in rectangular ducts shall not occur except at corners of ducts, unless the size of the duct and
standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
1. Apply an adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts exceeding 12.7 m/sec. (2,500 FPM) air velocity.

F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm (4 inches) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 300 mm
(12 inches) transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm (3 inches) from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 450 mm (18 inches) longitudinally.
G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that are either channel or "Z"
profile or are integrally formed from the duct wall at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
H. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of the same gage specified for the duct, secured to ducts
with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation. Provide
2.4-mm-diameter (3/32-inch-diameter) perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent.
I. Terminate liner with duct build outs installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other
devices. Fabricated build outs (metal hat sections) or other build out means are optional; when used, secure
build outs to the duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner

SCHEDULE I:
Minimum Thickness of HVAC Pipes Insulation
Internally exposed or Running In

Item Inside the Plant Rooms or tunnels Externally Exposed
Voids, Shafts & Ducts
Pipes Insulation Pipes Insulation Pipes Insulation
Insulation Insulation Insulation
Diameter Thickness Diameter Thickness Diameter Thickness
Material Material Materials
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Closed
Closed cell Closed cell
Refrigerants All pipes 32 All pipes 32 All pipes cell 32
elastomer elastomer
elastomer
B. Minimum Thickness of Insulation for Domestic Water Services
Inside the Plant Rooms or Tunnels In Voids, Shafts & Ducts
Pipes Insulation Insulation Pipes Insulation Insulation

Diameter Material Thickness Diameter Material Thickness
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Domestic cold water system All pipes NA 10 All pipes Closed cell 10
elastomer
For Metallic Pipes Only
Domestic hot water system 15-32 Closed cell 32 15-32 Closed cell 32
elastomer elastomer
40 38 40 38
50-150 50 50-150 50
200-350 63 200-350 63
Externally Exposed Embedded In walls or buried
Pipes Insulation Insulation Pipes Insulation Insulation

Diameter Materials Thickness Diameter Material Thickness
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Domestic cold water system All pipes Closed cell 10

elastomer
For Metallic Pipes Only
Domestic hot water system 15-32 Closed cell 32 15-32 Closed cell 10
elastomer elastomer
40 38 40 15
50-150 50 50-150 32
200-350 63 200-350 50
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 08 00.00 10
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
ACG Commissioning Guideline (2005) Commissioning Guideline

NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
NEBB Commissioning Standard (2009) Procedural Standards for Whole Building Systems
Commissioning of New Construction; 3rd Edition
SMACNA 1429 (1994) HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual, 1st
Edition
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED NC (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental
Design(tm) New Construction Rating System
1.2 DEFINITIONS
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the Commissioning Standard primarily
because the intent of this Section is to use the industry standards specified, along with additional
requirements listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar terms is provided for
clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding ACG, NEBB, or TABB
requirements where differences exist.
Mechanical Specifications 23 08 00 - 1 Commissioning Of HVAC Systems

SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term ACG NEBB TABB
Procedural Standards for SMACNA HVAC

ACG Commissioning
Commissioning Standard Building Systems Commissioning
Guideline
Commissioning Guidelines
TABB Certified
Commissioning ACG Certified NEBB Qualified
Commissioning
Specialist Commissioning Agent Commissioning Administrator
Supervisor
1.3.1 General
Perform Commissioning in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the
Commissioning Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., ACG Commissioning Guideline, NEBB Commissioning
Standard, or SMACNA 1429 unless otherwise stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations and
suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the Commissioning Standard for all
aspects of Commissioning, including qualifications for the Commissioning Firm and Specialist and calibration
of Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are
more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall
be adhered to. All quality assurance provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as performance
guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the
Commissioning Standard, Commissioning procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning Specialist.
Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or
adopted by the body responsible for the Commissioning Standard used (ACG, NEBB, or TABB), the
requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be considered
mandatory.
1.3.2 Energy
Formal LEED NC certification is not required; however, the Contractor is required to provide documentation
that meets the LEED NC Energy & Atmosphere (EA) Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning. For New
Construction and Major Revisions provide, also, documentation that meets EA Credit 3; Enhanced
Commissioning. Provide documentation for as many LEED credits as possible to support LEED Silver
certification of the project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
SD-02 Shop Drawings

Commissioning Plan
SD-03 Product Data
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists

Functional Performance Tests
SD-06 Test Reports
Commissioning Report
SD-07 Certificates
Commissioning Firm
Commissioning Specialist
1.5.1 Commissioning Firm

Submit certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm's qualifications to perform the duties specified
herein and in other related Sections, no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. Include in the
documentation the date that the Certification was initially granted and the date when the current
Certification expires. The firm is either a member of ACG or certified by the NEBB or the TABB and certified
in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and
specifications. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm or disciplinary action taken
by ACG, NEBB, or TABB against the proposed Commissioning Firm shall be described in detail. The
certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the
firm loses subject certification during this period, immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit
another Commissioning Firm for approval. Any firm that has been the subject of disciplinary action by the
ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not eligible to perform any
duties related to the HVAC systems, including Commissioning. All work specified in this Section and in other
related Sections to be performed by the Commissioning Firm shall be considered invalid if the
Commissioning Firm loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an
approved successor. These Commissioning services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the
quality oversight for which it is responsible. The Commissioning Firm shall be a subcontractor of the prime
Contractor and shall be financially and corporately independent of all other subcontractors. The
Commissioning Firm shall report to and be paid by the prime Contractor.
1.5.2 Commissioning Specialist
1.5.2.1 General
Submit certification of the proposed Commissioning Specialist's qualifications to perform the duties
specified herein and in other related Sections, no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. The
documentation shall include the date that the Certification was initially granted and the date when the
current Certification expires. The Commissioning Specialist shall be an ACG Certified Commissioning Agent,
a NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator, or a TABB Certified Commissioning Supervisor and shall be
an employee of the approved Commissioning Firm. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed
Commissioning Specialist or disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or TABB against the proposed
Commissioning Specialist shall be described in detail. The certification shall be maintained for the entire
duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Commissioning Specialist loses subject
certification during this period, immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another
Commissioning Specialist for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by the
ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not eligible to perform any

duties related to the HVAC systems, including Commissioning. All work specified in this Section and in other
related Sections performed by the Commissioning Specialist shall be considered invalid if the Commissioning
Specialist loses certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by the approved
successor.
1.5.2.2 Responsibilities
Perform all Commissioning work specified herein and in related sections under the direct guidance of the
Commissioning Specialist. The Commissioning Specialist shall prepare, no later than 28 days after the
approval of the Commissioning Specialist, the Commissioning Plan which will be a comprehensive schedule
and will include all submittal requirements for procedures, notifications, reports and the Commissioning
Report. After approval of the Commissioning Plan, revise the Contract NAS schedule to reflect the schedule
requirements in the Commissioning Plan.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Begin the work described in this Section only after all work required in related Sections has been
successfully completed, and all test and inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals
required in these Sections have been submitted and approved. Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists
shall be performed at appropriate times during the construction phase of the Contract.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND TEST FORMS AND CHECKLISTS
Designate Contractor team members to participate in the Pre- Functional Performance Test Checklists and
the Functional Performance Tests specified herein. In addition, the client team members will include a
representative of the Contracting Officer, the Design Agent's Representative, and the Using Agency's
Representative. The team members shall be as follows:
Designation Function
A Contractor's Commissioning Specialist
M Contractor's Mechanical Representative
E Contractor's Electrical Representative
T Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist
C Contractor's Controls Representative
D Design Firm Representative
O Engineer’s Representative
U Client’s Representative
Appendices A and B shall be completed by the commissioning team. Acceptance by each commissioning
team member of each Pre- Functional Performance Test Checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date
unless an "X" is shown indicating that participation by that individual is not required. Acceptance by each
commissioning team member of each functional performance test item shall be indicated by signature and
date.

3.2 TESTS
Perform the pre-functional performance test checklists and functional performance tests in a manner that
essentially duplicates the checking, testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections.
Where checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other Sections, establish methods
which will provide the information required. Testing and verification required by this section shall be
performed during the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are independent from the
requirements of this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any of the requirements specified in this Section.
Provide all materials, services, and labor required to perform the pre- functional performance tests checks
and functional performance tests. A functional performance test shall be aborted if any system deficiency
prevents the successful completion of the test or if any participating commissioning team member of which
participation is specified is not present for the test.
3.2.1 Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists
Perform Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists, for the items indicated in Appendix A, at least 28 days
prior to the start of Pre-Functional Performance Test Checks.. Correct and re-inspect deficiencies discovered
during these checks in accordance with the applicable contract requirements. Submit the schedule for the
test checks at least 14 days prior to the start of Pre-Functional Performance Test Checks.
3.2.2 Functional Performance Tests
Submit test procedures at least 28 days prior to the start of Functional Performance Tests. Submit the
schedule for the tests at least 14 days prior to the start of Functional Performance Tests. Perform Functional
Performance Tests for the items indicated in Appendix B. Begin Functional Performance Tests only after all
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists have been successfully completed. Tests shall prove all modes of
the sequences of operation, and shall verify all other relevant contract requirements. Begin Tests with
equipment or components and progress through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any
Functional Performance Test item, correct all deficiencies in accordance with the applicable contract
requirements. The item shall then be retested until it has been completed with no errors.
3.3 COMMISSIONING REPORT
Submit the Commissioning Report, no later than 14 days after completion of Functional Performance Tests,
consisting of completed Pre- Functional Performance Test Checklists and completed Functional Performance
Tests organized by system and by subsystem and submitted as one package. The Commissioning Report shall
also include all HVAC systems test reports, inspection reports (Preparatory, Initial and Follow-up inspections),
start-up reports, TAB report, TAB verification report, Controls start-up test reports and Controls Performance
Verification Test (PVT) report. The results of failed tests shall be included along with a description of the
corrective action taken.
APPENDIX A
PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Multizone Air Handling Unit

For Air Handling Unit:
Checklist Item
Installation A M E T C O
a. Inspection and access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b.
Condensate drainage is unobstructed.
(Visually verify pan drains completely by ___ ___ X X X ___
pouring a cup of water into drain pan.)
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Electrical A M E T C O
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X X ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is located
___ X ___ X X ___
within sight of the unit it controls.
e. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ X ___ X X ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
b. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Hot water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
d. Steam and condensate piping properly
___ ___ X X X ___
Connected.
Controls A M E T C O
a. Control valves/actuators properly
___ X X X ___ ___
installed.
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
c. O/A dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ X X X ___ ___
d. O/A dampers/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Multizone
Air Handling Unit (cont) A M E T C O
e. Zone dampers/actuators properly installed & dampers

___ X X X ___ ___
leak checked.
f. Zone dampers/actuators operable ___ X X X ___ ___
g. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) A M E T C O
h. Construction filters removed and replaced. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
i. TAB report approved. ___ X X ___ X
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - DX Air Cooled Condensing Unit
For Condensing Unit: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Check condenser fans for proper rotation. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of
___ X ___ X ___ ___
the unit it controls

a. Unit safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

b. Control system and interlocks installed. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Control system and interlocks operational. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Pumps
For Pump: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Piping system installed. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Power available to pump disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Pump rotation verified. ___ X ___ X X ___
c. Control system interlocks functional. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) A M E T C O
a. Pressure/temperature gauges installed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Packaged Air Cooled Chiller
For Chiller: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Chiller properly piped. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
c. Separate power is supplied to electric heating tape. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of
___ X ___ X ___ ___
the unit it controls.
a. Factory startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Chiller safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Chilled water flow switch installed. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
d. Chilled water flow switch tested. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
e. Chilled water pump interlock installed ___ ___ X X X ___
f. Chilled water pump interlock tested. ___ ___ ___ X
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Exhaust Fan
For Exhaust Fan: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to fan disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___
c. Verify that power disconnect is located
___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
Within sight of the unit it controls.
a. Control interlocks properly installed. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Control interlocks operable. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
e. Verify proper location and installation of
___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
Thermostat.

a. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Computer Room Unit
For Computer Room Unit: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed and
___ ___ X X X ___
Routed to floor drain.
c. Fan belt adjusted.
___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
___ X ___ X ___ ___
e. Power available to reheat coils. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
Coils/Humidifier A M E T C O
a. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
c. Hot water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Steam piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
e. Humidifier makeup water connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Control valves operable. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Unit control system operable and verified ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Verify proper location and installation of
___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
Thermostat.
a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC System Controls
For HVAC System: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Layout of control panel matches drawings. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Framed instructions mounted in or near
___ ___ X X ___ ___
Control panel.
c. Components properly labeled (on inside and
___ ___ X X ___ ___
Outside of panel).
d. Control components piped and/or wired to
___ ___ X X ___ ___
Each labeled terminal strip.
e. EMCS connection made to each labeled
___ ___ X X ___ ___
Terminal strip as shown.
f. Control wiring and tubing labeled at all
___ ___ X X ___ ___
terminations, splices, and junctions
Main Power and Control Air A M E T C O
a. 220volt AC power available to panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. 138 kPa gauge
___ ___ X X ___ ___
Compressed air available to panel.
a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit

b. For Air Handling Unit: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Inspection and access doors are operable
___ ___ X ___ X ___
And sealed.
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___
___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
e. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
c. Hot water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Steam and condensate piping properly
___ ___ X X X ___
Connected.
a. Control valves/actuators properly installed ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
e. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
a. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Energy Recovery System
For Energy Recovery System: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Recovery system piping installed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Startup A M E T C O
a. Startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Control valves/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

APPENDIX B
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS
Functional Performance Test - Pump
NOTE: Prior to performing this test, for closed loop systems ensure that the system is pressurized and the make-up
water system is operational, or for open loop systems ensure that the sumps are filled to the proper level.
1. Activate pump start using control system commands.
a. Verify correct operation in:
HAND__________ OFF__________ AUTO__________
b. Verify pressure drop across strainer:
Strainer inlet pressure __________ kPa gauge
Strainer outlet pressure _________ kPa gauge
c. Verify pump inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report and pump
design conditions.
DESIGN TAB ACTUAL
Pump inlet pressure kPa gauge _________ __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure kPa gauge _________ __________ __________
d. Operate pump at shutoff and at 100 percent of designed flow when all components are in full flow. Plot test
readings on pump curve and compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent

Pump inlet pressure kPa gauge __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure kPa gauge __________ __________
Pump flow rate L/s __________ __________
SETPOINT
Differential Pressure Transmitter __________ __________
Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump
e. For variable speed pumps, operate pump at shutoff (shutoff to be done in manual on variable speed drive at the
minimum rpm that the system is being controlled at) and at minimum flow or when all components are in full by-
pass. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent

Pump inlet pressure kPa gauge __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure kPa gauge __________ __________
Pump flow rate L/s __________ __________
SETPOINT
Differential Pressure Transmitter __________ __________
2. Measure motor amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase to ground for both the full flow and
the minimum flow conditions. Compare amperage to nameplate FLA.
a. Full flow:
Nameplate FLA __________
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________
b. Minimum flow:
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________

3. Note unusual vibration, noise, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump
4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item
tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative _____________________________
Contracting Officer's Representative _____________________________
Design Agency Representative _____________________________
Using Agency's Representative _____________________________

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit
For Air Handling Unit:
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air handling unit in accordance with specification
including the following:
a. Ensure that a slight negative pressure exists on inboard side of the outside air dampers throughout the
operation of the dampers. Modulate OA, RA, and EA dampers from fully open to fully closed positions.
b. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan operating] [supply and return fans operating] mode is
initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position prior to fan start ___________.
(2) All valves in normal position prior to fan start ___________.
(3) System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. _____.
c. Occupied mode of operation - economizer de-energized.
(1) Outside air damper at minimum position.______________________
(2) Return air damper open.______________________________________
(3) Relief air damper [at minimum position][closed].____________
(4) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space cooling temperature set point.
Set point _______ deg C
Actual _______ deg C
(5) Hot water control valve modulating to maintain space heating temperature set point input from outside air
temperature controller. ______
d. Occupied mode of operation - economizer energized.
(1) Outside air damper modulated to maintain mixed air temperature set point.
Set point _______deg C Actual _____deg C O/A damper position ___________ percent Return Air
Temperature _____ deg C outside Air Temperature _______ deg C
(2) Relief air damper modulates with outside air damper according to sequence of operation. Relief air damper
position ________ percent.

(2) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space cooling temperature set point.
Set point _______ deg C Actual _____ deg C Return sensor overrides to normal operation.
e. Unoccupied mode of operation.
(1) Observe fan starts when space temperature calls for heating/cooling ____.
(2) All dampers in normal position. _________________________
(3) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as specified in sequence of operation.
f. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan off][supply and return fans off] mode is initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position. ______________________________
(2) All valves in normal position. ______________________________
(3) Fan de-energizes. ______________________________
g. Verify cooling coil and heating coil operation by varying thermostat set point from cooling set point to heating
set point and returning to cooling set point________.
h. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection thermostat________.
i. Verify occupancy schedule is programmed into time clock/UMCS________.
2. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the
item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ____________________________
Functional Performance Test Checklist - Packaged Air Cooled Chiller
For Chiller:
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of chilled water system in accordance with
specifications including the following: Start building air handler to provide load for chiller. Activate controls system
chiller start sequence as follows.

a) Start chilled water pump and establish chilled water flow. Verify chiller-chilled water proof-of-flow switch
operation. ____________
b) Record outdoor air temperature. ____________
c) Verify control system energizes chiller start sequence. ________
d) Verify chiller senses chilled water temperature above set point and control system activates chiller start.
Setpoint_____deg C Actual_____ deg C
e) Verify functioning of "soft start" sequence. ___________________
f) Verify and record chiller data in accordance with 2, 3 and 4 below on fully loaded chiller.
g) Shut off air handling equipment to remove load on chilled water system. Verify chiller shutdown sequence is
initiated and accomplished after load is removed. ___________________________________________
h) Restart air handling equipment one minute after chiller shut down. Verify chiller restart sequence.
________________________________
2. Verify chiller inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report,
chiller design conditions, and chiller manufacturer's performance data.
DESIGN TAB TEST ACTUAL
Chiller inlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ __________ __________

Chiller outlet pressure (kPa gauge) __________ __________ __________
Chiller flow L/sec __________ __________ __________
3. Verify chiller amperage each phase and voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
Motor F/L AMPS
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3_______
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3_______
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd_______
Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - Packaged Air Cooled Chiller
4. Record the following information:
Design
Outdoor air temperature ___________ degrees C

Ambient dry bulb temperature ___________ degrees C _____degrees C
Entering chilled water temperature ___________ degrees C _____degrees C
Leaving chilled water temperature ___________ degrees C _____degrees C
Calculate chiller load at ambient conditions and compare to chiller rated capacity from manufacturers
Literature. Calculated ________ KWs Rated ________ KWs.
5. Unusual vibration, noise, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
6. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify
that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Fan Coil Units and Air Coolers
The Contracting Officer will select fan coil units to be spot-checked during the functional performance test.
The number of terminals shall not exceed 10 percent. Hot water and chilled water systems must be in
operation providing design water temperatures.
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of selected fan coils in accordance
with specifications including the following:
a. Cooling only fan coils:
(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temp set point adjustment.
1. Check blower fan airflow. _____ L/s

2. Check cooling coil water flow. _____ L/s
3. Verify proper operation of cooling water control valve.______
4. Cooling mode inlet air temperature ______deg C
5. Cooling mode outlet air temperature______deg C
6. Calculate coil sensible capacity and compare to design:
Calculated _______Watts Design______Watts
b. Cooling/heating fan coils:
(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temp set point adjustment.
1. Check blower fan airflow. _____ L/s

2. Check cooling coil water flow. _____ L/s
3. Verify proper operation of cooling water control valve. ____
4. Check cooling mode inlet air temperature. _____deg C
5. Check cooling mode outlet air temperature. _____deg C
6. Calculate cooling coil sensible capacity and compare to design:
7. Calculated _________Watts Design_____Watts
8. Check heating coil water flow. _____ L/s
9. Verify proper operation of heating water control valve. _____
10. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ deg C
11. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____deg C
12. Calculate heating coil capacity and compare to design:
Calculated______Watts design_______Watts

Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ____________________________

Contractor's Mechanical Representative ____________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative ____________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ____________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative ____________________________
Design Agency Representative ____________________________
Contracting Officer's Representative ____________________________
Using Agency's Representative ____________________________
Functional Performance Test Checklist - Unit Heaters
The Contracting Officer will select unit heaters to be spot-checked during the functional performance test. The number
of terminals shall not exceed 10 percent. Hot water systems (for hot water unit heaters) must be in operation and
supplying design hot water supply temperature water.
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of selected unit heaters:
a. Verify unit heater response to room temperature set point

adjustment.___________________________________
b. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ deg C
c. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____ deg C
d. Record manufacturer's submitted fan capacity _____L/s
e. Calculate unit heater capacity using manufacturer's fan capacity and recorded temperatures and
compare to design.
f. Calculated_____Watts Design______Watts

2. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that
the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ___________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative ___________________________
Design Agency Representative ___________________________
Contracting Officer's Representative ___________________________
Using Agency's Representative ___________________________

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Computer Room Unit
For Computer Room Unit:
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of computer room unit in accordance
with specification including the following:
a. System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ______
b. Verify cooling and heating operation by varying thermostat set point from space set point to space set point
plus 5.5 degrees, space set point minus 5.5 degrees, and returning to space set point. ________________
c. Verify humidifier operation by varying humidistat set point from space set point to space set point plus 20
percent RH, and returning to space set point.
_________________________________________________________________
d. Verify that airflow is within tolerance specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF
HVAC SYSTEMS. ________________________________________________________
Signature and Date

Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC Controls
For HVAC System:
The Contracting Officer will select HVAC control systems to undergo functional performance testing. The number of
systems shall not exceed 10 percent. Perform this test simultaneously with FPT for AHU or other controlled equipment.
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of HVAC controls by performing the Performance
Verification Test (PVT) test for that system. Contractor to provide blank PVT test procedures previously done by the
controls Contractor.
a. Verify interlock with UMCS system______.
b. Verify all required I/O points function from the UMCS system_____.
2. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the Performance Verification Test and certify that the
item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Energy Recovery System
For Energy Recovery System:
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of energy recovery system in accordance
with specifications including the following: Start equipment to provide energy source for recovery system.
a. Verify energy source is providing recoverable energy.____________
b. Verify recovery system senses available energy and activates.____
2. Verify recovery system inlet/outlet readings, compare to design conditions and manufacturer's performance data.
Design Actual
Primary loop inlet temp (degrees C) __________ __________
Primary loop outlet temp (degrees C) __________ __________
Primary loop flow rate L/s __________ __________
Secondary loop inlet temp (degrees C) __________ __________
Secondary loop outlet temp (degrees C) __________ __________
Secondary loop flow rate L/s __________ __________
Primary loop energy Watts’s __________ __________
Secondary loop energy Watts’s __________ __________
3. Verify that recovery system deactivates when recoverable energy is no longer available.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
4. Check and report unusual vibration, noise, etc.

______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________

Signature and Date
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 09 13.34 40
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Extent of Work: The requirements of this Section apply to the piping work as shown on Drawings and
specified in other sections of these specifications.

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of valves, of types and sizes required, and
which have been in satisfactory use for not less than five year in similar service.
B. Inspection of Castings: Provide valve bodies, bonnets and discs which have been inspected in
accordance with manufacturer's standard written quality control procedure.
1. Marking of Valves: All valves shall have the manufacturer's name, material designation, pressure
rating and size clearly marked on the outside of the body. In addition, all globe and check valves shall
have arrow indication of flow direction.
2. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer.
C. Hydrostatic Testing of Valves: Provide valves which have been tested in accordance with manufacturer's
standard written test procedure and the applicable BS or ANSI Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Preferred Manufacturers: Product names are given to indicate the quality or standard required in making
a submission, but the Contractor is free to submit for approval materials or goods or alternative
manufacturers provided they are not of a lesser standard than the named project.
B. Manufacturer's Data, Valves:
1. Submit manufacturer's product data including dimensions, sizes, end-connections, weights, and
installation instructions.
2. Include instructions on repacking and repairing valves.
3. Include data indicating Code compliance and optional features.
4. Include required reports as prepared by manufacturers of valves.
Mechanical Specifications 23 09 13.34 40 - 1 Valves

A. Provide manufacturer's standard temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves, and provide
factory-applied end-caps on valves. Maintain coating and end-caps through shipping, storage and
handling, in adequate conditions to inhibit corrosion, prevent damage and eliminate dirt and moisture
from inside of valves. During transportation and delivery, handle valves with care, using adequate lifting
equipment. Do not drop or abuse valves. Store valves inside and protect from weather. Where coating
has been removed or damaged, and where valves are in environment which could reasonably be
expected to cause rusting, protect valves with separate, durable, waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVE TYPES AND SIZES

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated valves of the type, body material and
pressure class for use in service indicated. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide
proper selection as determined by installation requirements, with pressure class selected from BS
standards based on the maximum pressure and temperature in the piping system. Except as otherwise
indicated, provide valve sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and
equipment connections. Valves larger than 50 mm diameter shall be rated PN16. Valve shall be flanged
made of cast iron body and bronze trim. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is
Contractor's option.
B. Gate Valves:
1. Packing: Select valves, equipped with packing suitable for intended service and designed for
repacking. Select valves designed so back seating protects packing and stem threads from fluid when
valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland follower.
C. Globe Valves:
1. Packing: Select valves, equipped with packing suitable for intended service and designed for
repacking. Select valves designed so back seating protects packing and stem threads from fluid when
valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland follower.
2. Composition Discs: Where required, provide suitable material for intended service. For steam
throttling service, fit composition disc valve with throttling nut. For metal-seated globe valves,
provide hardened stainless steel disc and seat ring.
D. Drain Valves:
1. For Low Pressure Drainage Service: Ball valve, threaded Ends 50 mm and Smaller: Nominal pressure
PN 16, Series B, bronze body, lever operated quarter turn, brass ball, PTFE seat, complying to BS 2872
& 2874, threads to BS 21 with hose adapter.
E. Ball Valves:
1. General: Select with port area equal to or greater than connecting pipe area, include seat ring
designed to hold sealing material.
2. For Gas Service: Valve size 15 mm to 100 mm: Working pressure 17 bar, and the following
characteristics:

a. Forged bronze body.

b. Chrome-plated bronze ball, which seals in both directions.
c. Buna-N stem seals (Teflon on 100 mm valve) to guard against leakage.
d. Blowout proof stem, dual-seal.
e. Quarter-turn of the handle to completely open or close.
f. 13 thru 100 mm valves provided with copper tubing extensions brazed to valve flanges.
F. Swing Check Valves:
1. Provide valves of bronze, regrinding, with seating angle 40° to 45°, unless composition disc is
specified.
2. Provide stop plug as renewable stop for disc hanger, unless otherwise specified.
3. Provide disc and hanger as separate parts, with disc free to rotate.
4. Provide support hanger pins on both ends by removable side plugs.
5. For Domestic Water Service: Threaded Ends 50 mm and Smaller: Nominal pressure PN 32, Series A,
bronze body, screwed cap, horizontal swing, bronze disc, complying with BS 5154, threads to BS 21.
G. Lift Check Valves:
1. General: Provide lift check valves, constructed of bronze or cast iron to suit service. Select valves of
temperature/pressure rating (PN) to match operating conditions and with pressure containing parts
of materials having at least physical properties of BS 1400 for bronze and BS 1452, grade 220 for cast
iron valves. Castings shall be free of any impregnating materials.
a. Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Size to 50 mm, straight pattern, threaded ends, pressure rated for
10 bar saturated steam, renewable composition disc, screw-over cap, bronze body, complying
with BS5154, Series 13, Threads to BS 21.
b. Vertical Lift Check Valves: Size to 50 mm, straight vertical pattern, threaded ends, pressure rated
for 10 bar saturated steam renewable composition disc, screw-in hub, bronze body complying
with BS 5154, Series B, threads to BS 21.
c. Air Compressor Lift Check Valves: Size to 50 mm, straight pattern, threaded ends, pressure rated
for 20 bar air, flat stainless steel disc, renewable stainless steel seat ring, stainless steel spring,
screw-in cap, bronze body threads to BS 21.
d. Spring Loaded Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Size to 50 mm straight pattern, threaded ends,
pressure rated for 10 bar saturated steam, renewable composition disc, phosphor bronze wire
spring, screw-over cap, bronze body threads to BS 21.

H. Double Regulating Valves:
1. Balancing valves up to size 50 mm dia shall be of bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and
carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves to have differential pressure readout ports across valve seat area.
Read out ports to be fitted with internal EPTA insert and check valve. Valve bodies to have 6 mm NPT
tapped drain/purge port. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service
and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position.
All valves to have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. Valves to be leak tight at full
rated working pressure. All valves to be provided with moulded insulation to permit access for
balance and read out.
2. Balancing valves size 65 mm dia and above shall be of heavy duty cast iron flanged construction with
flanged connections to BS 4504 suitable up to 175 psi working pressure.
Valves size 65 and 80mm dia shall have a brass ball with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves
size 100mm dia and above shall be fitted with a bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seat
insert and stainless steel stem. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for
service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. All valves to have
calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. Valves to be leak tight at full rated working
pressure. All valves to be provided with moulded insulation to permit access for balance and read
out.
I. Suction Diffusers:
1. An angle pattern flow straightening suction diffuser shall be installed at the chilled or heating water
pump suction connection as an option, and mandatory if the required straight length of pipe at pump
suction connection cannot be provided due to site constraints. Each fitting shall be equipped with a
combination diffuser strainer orifice cylinder, flow straightening vanes, start-up strainer, permanent
magnet and adjustable support foot.
2. The combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential

equal to the system pump shutoff head and shall have a free area equal to five times the cross
section area of the pump suction opening. The length of the flow straightening vanes shall be no less
than 2 times the diameter of the system pump suction connection.
3. The flow straightening fitting shall be of cast iron construction with flanged system and flanged pump
connections. The fitting shall have a carbon steel combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder with
3/16 diameter perforations to protect the system pump. The full length carbon steel flow
straightening vanes shall provide non turbulent flow to the suction side for the system pump. The
magnet shall be positioned in the flow stream to protect the pump seal(s). The start-up strainer shall
be of 16 mesh bronze and the adjustable support foot shall eliminate pipe strain at the flow
fitting/pump connection. All internal components shall be replaceable.

J. Butterfly Valves:
1. Butterfly valves shall have cast or ductile iron body with resilient replaceable EPDM seat and shall be
of the lugged wafer type, extended neck.
Disc shall be aluminum bronze or stainless steel. Operator shall be infinite position with memory
stop for sizes up to 150mm and gear drive for sizes 200mm dia. and above.
Pressure rating shall be at 16 bars.
K. Strainers:
1. Strainers shall be full line size located ahead of all pumps and in locations as indicated on drawings.
Bodies shall be bronze, screwed body, ‘Y’ type, up to 50 mm size with 37% open mesh Monel or
stainless steel metal screen & 1.4 mm dia. holes.
For sizes 65 mm and above, Iron body, flanged, “Y” type bolted cover flanged, tapped blow-off
outlet, 37% open mesh Monel or stainless steel metal screen, with 1.4 mm diameter holes.
L. Air Vents :
1. Provide air vents at all high points in supply and return chilled and heating water piping.
2. Automatic air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats and
guides and non-corrodible valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a lock
shield valve. Air release pipes shall be run to discharge at the nearest visible point – to be agreed
with the Engineer.
2.2 VALVE FEATURES
A. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide proper
valve features as determined by installation requirements.
1. Bypass: Provide manufacturer's standard bypass piping and valving where indicated on the
drawings.
2. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with BS 4504 (cast iron).
3. Threaded: Valve ends complying with BS 3643 (bronze).
4. Solder-Joint: Valve ends complying with BS 864, Part 2.
B. Trim: Valve components sustaining system pressure including stems (shafts) and seats shall be
manufactured from bronze materials, of standard alloy recognized in valve manufacturing industry:
1. Non-Metallic Disc: Non-Metallic material selected for service indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's published literature.
2. Renewable Seat: Design seat of valve with removable disc, and assemble valve so disc can be
replaced when worn.
3. Extended Stem: Increase stem length by 50 mm minimum, to accommodate insulation applied

over valve.
4. Inside Screw, Non-Rising Stem: Stem and hand wheel designed to rotate without rising when valve is
operated from closed to open position.

Schedule of Valves and Appliances

Pressure rating of all valves and appliances shall be suitable for the operating conditions of which they will be installed,
and shall not be less than the specified PN rating.
Size (DN) Valve / Fitting Details Application BS No. PN
Bronze gate valve; non-rising extended stem; to

5154 Series 13 screwed (F) screwed Bonnet; 5154 16
one piece wedge; ends screwed BS 21 Taper
Up to 50 thread stainless steel trim and spindle. In Isolating
compliance with NSF or NRC
BS 5154 and BS 5150 (flanged) high-grade cast

iron bodes, epoxy painted inside with full way
Isolating 5150 16
bore, stainless steel trim and spindle. . In
65 - 200 Cast iron butterfly valve, Fully lugged through

bolted. With replaceable elastomer seat, hand
wheel and gearbox operated; capped for end of Isolating/
5154 16
line service where specified. Throttling
In compliance with NSF or NRC

Domestic
Pump
Cast iron straight pattern globe valve; bronze
discharge
50 - 150 trim; Flanged BS 4504 stainless steel trim and 5152 16
And softened Throttling
spindle. In compliance with NSF or NRC
water Systems and Isolating
Cast iron butterfly valve, Fully lugged through

bolted. With replaceable elastomer seat, Isolating/
hand wheel and gearbox operated; capped for Throttling
150 - 250 1873 16
end of line service where specified.
(High Duty)
In compliance with NSF or NRC
Balancing valve with position indicator drain

connection & 2 No. pressure cocks complete Regulating
200-450 5155 16
with plug type disc with logarithmic valves
characteristic In compliance with NSF or NRC
Cast iron butterfly valve; replaceable elastomer

seat; 50 - 100mm lever operated, 150- 300mm
Isolating and
hand wheel and gearbox operated; 'U' water
80-250 Coarse 5155 16
type, through bolted. Fully lugged, tapped for
throttling
end of line service where specified. In

Schedule of Valves and Appliances

Pressure rating of all valves and appliances shall be suitable for the operating conditions of which they will be installed,
and shall not be less than the specified PN rating.
Size (DN) Valve / Fitting Details Application BS No. PN
316 stainless steel –Plug and socket quick

coupling, with PTFE seal Released by side Quick release
All sizes push buttons. Complete with stainless steel 50
coupling
fascia and suitable for high pressure
application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements:
1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in
branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so
that separate support can be provided when necessary.
2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems
pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end
adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.
B. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper manner to
receive insulation.
C. Applications Subject to Shock: Install valves with bodies of metal other than cast iron where thermal or
mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur.
D. Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to locations indicated
and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shut off of metal seated
valves.
E. Applications Subject to Corrosion: Do not install bronze valves and valve components in direct contact
with steel, unless bronze and steel are separated by dielectric insulator. Install bronze valves in
condensate service and in other services where corrosion is indicated or can be expected to occur.
F. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.
G. Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install gate, ball or globe valves complying with the
applicable BS. Where throttling is indicated or recognized as principal reason for valve, install globe
valves.
H. Install Check Valves where indicated and where flow reversal is obviously not desirable but can be
expected to occur.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 09 23
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
Automatic control systems shall be of the electronic type as described in the attached documents. Unless
otherwise specified control systems shall be energized as follows:
Electric Control Systems 220 volts Electronic Control Systems - Standard 24 volts Electronic Control Systems -
D.D.C. 0-10 volts
The installation may be a single system or a combination of systems.
All controls shall be capable to operate in ambient conditions varying between 0-55C and 90% R.H. non-
condensing.
All control equipment including all control valves, dampers and actuators shall be selected sized and rated to
suit the application and operating conditions of the systems in which they are installed to provide stable and
repeatable performance of the systems being controlled.
All items of control equipment shall be compatible within any system, between systems and with controlled
equipment. All items of control equipment shall be sited such that access for adjustment and maintenance
purposes is not impeded. However, where items of control equipment are mounted in accessible positions
within normally occupied areas, the control items shall be provided with secure tamper proof enclosures to
prevent unauthorized interference.
Control systems shall be arranged such that, in the event of electrical power failure or other abnormal
operating conditions, inherent fail-safe features are provided to equipment and systems to prevent
potentially hazardous conditions arising.
The sensitivity of sensors and the speed of response of actuators shall be selected for complete compatibility
with the system application requirements.
Basic adjustments for original setting of controls such as control characteristics, sensitivity, set points, anti-
hunting adjustments, timers, set back and boost, shall be contained and concealed in tamper-proof, lockable
panels.
All controllers shall be provided with built-in adjustable neutral zone. All control components shall be of high
quality, low risk rate and of long term reliability for both continuous and intermittent use and shall maintain
accuracy and high repeatability of commissioned performance.
Where equipment requires less than 220 volts supply, all necessary voltage transformers shall be provided
either separately or integrated with the various packaged equipment. Equipment requiring D.C. supply shall
be provided with all necessary current rectifiers and shall be suitable for the connected loads.
Mechanical Specifications 23 09 23 - 1 Direct Digital Control System

1.1 Direct Digital Controller (DDC’s)
DDC > 20 I/O General
Direct digital controllers (DDC’s) shall be of the fully intelligent type, capable of performing all Control and
Energy Management functions assigned to them, independent of any other home automation terminal.
Direct digital controllers may be of modular or fixed hardware construction or a combination of both. direct
digital controllers requiring fan cooling are not acceptable.
All DDC’s shall incorporate dual Flash Memory for the storage of the O/S. Whilst the DDC site specific
data files is being processed the active O/S it shall be possible locally, by any client or remotely via the WAN
capability to download a new O/S into the dormant area of memory and to switch over to the new O/S either
at a specific time or on request. This switch process shall take no more than 3 seconds to occur and provide
seamless operation of the plant. The Use of EPROM’s within a controller to store the controller O/S
(Operating System) are not acceptable due to the high cost of upgrading and the associated downtime.
In the event of total memory loss of the DDC, or the expiration of back-up power, or on start-up of the
unit the necessary data-base shall be downloaded from a back-up terminal automatically and without user
instruction. Controllers requiring a manual intervention for the re-loading of applications software are not
acceptable.
The DDC shall have a self-analysis feature with in-built diagnostics and shall transmit any malfunction
messages to the designated terminal.
An RS 232 port shall also be made available at the DDC for connection of either a user terminal, Win CE
device or a modem.
A connection capability shall be included for a communications module either ARCNET or Ethernet as
described in section 2.0 shall be included as standard to provide flexible topology and expandability.
The DDC shall have its own real time clock and calendar to enable full stand alone operation. Each DDC’s shall
incorporate points to indicate the DDC Real Time Clock actual time, and number of hours in service.
The DDC shall automatically align its totalised parameters such as hours run, meter points, self learning
parameters with the designated backup terminal at least once per day.
All software required to perform the operational functions of the system under normal operation shall be
resident in the DDC Flash memory.
In the event of the failure of communications between the DDC and the users
terminal, alarms, reports and logs shall be stored at the DDC and transmitted to the terminal on restoration
of communications with a fully managed retry sequence based on priority and time. DDC’s shall store a
minimum of 200 alarms DDC’s in excess of 32 I/O shall store a minimum of 500 alarms and 25 Logs per point.
In order to optimise the operation and speed of processing of points in the controller The system shall
individually configure whether a point is processed:-
-On each scan
-On every number of scans

-On a time boundary
Where information is required to be transmitted between controllers for the sharing of data such as outside
air temperature, it shall be possible for global points to be allocated such that information may be
transmitted either on change of status or at specific time intervals.
The system shall be capable of adding new controllers to the system without recourse to the manufacturer
and without taking any part of the system off-line.
The controller shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the following hardware point types:-
ANALOGUE INPUTS - inputs each with 12bit resolution minimum shall be provided. Each input shall be
capable of accepting typically signals of 0 -10Vdc, 0-20mA, 0-10 ma, 0-1 ma or 0-10K ohms. The specialist
manufacturer shall provide suitable sensors and transducers to carry out the analogue monitoring shown on
the point schedule.
ANALOGUE OUTPUT POINTS. - outputs each with 8 bit resolution minimum for modulating signal capability
shall be provided (1 ma per channel max. at 10V output).
DIGITAL INPUTS - Voltage free SPST contacts (open/closed) <10K Ohms closed, >1M Ohms open.
PULSE INPUTS - Voltage free SPST contacts (open/closed) <10K Ohms closed, >1M Ohms open. These shall
support a frequency of 10Hz. These inputs shall equally be able to be used for electrical maximum demand
calculations.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS - Voltage free contact (rated at 230Vac 1A resistive) ON/OFF/AUTO override switches shall
be integral and provided for each output including future expansion capability.
In order to provide greater flexibility in the combinations of different hardware points it shall be possible in
the software for analogue points (input and output) to be used in a digital mode, for the starting and
stopping of motors or for the input of on/off information via the use of modules.
The specialist manufacturer shall provide suitable actuators for valves, dampers etc. to carry out the
analogue control shown on the point schedule.

1.2 DOCUMENTATION
1.2.1 General
The Contractor shall provide all schematic wiring diagrams associated with the system, a schedule of all
points on the system, a schedule of all hardware and software and a copy of all users manuals.
Specific to the Building Management System site-specific data the following is the minimum requirement. All
descriptions used (mnemonics, short and long point titles) shall be identical to those shown at user terminals.
All shall indicate the site name, drawing number and revision.
1.2.2 DDC Wiring Diagrams
These shall indicate DDC No. and type, hardwired points connected and software points utilised complete
with mnemonic, point titles and point number.
1.3 CONTROL FIELD DEVICES:
1.3.1 Actuators
1.3.1.1 General
Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Shall have a sufficient torque to open and close valves and dampers against the maximum out of balance
pressure across them.
Shall have position indicators unless fitted to terminal units.
1.3.1.2 Control Damper Actuators:
Shall be of the type where the damper spindle passes through the actuator and is secured by a U clamp.
Actuator Additional Features: where required.
1.3.1.3 Auxiliary Switches:
Shall have changeover contacts suitable for 240V a.c. 2 amp rating.
1.3.1.4 Modulating Motors
Auxiliary switch packs containing at least two electrically independent switches one for each end of motor
travel, adjustable for operation over at least half the motor travel.
1.3.1.5 Two-Position Motors
One electrically independent switch
1.3.1.6 Feedback Potentiometers

One potentiometer whose resistance varies proportionally with the actuator travel.

1.3.1.7 Fail Safe

Auxiliary spring or power pack for fail-safe conditions.
The spring shall be rated for a minimum of 1000 operations.
The power packs shall have their batteries trickle charged and each full charge shall be capable of operating
the actuator ten times. The battery shall require no maintenance and shall have a life of at least 5 years.
Both fail safe devices shall have sufficient torque to open or close valves and dampers against the maximum
out of balance pressure across them.
1.3.1.8 Control Valves
All valves with the exception of unit valves shall be fitted with valve position indicators clearly marked to
show the fully open and fully closed positions.
All valves shall be tested to a pressure of at least 200% of their standard rated working pressure.
All Valves Actuators shall be of modulating type
1.3.1.9 Valve Bodies
Up to and including 50mm shall be screwed to BS 21 and above 50mm they shall be flanged. The body
construction and flanges shall be suitable for the medium, temperature and pressure of the systems.
Construction: with the exception of butterfly valves, shall be of the single seated plug or rotating shoe types.
No plugs, shoes or trims shall be constructed of materials liable to corrode or cause sticking.
1.3.1.10 Let-by
On liquid applications let-by shall not exceed 0.5% of full duty for plug type valves, or 1% for shoe types.
For steam applications, valves shall give 0% let-by.
1.3.1.11 Characteristics
The valves when used to control heater exchangers shall have equal percentage or modified parabolic
characteristic and their frangibility shall be not less than 40:1.
Three and four port valves shall give a constant total flow characteristics, within ±10%, for all vale positions.
1.3.1.12 Authority
All two-port modulating valves shall be selected to have an authority between 0.3 and 0.5.
All three and four-port valves shall be selected to have an authority of not less than 0.5.
1.3.1.13 Two-Port Valves:
Shall be selected to ensure that each valve is capable of opening and closing against the maximum
differential head which may be applied across the valve in its circuit.

1.3.1.14 Three-Port Valves:

Only the bottom port shall be used for bypass connections except on terminal unit valves.
Rotary shoe valves may be used up to a maximum size of 50mm provided that the shoes are of one piece
construction.
Spring loaded shoe valves are not acceptable.
Rotary shoe valves may only be used on closed circuit systems.
Where three-port valves are used to separate flow between two independent circuits, the selection shall be
checked to ensure that the valve is capable of opening and closing against the maximum differential head
which may be applied across the valve.
1.3.1.15 Four-Port Valves:
Shall have a reduced kv on the bypass port such that its resistance simulates the resistance of the heat
exchanger.
1.3.1.16 Automatic Control Valves:
All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and modulating plug or V-port inner guides, unless
specified otherwise: Valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe in either normally open or normally closed
position in the event of control failure.
All valves shall be capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the exact dictates of the
controllers and variable load requirements. The valves shall be capable of operating in sequence when
required by the sequence of operation. All control valves shall be sized by the Control Engineer or the
Contractor and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads as specified. All control valves
shall be suitable for the pressure conditions and shall close against the differential pressures involved. All
control valves shall have throttling guides and renewable seats and discs. Valve operators shall be electric
spring return type, capable of a 30 second travel from full open to full close and full close to full open. Body
pressure rating and connection type (screwed or flanged) shall conform to pipe schedule. Control valve
operators shall be sized to close against a differential pressure equal to the design pump head plus 10
percent. Where pressure and flow combinations exceed ratings for commercial valves and operators,
industrial class valves and operators shall be provided.
Chilled water valves shall be of two port as specified and shall be of throttling type. Valves shall be single
seated type, except where pressure and flow combination exceed rating for commercial valve operators,
industrial class valves and operators shall be used.
Fan coil unit water control valves , which shall be of two way motorised type. Control valves for dual
temperature operation shall include a built-in a quastat. Valves shall be furnished complete with flare nuts.
Manufacturer shall furnish ten spare valves.
Motorized valves shall be of the gate or globe type with lug ends and shall be furnished with electric spring
return motor operators. Valve body shall be carbon steel with 316 stainless disc, 17-7 pH stainless shaft. Seat
and seal materials shall be teflon. The valve shall be provided with a speed control device (adjustable) to pre-
vent the valve from too rapid a closure rate. Valves shall be rated in all sizes for bubble tight closure at 150

psi differential across the disc and a maximum operating temperature of 2.12'F. The motor operator shall be
provided with an external position indicator. Valves shall be full-bodied, full lug type only (wafer type or semi-
lugged valves will not be permitted). Valves shall be bolted from both ends of the flanges.
All motorized valves shall be provided with manually operated hand wheels for overriding the operator.
1.3.1.17 Damper Operators:
All damper operators shall be electric spring-return type such that damper will fail-safe upon interruption of
electric power. The failure position shall be as specified or as required to suit job conditions. Dampers shall be
capable of a 30 second travel from full open to full closed and full closed to full open. The operators shall be
capable of operating in sequence when required by the sequence of operation. The operators shall have
external adjustable stops to limit the stroke in either direction. The operator linkage arrangement shall be
such as to permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers as required.
A sufficient number of damper operators shall be installed to operate single and multiple damper sections
smoothly and in unison at the maximum rated static pressure and air velocity, and to provide the close-off
torque required to meet damper leakage criteria. Provide auxiliary drive shafts with pillow block bearings and
bearing support brackets rigidly attached to the damper frame assembly on damper banks more than one
damper section wide.
1.3.1.18 Dampers:
Dampers Which Require opposed Blade Action:
1) Dampers in modulating service such as outdoor air, return air and spill air dampers in air conditioning
systems.
2) Outdoors air intake, exhaust air, and recirculation air dampers in ventilation systems which are under
modulating control.
Dampers, Which Require Parallel Blade Action:
1) Dampers in two position service such as outdoor air intake and exhaust air dampers in ventilation sys-
tems, which are under two-position control.
2) Fan discharge dampers.
3) Floor isolation dampers in supply and return air ducts.
The bearings shall be nonferrous sleeve type. The frames shall be of 89mm.x13 mm. (3-1/2 in.x1/2 in.)
channel iron with welded corners and stiffening members to form a rigid assembly. Dampers shall have both
blades and frames galvanized. All dampers shall have stainless steel blade end seals, and the edges of the
blades shall be crimped with neoprene seals to interlock in order to prevent leakage when dampers are
closed.
1.3.2 Sensors
1.3.2.1 Averaging Elements
Shall be used on cuts having a cross-sectional area exceeding 0.6m2 and shall have a minimum capillary
length of 5m.

The capillary element shall be serpentine across the whole duct.
Where the span of the element is less than 1m then it shall be fixed with purpose-made clips and may be
unsupported across the duct.
Where the span of the element is above 1m then it shall be supported on Unistrut or similar rigid support.
1.3.2.2 Room Thermostats
When of the bimetal detector type they shall be fitted with a shunt accelerator heater.
Shall be suitable for mounting on British Standard conduit boxes.
Scale ranges shall cover a band of at least 5°C and no more than 15°C on either side of the set point detailed
in the controller and regulator schedules. The operating differential shall not exceed 1°C, under all load
conditions, for rates of temperature rise and fall within the controlled space of 3°C per hour, and 2°C for rates
of 14°C per hour.
1.3.2.3 Room Temperature Detectors:
Shall have sensitivities such that a change at the detector of 0.2°C from the stabilized condition is sufficient to
start modulating the corrective element.
Shall operate on extra-low voltage and be suitable for mounting on British Standard conduit boxes.
1.3.2.4 Duct Mounted And Immersion Thermostats
Shall have rigid stems or capillaries terminated in sensing bulbs. Stems shall have a minimum length of
300mm. Capillary and bulb assemblies shall have a minimum length of 1.5m.
Scale ranges shall cover a band of at least 5°C and no more than 15°C on either side of the set point.
The operating differential shall not exceed 3°C for all load conditions.
1.3.2.5 Immersion And Duct Mounted Temperature Detectors:
Shall be sensitive such that changes at the detector, of 0.3°C and 0.2°C respectively, from the stabilized
conditions, are sufficient to start modulating the corrective element.
Duct mounted averaging element detectors shall have a minimum sensing length of 5m.
Multiple thermistor beads will not be acceptable.
1.3.2.6 Duct Mounted Low Limit Temperature / “Frost” Protection Thermostats

May be any of three types:-
Rigid Stem: shall be used on ducts having a cross-sectional area of up to and including 0.6m2. They shall be as
specified for duct mounted thermostats.
Capillary: shall be used on ducts having a cross-sectional area exceeding 06.m2.
Shall have a minimum capillary length of 5m and shall operate when any 300mm length of sensing element
falls below the set point.

The capillary element shall be serpentine across the whole duct.
Where the span of the element is less than 1m then it shall be supported on Unistrut or similar rigid support.
Electronic Clamp-on Type: shall be used as an alternative to rigid stem and capillary types.
The thermistor element shall be clipped to the heater battery return tube within the ductwork by means of a
phosphor bronze clip.
The unit shall be arranged for automatic reset after power failure.
1.3.2.7 Pressure Switches For Air Systems:
Shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied with air connections permitting their use as static or
differential pressure switches.
Shall be supplied suitable for wall mounting or mounting on ducts in any plane.
The set point shall fall within 40%-70% of the scale range.
Shall have differentials adjustable over 10%-30% of the scale range.
1.3.2.8 Air Flow Switches:
Shall be selected fro the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting attitude and shall be suitable for
mounting in any plane.
1.3.2.9 Water Flow Switches:
Shall be selected for the correct water velocity and pipe size and mounting attitude.
1.3.2.10 Level Switches:
Shall be selected for the fluid type, system pressure and have adjustable differentials.
They may be: -
 Conventional float type

 Capacitance type
 Conductivity type
Where conductivity types are offered they shall include all probes (including earth).
1.3.2.11 Duct Smoke Detectors:
These detectors shall have output of signals to the fire detection system, through input modules specified
under electrical section.
1.3.2.12 Watt-Hour Transducers:
Watt-hour transducers shall included a 2 wire, 4-20 mA transmitter and transducer. Potential and current
transformers will be provided under the Electrical Section of the Specifications. Mount transmitter and
transducer in a single enema enclosure, suitable for 1, 2, 3 element, single-phase and/or three phase service
at the a.c. line voltage level. Nominal potential input shall be as indicated on electrical drawings.

Each transmitter shall be factory adjusted to a calibrated accuracy of .1% over the operating span. Provide
certified calibration sheet from manufacturer with 2 year warranty. Manufacturer shall be Rochester
Instrument Systems, Series WWH, and Scientific Columbus Exceltronic watt-hour transducer. Wiring between
current transformers, potential transformers and the kwh transducer, and between the kwh transducer and
the DDC system, shall be provided by this Contractor.
1.3.2.13 Hydronic Differential Pressure Transmitters
Differential pressure transmitters shall be variable capacitance type arranged for 2 wire, 4-20 mA control
signal output. Transmitter shall be enclosed in a gasketed, dust and watertight housing. A11 body cavities
open to the process fluid shall be provided with drain ports at the top of the cavity. Both drain and vent ports
shall be minimum 1/4 inch-18 NPT. The transmitter shall have continuously adjustable (externally) zero and
span.
The differential pressure range span shall be adjustable to permit maximum zero elevation of 600% of
calibrated span and a maximum zero suppression of 500% of calibrated Span. These adjustments shall be
made within the transmitter housing without a change of parts. The transmitter housing of sustaining
differential pressures in either direction, up to the body rating without damage to the instrument or a loss of
accuracy or zero shift.
The transmitter shall be fully compensated for both process and ambient temperature variations and a
calibrated accuracy of 7+0.25% of calibrated Span.
1.3.2.14 Hydronic Differential Temperature Controllers
Differential Temperature Controllers shall be able to compare temperatures and controls the heating pumps
whenever the temperature at the collectors is higher than the tanks. The unit shall have extra sensors to start
auxiliary heating systems.
The unit shall have an LCD display showing all temperatures measured and shall be able to control the
configuration of heating system required in the drawings.
The unit shall have the following:
1- 4 x PT 1000 temperature sensors
2- 4 output relays
3- LCD display showing temperatures and operating pumps & active valves
4- Power Fault warning
1.3.2.15 Air Differential Pressure Sensor (DPS)
The air differential pressure sensor DPS shall be utilised for measuring air-flow differential pressure in ,
clean-rooms, pharmaceutical plants and ventilation air ducts .
DPS shall be of inductive coupling type suitable for detection of fractional movements of a sensing
diaphragm. Which should be suitable of sensing low pressures.
The DPS low differential pressure sensor shall be selected in ranges starting from as low as 5 Pascals up to
200Pa suitable for range of the applications. Whether controlling the differential pressure between two
rooms, measuring the differential pressure in a ventilation duct, or detecting the condition of an air filter.

The DPS clean-room dps pressure sensor shall have standard linearity of ±0.2% full scale. The pressure
hysteresis shall be higher than ±0.1% full scale
The signal of the DPS low shall be of 5 or 10 Volt DC output or a 4-20mA current output in either 3 wire or 2
wire configuration. The supply voltage shall be 24Vdc, 230Vac or 115Vac mains.
An LCD local readout display integrated into the DPS differential air pressure sensors enclosure shall be
provided. An auto-zeroing feature and cyclic calibration purposes plus relay switch outputs for triggering an
alarm shall also be provided with the local display.
Provide additional contact outputs suitable for remote monitoring and alarming signals. The device shall
communicates with the master control module via a mode bus. The housing shall be designed for front-flush
installation suitable for clean room requirements. Function keys shall be integrated into a stainless-steel
keypad that forms a single smooth surface along the front of the housing.
1.3.2.16 Air Differential Pressure Monitoring Display system
Provide a remote large graphic RGB backlit touch-screen display for to monitor and report alarms and status
for all DPS. The monitor shall allow fingertip access to menus that guide the user through room setup,
application, security and calibration. The monitoring display shall incorporate green LED for each room to
indicate normal conditions, and a red LED, audible alarm, and SPDT relay, for remote annunciation, as to
signal unsatisfactory room pressure status. Additional features shall include selectable analog 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to
10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA output, relay output, output and display averaging, and door status indication.
A, remote annunciator, shall be provided for remote visual and audio indication of room pressure status. A
Green LED to indicate normal room conditions, a Red LED to indicate an alarm condition, and a buzzer to
provide an audio alarm for indication of room pressure status. An acknowledge switch shall be provided to
deactivate the audio and visual alarms.
1.3.2.17 Annular:
Annular shall be industrial type, Dietrich Standard Corporation annubars
Assembly shall consist of an averaging pilot tube (annubar) flow element and a differential pressure
transmitter. Assembly shall be provided with insertion/retraction mechanism complete with 1 inch cast steel
ball Value, compression fitting nipples, contoured weld coupling required for installation.
Annular flow element shall be installed so that the total head pressure ports are set in line with the pipe axis
facing upstream and the static pressure port is facing downstream.
Annular shall be installed in plane with upstream elbow, with a minimum of 10 upstream and 5 down stream
pipe diameters of straight run. If a modulating valve is installed upstream of the annubar, 25 pipe diameters
of straight run are required.
Accuracy shall be +0.1% of actual value. Repeatability shall be +0.1% of actual value. Annular shall be suitable
for the design pressures and temperatures involved.
Annular shall be provided with all necessary mounting hardware to allow for the removal of the flow sensor
under pressure without shutting down the pipeline. The annular shall be provided with a 1/8 inch female NPT
by 1/2-inch male NPT adaptor for the future connection of 1/2-inch impulse tubing and 1/2 inch pipe-to-tube
connector. Utility Billing and customer information system

1.3.2.18 Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter drives shall be suitable for use on standard squirrel cage motors as specified and be of the
pulse width modulation type. The control range shall be 0.5 to 120Hz. The motor nameplate current shall not
be exceeded on start up.
Frequency Inverter drives shall be capable of connection to a motor already rotating in the correct direction
at any speed up to the specified maximum without braking the motor to a standstill, and connection to a
motor driven fan wind milling in reverse direction without causing tripping, and returning the fan correctly
to the set conditions of speed and direction .
Drives shall withstand 500 milliseconds mains interruption without causing tripping and be fully protected
against any electrically induced disorders without operating fuses.
Drives shall be suitable for local and remote control and provide means of running at a fixed (selectable)
speed on closure of a remote volt-free contact, overriding the speed control reference.
Frequency inverters shall have digital display of all operating conditions and recall of design limits. These shall
be keyboard adjustable where applicable.
Volt-free contacts shall be provided to monitor all alarm functions.
A4-20mA analog output signal shall be provided, programmable for, but not limited to, the following:
(i) Output frequency
(ii) Reference signal
(iii) Output current
(iv) Motor torque
(v) Motor power.
The manufacturer of the frequency Inverter drive shall ensure that the Inverter and motor are entirely
compatible and shall provide details regarding the production of harmonics, mains borne and airborne
(radiated, magnetic or electro-static) interference. Written guarantees shall be given that disturbance levels
will not exceed the limits of the EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards.
Frequency inverters shall comply in all respects with the UL or relevant British and European Standards.

PART 2 - Utility Management Systems
2.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Refer to the Main Contract General Conditions of the Specification together with the additional particular
clauses applicable to the Building Services.
The documentation and work shall be carried out in accordance with codes and procedures defined in the
General Conditions and complimented with details in this Section of Particular Specifications, all to the
ENGINEERS approval.
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor, has by careful examination of the plans and Specifications,
and the site where appropriate, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the works, and all
conditions that must be met in order to carry out the works under this section of the Contract.
2.2 UTILITY BILLING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The utility Information Management system shall be designed to provide easy and efficient management of
billing and customer services, as it shall allow the quick access to vital customer information through the use
of advanced graphical interface techniques.
The billing system shall perform quick storing of entire customer base data and information by:
Account name
Account number
Book/sequence number
Service location, city, state, zip code
Balance due or, to search for a specific customer, use the advanced search capabilities.
2.2.1 Customer List
The user should be able to view a complete list of accounts all the time along with the customer’s name,
account number, service address, city, state, zip code, and total balance and in accordance to the following
access to data base:-
Sort by – This list may be sorted by any of the field names above
Search by – Specific customers or groups of customers as located by searching on the following options:
account number, book/sequence number, service location, city, state, zip, phone number, meter ID number,
or coded name
Highlighted – for those accounts which are highlighted indifferent colors to indicate if the account is inactive,
delinquent, new, or other
Account number or Book/Sequence order – the user shall be able to toggle back and forth between listing all
accounts by account number or by book/sequence order

2.2.2 Print Customer Report
The system shall print a list of customers, according to the set sort order and search filter the user has
applied.
2.2.3 Account Detail
2.2.4 View Detailed Information –
The System shall drill down on any account to view detailed information for each customer including:
Account number
Coded name
Book/sequence assignment
Service address
Mailing address
Meter information including:
Meter number
Meter ID number
MID type/number
Meter type
Units of measure
Roll over digits
Reading multiplier
Income centers (services connected) and rate codes
Account notes
Free from notes for the account
Reading route notes
Bill message for this account
Print detailed customer information for this account
Owner information screen (for renters)
Additional information shall be available from the account detail screen
Alternate search
Phone number

Customer type
User code
NFS check flag
Overdue status
Account status
Lot and block number
Bank (for draft payments)
Checking account number
Deposit refund date
Deposit receipt number
Miscellaneous, Currency field
Meter purchase date
Number of units (e.g. for duplexes)
Government ID number (e.g. SS or Driver’s License number)
Company-defined data fields may be created in system setup to store additional information unique to the
company
2.2.5 Account Balance
This shall allow the user to view the customer’s demographic information listed above in section 2.2.4, plus
aged balances by income center (service), a total for each service and the total account balance
2.2.6 Transaction History
audited transaction detailed by transaction type, amount, date, audit number, and user, filtered by any
period range
For each account, unlimited history can be stored and viewed
A Detailed Transaction Report for this account shall be printed from this screen
2.2.7 Billing History
the amounts billed to a customer detailed by income center (service), date of each billing, total amount, due
date for each billing, previous balance and after due date amount, filtered by any period range
The last year’s usage amount and global message for each billing should be also displayed
For each account, unlimited history shall be stored and viewed

2.2.8 Reading & Usage History

 This shall allow the user to view the customer’s demographic information listed above in section 2.2.4,
plus the readings, dates, usage, and meter change-outs for the customer with charges specified by income
center (service)
 There should be an indication if a reading was estimated
 For easy reference, readings should be highlighted in different colors for those just entered, applied
closed, or a meter change out.
 For each account, unlimited history shall be stored and viewed
2.2.9 Work Order History

 This shall allow the user to view the customer’s demographic information listed above in section 2.2.4,
plus the work orders that have been opened for a customer showing each work order number,
description, associated cost center, open date and close date, and related pricing
 For easy reference, work orders should be highlighted in different colors to differentiate between
complete, voided, and open status
 For each account, unlimited history shall be stored and viewed
 A work order history report for the customer shall be printed from this screen
2.3 PROCESSES
This shall perform account-specific processes quickly and easily for the same customer screen
2.3.1 Payment Register
This shall go to the payment register to apply or view a payment for this account (see Payment Management
in section 2)
2.3.2 Adjustment Register
This shall go to the adjustment register to apply or view an adjustment for this account (see Adjustment
Management in section 3)
2.3.3 Deposit Register
This shall go to the deposit register to apply or view a deposit for this account (see Deposit Management in
section 4)
2.3.4 Final Bill/Transfer
This shall allow the user to perform a final bill or transfer through the use of the Final Bill/Transfer wizard
2.3.5 Meter Change-Out
This shall allow the user to perform meter change-outs using the Meter Change-Out wizard

2.3.6 Work Order –
This shall allow the user to open the work order screen, automatically pre-filling the customer information,
and initiating a new work order
2.3.7 Edit Readings
This shall allow the user to view and edit readings, usage, meter change-outs and estimated readings for a
customer
2.4 PAYMENT MANAGEMENT
2.4.1 Payment register
The user shall be able to view a list of payments with the customer’s name, account name, due date, address,
amount, document number, and payment type
 Sort by – This list may be stored by any of the field names above
 Search by – specific payments or groups of payments may be located by searching on the following
options: account number, date of payment, name, address, amount, check number, or audit number
 Cash payments – payments made by cash should be highlighted on the payment register for easy
reference
 Show open – the user shall be able to toggle back and forth between seeing all payments or only the
payments taken during the current day’s business on this register
2.4.2 Payment details
Details available for each payment include the customer’s demographic information, amount, payment
method, and document number as well as the payment distribution and income centers affected

2.4.3 Payments by batch entry
The user shall be able to enter multiple payments or a single payment by keying the account number,
payment method (cash, check, money order, etc.), the document identification (if applicable) and the
payment amount – all by 10 key method with one hand via the number pad on the keyboard, if desired
2.4.4 Payment Distribution –
The payment should be distributed according to the company-defined payment priorities established in
system setup. The user shall be able to make necessary adjustments to the payment distribution, if desired
2.4.5 Balanced Distribution
The system performs a check to insure the distributed amount equals the entered payment amount, alerting
a user with a RED highlight when out of balance
2.4.6 Running Payment Totals
The user shall be able to view a running total of all payments entered until the closing process has been
performed to close the day’s payment. These running totals include: count of all payments, amount of all
payments, count of cash payments, amount of cash payments, count of other payments, and amount of
overpayments
2.4.7 Direct GL Payments
The user shall be able to receive payments for services or products un-billed such as building permits, dog
tags, or backflow devices
2.4.8 Cash Drawer
The system interfaces with a cash drawer system and receipt printer (additional hardware) to provide change
required for cash payments, printed receipts, and check or bill stub validation
2.4.9 Reverse payment
The system shall reverse a payment
2.4.10 Print Payment Report
The system shall print a list of payments, according to the current sort order and search filter the user has
applied

2.4.11 Re-distribution of Credits
Redistribution of credits may be done in order to allow a credit in one income center to pay a charge in
another income center. This process shall not increase the money taken in or decrease the account
receivables; it will just move money from one income center to another. Typically it should be used just prior
to any delinquent account work such as applying penalties. The system shall search through the selected
group of books and retrieves those accounts that have both credit balances and debit balances. Then the
system applies credit balances to debit balances according to the payment order prioritized on the payment
information in system setup.
2.5 ADJUSTMENT MANAGEMENT
2.5.1 Adjustment register
The user shall be able to view a list of adjustments with the account number, customer name, date, amount,
description and income center affected
 Sort by – this register may be sorted by any of the field names above
 Search by – specific adjustments or groups of adjustments may be located by searching on the following
options: account number, customer name, date, amount, description, income center affected, or audit
number
 Show open – the user shall be able to toggle back and forth between seeing all adjustments or only the
adjustments made during the current day’s business on this register Deposit Management
This section should allow the user to manage security deposits based on the customer’s account. The system
should allow deposits to be attached to as many as three income centers.
2.5.2 Deposit Register
The user shall be able to view a list of deposits with the account number, customer name, deposit date,
amount of deposit applied against any of three income centers
 Sort by – this register may be sorted by any of the field names above
 Search by – specific deposits or groups of deposits may be located by searching on the following options:
account number, customer name, deposit date, total amount, amount for any of three income centers,
or audit number
 Show open – the user shall be able to toggle back and forth between seeing all deposits or only the
deposit made during the current day’s business on this register
 Highlighted – For easy reference, deposits should be highlighted in different colors to indicate the
account is inactive, delinquent, new, or other
2.5.3 Deposit Details
Details available for each deposit include the customer’s demographic information, amount of deposits, date
of deposits, last interest date, and history of deposit transactions as well as the income centers affected

2.5.4 Apply New Deposits
Deposits may be applied to a customer’s account from this screen by entering the account number or
book/sequence, the deposit amount and date and income center affected
2.6 APPLY INTEREST
Interest may be applied to accounts by book and sequence groups
2.7 REFUND DEPOSITS
Deposits may be refunded from a single account from this screen, deposits are not credited to the
customer’s. Refunds are made by check through your accounting package. This refund transaction should be
transferred to the accounting package as part of the Transfer to GL process.
2.8 PRINT DEPOSIT REPORT
The system shall print a list of deposits, according to the current sort order and search filter the user has
applied.
2.9 PROCESS MANAGEMENT
This section should allow the user to manage all processes that are performed by route book or system-wide.
By using route book criteria, the system supports multiple billing cycles.
2.10 READINGS
2.10.1 Route/Book Worksheet
Shall print a worksheet for meter readers to enter manual readings
2.10.2 Enter Manual Readings
Shall enter readings based on the two following options:

 Readings by Book – This shall allow the user to select a book which displays all the accounts for that book
with a space to enter the readings
 Readings by Account – This shall allow the user to start a new line for each account in the same format as
the Readings by Book screen
2.10.3 Import Readings
This shall allow the user to import reading files from automatic meter reading devices. The type of device
interface is company-defined in system setup (see types currently supported in section 7.3)
2.10.4 Other Readings
A wizard screen with radio buttons should allow selection of the following options:
 Estimate – produces a reading file with estimated readings for the selected book using the average of the
last three usages. (Note: A minimum of three usages are required in the system prior to using estimates)

 Use Last – produces a reading file with the previous readings for the selected book for use in the current
billing cycle to produce minimum bills in each account
 Plug Zeroes - produces a reading file with zero readings for the selected book that must contain only flat
rate customers that are not metered
2.10.5 Process Readings
Shall create a listing of all reading files that may be edited, deleted, or processed based on the following
options:
 Verify – produces a report of charges and usages without applying actual charges to the accounts. Use
this report to review charges before applying them to the accounts; make edits as needed
 Calculate – applies readings, usage, and charges to accounts for the first time in a billing cycle
 Re-calculate – removes current readings, usage, and charges which are recalculated with new readings
2.11 BILLING
2.11.1 Print Bills
Shall allow the user to set up a bill run by following a billing wizard to enter the desired billing date, type of
notice (first, second/reminder, or disconnect), whether to print a bill for bank draft customers, the minimum
amount to print a bill for, and a global message for the bill run
The user shall be able to select from the following print options:
 By Book/Sequence – print bills in the order of their book and sequence; user shall be able to select which
book/sequence to bill.
 By Zip Code – print bills by zip code order; user shall be able to select which book/sequence to bill.
 By Account – print bills for selected accounts
2.11.2 Bills Recap Report
Billing register report for the most recent bill run:

 By Book/Sequence – list bills in the order of their book and sequence
 By Zip Code – list bills by zip code
2.11.3 Zip Code Analysis
Reports the number of bills printed for each zip code for the most recent bill run
2.11.4 Print Labels –
Should allow the following options for printing labels:

 By Book/Sequence – prints labels in the order of their book and sequence
 By Zip Code – prints labels by zip code
 Customer options – print all customers, only renters, or only owners

2.12 DRAFTS
2.12.1 Process Drafts
Shall allow the user to preview drafts before exporting to and electronic text file by the following options:
 Pre-Notes – lists only those customers being setup for drafts for the first time
 Live Drafts – list customers with balances that are going to be drafted at the bank
2.12.2 Apply Draft Payments
Shall produce a list of draft runs that are created from the process drafts screen allowing the user to print the
preview list again, apply the drafts to the accounts as a payment, and produce a Payment Report for the draft
run
2.12.3 Electronic Drafts
Should be supported in the banking-standard format, NACHEFT (National Automated Clearinghouse

Electronic Funds Transfer). The file destination is company-defined in the system setup for Drafts
2.13 OVERDUE
(See section 7 for company-definable penalty configurations)
2.13.1 Apply Penalties
Shall allow the following methods for applying penalties:

 By Book – This shall allow the user to preview a penalty list on screen (which shall be also be printed)
before applying by the book range selected
 By Account – This shall allow the user to pull up each account in a Penalty Register screen
 Daily Penalties – This shall allow the user to run daily penalties as specified by criteria set in system
setup. System will remind user to run daily penalties if they have forgotten to run them
2.13.2 Meter Pull List
Produces a report for delinquent customers with overdue balances meeting company-defined minimum
balance and age range criteria
2.13.3 Overdue Account List
Produces a report of customers with overdue balances
2.14 CLOSE OUTS

End Day – shall allow the following options:
 Close payment register clears the running total in the payment register by user, closes the audit number
used and produces a payment report which shall run for detail (lists all customers) or summary (gives
total by payment type broken out by service).

 Close Adjustment Register closes the audit number assigned to the days adjustments per user and
produces and Adjustment Report which shall run for detail (lists all customers) or summary by itself
(gives total per adjustment code).
 Close Deposit Register – closes the audit number assigned to the days deposits per user and produces a
Deposit Report which lists each customer, their beginning deposit amount, charges, and ending deposit
amount
 Close Day - this shall only run after all registers have been closed and shall produce a Daily Balance
Summary which starts with the days beginning balance detailed by book and income center, shows all
debits and credits, and ends with the days ending balance
2.14.1 Close Financial Period

Shall allow the user to close all monetary transactions, create a new financial period, and produce the
following reports:
 Period Activity report totals each type of transaction by service, breaks down accounts receivable total
by New, Active and Inactive accounts, and breaks down deposit totals by New, refund to AR, Refund to
check, and Deposit changes
 Audit Summary Report totals each audit number used in the period giving total transaction amount, user,
date, etc.
 Period Balance Summary same as Daily Balance Summary but should start with the beginning balance of
the month and shows changes for the whole period
 Adjustment Code Summary gives a list of each adjustment code used in the period and the net affect of
the adjustments by service
2.14.2 Close Billing Cycle
Shall allow close out of the selected reading books if there are no unread meters, age account balances, and
produce the following reports:
 Usage Summary Report breaks out the current cycles usage by book and then by rate code, compares to
last month’s usage broken out the same way, and calculates the percentage of change
 Pump Station Comparison report compares the usage by pump station with the usage of customers
attached to that pump station noting any adjustment made
2.15 REPORT MANAGEMENT
Through the use of a report wizard, the user should have the ability to select the type of report required,
criteria desired, preview the report on-screen, save the report as a file, or print the report.
2.15.1 On-line Reports
Most reports should print to screen first so the user shall be able to determine whether a paper copy is
necessary
2.15.2 Export Files
Reports saved as a file (.xls for excel, for example) should be then exported out of the system to be used in
other software as a spreadsheet, database, or text file. Data may also be exported to a report writing tool
such as Seagate’s Crystal Reports for further analysis and manipulation

2.15.3 Report writer
A custom report designer shall allow the user to create custom reports by selecting any combination of data
fields and specifying criteria. Reports may be saved for repeated use.
2.15.4 Standard Reports
In addition, these standard reports should be available from this screen and other context-related screens:
2.15.5 Accounts Receivable
By Service – details by account for each income center (service)
By Account - details by account with a column for current, 30 to 59, 60 to 89, 90 to 119, 120+, and total
balance
2.15.6 Balance Summary
By Day – This shall allow the user to print the Daily Balance Summary for that day
By Period – This shall allow the user to print the Period Balance Summary for the current period
2.15.7 Period Activity Report
This shall allow the user to print this report for the selected period
2.15.8 Audit Summary Report
This shall allow the user to print this report for the selected audit number range or date range
2.15.9 Rate Study
This shall allow the user to determine high usage periods, which customers are using what percentage of the
services provided. May be used to determine how to modify the existing rate structure to maximize an
increase in rates and to determine where to place conservation restrictions on customers. The rate study is
also available in graphic format so that patterns of usage can be easily discerned.

SCHEDULE 1:
Schedule of Approved Manufacturers
All materials and equipment specified in this Volume shall be of a quality equivalent to/or better than
furnished or manufactured by the following
Equipment Manufacturer Country Of origin
Greystone USA, Canada

Sompoy UK, Europe
Kely USA
Hydraumeter USA
Unicon USA
Control Field Devices
Halstub wlacher Germany
SDI USA
Johnson Control Europe
Siemens Europe
Honeywell Control
NOTES
1 The design is based upon the equipment listed in the equipment schedules.
2 The tender pricing shall be based on any of the above listed acceptable manufacturers for each type.
3 The contractor must submit the base tender complying with the listed manufacturers equipment. An
alternative offer from alternative manufacturers may be submitted in addition to the base tender,
provided that full substantiating data of the equipment, and noting the non-compliant features of the
alternative equipment together with the cost implications, is submitted
All alternative equipment offers may be accepted or rejected at the sole discretion of the Engineer as it
shall be to the approval and final acceptance of the Engineer.
4 Submit the compliance form with the Tender indicating the proposed manufacturers for major
equipment. Treat all equipment for which data submissions are required as major equipment for this
purpose.
5 Changes from the equipment offered at Tender will not normally be permitted unless the Engineer is
satisfied that there is significant advantage in Principle.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 09 33.00 40
ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2010; Errata 1-3 2011; INT 1-12 2011; Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y,
Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 4-8 2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 9-12
2013; INT 17 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings
ASHRAE 90.1 - SI (2010; Errata 1-2 2011; INT 2-12 2011; Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y,
Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 3-9 2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 10-14
2013; INT 17 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings
AWS WHB-2.9 (2004) Welding Handbook; Volume 2, Welding Processes, Part 1
ASME B16.22 (2012) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
ASTM A666 (2010) Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar
ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B280 (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning
and Refrigeration Field Service
ASTM B62 (2009) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings
ASTM D1693 (2013) Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene
Plastics
Mechanical Specifications 23 09 33.00 40 - 1 Electric And Electronic Control System For HVAC
ISA - INTERNATIONAL SOCIETY OF AUTOMATION (ISA)
ISA 7.0.01 (1996) Quality Standard for Instrument Air
ISA RP60.9 (1981) Piping Guide for Control Centers
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)
RCBEA GUIDE (2004) NASA Reliability Centered Building and Equipment Acceptance Guide
NEMA DC 3 (2008) Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats
NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
DOD-G-24508 (1977; Rev A; Am 4 1998) Grease, High Performance, Multipurpose (Metric)
MIL-F-18280 (1995; Rev F; Supp 1; CANC Notice 1) Fittings, Flare less Tube, Fluid
Connection
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-2962 (Rev A; Notice 2) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC Content
FED-STD-595 (Rev C; Notice 1) Colors Used in Government Procurement
prevail
1.2.1 General Requirements
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to work specified
in this section.
Section 26 60 13.00 40 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTORS applies to this section.
Submit Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists for control and instrumentation systems including
manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty
information, and fabrication site information.
Submit Records of Existing Conditions consisting of the results of survey of work area conditions and features
of existing structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite. Commencement of work constitutes
acceptance of existing conditions.
1.2.2 System Requirements
Provide automatic temperature control systems that are complete in all details and that include all necessary
accessories to maintain conditions indicated or specified.
Provide pneumatic electric or electronic automatic temperature control systems. As far as practical, provide
control equipment that is the product of a single automatic control systems manufacturer. Provide
automatic control systems components not the product of the control system manufacturer that are
approved for use with the control system as indicated.
Provide automatically controlled valves to control environment that are furnished by the automatic control
systems manufacturer.
Provide automatically controlled dampers, independent of dampers integral with manufactured air-handling
units, furnished by the automatic control systems manufacturer. Use a damper manufacturer that is licensed
to display the AMCA seal.
Submit Fabrication Drawings for control and instrumentation systems consisting of fabrication and assembly
details to be performed in the factory.
Submit Operating Instructions for control and instrumentation consisting of standard operating procedures
including startup, shutdown, and emergency operation.
1.3.1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products, which are of similar material, design and workmanship. Provide standard
products that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening that
includes applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. Provide a
product that has been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs,
or brochures during the 2-year period.
1.3.2 SERVICE SUPPORT
Support the equipment items by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service
organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. Provide service
organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory
service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of contract.
1.3.3 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Provide each item of equipment with a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model
number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is
not acceptable.
1.3.4 MODIFICATIONS OF REFERENCES
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, wherever
the words shall, should, will, would, or may appear. Interpret references in these publications to the
"authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the "Engineer."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists
Records of Existing Conditions
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Control Components
Thermometers
Pressure Gages
Valves
Dampers
Operators
SD-04 Samples
Manufacturer's Standard Color Charts
Thermostat Covers
Thermostat Guards
Room Humidistats
SD-06 Test Reports
Set Points and Final Adjustments Of Controls
Test Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Listing of Product Installations
Qualified Permanent Service Organizations
Manufacturer's Standard Factory Finishing
Operating Instructions
Scheduled Instructional Services
Air Supply Source
Mechanical Refrigeration-Type Air Dryer
Pneumatic Operators
Electric Operators
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Seal openings after manufacturing and inspection, until ready for installation.
Carefully handle instruments and equipment, do not subject to shock, and protect from weather, dust,
construction materials, and damage.
1.6 ACCESSIBILITY
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily
accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
1.7 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment. Provide
motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors that conform to and have electrical connections provided
under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for components of
packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Extended voltage range motors are not
permitted. Provide controllers and contactors that have a maximum of 240 volt control circuits, and have
auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than
sizes indicated, include the cost of additional electrical service and related work under the section that
specified that motor or equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment under
and conforming to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Submit Equipment and performance data for the following items consisting of use life, system functional
flows, safety features, and mechanical automated details. Submit curves indicating tested and certified
equipment response and performance characteristics.
a. Control Components
b. Thermometers
c. Pressure Gages
d. Valves
e. Dampers
f. Operators
2.1 CONTROL COMPONENTS
2.1.1 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Provide temperature sensors, sensor transmitters, and controller output signals that are directly proportional
to the variations in the measured variable. Provide linearity that is within plus or minus ½ percent for a 93
degrees C span, and plus or minus 1 percent for a 10 degrees C span, throughout the scale range.
Where extremely accurate temperature sensing is required or the transmitter is a considerable distance from
the receiver controller, use a two-pipe relay-type transmitter. Provide instrument that has feedback
incorporated into the design and 10 degrees C temperature range. Provide capillary that is compensated and
is available in 2500 and 5000 millimeter averaging lengths. Provide unit that operates on 140 kilopascal input
pressure, and has a 20 to 100 kilopascal output over the specified range.
2.1.2 HUMIDITY SENSORS
Provide humidity sensors, sensor transmitters, and controller output signals that are directly proportional to
the variations in the measured variable. Provide linearity that is within plus or minus 1 percent for a 90
percent relative humidity span. Provide element that is capable of withstanding 100 percent relative
humidity without loss of calibration when humidity sensor is duct-mounted downstream from a cooling coil.
2.1.3 RECEIVER CONTROLLERS
Provide receiver controllers that have a calibrated set point adjustment, minimum calibrated scale with no
greater than minus [16.7] [_____] degrees C degrees divisions for duct and immersion application and minus
[17.2] [_____] degrees C divisions for room control application. Provide set point indication and an
adjustable proportional band covering the complete range necessary for the specific application. Provide
controller range that matches that of the temperature sensor. Provide devices that incorporate authority
and remote set point calibrated adjustments, as required.
2.1.4 RECEIVER INDICATORS
Provide receiver indicators that have visual readout for temperature and humidity, using the transmitted
signal from the sensor device to the receiver-controller device. Provide readout and accuracy of the receiver
indicator that has the indicated value within plus or minus ½ percent of the span of the measured variable, as
transmitted by the sensor. Mark factory calibration on back of instrument. Provide range that matches that
of the temperature or humidity sensor.
Provide a combined accuracy of the sensor and the receiver indicator that is within [minus 16.7] [_____]
degrees C and [5] [_____] percent relative humidity of the span.
Provide ambient conditions to [65.6] [_____] degrees C that do not cause a shift in control point in pneumatic
sensor, receiver controller, or indicator systems.
2.1.5 Space Thermostats
2.1.5.1 Electrical Control
Provide low-voltage type space thermostat with [non-setback/setup] [setback/setup] temperature control
for [cooling only] [heating only] [cooling and heating]. Provide thermostat that conforms to NEMA DC 3, and
is as indicated.
2.1.5.3 Space Thermostat Accessories
Provide brushed aluminum Thermostat covers.
Provide insulating bases for thermostats located on exterior walls.
Provide cast-metal Thermostat guards in unfinished spaces.
Mount guards and thermostats on separate bases.
Submit Manufacturer's standard color charts showing the manufacturer's recommended color and finish
selections.
2.1.6 Outdoor Reset Thermostat
Provide a [remote-bulb type] [functionally equivalent bimetallic rod and tube type] outdoor reset thermostat
for proportioning action with an adjustable throttling range. Provide scale range of [minus 23.3 to plus 21.2]
[1.7 to 35.0] degrees C with adjustable set point over the full range. Mount unit indoors, with sensing bulb
mounted outdoors with solar compensation when indicated. Provide unit that proportionally resets the
control point of a remote sensing submaster temperature controller.
2.1.7 Immersion Thermostats
Provide [remote-bulb type] [functionally equivalent bimetallic rod and tube type] immersion thermostats, for
proportional action with adjustable set point over the full operating range, and adjustable throttling range.
Provide a nonferrous separable socket for each thermal element.
When used as a secondary controller, provide a remotely set adjustable set point.
2.1.8 Airstream Thermostats
Provide remote-bulb type or functionally equivalent bimetallic rod and tube type airstream two-position
thermostats, with adjustable set point. Provide set point in middle third of range of device.
Provide airstream thermostats for control of modulating devices that are the remote-bulb type for
proportional action with adjustable set point over the full operating range, and adjustable throttling range.
Provide airstream thermostats for averaging service that have a remote-bulb element not less than one-half
as long as the longest side of the airstream cross section, of a type suitable for averaging service with liquid-
filled bulb or equivalent. Gas- or vapor-filled bulbs are not acceptable for averaging service. Locate bulb to
sense average temperature.
Provide airstream temperature primary controllers for remote reset or compensating operation, that are
remote-bulb type for proportional operation with adjustable set point over the full operating range,
adjustable throttling range, and an adjustable authority of the secondary controller. Low- or high-limit
thermostats, or other instruments having one-sided control, are not acceptable where reset or compensating
controllers are indicated.
2.1.9 Line-Voltage Thermostats
Provide line-voltage thermostats that have integral "MANUAL ON/OFF/AUTO" selector switch, a maximum
differential of [1] [_____] degrees C, concealed temperature adjustment, and a locking cover. Provide line-
voltage thermostats that are rated for the load, [single] [two]-pole as required.
Provide insulating bases for thermostats located on exterior walls.
Provide cast metal type thermostat guards in unfinished spaces.
Mount guards and thermostats on separate bases, unless otherwise approved.
Provide line-voltage thermostats that are furnished and mounted under this section, and wired in accordance
with applicable sections of DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL unless otherwise specified.
2.1.10 Electrical Low-Limit Duct Thermostat
Provide air-handling unit freeze protection. Make the lowest temperature across any 300 millimeter of bulb
length, [single] [multiple] tube, sufficient to trip a snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw switch when the
temperature sensed is equal to, or below, set point. Provide 6100 [_____] millimeter minimum length of
bulb. Provide one limit thermostat for every 1.8 [_____] square meter of coil surface. Provide thermostats
that have manual reset.
2.1.11 Fire Thermostats
Provide fire thermostats that are UL-approved and listed, are factory set in accordance with NFPA 90A, and
have normally closed contacts. Perform reset manually.
2.1.12 Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostat
Furnish induction air-conditioning units with valve-top thermostats. Provide units that are proportional
acting for proportional flow, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at variable pressures
to maximum 170 [_____] kilopascal, gage air supply. Provide molded rubber operator diaphragm, die-cast
housing, and furnish unit with position indicator and adjusting knob.
2.1.13 Room Humidistats
Provide room humidistats that are wall-mounted, reverse acting, proportioning type, with adjustable
minimum throttling range no greater than [2] [_____]-percent relative humidity. Provide humidistats that
are capable of maintaining the relative humidity within the limits of the throttling range for relative humidity
of [30 to 80] [_____] percent and temperatures to [43.3] [_____] degrees C.
Submit manufacturer's standard color charts showing the manufacturer's recommended color and finish
selections.
2.1.14 Duct Humidistats
Provide insertion type duct humidistats, mounted on outside of duct, with sensing element within duct.
Provide reverse acting, proportioning type duct humidistats, with adjustable minimum-throttling range no
greater than [2] [_____] percent relative humidity. Provide humidistats capable of maintaining relative
humidity within the limits of the throttling range for relative humidity of [20 to 80] percent and temperatures
to [65.6] [_____] degrees C. Provide sensing element suitable for the indicated installation location.
2.1.15 High-Limit Duct Humidistats
Provide insertion type high-limit duct humidistats, mounted on outside of duct, with sensing element within
duct. Provide reverse acting, two-position type humidistats, with minimum differential no greater than [2]
[_____] percent relative humidity. Provide sensing element suitable for the indicated installation location.
2.1.16 Water Temperature Controllers
Insert water temperature controller in a nonferrous separable socket installed in the waterline. Provide
controller that operates [remotely] [integrally] on an adjustable differential over an adjustable temperature
range, and is suitable for operating in conjunction with the control valve provided.
2.1.17 Building Static-Pressure Transmitter
Provide a double-bell, differential type building static-pressure transmitter with temperature compensation.
Provide scale range of [minus 125 to plus 125] [_____] kilopascal, gage, and sensitivity within plus or minus
[0.124] [_____] kilopascal, gage. Provide transmitter that transmits an [electronic] [pneumatic] signal to an
indicating receiver with a matched scale range.
Provide a total system accuracy of not less than [12] [_____]kilopascal, gage.
2.1.18 Building Static-Pressure Controller
[Provide a slack diaphragm type building static-pressure controller, with an adjustable set point, and
adjustable throttling range. Provide controller range of [2.5 to 1500] [_____] kilopascal, gage. Provide
throttling range that is adjustable from [5 to 12] [_____] kilopascal, gage. Provide [electronic] [pneumatic]
output.
][Provide a double bell, differential type building static-pressure controller with temperature compensation.
Provide scale range of [minus 125 to plus 125] [_____] kilopascal, gage, and sensitivity within plus or minus
[12] [_____] kilopascal, gage. Provide controller with an adjustable set point over the full-scale range and
adjustable throttling range, proportional band. Provide [electronic] [pneumatic] output.
2.1.19 Pressure Transmitter
Provide the indicating type pressure transmitters for gas, liquid, or steam service. Provide transmitter range
suitable for system operating characteristics. Provide output that is proportional to system pressure and is
electronic or pneumatic. Provide indicating receiver with a matched scale range.
Provide total system accuracy that is not less than [1/2] [_____] percent of system range.
2.1.20 Remote Pressure Transmitter
Provide pressure sensors for gas, liquid, or steam service remote indication that are [pneumatic] [pressure-
to-current] type. Provide direct current output and power supply that is compatible with the remote readout
indicator.
2.1.21 Remote Element Instruments
Provide remote element instruments that have sufficient length of capillary to mount the instrument on the
control panel in an accessible location. Provide excess capillary that is coiled and concealed. Provide
armored capillary where indicated.
2.1.22 Airflow Switches
Provide UL approved airflow switches, with pressure range of [30 to 2500] [_____] kilopascal, gage, and
electrical rating of [220 volts ac, 5 ampere] [110 volts ac, 10 ampere] and [560] [_____] wattage rating ac
pilot duty.
2.1.23 Pneumatic Relays
Provide [positive-acting] [gradual-acting] [direct] [reverse] relays.
2.1.24 Switches
Provide switches as indicated.
Provide adjustable switches with indicating plates and accessible adjustment. Calibrate and mark minimum-
positioning switches that control dampers in percent of maximum airflow determined by airflow test.
2.2 THERMOMETERS
Provide thermometers adjacent to thermostats with nonferrous separable sockets when in immersion
service. Select thermometer scale range according to service. Provide thermometers that are readable from
operating level.
Provide dial type temperature indicators that have a [65] [80] [90] [115] [125] millimeter diameter
antiparallax dial face with white background and black markings.
Provide [friction] [micrometer] maximum-registering type pointer with external calibrator adjustment.
Provide accuracy within [1] [_____] percent of dial range.
Provide [corrosion-resistant steel] [cast aluminum] [brass], [bottom-connection] [back-connection]

[adjustable-head] type case, with [corrosion-resistant steel] [chrome-plated] close-type ring.
Provide [vapor] [solid liquid] [bimetal] activating medium.
Provide stem length that is [15 millimeter taper pipe thread, fixed thread] [20 millimeter taper pipe thread,
separable socket].
Provide dial type thermometers or thermometers with a minimum 230 millimeter vertical scale.
Provide temperature sensor, sensor transmitter, and output signals that are directly proportional to the
variations in the measured variable. Provide linearity that is within plus or minus [1/2] [_____] percent
throughout the scale range for a [93.3] [_____] degree C span, and plus or minus [1] [_____] percent for [10]
[_____] degrees C span.
When the transmitter is over [15] [30] meter from the receiver indicator, use a signal booster to improve
signal response. Provide a transmitter that has feedback incorporated in the design and has a [10] [38] [93]
degrees C temperature range. Provide capillary that is compensated and is available in short style, [2.5]
[_____] to [5.5] [_____] meter averaging lengths. Provide unit that operates on a [140] [_____] kilopascal
input pressure and has a [20] [_____] to [100] [_____] kilopascal output over the specified range.
For multizone units, provide each zone discharge duct with a remote-reading panel-mounted dial
thermometer. Locate sensor not less than [3] [_____] meter downstream of the mixing dampers or other
device causing air turbulence.
2.3 PRESSURE GAGES
Provide pressure gages used to indicate supply and outlet air pressures of automatic control instruments that
are the manufacturer's standard, minimum [90] [_____] millimeter diameter.
2.4 CONTROL SYSTEM VALVES
Provide bronze valve bodies, DN50 iron pipe size (ips) and smaller, with [screwed] [flanged] end connections.
If DN65 ips and larger, provide cast iron valve bodies with flanged end connections.
Provide single seated valves for dead-end service except where otherwise indicated.
Provide modulating service valves with plugs matched to the characteristics of the coil for effective control.
Provide tetrafluoroethylene, spring-loaded, and self-adjusting valve-stem packing.
Provide top and bottom guided and [AISI, Type 303 corrosion-resistant steel] [Monel] valve stem. Cage
construction is acceptable.
Provide valves with position indicators and, where indicated or required for proper operation, provide with
positioners.
Provide valve linkage with an adjustment for valve lift.
2.4.1 Hydronic
Provide hydronic system valve bodies and trim that are rated for service pressures through [860] [_____]
kilopascal at [121] [_____] degrees C.
Provide hydronic system valves that have replaceable plugs and seats of [SAE, Type 72 brass] [AISI, Type 303
corrosion-resistant steel], selected for maximum life depending on application conditions.
[Provide maximum pressure drop across any hydronic system valve at maximum flow of [15] [_____]
kilopascal of water.
2.5 POWER-OPERATED DAMPERS
2.5.1 Frame and Blade Assembly
Provide frames and blades that are constructed of [extruded aluminum] [galvanized steel] [rolled carbon
steel] [corrosion-resistant steel].
Provide mechanically attached, field replaceable resilient seals. Attachment by adhesive is not acceptable.
Provide [neoprene] [flexible metal compression-type jamb seals constructed of [aluminum] [corrosion-
resistant steel]].
Provide frames that have corner reinforcement and stay rods, where necessary. Provide frames that are
fabricated by welding or riveting. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces by coating with an equal weight of
zinc.
For static pressures in excess of [750] [_____] pascal, provide master-blade-driven dampers with blades
longer than [610] [_____] millimeter with a maximum blade width of [200] [_____] millimeter. Provide
maximum blade width for other services of [250] [_____] millimeter. Provide [1220] [_____] millimeter
maximum blade length. For dampers more than [1220] [_____] millimeter wide, provide dampers that are
made in two or more sections with intermediate mullions; with each section mechanically interlocked with
adjoining section or sections.
Provide minimum shaft size of [15] [_____] millimeter, [round] [square].
Where linkage is such that operator torque is applied to a master blade and transmitted therefrom, provide a
master blade that is reinforced and a shaft that is full length. This type construction is limited to [500]
[_____] pascal, static pressure.
Provide blades that are attached to round shafts by hardened cup-point setscrews, or by being pinned.
Provide a minimum three-thread engagement. Where setscrews are used, provide two setscrews, 90 degrees
apart, to secure master blade. Secure shaft end retainers by pins or spring washers in grooved shaft or by
similar construction.
Caulk frames with elastomer compounds to prevent bypass leakage.
[Provide blades without resilient seals that have interlocking edges.
Provide maximum leakage of dampers of [_____].
2.5.2 Bearings
[Provide [oil-impregnated sintered bronze] [graphite-impregnated nylon sleeve type] shaft bearings, except
as otherwise indicated. Provide thrust washers at bearings, when necessary to maintain blade alignment.
[Provide single row, unground, flanged, radial, antifriction type shaft bearings with extended inner race
suitable for press mounting in damper frame. Provide AISI type 316 corrosion-resistant steel bearing
materials. Provide lubricant free bearings. Mark operation and maintenance manual, and attach instructions
to the damper frame noting: "DO NOT LUBRICATE CORROSION-RESISTANT STEEL BEARINGS." Factory sealed,
shielded carbon-steel ball bearings are acceptable provided lubricant conforms to DOD-G-24508.
Provide [oil-impregnated sintered bronze] [graphite-impregnated nylon] linkage pivot bearings.
2.5.3 Installation
Install dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.6 CONTROL SYSTEM VALVE AND DAMPER OPERATORS
2.6.1 Operators
Provide motor operators that provide smooth proportional control under operating conditions normal to the
system.
Provide spring-return operators for two-position control.
Provide spring returns on reversible operators where required for fail-safe operation.
For operators operating in sequence with other operators, provide operators that have adjustable operating
ranges and set points.
Provide operators that have sufficient power on closeoff to provide tight sealing against maximum system
pressures.
Provide operators that close valves and dampers to fail-safe position indicated.
2.6.2 Dampers
Provide dampers that are equipped with operators of sufficient power to control dampers, without flutter or
hunting, through the entire operating range at air velocities at least [20] [_____] percent greater than
maximum design velocity.
2.6.3 Pneumatic Operators
Provide positioners where two or more operators are controlled from the same controller, and where
indicated. Mount positioners directly on the driven device. Provide feedback from the [stem] [rod] through
a pilot spring. Provide adjustable starting point from [15] [_____] to [85] [_____] kilopascal. Provide
adjustable operating span from [35] [_____] to [90] [_____] kilopascal.
2.6.4 Electric Operators
Provide reversible type electric motor operators for modulating control.
Provide split-phase type electric motor operators with oil-immersed gear train. Provide motor that has
ample capacity to handle applied loads under operating conditions normal to the system. Heat locations
where temperatures fall below minimum operating temperature of operator.
2.7 CENTRAL CONTROL CABINET
Provide a free-standing modular type control cabinet with hinged, locking access door, one per module.
[Provide control cabinet that consists of enclosed wall-mounted modular cabinet sections. Provide lockable
cabinets with hinged fronts to provide access to the interior of each cabinet.
Provide a 1.5 millimeter thick, high-pressure laminate-covered writing surface and recessed storage drawers
with locks.
2.7.1 Cabinet Construction
Provide cabinets made of [steel] [aluminum], suitably reinforced and braced to provide a flat-faced, rigid-
front panel.
Provide surfaces that are free of scale, welding slag, and dirt, and are flat without waves. Do not distort or
buckle the cabinet during installation handling.
Provide square cutouts with panels to ensure that instruments are installed level and square.
Make finished cutouts and holes free of burrs and sharp edges. Provide cutouts made up of [modular
sections] [fabricated sections] in sizes suitable for handling. Provide neat and straight section joints. Securely
fasten together and align cabinets, and securely wall or floor anchor each cabinet, as required.
Provide high-grade steel exterior hardware with [polished-nickel] [chrome-plated] finish.
Provide cadmium-plated steel interior hardware.

Provide access doors with hinges, latches, and locks. Provide sufficiently sturdy cabinet frames to prevent
doors from sagging when open. Provide latches to hold doors open at 90 degrees and provide roller latches
to hold doors closed. Furnish keys that are common to all access door locks.
2.7.2 Finish
Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3. Provide blast pattern that has a maximum surface
profile of [0.05] [_____] millimeter. Not more than [8] [_____] hours after cleaning, follow the
manufacturer's standard procedure for priming and finish painting. Conform to CID A-A-2962 or FED-STD-
595 for final coat, semi-gloss green enamel for all external surfaces. Use soft gloss white paint for interior
surfaces. When painting is not started within 8 hours after cleaning, reclean surfaces before painting.
2.7.3 Graphic System Portrayal
Provide cabinets with individual modules portraying systems configurations. Provide portrayals by approved
color-coded graphic tapes in laminated plastic securely fastened to the front panel. Provide beveled edges
that are finished smooth and free of waves, scratches, or gouges. Identify instruments and auxiliary
equipment by engraved [plastic] [formica] labels. Tape is not acceptable.
2.7.4 Instruments and Components
Obtain approval of instruments prior to installation. Provide clean instruments that are free of foreign
matter.
Provide pipe connections in air lines at each pneumatic room controller to connect gages for testing.
2.7.4.1 Receiver-Type Indicator
Provide receiver-type dial size indicators as indicated.
Provide indicator cases that are made of drawn steel, flush mounted with three equally spaced [screws]
[panel clamps] and panel cutout to match indicator as furnished.
Provide bourdon tube of material and construction suitable for 20 to 100 kilopascal input.
Accomplish indicator movement by [precision brass] [approved manufacturer's standard practice].
Provide a dial with black numerals and graduating marks on a flat white background.
Provide fixed needle pointer.
Provide indicator calibration by means of calibration screw on face of indicator, with dial accuracy to within
0.5 degree C in the applicable range.
Provide scale ranges that operate full scale between 20 and 100 kilopascal, with scale ranges as indicated.
2.7.4.2 Electronic Temperature Indicator
Provide electronic temperature indicator that indicates the sensor input throughout the operating range of
the system. Provide accuracy within plus or minus [1/2] [_____] percent of the system range. Provide input
that is proportional to the measured variable. Provide scale range of minus [29] [_____] to plus [95] [_____]
degrees C.
2.7.4.3 Electronic Pressure Indicator
Provide electronic pressure indicator, calibrated in pascal, that indicates the pressure drop through range of
transmitter. Provide accuracy of not less than plus or minus [10] [_____] pascal.
2.7.4.4 Remote Control Point Adjuster
Provide remote adjustment for resetting the set point of the control device in [2] [_____]-degree increments
for the full range of the control span.
2.7.4.5 Manual Minimum Position Switch
Provide manual minimum position switch that has an adjustable minimum output between [20] [_____] and
[90] [_____] kilopascal, that is furnished with a calibrated [0] [_____] to [100] [_____] percent set point scale
with scale divisions of [5] [_____] or less, and that has a set point-locking adjustment knob. Provide a switch
suitable for a maximum pressure of not less than [175] [_____] kilopascal.
2.7.4.6 Remote Temperature Transmitter
Provide remote temperature transmission of discharge air and space temperature that transmits a signal in
proportion to the measured temperature to an electronic thermometer in the central control panel. Provide
plus or minus [0.25] degree C [_____] total system accuracy.
2.7.4.7 Remote Filter Pressure Transmitter
Provide filter pressure-drop transmitter that transmits an electronic signal to a common pressure indicator,
calibrated in pascal, at the control center. Provide accuracy of not less than plus or minus [10] [_____]
pascal. Provide pressure transmitter range from [0] [_____] to [1500] [_____] pascal.
2.7.5 Panel Instrument Tubing
Provide copper or black polyethylene instrument tubing within panels. Provide tubing connections at panels
that are made with through-bulkhead type fittings.
Neatly install and properly support tubing. For instruments and accessories mounted on hinged access
panels, provide sufficient flexible tubing to allow the door to open at least 135 degrees. Tie flexible tubing
into a single cable.
Provide pressuretight fittings and joints, and as indicated.
2.8 INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM CONTROL PANELS
Provide each air handling system with an individual control panel mounted adjacent to and vibration isolated
from the air handling unit.
Provide manufacturer's standard steel construction control panel of adequate gage and sufficient
reinforcement to be completely rigid. Provide manufacturer's color finish approved by the Engineer. Provide
mechanically attached, engraved, [3] [_____] millimeter thick, laminated, black and white plastic
identification plates. Locate panel as indicated.
Provide panel that contains a thermometer for each duct or immersion thermostat, as indicated, and for
electropneumatic and pneumoelectric switches not connected to starters, pilot lights for fan air filters, pump
motors, filter runout pilot lights, air switches, or other accessories, as indicated. Provide panel that contains
all controllers, recorders, and other instruments, including a 40 millimeter gage showing pressure of primary
air to pneumatic controllers; and 40 millimeter gages showing pressures of controlled air from each
controller, other than room controllers.
2.9 FACTORY FINISHING
Manufacturer's standard factory finishing systems is acceptable with certification that the factory painting
system applied withstands 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, and equipment located outdoors withstands 500
hours in salt-spray fog test. Perform salt-spray fog test in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the
acceptance criteria are the following: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shows no signs of
blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shows no signs of rust creepage
beyond 3.0 mm on either side of the scratch mark.
Provide a film thickness of not less than the film thickness used on the test specimen for the factory finishing
system applied on the equipment. If manufacturer's standard factory finishing system is being proposed for
use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 50 degrees C, provide a factory finishing system designed for
the temperature service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install control components using qualified control and instrumentation specialists working under the
direction of the manufacturer's representative.
Install control components using Contractor-certified control and instrumentation specialists.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as indicated.
Submit Installation Drawings and include details of equipment room layout and design.
Provide Listing of Product Installations for controls and instrumentation systems that include identification of
at least [5] [_____] units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a
minimum period of [5] [_____] years. Include purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and
date of installation on list.
3.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION
To prevent vibration, isolate controllers by location or by mounting devices supplied by the equipment
manufacturer.
Install tubing and conduit to prevent the transmission of equipment vibration. Mount single tube runs in
aircraft-type clamps containing an elastomer insert, preventing contact with ducting or air handling unit
housing, casing, or enclosure. Provide multiple runs that conform to the same isolation requirements, but
submit mounting details for approval. Refer to Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for vibration isolation considerations.
Perform PT&I tests and provide submittals as specified in Section 01 86 12.07 40 RELIABILITY CENTERED
ACCEPTANCE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
Provide equipment to check the calibration of instruments. Recalibrate or replace instruments not in
calibration.
Perform tests in accordance with referenced standards in this section.
[Test multizone unit dampers for temperature pickup due to leakage when hot deck is closed and cold deck is
open. Provide [1] [_____] degrees C maximum temperature rise when the temperature difference between
the hot and cold decks is [10] [_____] degrees C, unless otherwise approved.
]After the inspection has been completed, check systems for continuity.
After completion of control and instrument piping, test and adjust control equipment in terms of design,
function, systems balance, and performance, and otherwise make ready for air handling systems acceptance
tests. Provide data showing set points and final adjustments of controls.
After air handling system acceptance and after the systems have operated in normal service for [2] [_____]
weeks, check the adjustment on instruments and devices. Correct items found to be out of order. When air
handling systems are in specified operating condition and when all other pertinent specifications
requirements have been met, automatic temperature-control systems are acceptable.
Test pneumatic systems in accordance with ISA 7.0.01. Provide system pressure that does not exceed [200]
[_____] kilopascal.
Submit test reports to the Engineer.
3.6 OPERATOR TRAINING
Provide written operating instructions and not less than [8] [_____] hours of operator training.
Provide classroom and field instructions in operation and maintenance of systems equipment where required
by the technical provisions. Direct these services using the manufacturer's factory trained personnel or
qualified representative. Give the Engineer [seven] [_____] calendar days written notice of scheduled
instructional services. Make instructional materials belonging to the manufacturer or vendor available to the
Engineer.
3.7 SPECIAL TOOLS
Provide special tools as required for the operation and adjustment of controllers, instruments, or other
control system devices.
3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals that are consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures,
schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures and safety precautions.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 23 25 00
CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
ASTM D1384 (2005; R 2012) Corrosion Test for Engine Coolants in

Glassware
ASTM D2688 (2011) Corrosivity of Water in the Absence of Heat Transfer

(Weight Loss Methods)
ASTM D596 (2001; R 2011) Reporting Results of Analysis of Water
NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
PWTB 420-49-5 (1998) Industrial Water Treatment Procedures
UFC 3-230-03 (2012) Water Treatment
Estidama Pearl Rating (1 Pearl)

Mechanical Specifications 23 25 00 - 1 Chemical Treatment of Water for Mechanical Systems

This section covers the provisions and installation procedures necessary for a complete and totally functional
water system(s) chemical treatment. Provide and install the system with all necessary System Components,
Accessories, Piping Components, and Supplemental Components/Services.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
SD-03 Product Data
Water Treatment System

Water Analysis
Spare Parts
Field Instructions
Tests
Training Course
SD-06 Test Reports

Condenser Water QA Tests
Steam Boiler Water QA Tests
Water Treatment System
1.4.1 Safety
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be electrically
energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded,
or fitted with other types of safety devices. Install safety devices so that proper operation of equipment is
not impaired. Provide [catwalk,] [ladder,] [and guardrail] where indicated and in accordance with Section [05
50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS] [05 51 33 METAL LADDERS].
1.4.2 1Drawings
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories
that may be required. Carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and finish
conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange such work accordingly, furnishing
required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the
detail drawings, not later than 1 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a
complete list of parts and supplies, with source of supply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
a. Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, that are of a similar material, design and workmanship and that have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening.
b. The two-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and
of similar size. The two years’ experience shall have been satisfactorily completed by a product which has
been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's
catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.
c. All products shall be supported by a service organization. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent
service organizations for support of the equipment, including their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and shall be able to
render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period
of the contract.
d. The selected service organization shall provide the chemicals required, the concentrations required, and
the water treatment equipment sizes and flow rates required. The company shall provide all chemicals
required for the [condenser] [condenser and chilled] water systems and fill the systems with chemicals to
the levels specified. The chemical shall meet the requirements of this specification as well as the
recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and cooling tower. Acid treatment chemicals
shall not be used.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, and catalog
or serial number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment. Nameplates shall be provided for:
a. Pump(s)
b. Pump Motor(s)
2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical equipment, motors, motor efficiencies, and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with
motors, motor starters, and controls. Electrical characteristics and enclosure type shall be as shown, and
unless otherwise indicated, all motors of 745 W and above totally enclosed fan cooled enclosures, shall be
high efficiency type. Field wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Each motor shall
conform to NEMA MG 1 and be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without
exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. All motors shall be continuous duty with the enclosure
specified. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances
necessary for the motor control indicated. Furnish motors with a magnetic across-the-line or reduced voltage
type starter as required by the manufacturer. Motor starter shall be provided with NEMA 1 enclosures.
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any
control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided.

2.4 GAUGES
Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100, Class 1, 2, or 3, Style X, Type I or III as required, 115 mm in diameter
with phenolic or metal case.
2.5 WATER ANALYSIS
Conditions of make-up water to be supplied to the boilers, cooling towers and chilled water systems reported
in accordance with ASTM D596 are as follows:
Date of Sample [_____]
Temperature [_____] degrees C.
Silica (SiO 2) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Insoluble [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Iron, total (Fe) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Aluminum (Al) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Calcium (Ca) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Magnesium (Mg) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Carbonate (HCO 3) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Sulfate (SO 4) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Chloride (Cl) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Nitrate (NO 3) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Turbidity [_____] ntu
PH [_____]
Residual Chlorine [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Total Alkalinity [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Non-Carbonate Hardness [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Total Hardness [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Dissolved Solids [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Conductivity [_____] micromho/cm
2.6 CONDENSER WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
The use of chemical-treatment products containing hexavalent chromium (Cr) is prohibited. Treat the water
to be used in the condenser water systems to maintain the conditions recommended by this specification as
well as the recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and evaporator coils. Chemicals
shall meet all required federal, state, and local environmental regulations for the treatment of condenser-
side heat exchangers, cooling towers and direct discharge to the sanitary sewer.
2.6.1 Condenser Water Limits
The condenser water limits shall be as follows, unless dictated differently by the cooling tower or chiller
manufacturer's recommendations:
Treatment type Phosphonate/Polymer

Puckorius Index 4 minimum
Langelier Index 4 maximum
Total Dissolved Solids 5000 ppm maximum
Calcium Hardness 1200 ppm maximum
Silica 150 ppm maximum
PH 7.5 - 8.5

For treated condenser/cooling tower water, blowdown must be minimized until the first of one of the top 5
limits is reached. Specific requirements for treatment chemicals and levels are listed below in paragraphs
dealing with small and large systems.
2.6.2 Glycol Solution
Provide for the system a 20 percent concentration by volume of industrial grade [ethylene] [propylene]
glycol, and corrosion inhibitors. Test the glycol in accordance with ASTM D1384 with less than 0.013 mm
penetration per year for all system metals. The glycol shall contain corrosion inhibitors. Silicate based
inhibitors are not acceptable. The solution shall be compatible with pump seals, other elements of the
system, and water treatment chemicals used within the system.
2.6.3 Chemical Treatment for Small Systems
For cooling systems with a capacity of 175.8 kW or less, provide the following chemical treatment. For
corrosion control provide 6.8 to 9.1 kg polyphosphate in nylon mesh bag in cooling tower sump. If biocide is
needed, use either 1-bromo-3-chloro-5.5-dimethylhydantoin or glutaraldehyde as recommended by
manufacturer.
2.6.4 Chemical Treatment for Large Systems
For cooling systems with capacities greater than 175.8 kW provide one of the three following chemical
treatments with the limits indicated. The zinc and molybdate in the last two treatments help to meet the
maximum corrosion requirements in waters that tend to be more corrosive. Biocides must be maintained to
control bacteria below 10,000 colony forming units per milliliter.
a. Phosphonate Type Treatment
Phosphonate (3-5 ppm)

Polymer (3-4 ppm)
TT (1-2 ppm)
Biocides as required
b. Zinc-Phosphonate Type Treatment

Polymer (3-4 ppm)
Zinc (1-2 ppm)
TT (1-2 ppm)
c. Zinc-Molybdate Type Treatment

Polymer (3-4 ppm)
Molybdate (10-15 ppm)
Zinc (2-3 ppm)
TT (1-2 ppm)

2.6.4.1 General Requirements
Provide a water treatment system capable of automatically feeding chemicals and bleeding the system to
prevent corrosion, scale, and biological formations. Submit 3 (Three) complete copies, at least 5 weeks prior
to the purchase of the water treatment system, of the proposed water treatment plan including a layout;
control scheme; a list of existing make-up water chemistry, including the items listed in paragraph Water
Analysis; a list of treatment chemicals to be added; the proportion of chemicals to be added; the final treated
water control levels; and a description of health, safety and environmental concerns for handling the
chemicals plus any special ventilation requirements. Automatic chemical feed systems shall automatically
feed chemicals into the condenser water based on makeup water rate. Electrical signals from a water meter
on the makeup water line shall be used to control the output of chemical feed pumps. The system shall be
initially set manually based on the water analysis of the make-up water. Submit 3 (Three) complete copies of
operating and maintenance manuals for the step-by-step water treatment procedures. The manuals shall
include testing procedures used in determining water quality.
2.6.4.2 Chemical Feed Pumps and Tanks
a. Furnish chemical feed pumps and tanks as a package with the pumps mounted on and piping connected
to the tank. The chemical feed pumps shall be positive displacement diaphragm type. The pump's
cylinders, plungers, ball check valves, and check valve bodies shall be of corrosion resistant materials
suitable for the chemicals being pumped. Cylinders shall be replaceable for increased or reduced
pressure or capacity ranges.
b. The flow rate of the pumps shall be adjustable from 0 to 100 percent while in operation. Volumetric
accuracy of the pumps shall be within one percent over the range indicated. Pump capacities shall be
adjustable by positioning crank pin with micrometer setscrews. Stroke length scale shall be divided in
percentage graduations engraved on scale. The discharge pressure of pumps shall not be less than 1.5
times the line pressure at the point of connection. The pumps shall be provided with a pressure relief
valve and a check valve mounted in the pump discharge. The pumps shall be controlled by an external
controller/timer receiving signals from the makeup water meter.
c. Drive motors shall be 230 volt, single phase and shall have drip-proof enclosures. Provide two chemical
tanks. The tanks shall be constructed of high density polyethylene or fiber reinforced plastic with a
hinged cover and mounted on legs. Tanks shall have filling and drain connections and gauge glass. Each
tank shall be furnished with one pump, mounted and piped with black iron pipe and fittings, with suction
strainer and stainless steel screen, and with 13 mm relief valve with steel body and stainless steel trim.
Tank bottom shall be dished concave to a radius equal to the diameter of the tank. Motor-driven agitator
shall be provided. The tanks shall have sufficient capacity to require recharging only once per 21 days
during normal operation. Or as per Schedules
2.6.4.3 Chemical Injection Assembly
Provide an injection assembly at each chemical feed point. Locate the injection assembly downstream of
recirculating pumps and upstream of the condenser. The injection assemblies shall be constructed of
stainless steel. The discharge of the assemblies shall extend to the centerline of the condenser water piping.
Each assembly shall include a shutoff valve and check valve at the point of entrance into the condenser water
line.
2.6.4.4 Water Meter
Provide water meters with an electric contacting register and remote accumulative counter. Install the meter
within the make-up water line, as indicated.

2.6.4.5 Timers
Timers shall be of the automatic reset, adjustable type, and electrically operated. The timers shall be
designed to work with the contacting head water meters. The timer should include the water meter cable.
The timers will control operation of the chemical feed pumps. The timers shall be suitable for a 120 volt
current. The timers shall be located within the water treatment control panel.
2.6.4.6 Bleed (Blowdown) Line
Control the flow through the bleed line by a conductivity meter and probe installed to measure the
conductivity of the condenser water. The conductivity meter shall have a high and low set point above which
the conductivity meter shall open a solenoid valve on the bleed line. The bleed line attachment to the
condenser water piping shall be located downstream of the recirculating pumps and upstream of the
chemical injection point. The bleed line shall be extended to the nearest drain for continuous discharge.
2.6.4.7 Control Panel
The control panel shall be a NEMA 12 enclosure suitable for surface mounting. The panel shall be constructed
of stainless steel with a hinged door and lock. The panel shall contain a laminated plastic nameplate
identifying each of the following functions:
(1) Main power switch and indicating light

(2) MAN-OFF-AUTO selector switch
(3) Indicating lamp for bleed-off valve
(4) Indicating lamp for each chemical feed pump
(5) Set point reading for each timer
(6) Connection to Building Management System
2.6.4.8 Chemical Piping
The piping and fittings shall be constructed of schedule 80 PVC suitable for the water treatment chemicals.
2.6.4.9 Sequence of Operation
The chemicals shall be added based upon sensing the make-up water flow rate and activating appropriate
timers. A separate timer shall be provided for each chemical. The blow down shall be controlled based upon
the conductivity of the condenser water. The injection of the chemical required for biological control shall be
controlled by a timer that can be manually set for proper chemical feed. All timer set points, blow down
rates, and chemical pump flow rates shall be determined and set by the water treatment company.

2.6.4.10 Test Kits
One test kit of each type required to determine the water quality as outlined within the operation and
maintenance manuals shall be provided.
2.7 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
A 20 L shot feeder shall be provided on the chilled water piping as indicated. The feeder shall be furnished
with an air vent, gauge glass, funnel, valves, fittings, and piping.
2.7.1.1 Chilled Water Treatment
Treat chilled water with either a borax/nitrite type treatment or a molybdate type treatment. Both types of
treatment can be used with glycol. Borax/nitrite treatment shall be maintained at the limits of 600 to 1000
ppm nitrite, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor (TT or MBT), and pH of 8.5 to 9.5. Molybdate treatment
shall be maintained at the limits of 100 to 125 ppm molybdate, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor (TT or
MBT), and pH of 8.0 to 9.0.
2.7.1.2 Dual Temperature Systems
Dual hot/chilled water systems treated with borax/nitrite shall also be treated with a biocide.
2.7.1.3 Chilled Water Test Kits
maintenance manuals shall be provided (e.g. pH and nitrite or molybdate).
2.8 TEST KIT
maintenance manuals shall be provided (e.g. pH, hardness and sulfite).
2.9 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
Drain and makeup water piping shall comply with the requirements of Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL
PURPOSE. Drains which connect to sanitary sewer systems shall be connected by means of an indirect waste.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Client of
any discrepancy, before performing any work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Provide all chemicals, equipment and labor necessary to bring all system waters in conformance with the
specified requirements. Perform all work in accordance with the manufacturer's published diagrams,
recommendations, and equipment warranty requirements.
3.3 PIPING
Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with a dielectric union.
3.4 TRAINING COURSE
Submit a schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed training course that identifies the date,
time, and location for the training. Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the
Client. The training period shall consist of a total 45 hours of normal working time and start after the system
is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. Submit field instructions, at least 2 weeks prior
to construction completion, including equipment layout, wiring and control diagrams, piping, valves and
control sequences, and typed condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation instructions shall
include preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal and safe
operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. The posted instructions shall be
framed under glass or laminated plastic and posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer. The field
instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
3.5 TESTS
If the waters of the mechanical systems are not in conformance with the specified requirements or in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, the water treatment company shall take corrective
action to enable compliance. Daily operational tests shall be performed in the directed frequencies to
maintain required control to prevent corrosion, scaling and damage to equipment during operation Submit
test schedules, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing, for the
condenser/chilled/boiler/condensate/feedwater, water quality tests. The schedules shall identify the date,
time, frequency and collection location for each test.

3.5.1 Condenser Water Quality Tests
3.5.1.1 Small Systems (weekly)
Once a week, for cooling systems with a capacity of 175.8 kW or less, the following items shall be recorded.
PH [_____]
Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
3.5.1.2 Tests for Large Systems (daily)
Daily, for cooling systems with a capacity larger than 175.8 kW, the following items shall be recorded.
PH [_____]
Phosphonate [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Zinc, if used (Zn) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Molybdate, if used (Mo) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
3.5.2 Chilled Water Testing (monthly)
Once a month, the following tests will be performed on chilled water.
PH [_____]
Nitrite or Molybdate [_____] ppm (mg/L)
3.5.3 Hot Water Boiler Water Quality Testing
3.5.3.1 Low and Medium Temperature Systems (monthly)
Monthly testing shall be completed and recorded for the following parameters.
PH [_____]
3.5.3.2 High Temperature Hot Water Systems (daily)
Daily testing shall be completed and recorded for the following parameters.
PH [_____]
Sulfite (Na2SO3) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Hardness [_____] ppm (mg/L)
3.5.4 Quality Assurance Testing
Conduct QA testing periodically by an independent water treatment lab/consultant to verify to managers

that the mechanical and water treatment systems are being maintained properly. Provide the QA evaluation
reports to the government COR.

3.5.4.1 Condenser Water QA Tests
Submit test reports in bound 216 by 279 mm booklets. The reports shall identify the chemical composition of
the condenser water. The reports shall also include a comparison of the manufacturer's or chemical vendor's
recommended operating conditions for the cooling tower and condenser in relation to the actual condition of
the condenser water. Any required corrective action shall be documented within the report.
a. For cooling systems with a capacity of 175.8 kW or less, the following tests shall be performed
Presence of scale/corrosion [_____]

Polyphosphate [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Biocide [_____] ppm (mg/L)
PH [_____]
Calcium Hardness (as CaCO3) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Written evaluation summary
b. For cooling systems with capacities greater than 175.8 kW), the condenser water shall be analyzed a
minimum of once a month for a period of one year by the water treatment company. The analysis shall
include the following information recorded in accordance with ASTM D596.
Date of Sample [_____]

Temperatures (before & after condenser) [_____] [_____] degrees C.
pH [_____]
Silica (SiO2) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Iron (total, as Fe(2)O(3)) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Copper (Cu) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Calcium Hardness(CaCO3) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Total Hardness (as CaCO3) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Chloride (Cl) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Total Dissolved Solids [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Phosphonate (as PO4) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Zinc (if used) (Zn) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Molybdate (if used) (Mo) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Tolyltriazole (TT) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Biocide [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Bacteria colony count [_____] colonies/mL
Makeup water pH [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Makeup water Iron [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Makeup water Silica [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Makeup water Calcium Hardness [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Makeup water Total Hardness [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Makeup water Total Alkalinity [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Makeup water Chloride (Cl) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
Makeup water Conductivity [_____] micromho/cm

3.5.4.2 Chilled Water Quality Assurance Testing (quarterly)
Quarterly, the following tests shall be performed on chilled water.
PH [_____]
Iron (total, as Fe (2) O (3)) [_____] ppm (mg/L)
3.5.5 Corrosion Testers
Install corrosion coupon and rack systems to verify corrosion control in the systems. Testers or coupons are
installed in flowing system water through a side stream or rack system. Both mild steel and copper metal
samples are to be tested in the corrosion testers in accordance with ASTM D2688. Samples are to be
replaced and analyzed every 3 months. Rates of corrosion less than 3 mpy for steel and 0.2 mpy for copper
are acceptable. Corrosion testers shall be installed on the piping systems of the following systems.
Condenser loop
Chilled water system
Hot water loop
Condensate
3.6 INSPECTIONS
3.6.1 Inspection General Requirements
Thirty days after project completion, inspect the cooling tower and condenser for problems due to corrosion,
scale, and biological growth. If the cooling tower and condenser are found not to conform to the
manufacturer's recommended conditions, and the water treatment company recommendations have been
followed; the water treatment company shall provide all chemicals and labor for cleaning or repairing the
equipment as required by the manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 31 13.00 40
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS apply to work specified in
this section.
Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT applies to work
in this section.
1.1 REFERENCES
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 325 (2011) Steel Construction Manual
AISC 360 (2010) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK (2012) Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment (SI
Edition)
ASHRAE FUN SI (2009; Errata 2010) Fundamentals Handbook, SI Edition
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals

for Brazing and Braze Welding
ASTM A123/A123M (2012) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A36/A36M (2012) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A653/A653M (2011) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A924/A924M (2013) Standard Specification for General Requirements
for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C1071 (2012) Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining
Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
Mechanical Specifications 23 31 13.00 40 - 1 Metal Ducts

ASTM D257 (2007) Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or

Conductance of Insulating Materials
ASTM E90 (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions and Elements
NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning

and Ventilating Systems
SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and

Flexible, 3rd Edition
SMACNA 1987 (2006) HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide, 3rd Edition
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE AMS 2480 (2009; Rev H) Phosphate Treatment, Paint, Base
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC Painting Manual (2002) Good Painting Practice, Steel Structures Painting
Manual, Volume 1
UL 181 (2005; Reprint Oct 2008) Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air
Connectors
UL 555 (2006; Reprint May 2012) Standard for Fire Dampers

1.2 SUBMITTALS
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Connection Diagrams

Record Drawings
Offset Fitting Configurations
SD-03 Product Data
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Brazing Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Round, High-Pressure, Double-Wall Sheet Metal Ducts
Turning Vanes
Sound Traps
Flexible Connectors
Flexible Duct Materials
Power Operated Dampers
Fire Dampers and Wall Collars
Gravity Backdraft and Relief Dampers
Manual Volume Dampers
SD-05 Design Data
Design Analysis and Calculations
SD-06 Test Reports
Ductwork Leakage Tests
Operational Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Brazing Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials

Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Round, High-Pressure, Double-Wall Sheet Metal Ducts
Turning Vanes
Dampers
Sound Traps
Flexible Connectors
Power Operated Dampers
Fire Dampers and Wall Collars
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
Provide record drawings with current factual information. Include deviations from, and amendments to, the
drawings and concealed or visible changes in the work, for medium/high pressure ductwork systems. Label
drawings "As-Built".

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Include the manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty
information, and fabrication site information within material, equipment, and fixture lists.
Provide low-pressure systems ductwork and plenums where maximum air velocity is 10.1 meter per second and
maximum static pressure is 500 pascal water gage (wg), positive or negative.
Submit connection diagrams for low pressure ductwork systems indicating the relation and connection of
devices and apparatus by showing the general physical layout of all controls, the interconnection of one system
(or portion of system) with another, and internal tubing, wiring, and other devices.
Submit design analysis and calculations for low pressure ductwork systems indicating the manufacturers
recommended air velocities, maximum static pressures, temperature calculations and acoustic levels.
Encompass high velocity systems ductwork where:
a. Minimum air velocity exceeds 10 meter per second or static pressure exceeds 500 pascal.
b. Medium static pressure ranges from over 500 pascal through 750 pascal, positive or negative, or over 750
pascal through 1500 pascal positive.
c. High static pressure ranges from over 1500 pascal through 2500 pascal, positive.
d. Do not use rigid fibrous-glass ductwork.
2.1.1 Design Requirements
Submit records of existing conditions including the results of a survey consisting of work area conditions, and
features of existing structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite.
Submit equipment and performance data for medium/high pressure ductwork systems consisting of use life,
system functional flows, safety features, and mechanical automated details. Submit test response and
performance characteristics curves for certified equipment.
Submit design analysis and calculations for medium/high pressure ductwork systems indicating the
manufacturer's recommended air velocities, maximum static pressure, and temperature calculations.

2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Provide hot-dip galvanized carbon steel ductwork sheet metal of lock-forming quality, with regular spangle-type
zinc coating, conforming to ASTM A924/A924M and ASTM A653/A653M, Designation G90. Treat duct surfaces to
be painted by apostatizing.
Conform to ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 for sheet metal
thickness and reinforcement thickness.
Low pressure ductwork minimum standards are:
MINIMUM SHEET METAL THICKNESS
TABLE A: Rectangular Or Round Ducts - Low & Medium Pressure
(Modified Table 4 DW/146)
____________________________________________________________________
DUCT SIZE NOMINAL SHEET THICKNESS
(Longer Side or Diameter) mm.
Up to 400 mm. 0.7
401 mm. to 600 mm 0.8
601 mm. to 800 mm. 1.0
801 mm. to 1000 mm. 1.0
1001 mm. to 1500 mm. 1.0

1501 mm. to 2500 mm. 1.2
2501 mm. to 3000 mm. 1.6
_____________________________________________________________________
All rectangular ducts over 400 mm. longer side shall be stiffened by beading at 300 mm. centers or cross breaking
at not more than 1220 mm. spacing. Ducts above 800 mm. longer sides to have transverse joints flanged in
accordance with DW/142, with maximum spacing of 2000 mm.

2.2.2 Brazing Materials
Provide silicon bronze brazing materials conforming to AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
2.2.3 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Conform to ASTM A36/A36Mfor mill-rolled structural steel and, wherever in contact with sheet metal ducting
galvanize to commercial weight of zinc or coated with materials conforming to ASTM A123/A123M SSPC Painting
Manual.
In lieu of mill-rolled structural steel, submit for approval equivalent strength, proprietary design, rolled-steel
structural support systems.
2.3 COMPONENTS
2.3.1 Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Submit offset fitting configurations for approval. Shop fabricate fittings.
2.3.1.1 Fittings Construction
Manufacture as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded or brazed into duct sections.
Provide two-piece type miter elbows for angles less than 31 degrees, three-piece type for angles 31 through 60
degrees, and five-piece type for angles 61 through 90 degrees. Ensure centerline radius of elbows is 1-1/2 times
fitting cross section diameter.
Provide conical type crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and 90-degree tees.
Ensure cutouts in fitting body are equal to branch tap dimension or, where smaller, excess material is flared and
rolled into smooth radius nozzle configuration.
2.3.2 Round, High-Pressure, Double-Wall Sheet Metal Ducts
Shop fabricate ducts and fittings.
Construction comprises of an airtight, vapor barrier, outer pressure shell, a 25 millimeter insulation layer, and a
metal inner liner that completely covers the insulation throughout the system.
Provide insulation conforming to NFPA 90A and ASTM C1071 for thermal conductivity in accordance with ASTM
D257.
2.3.3 Reinforcement
Support inner liners of both duct and fittings by metal spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and
concentricity.

2.3.4 Fittings
Submit offset fitting configurations for approval.
Make divided flow fittings as separate fittings, not tap collars into duct sections, with the following construction
requirements:
a. Sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and tap
b. Tap liner securely welded to inner liner, with weld spacing not to exceed 75 millimeter
c. Pack insulation around the branch tap area for complete cavity filling.
d. Carefully fit branch connection to cutout openings in inner liner without spaces for air erosion of insulation
and without sharp projections that cause noise and airflow disturbance.
Continuously braze seams in the pressure shell of fittings. Protect galvanized areas that have been damaged by
welding with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Construct two-piece type elbows for angles through 35 degrees, three-piece type for angles 36 through 71
degrees, and five-piece type for angles 72 through 90 degrees.
Provide conical type crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and 90-degree tees.
2.3.5 Turning Vanes
Provide double-wall type turning vanes, commercially manufactured for high-velocity system service.
2.3.6 Dampers
Construct low pressure drop, high-velocity manual volume dampers, and high-velocity fire dampers in
accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Dampers shall be of Flannged Type
2.3.7 Sound Traps
Provide sound traps.
Ensure the pressure drop at the rated flow does not exceed ratings in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK,
Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 or design criteria.
Ensure the sound trap is airtight when operating under an internal pressure of 2600 pascal. Provide an air-side
surface capable of withstanding air velocities of 50 meters per second without any particulate matter leaving the
trap and being carried downstream.
2.3.7.1 Attenuation
Factory fabricate sound traps. Confirm cataloged acoustic attenuation made by an independent laboratory in
accordance with ASTM E90. Confirm pressure drop measurements in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK,
Chapter 18. For noise-reduction data, include effects of flanking paths and vibration transmission. Conduct tests
with standard metal inlet and outlet connections under indicated capacity flow.

Ensure attenuation is in accordance with ASHRAE FUN SI. Include a graphic system noise spectrum certification
indicating proposed fan sound power level. Attenuation of ducting system proposed for installation is based on
ASHRAE FUN SI for bends, branches, and other duct system construction noise criteria curve.
Reduce fan-rated sound-power level to not less than 65 decibels in the 250-hertz third octave band when
measured at the sound trap discharge end.
2.3.7.2 Construction of Sound Traps
Provide double-metal walled, round/ rectangular sound traps. Provide mill-galvanized sheet metal steel with
commercial weight of zinc, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M. Exterior metal acts as a vapor barrier. Metal
thickness is not less than that required for the pressure service, in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK,
Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966, but not less than 0.85 millimeter. Cover absorbing
material, on the sound-impinging side, with formed perforated mill-galvanized steel of not less than 0.70
millimeter. Ensure all exterior sheet joints are continuously welded. or construct with locksets filled with
chloroprene mastic prior to forming.
Spot weld interior surfaces not more than 75 millimeter on center. Ensure all connections to duct transitions are
flanged with through-bolted 3 by 25 millimeter continuous rubber gasketing. Provide vibration isolated trapeze
type supports.
Provide fibrous glass absorption material. Ensure surfaces exposed to airstream are chloroprene coated or
protected with woven fibrous-glass cloth conforming to ASTM C1071. Ensure the total compressed thickness
gives the required attenuation, and thermal insulation to preclude condensation on exterior surface under
normal operating conditions. Compressed material density is approximately 72 kilograms per cubic meter.
Select materials conforming to fire hazard requirements of NFPA 90A.
2.3.8 Flexible Connectors for Sheet Metal
Use UL listed connectors, 915 gram per square meter, waterproof, fire-retardant, airtight, woven fibrous-glass
cloth, double coated with chloroprene. Clear width, not including clamping section, is 150 to 200 millimeter.
Provide leaded vinyl sheets as a second layer for sound attenuation. Ensure leaded vinyl is not less than 1.4
millimeter thick, weighing not less than 4.25 kilogram per square meter, and capable of approximately 10-
decibel attenuation in the 10- to 10,000-hertz range.
2.3.9 Duct Hangers
For duct hangers in contact with galvanized duct surfaces, provide galvanized steel painted with inorganic zinc.
2.3.10 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Provide mill-rolled structural steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M. Whenever in contact with sheet metal
ducting, provide galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
In lieu of mill-rolled structural steel, submit equivalent strength, proprietary-design, rolled-steel structural
support systems for approval.

2.3.11 Flexible Duct Materials
Metallic Flexible Duct
a. Provide duct that conforms to UL 181 and NFPA 90A with factory-applied insulation, vapor barrier, and end
connections. Provide duct assembly that does not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed.
Provide ducts designed for working pressures of 497 Pa and 373 Pa. Provide flexible round duct length that
does not exceed 1525 mm. Secure connections by applying adhesive for 51 mm over rigid duct, apply flexible
duct 51 mm over rigid duct, apply metal clamp, and provide minimum of three No. 8 sheet metal screws
through clamp and rigid duct.
b. Inner duct core: Provide interlocking spiral or helically corrugated flexible core constructed of zinc-coated
steel, aluminum, or stainless steel; or constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized spring steel wire
helix fused to continuous, fire-retardant, flexible vapor barrier film, inner duct core.
c. Insulation: Provide inner duct core that is insulated with mineral fiber blanket type flexible insulation,
minimum of 25 mm thick. Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard fire retardant
vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.
2.3.12 Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Use flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated on the drawings, and is not to exceed
1.5 m. Provide runouts that are preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181.
Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier. Provide not less than 0.60 L glass fabric duct connectors
coated on both sides with neoprene. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with vertical air
inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose.
Provide a die-stamped elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other than the vertical
air inlet type. Insulated flexible connectors are allowed as runouts. Provide insulated material and vapor barrier
that conform to the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Do
not expose the insulation material surface to the air stream.
2.3.13 Manual Volume Dampers
Damper shall be of externally located flanged type.
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for volume damper construction.
Equip dampers with an indicating quadrant regulator with a locking feature externally located and easily
accessible for adjustment and standoff brackets to allow mounting outside external insulation. Where damper
rod lengths exceed 760 millimeter, provide a regulator at each end of damper shaft.

2.3.13.1 Damper Construction
Provide all damper shafts with two-end bearings.

Ensure splitter damper is min. 0.76 millimeter sheet metal and is 0.25 millimeter heavier than duct in which
installed. Hinges are full length piano-type or 3 millimeter thick door type.
Provide a full length damper shaft and extend it beyond the damper blade. use a 10 millimeter square shaft for
damper lengths up to 500 millimeter and a 15 millimeter square shaft for damper lengths 500 millimeter and
larger. Where necessary to prevent damper vibration or slippage, provide adjustable support rods with locking
provisions external to duct at damper blade end.
Provide dampers in ducts having a width perpendicular to the axis of the damper that is greater than 300
millimeters of multiblade type having a substantial frame with blades fabricated of 1.6 millimeter metal. Provide
blades not exceeding 250 millimeters in width and 1220 millimeters in length, welded to 15 millimeter diameter
shafts. Ensure dampers greater than 1220 millimeters in width are made in two or more sections with
intermediate mullions, each section being mechanically interlocked with the adjoining section or sections.
Provide blades with graphite-impregnated nylon bearings and connect so that adjoining blades rotate in
opposite directions.
2.3.14 Gravity Backdraft and Relief Dampers
Construct frames of not less than 40 by 100 millimeter reinforced 1.6 millimeter galvanized carbon steel. Solidly
secure frames and mullions in place and seal with elastomer caulking against air bypass.
Provide shaft bearings with graphite-impregnated nylon.
Equip counterbalanced dampers with fixed or adjustable counterbalancing weights.
Gravity backdraft dampers may be equipment manufacturer's standard construction in sizes 460 by 460
millimeter or smaller, when furnished integral with air moving equipment.
2.3.14.1 Blade Construction
Maximum blade width is 230 millimeters, and maximum blade length is 900 millimeters. Blade material is 1.6
millimeters galvanized steel or 1.99 millimeters 6063 alloy aluminum. Provide blades with mechanically retained
seals and 90-degree limit stops.
Blades linked together for relief service dampers are to open not less than 30 degrees on 12 pascal wg
differential pressure.
2.3.15 Power-Operated Dampers
Ensure dampers conform to applicable requirements specified under Section 23 09 33.00 40 ELECTRIC AND
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.
2.3.16 Fire Dampers and Wall Collars
Ensure fire damper locations are in accordance with NFPA 90A.

Provide fire dampers in ductwork at firewall barriers.
Construct and label fire dampers in accordance with UL 555 to provide damper and mounting fire-resistance that
equals or exceeds fire-resistance of the construction in which installed. For link loads in excess of 90 Newtons,
provide UL-approved quartzoid links.
Construct wall collars in accordance with UL 555.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
For sheet metal surfaces to be painted, and surfaces to which adhesives are to be applied, clean surface of oil,
grease, and deleterious substances.
Ensure strength is adequate to prevent failure under service pressure or vacuum created by fast closure of duct
devices. Provide leak tight, automatic relief devices.
3.1.1 Construction Standards
Provide sheet metal construction in accordance with the recommendations for best practices in ASHRAE EQUIP
SI HDBK, Chapter 16, SMACNA 1966, NFPA 90A, and ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32.
Design and fabricate supplementary steel in accordance with AISC 360 and AISC 325.
Where construction methods for certain items are not described in the referenced standards or herein, perform
the work in accordance with recommendations for best practice defined in ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK.
3.2 INSTALLATION
When furnishing the listing of product installations for medium/high pressure ductwork systems include
identification of at least 5 units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a
minimum period of 5 years. Include purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of
installation.
Fabricate airtight and include reinforcements, bracing, supports, framing, gasketing, sealing, and fastening to
provide rigid construction and freedom from vibration, airflow-induced motion and noise, and excessive
deflection at specified maximum system air pressure and velocity.
Provide offsets and transformations as required to avoid interference with the building construction, piping, or
equipment.
Make plenum anchorage provisions, sheet metal joints, and other areas airtight and watertight by caulking
mating galvanized steel and concrete surfaces with a two-component elastomer.

3.2.1 Jointing
Enclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers by a rigid sheet metal collar and sealed
to building construction with elastomers for complete air tightness.
Provide outside air-intake ducts and plenums made from sheet metal with soldered watertight joints.
3.2.2 Ducts
Wherever ducts pass through firewalls or through walls or floors dividing conditioned spaces from
unconditioned spaces, provide a flanged segment in that surface during surface construction.
Where interiors of ducting may be viewed through air diffusion devices, construct the viewed interior with sheet
metal and paint flat black.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ducts
Weld angle iron frames at corners and ends, whenever possible. Rivet or weld angle iron reinforcements to
ducts not more than 150 millimeters on center, with not less than two points of attachment. Spot welding,
where used, is 75 millimeters on center.
Seal standard seam joints with an elastomer compound to comply with SMACNA 1966 Seal Class A, B or C as
applicable.
Limit crossbreaking to 1220 millimeters and provide on all ducts 200 millimeters wide and wider. Provide bead
reinforcement in lieu of crossbreaking where panel popping may occur. Where rigid insulation is applied,
crossbreaking is not required.
3.3.1.1 Longitudinal Duct Seams

Provide Pittsburgh lock corner seams.
3.3.1.2 Joints and Gaskets
Bolt companion angle flanges together with 6 millimeters diameter bolts and nuts spaced 150 millimeters on
center. Gasket flanged joints with chloroprene full-face gaskets 3 millimeters thick, with Shore A 40 durometer
hardness. Use one piece gaskets, dovetailed at joints.

3.3.1.3 Flexible Duct Joints
Between flexible duct without sheet metal collars and round metal ductwork connections make joints by
trimming the ends, coating the inside of the flexible duct for a distance equal to depth of insertion with
elastomer caulk, and by securing with sheet metal screws or binding with a strap clamp.
3.3.1.4 Square Elbows
Provide double-vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.5 Radius Elbows
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for radius elbows. Provide an inside radius equal to the width of the duct. Where
installation conditions preclude use of standard elbows, the inside radius may be reduced to a minimum of 0.25
times duct width and install turning vanes in accordance with the following schedule.
RADIUS OF TURNING
WIDTH OF ELBOWS VANES IN PERCENT OF DUCT WIDTH
MILLIMETER VANE NO. 1 VANE NO. 2 VANE NO. 3
Up to 406 56 -- --
430 to 1220 43 73 --
1245 and over 37 55 83
Where two elbows are placed together in the same plane in ducts 760 millimeters wide and larger, continue the
guide vanes through both elbows rather than spaced in accordance with above schedule.
3.3.1.6 Outlets, Inlets, and Duct Branches
Install branches, inlets, and outlets so that air turbulence is reduced to a minimum and air volume properly
apportioned. Install adjustable splitter dampers at all supply junctions to permit adjustment of the amount of air
entering the branch. Wherever an air-diffusion device is shown as being installed on the side, top, or bottom of a
duct, and whenever a branch takeoff is not of the splitter type; provide a commercially manufactured 45 degree
side-take-off (STO) fitting with manual volume damper to allow adjustment of the air quantity and to provide an
even flow of air across the device or duct it services.
Where a duct branch is to handle more than 25 percent of the air handled by the duct main, use a complete 90-
degree increasing elbow with an inside radius of 0.75 times branch duct width. Size of the leading end of the
increasing elbow within the main duct with the same ratio to the main duct size as the ratio of the related air
quantities handled.
Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by the duct main, construct the branch
connection with a 45 degree side take-off entry in accordance with SMACNA 1966.

3.3.1.7 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece does not exceed 15
degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto.
Where equipment is installed in ductwork, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece from the straight
run of duct connected thereto does not exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and [22-1/2]
degrees on the downstream side of the equipment.
3.3.1.8 Branch Connections
Construct radius tap-ins in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.9 Access Openings
Construct access door in accordance with SMACNA 1966, except that sliding doors may be used only for special
conditions upon prior approval. Provide double-panel type doors.
Install access doors and panels in ductwork upstream and downstream from coils, adjacent to fire dampers, at
controls or at any item requiring periodic inspection, adjustment, maintenance, or cleaning, and where
indicated, and every 6.1 Meters for indoor air quality housekeeping purposes.
Minimum access opening size is 305 by 460 millimeters, unless precluded by duct dimensions or otherwise
indicated.
Make airtight access doors that leak by adding or replacing hinges and latches or by construction of new doors
adequately reinforced, hinged, and latched.
3.3.1.10 Duct Access For Cleaning
Make duct access particularly suitable for commercial duct cleaning methods utilizing vacuum devices. Space
access openings with a frequency and at points that permits ready access to duct internals with essentially no
duct or insulation cutting. Where access through an air-diffusion device or through access doors specified herein
is not available at a specific point, provide 200 millimeters diameter, 1.5 millimeters access plates not more than
3 meters on center. Where duct is insulated and vapor-sealed, provide mastic seals around circumference of
access. When access plate is in place and insulated, externally identify the location.

3.3.1.11 Plenum Construction
Provide intake and discharge plenum companion angle joints with the following minimum thickness of materials:
LONGEST ANGLES SIDE SHEET METAL USS REINFORCEMENT INCHES, 610

MILLIMETER GAGE ALL SIDES COMPANION ANGLES MM ON CENTER
MILLIMETER MAXIMUM
To 1220 1.0 40 by 40 by 3 40 by 40 by 3
1245 to 2135 1.3 50 by 50 by 3 50 by 50 by 4.7

2160 to 3048 1.6 50 by 50 by 3 50 by 50 by 3
3075 and larger 2.0 50 by 50 by 4.7 50 by 50 by 4.7
At the floor line and other points where plenums join masonry construction, bolt panels 300 millimeters on
center to 50 by 50 by 4.7 millimeters thick hot-dip galvanized steel angle that has been secured to the masonry
with masonry anchors and bolts 600 millimeters on center and caulked tight to the masonry.
Anchor panels to curbing by not less than 50 by 50 by 4.7 millimeters thick hot-dip galvanized steel angle iron.
Concrete curbing includes angle iron nosing with welded studs for the anchoring of panels. Level nosing at curb
height within plus or minus 1 millimeter.
Weld and grind miter corners for angle iron and channel iron.
3.3.1.12 Plenum Door Construction
Construct plenum access doors in accordance with SMACNA 1966 except that access doors smaller than man-
access doors have door openings framed with angle iron that is one commercial size smaller than the specified
panel reinforcement.
Ensure man-access door size conforms to per SMACNA 1966 and paragraph entitled, "Access Openings," of this
section. Insulated and uninsulated construction is per SMACNA 1966. Frame door openings with channel iron.
Frame doors with angle iron. Size channel iron and angle iron approximately the same size as specified panel
reinforcement. Provide exterior door skin 1.6 millimeters. Fabricate latches from steel with hinges at least 100
millimeters long, and bolting at least 10 millimeters diameter.

3.3.1.13 Manual Volume Dampers
Provide balancing dampers of the splitter, butterfly, or multilouver type, to balance each respective main and
branch duct.
For dampers regulated through ceilings provide a regulator concealed in a box mounted in the ceiling, with a
cover finish aesthetically compatible with ceiling surface. Where ceiling is of removable construction, set
regulators above the ceiling, and mark the location on ceiling in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.3.1.14 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal
Connect air handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan inlets and outlets to upstream
and downstream components by treated woven-cloth connectors.
Install connectors only after system fans are operative, and vibration isolation mountings have been adjusted.
When system fans are operating, ensure connectors are free of wrinkle caused by misalignment or fan reaction.
Width of surface is curvilinear.
3.3.1.15 Rectangular Sheet Metal Ducts
3.3.1.16 Medium-Pressure Gages, Joints, And Reinforcement
Ensure minimum sheet metal gages, joints, and reinforcements between joints are in accordance with ASHRAE
EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Ensure sheet metal minimum thickness, transverse reinforcement between joints, and joints of ducts are in
accordance with the following:
LONGEST SIDE SHEET METAL COMPANION ANGLE (mm) REINFORCEMENT ANGLES

(mm) THICKNESS ALL INCHES, 600 (mm) ON
SIDES CENTER MAXIMUM
(BACK TO BACK)
______ _________ _______________ ____________________
50 by 50 by 3, two tie rods Two 50 by 50 by 3, two tie
2450 to 2750 1.6
along angle rods along angle
Two 50 by 50 by 5, two tie
50 by 50 by 5, two tie rods
2451 to 3350 1.6 rods along angle
along angle
50 by 50 by 5, with tie rods Two 50 by 50 by 5, with tie
3351 and longer 2.0
every 1200 mm rods 1200 mm

3.3.1.17 Medium- And High-Pressure Branches, Inlets, Outlets
Install branches, inlets, and outlets to minimize air turbulence and to ensure proper airflow.
Install dampers so that the amount of air entering duct mains is adjustable.
Provide commercially manufactured air extractors to allow adjustment of the air quantity and to provide an even
flow of air across the device or duct served.
3.3.1.18 Duct Branch Transition
Where a duct branch handles over 25 percent of the air transported by the duct main, use a complete 90-degree
increasing, with an inside radius of 0.75 times duct branch width. Ensure the size of the trailing end of the
increasing elbow within the main duct is in the same ratio to the main duct size as the ratio of the relative air
quantities handled.
Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by the duct main, provide a branch
connection with an inside radius of 0.75 times branch duct width, a minimum arc length of 45 degrees, and an
outside radius of 1.75 times duct branch width. Place arc tangent to duct main.
3.3.1.19 High-Pressure Gages, Joints, And Reinforcement
Ensure sheet metal minimum thickness, joints, and reinforcement between joints are in accordance with
ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Use the following types of ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966
transverse joints:
a. Welded flange joint with angle
b. Companion angle flanged joint
Use the following types of longitudinal seams:
a. Approved lock seams, back brazed, or continuously brazed seams for ducts with largest dimension up to
1800 millimeters
b. Continuously welded or brazed seams for ducts with largest dimension greater than 1800 millimeters

Sheet metal minimum thickness, transverse reinforcement between joints, and companion angle joints of ducts
with longest side greater than 2550 millimeters are in accordance with the following:
LONGEST SIDE SHEET METAL COMPANION ANGLE (mm) REINFORCEMENT ANGLES

(mm) THICKNESS ALL INCHES, 600 (mm) ON
SIDES CENTER MAXIMUM
(BACK TO BACK)
______ _________ _______________ ____________________
2450 to 2750 1.6 50 by 50 by 3, two tie rods Two 50 by 50 by 3, two tie

2451 to 3350 1.6 50 by 50 by 5, two tie rods Two 50 by 50 by 5, two tie
3351 and longer 2.0 65 by 65 by 5, with tie rods Two 65 by 65 by 5, with tie
every 600 mm rods 600 mm
3.3.2 Round Sheet Metal Ducts
3.3.2.1 Duct Gages And Reinforcement
Sheet metal minimum thickness, joints, and reinforcement between joints shall be in accordance with ASHRAE
EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Provide ducts with supplemental girth angle supports, riveted with solid rivets 150 millimeters on center to duct.
Locate girth angles as follows:
DIAMETER, MILLIMETER REINFORCEMENT-MAXIMUM SPACING, MILLIMETER
625 to 915 32 by 32, 3.2 thick, 1825 millimeters on center
Bolt heads and nuts shall be hex-shaped, M8 for ducts up to 1270 millimeters diameter, and M10 for 1271
millimeters diameter ducts and larger.
Continuously weld flanges to duct on outside of duct and intermittently welded with 25 millimeters welds every
100 millimeters on inside joint face. Remove excess filler metal from inside face. Protect galvanized areas that
have been damaged by welding with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.

3.3.2.2 Duct Joints
Provide duct joints manufactured by machine, with spiral locksets to and including 1500 millimeters diameters,
and to dimensional tolerances compatible with fittings provided. Draw band girth joints are not acceptable.
Prepare slip joints by coating the male fitting with elastomer sealing materials, exercising care to prevent mastic
from entering fitting bore, leaving only a thin annular mastic line exposed internally. Use sheet metal screws to
make assembly rigid, not less than four screws per joint, maximum spacing 150 millimeters. Do not use pop
rivets. Tape and heat seal all joints.
3.3.2.3 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece does not exceed 15
degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto.
Where equipment is installed in ductwork, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece from the straight
run of duct connected thereto does not exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and 22-1/2
degrees on the downstream side of the equipment.
3.3.3 Round, High Pressure, Sheet Metal Duct Installation
3.3.3.1 Joints
Provide an inner coupling to align the inner lining to maintain good airflow conditions equivalent to standard
round high-pressure duct joints. Butt joints are not suitable for the inner liner. Accomplish this alignment by
extending the liner of the fitting for slip joint into the pipe. For ducts over 860 millimeters inside diameter,
provide a separate coupling for inner alignment, with the pressure shells joined by angle-ring flanged
connections.
3.3.3.2 Insulation Ends
At the end of an uninsulated section or run where internally insulated duct connects to uninsulated spiral duct,
fitting, fire damper or flexible duct, install an insulated end-fitting to bring the outer pressure shell down to
nominal size.
3.3.4 Transverse Reinforcement Joints
Provide transverse reinforcements that are riveted with solid rivets to duct sides 150 millimeters on center or
spot welded 100 millimeters on center. Weld transverse reinforcement at all corners and ends to form
continuous frames.
3.3.5 Joint Gaskets
Gasket flanged joints with chloroprene full-face gaskets 3.2 millimeters thick, Shore A 40 durometer hardness.
Use one-piece gaskets, dovetailed at joints.
3.3.6 Radius Elbows
Fabricate elbow proportions and radius elbows in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE
FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.

3.3.7 Plenum Connections
Ensure round duct connections are welded joint bellmouth type.
Ensure rectangular duct connections are bellmouth type, constructed in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI
HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
3.3.8 Access Openings
Install access panels in ductwork adjacent to fire dampers.
Minimum size of access opening is 300 by 450 millimeters, unless precluded by duct dimension.
Frame access openings with welded and ground miter joints, 4 millimeters thick angle iron, with 10 millimeters
studs welded to frame. Ensure cover plates are not less than constructed of 2.8 millimeters metal.
In lieu of access doors, use readily accessible flanged duct sections upon approval. Provide stable hanger
supports for disconnected duct terminal.
3.3.9 Duct Supports
Install duct support in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and
SMACNA 1966. Meet the minimum size for duct hangers as specified in ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK, Chapter 16,
ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966. Provide two hangers where necessary to eliminate sway.
Support attachment to duct surfaces by solid rivet or welding 100 millimeters on center.
Take the following into account in selection of a hanging system:
a. Location and precedence of work under other sections
b. Interferences of various piping and electrical conduit
c. Equipment, and building configuration
d. Structural and safety factor requirements
e. Vibration, and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service conditions
Support sizes, configurations, and spacing are given to show the minimal type of supporting components
required. If installed loads are excessive for the specified hanger spacing, hangers, and accessories provide
heavier-duty components. After system startup, replace any duct support device which, due to length,
configuration, or size, vibrates or causes possible failure of a member, or the condition otherwise be alleviated.
Exercise special care to preclude cascade-type failures.
Do not hang ductwork and equipment from roof deck, piping, or other ducts or equipment. Maximum span
between any two points is 3 meters, with lesser spans as required by duct assemblies, interferences, and
permitted loads imposed.
Where support from metal deck systems is involved, coordinate support requirements with installation of metal
deck.

3.3.9.1 Double-wall Ducts
Provide round, double-wall duct supports as recommended by the manufacturer except that minimum hanger
ring and strap size is 40 by 4 millimeters.
3.3.9.2 Hangars
Attach hanger rods, angles, and straps to beam clamps. Receive approval from the Contracting Officer for
concrete inserts, masonry anchors, and fasteners for the application.
Hardened high-carbon spring-steel fasteners fitted onto beams and miscellaneous structural steel are acceptable
upon prior approval of each proposed application and upon field demonstration of conformance to specification
requirements. Make fasteners from steel conforming to AISI Type 1070, treated and finished in conformance
with SAE AMS 2480, Type Z (zinc phosphate base), Class 2 (supplementary treatment). Verify a 72-hour load-
carrying capacity by a certified independent laboratory.
Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, excluding air-diffusion devices and single-leaf dampers,
hang such equipment independently of the ductwork by means of rods or angles of sizes adequate to support
the load.
Sufficiently cross-brace hangers to eliminate swaying both vertically and laterally.
3.3.9.3 Installation
Ensure hanger spacing gives a 20-to-1 safety factor for supported load.
Maximum load supported by any two fasteners is 45 kilograms.
Install hangers on both sides of all duct turns, branch fittings, and transitions.
Friction rod assemblies are not acceptable.
3.3.9.4 Strap-type Hangars
Support rectangular ducts up to 900 millimeters by strap-type hangers attached at not less than three places to
not less than two duct surfaces in different planes.
Perforated strap hangers are not acceptable.
3.3.9.5 Trapeze Hangars
Support rectangular ducting, 900 millimeters and larger, by trapeze hangers. Support ducts situated in
unconditioned areas and required to have insulation with a vapor-sealed facing on trapeze hangers. Space
hangers far enough out from the side of the duct to permit the duct insulation to be placed on the duct inside
the trapeze. Do not penetrate the vapor-sealed facing with duct hangers.
Where trapeze hangers are used, support the bottom of the duct on angles sized as follows:
WIDTH OF DUCT, MILLIMETER MINIMUM BOTTOM ANGLE SIZE, MILLIMETER
760 and smaller 32 by 32, 3.2 thick

761 to 1200 38 by 38 by 3.2
1201 to 1830 38 by 38 by 4.8
1831 to 2440 50 by 50 by 6.4
2441 and wider 75 by 75 by 6.4
3.3.9.6 Purlins
Do not support ducting, when supported from roof purlins, at points greater than one-sixth of the purlin span
from the roof truss. Do not exceed 875 kilograms load per hanger when support is from a single purlin or1750
kilograms when hanger load is applied halfway between purlins by means of auxiliary support steel provided
under this section. When support is not halfway between purlins, the allowable hanger load is the product of
400 times the inverse ratio of the longest distance of purlin-to-purlin spacing.
When the hanger load exceeds the above limits, provide reinforcing of purlin(s) or additional support beam(s).
When an additional beam is used, have the beam bear on the top chord of the roof trusses, and also bear over
the gusset plates of top chord. Stabilize the beam by connection to roof purlin along bottom flange.
Purlins used for supporting fire-protection sprinkler mains, electrical lighting fixtures, electrical power ducts, or
cable trays are considered fully loaded. Provide supplemental reinforcing or auxiliary support steel for these
purlins.
3.3.9.7 Vibration Isolation
Isolate from vibration duct supports from structure at points indicated. Refer to Section 23 05 48.00 40
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
3.3.10 Flexible Connectors For Steel Metal
Connect air-handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan inlets and outlets to upstream
and downstream components by treated woven-cloth connectors.
Install connectors only after system fans are operative and all vibration isolation mountings have been adjusted.
When system fans are operating, ensure connectors are free of wrinkles caused by misalignment or fan reaction.
Width of surface is curvilinear.
3.3.11 Insulation Protection Angles
Provide galvanized 1 millimeter thick sheet, formed into an angle with a 50 millimeters exposed long leg with a
10 millimeters stiffening break at outer edge, and with a variable concealed leg, depending upon insulation
thickness.
Install angles over all insulation edges terminating by butting against a wall, floor foundation, frame, and similar
construction. Fasten angles in place with blind rivets through the protection angle, insulation, and sheet metal
duct or plenum. Install angles after final insulation covering has been applied.
3.3.12 Duct Probe Access
Provide holes with neat patches, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on caps for air-balancing pitot tube access.
Provide extended-neck fittings where probe access area is insulated.

3.3.13 Openings In Roofs And Walls
Building openings are fixed and provide equipment to suit.
3.4.2 Fire Damper Tests
Perform operational tests on each fire damper in the presence of the Contracting Officer by enervating a fusible
link with localized heat. Provide new links and install after successful testing.
3.4.3 Ductwork Leakage Tests
Conduct complete leakage test of new ductwork in accordance with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC. Perform tests prior to installing ductwork insulation.
3.4.4 Inspection
Inspect ductwork in accordance with SMACNA 1987.
3.5 DUCTWORK CLEANING PROVISIONS
Protect open ducting from construction dust and debris in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer. Clean
dirty assembled ducting by subjecting all main and branch interior surfaces to airstreams moving at velocities
two times specified working velocities, at static pressures within maximum ratings. This may be accomplished
by: filter-equipped portable blowers which remain the Contractor's property; wheel-mounted, compressed-air
operated perimeter lances which direct the compressed air and which are pulled in the direction of normal
airflow; or other means approved by the Contracting Officer. Use water- and oil-free compressed air for
cleaning ducting. After construction is complete, and prior to acceptance of the work, remove construction dust
and debris from exterior surfaces. Clean in conformance with SMACNA 1987.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Submit 3 copies of the operation and maintenance manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the medium/high
pressure ductwork systems. Update data and resubmit for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to
contract completion.
Ensure Operation and Maintenance Manuals are consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures,
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 31 14.00
STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. This section includes stainless steel ductwork and appurtenances
B. Related Sections
1. Seismic Protection.
2. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
3. Division 15, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
4. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification” for labeling and identifying.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions for . stainless steel duct and
dampers.
2. Manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions for flexible duct connectors.
3. Manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions for gaskets.
B. Sh op Drawings:
1. Fully dimensioned and to-scale layout drawings of duct and fittings including but not limited to duct
sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, walls and floor penetrations, and connections.
2. Show the location of every flanged duct connection and structural support member with dimensions
relating to:
a. Coordinated flanged connections in horizontal runs to be clear of horizontal structural supports.
Mechanical Specifications 23 31 14.00 - 9 Stainless Steel Ducts

b. Coordinated flanged connections in vertical runs to align with vertical structural supports and
details of fastening flanges to the supports.
c. Showing interface and spatial relationships between . duct and adjacent equipment.
d. Showing 2-hole alignment of duct flanges for welded ring flanges, and that all flange bolt holes
will straddle normal N-S, E-W and vertical centerlines.
e. Showing all drain, test and instrumentation tap locations and sizes.
f. Details of any and all special structural attachment points required to be welded prior to
coating duct.
g. Showing modifications of indicated requirements and how those modifications ensure that free
area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced.
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications
a. Manufacturer shall perform his own sheet metal fabrication
b. The owner and/or his representatives shall have the right to tour the
manufacturer’s plant anytime that fabrication is being performed on duct intended for his project.
2. Codes and Standards
a. Duct shall have a flame spread of less than 25 and a smoke generation rate of less than 50.
c. Duct shall be Factory Mutual approved for use without sprinklers for an unlimited vertical height.
3. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”
for fabrication and installation of metal duct and SMACNA’s “Round Industrial Duct Construction
Standards” intended for use by designers of industrial ventilation systems.
4. Installer Qualifications
a. Installation contractors shall have at least 3 years of successful experience on duct projects,
specifically industrial exhaust systems.
b. Codes and Standards
(1) ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1
“Duct Construction”, for fabrication and installation of metal duct.

(2) NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A “Standards for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”, NFPA 90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air
Heating and Air Conditioning Systems” and NFPA 91 “Standard for the Installation of
Blower and Exhaust Systems.”
(3) Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of
SMACNA “Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards.”
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect . duct from damage due to normal handling during shipment and storage.
Protection shall be applied to ends of duct to prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and
fittings.
B. Consignee must inspect shipment upon delivery and note any and all damages and discrepancies
on bill of lading and notify manufacturer within 24 hours.
C. Duct shall not be stored in an area where it will have a chance to be damaged from traffic or debris.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Stainless Steel Duct shall be AISI 300 series stainless steel, constructed to a duct gauge and reinforcing
system in accordance with “SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards” with Class 1, +10 in WG (after
fans) and -10 in WG (before fans) and –4 in WG schedule for all fume hood exhaust. Longitudinal seams shall be
fusion welded. Transverse seams shall be butt welded, no dissimilar filler materials allowed.
2. Duct Joints
a. Companion Flange for connecting . duct 20” or larger in diameter.
b. V-ring Insert Band Clamps for connecting duct smaller than 20” diameter.
c. Gasket shall be form-in-place, fully expanded 100% PTFE.
3 . duct thickness : min duct thickness shall be 1.0 mm
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated provide type and size required
to comply with duct system requirements including proper connection of duct and equipment unless
specified otherwise. Support materials in contact with the duct shall be fabricated of compatible materials
unless otherwise specified.
B. Duct Fittings
1. Factory fabricated duct fittings are to match adjoining ducts and to comply with the contracted duct
requirements. Unless otherwise specified, fabricate elbows with centerline radius equal to one and
one half (1-1/2) times the duct diameter 45 degree elbows shall be a minimum of 3 gores and 90
degree elbows shall be a minimum of 5 gores. Unless otherwise specified, use 45-degree laterals
and 45-degree elbows for branch take-off connections. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees
for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.
2. Provide flexible duct connectors at inlet and outlet of each fan and scrubber.
3. Predetermine location of duct drains prior to manufacturer’s fabrication. Drains are to be located in the
bottom of all main and branch ducts which are P-trapped and/or as shown on the drawings to allow
removal of condensation.
3. Factory fabricated duct and fittings with predetermined location of test holes for monitors should
be utilized.
C. Duct Joints
1. Duct Joints may be Companion Angle Ring Bolted Flanges or

V-ring Insert Band Clamps.

a. Flange 4” diameter to 120” diameter.
(1) Construction shall be generally roll formed or pressed sheet stock.

Materials shall be either AISI 300 Series Stainless Steel or owner approved equal.
(2) Bolt holes shall be elongated.
(3) Hardware shall be SAE Grade 5 plated steel alloy. Grade 5 hardware shall be tightened to
the following values:
Bolt Diameter Torque (foot-lbs)

5/16” 22
3/8” 36
2. Gasket shall be Joint Sealant
Diameter Seal Size

4” to 11” 3/16” x 1/8”
12” to 24” 1/4” x 1/8”
25” up 3/16” x 1/8”
a. Joints
(1) Construction shall be generally roll and press formed stainless steel sheet goods.
(2) Duct flanges shall be backed with a trapezoidal-shaped, loose metallic ring shaped to
work with the formed profile of the clamp band. One circumferential bolt with one
locknut is used to tighten the clamp to the duct.
(3) Gasket shall be a self-adhesive on each end of duct (4” diameter to 18”diameter) or a
singular die cut gasket (2” diameter to 3” diameter) as specified by the manufacturer
(4) Clamp bolt shall be tightened to the following values:
Clamp Bolt Diameter Torque(foot-lbs)

¼“ 75
5/16” 120
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Flexible duct connectors shall be U-type, Viton elastomer with A.36 retaining back-up bars, and 9” face
to face dimension.

B. Dampers: Equipment i s o l a t i o n d a m p e r s , b a l a n c i n g d a m p e r s a n d h e a d e r s e p a r a t i o n
manifold dampers shall be manufactured of the same materials as the duct unless otherwise noted. All
dampers shall be manufactured in such a way that all surfaces exposed to the air stream shall be either .
with Teflon or shall be made of Teflon. This shall include, where appropriate, Teflon v-ring seals on
damper shafts and Teflon injection molded bearings.
1. Round Dampers shall be single blade type with locking quadrants and non-metallic external shaft
bearings. Bearings and seals shall be ETFE or PFA Teflon injection molded for standard industrial
sizes or shall be Teflon v-ring assembly with thermoplastic sleeve for heavy-duty industrial sizes.
2. Rectangular dampers shall be parallel, opposed or back-draft type as indicated on the drawings. All
blade shafts shall pass through ETFE Teflon bearings and shall be connected by stainless steel and
installed external to damper air flow.
a. Opposed Blade – Linkage shall be located outside of air stream. Blades must have blade
stops.
b. Parallel Blade – Linkage shall be located outside of air stream. Blades must have blade
stops.
c. Back draft damper shall be an adjustable counterbalance type with parallel action blades.
Counterbalance arm shall be 316 stainless steel. Linkage shall be located outside of the air
stream. Blades must have blade stops.
d. Blast gate shall be non-binding when blade is inserted and extracted.
Construction shall provide adequate support of blade when in the open position with
blast gate mounted in vertical or horizontal duct. Damper blade shall be segmented to
limit weight of blade sections to 40 pounds maximum.
3. Horizontal Isolation Blast Gate: Fabricate as above with blade(s) and flanges perpendicular to air stream
with 8” maximum flange to flange width.
4. Inclined Isolation Blast Gate: Fabricate as above with flanges perpendicular to air stream and with
blade(s) and track at the maximum incline based on the blast gate width in Table below.
5. Butterfly damper shall be low leakage and non-binding. Blades must have blade stops. Adjustment
shall be infinite through an externally mounted wheel handle with a worm gear drive and marked with a
position indicator.
Duct Diameter Damper Width
4” to 8” 8”
10” to 16” 12”
18” to 48” 16”

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION & INSTALLATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which duct are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer and owner.
B. Assemble and install stainless steel duct while using extreme care not to scratch surface of coating. If
scratched, immediately contact manufacturer for repair instructions. Assemble and install in accordance
with recognized industry practices that will achieve air-tight seal, under 1% leakage. Install each run
with a minimum number of joints and orient the longitudinal seams to be on top of the duct. Align
duct accurately at connections, with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable
ties,
braces, hangers and anchors of type, which will hold in accordance with SMACNA “Industrial Duct
Construction Standards.”
1. No fastening devices such as screws, rivets, etc. are to be used on any part of a. Duct application. Test
holes and slots for monitoring must be predetermined before fabrication and coating unless using
approved Fab-Tech Field Modification Kits. Install. Stainless steel duct as shown on SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards.
2. Routing: Unless otherwise specified, locate stainless steel duct runs vertically and horizontally to avoid
diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if
not otherwise indicated, run duct in the shortest route that does not obstruct usable space or block
access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction,
columns, a n d other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Wherever
possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal duct from view by locating in mechanical shafts,
hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts
and similar finish work.
3. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route duct through transformer vaults and their electrical
equipment spaces and enclosures.
4. Penetrations: Wherever ducts passing through interior partitions and exterior walls are exposed to
view, conceal space between construction openings and duct with sheet metal flanges of same gauge
as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2”.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 37 13.00 40
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
ASHRAE 113 (2013) Method of Testing for Room Air Diffusion
ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK (2012) Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment (SI Edition)
ASHRAE FUN SI (2009; Errata 2010) Fundamentals Handbook, SI Edition

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to work
specified in this section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Certify air diffusion devices having been tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP SI HDBK,
Chapter 17; ASHRAE FUN SI, Chapter 31; and ASHRAE 113, where such certification is required.
Submit equipment and performance data for air-diffusion devices consisting of sound data in terms of Noise
Criteria (NC) index for the capacity range of the device.
Mechanical Specifications 23 37 13.00 40 - 1 Diffusers, Registers,And Grills

1.4 SUBMITTALS
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
SD-04 Samples
Manufacturer's Standard Color Chart
Type TS Supply Troffer
Type TSR Combination Supply and Return Troffer

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
Provide factory-fabricated units of aluminum that distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space
intended without causing noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 0.25 m/s in occupied zone, or dead
spots anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as
required for specified performance.
Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound rated and certified inlets and outlets according
to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound power level as indicated. Provide diffusers and registers with volume damper
with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the manufacturer, an automatically
controlled device is acceptable. Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers and registers,
except linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where
the inlet and outlet openings are located less than 2m above the floor, protect them by a grille or screen
according to NFPA 90A.
Preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration on air-diffusion device construction and mounting. Refer to Section 23
05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for vibration isolation
considerations. Modify devices and provide accessories necessary for mounting in indicated surface
construction.
Provide color as indicated on drawings/as per Engineer’s requirements.
Provide supply diffusers with combination damper and equalizing grid. Ensure dampers are extracting-
splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
Ensure air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments can be made from the face of the device. Make
volume adjustments by removable key.
Provide gaskets for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.
Include within the material, equipment, and fixture lists the manufacturer's style or catalog numbers,
specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site information.
Submit records of existing conditions consisting of the results of Contractor's survey of work area conditions
and features of existing structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite. Commencement of work
constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
Submit fabrication drawings for air-diffusion devices consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be
performed in the factory.

2.2 TYPES OF AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICES
2.2.1 Diffusers
Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser
unit minimizes ceiling smudging through design features. Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type
indicated. Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling diffusers conforming to the
requirements of UL Electrical Construction for the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply
diffusers or return air units. Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling. Provide sponge
rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim
for flush mounted diffusers. For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that is airtight and does
not interfere with volume controller. Provide return or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.
2.2.2 Square/Rectangular Supply Air Diffusers
Provide type DP series supply diffuser with a square/rectangular, perforated, hinged, face plate with
opposed blade volume control, baked enamel exterior finish, and black matte finish on exposed-to-view
interior surface.
Provide four-way deflection.
2.2.3 Linear Slot Diffusers
Provide type DLS supply diffuser, linear slot type, extruded aluminum construction, with fully adjustable
integral air pattern and volume control vanes that deflect air pattern from horizontal along ceiling to
straight down, or any intermediate setting and a pattern control element that permits complete blanking-
off of slot.
Slot width: as per schedules.
Provide number of slots per unit run as indicated.
Align butts in continuous runs for hairline joints.
Butt ends of diffuser against walls without mitered end caps. Provide end caps where slot terminates.
Provide exposed-to-view part of frame with anodized aluminum, and all interior exposed-to-view
components with a black matte finish.
Make joints between diffuser sections that appear as hairline cracks. Provide alignment slots for insertion
of key strips or other concealed means to align exposed butt edges of diffusers. Equip with plaster frames
when mounted in plaster ceiling. Do not use screws and bolts in exposed face of frames or flanges. Metal-
fill and ground smooth frames and flanges exposed below ceiling.
Linear diffusers to be provided with 25mm thick acoustically lined and insulated galvanized steel plenum.
The plenum to be integrated with cylindrical air pattern stabilizer and volume control damper
Linear diffusers shall be complete with end caps on end sections and one-piece diffusers, grid pattern air
straightness and concealed mounting brackets for easy installation without need for special tools.

2.2.4 Supply Grills
Provide supply grill double deflection type with adjustable face bars parallel to short dimension and
adjustable rear bars parallel to long dimension.
Provide manufacturer-furnished volume dampers

Provide volume dampers of the group-operated, opposed-blade type and key adjustable by inserting key
through face of register. Operating mechanism shall not project through any part of the register face.
Automatic volume control devices are acceptable.
Provide exhaust and return registers as specified for supply registers, except provide exhaust and return
registers that have a single set of nondirectional face bars or vanes having the same appearance as the
supply registers. Set face bars or vanes at angles reflected on drawings.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
Provide antismudge rings.
Provide integral extended surface to fit into module of lay-in ceiling.
2.2.5 Return Grills
Provide return grills, single deflection type with fixed face bars.
Provide grills installed in vertical surfaces with horizontal face bars set downward at 35 degrees from
vertical.
Provide grills installed in horizontal surfaces with face bars straight and parallel to short dimension.
Provide antismudge rings.
2.2.6 Supply Register
Provide supply register, double-deflection type, with adjustable face bars parallel to short dimension and
adjustable rear bars parallel to long dimension with opposed-blade type dampers.

2.2.7 Return Register
Provide return register, single-deflection type with fixed face bars with opposed-blade dampers.
Provide registers installed in vertical surfaces with horizontal face bars set downward at approximately 35
degrees from vertical.
Provide registers installed in horizontal surfaces with face bars set straight and parallel to short dimension.
2.2.8 Louvers
Provide louvers for installation in exterior walls that are associated with the air supply and distribution
system as specified in Section 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL AND DOOR LOUVERS.
2.2.9 Air Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks
Fabricate air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks from galvanized steel or aluminum sheets with galvanized
or aluminum structural shapes. Provide sheet metal thickness, reinforcement, and fabrication that conform
to SMACNA 1966. Accurately fit and secure louver blades to frames. Fold or bead edges of louver blades
for rigidity and baffle these edges to exclude driving rain. Provide air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks
with bird screen.
2.2.10 Bird Screens and Frames
Provide bird screens that conform to ASTM E2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or stainless steel. Provide
"medium-light" rated aluminum screens. Provide "light" rated stainless steel screens. Provide removable
type frames fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.
2.2.11 Radon Exhaust Ductwork
Fabricate radon exhaust ductwork installed in or beneath slabs from Schedule 40 PVC pipe that conforms to
ASTM D1785. Provide fittings that conform to ASTM D2466. Use solvent cement conforming to ASTM
D2564 to make joints. Otherwise provide metal radon exhaust ductwork as specified herein.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment as indicated and specified and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Submit installation drawings for air-diffusion devices. Indicate on drawings overall physical features,
dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and equipment weights.
3.1.1 Operations and Maintenance Manuals
Provide operation and maintenance manuals consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures,
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 73 13.00 40
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 211 (2005; Rev 6 2012) Certified Ratings Programme - Product

Rating Manual for Air Fan Performance
AMCA 300 (2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans
AMCA 99 (2010) Standards Handbook
AHRI 430 (2009) Central-Station Air-Handling Units
AHRI 880 I-P (2011) Performance Rating of Air Terminals
ASHRAE 51 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic

Performance Rating
ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013) Method of Testing General Ventilation

Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
ASTM A653/A653M (2013) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galv. annealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)
Apparatus
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 1940-1 (2003; Cor 2005) Mechanical Vibration - Balance Quality

Requirements for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State - Part 1:
Specification and Verification of Balance
Mechanical Specifications 23 73 13.00 40 - 1 Air Handling Units

NFPA 90A (2015) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
UL 900 (2004; Reprint Feb 2012) Standard for Air Filter Units
Estidama Pearl Rating (1 Pearl)

1.2 SUBMITTALS
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication and Connection Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Sample Warranty
SD-04 Samples
Coating Specimen
SD-06 Test Reports
Final Test Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of Conformance
Unit Cabinet
Fan

Drain Pans
Insulation
Plenums
Multizone AHU
Blow-Through AHU
Spare Parts
Warranty
Submit listing of product installations for air handling units showing a minimum of five installed units, similar
to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum period of 5 years. Provide list
that includes purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of installation.
1.3.1 Certification of Conformance
Submit certificates of conformance for the following items, showing conformance with the referenced
standards contained in this section:
a. Unit Cabinet
b. Fan
c. Drain Pans
d. Insulation
e. Plenums
f. Multizone AHU
g. Blow-Through AHU
h. Spare Parts

1.3.2 Sample Warranty
Submit samples of warranty language concurrently with Certificates for review and approval by the
Contracting Officer.
Submit a sample warranty for the following items:
a. Unit Cabinet
b. Fan
c. Drain Pans
d. Insulation
e. Plenums
f. Multizone AHU
g. Blow-Through AHU
h. Spare Parts
Deliver, handle, and store equipment and accessories in a manner that prevents damage or deformity.
Provide temporary skids under units weighing more than 200 kilogram.
1.5 WARRANTY
Final acceptance is dependent upon providing the warranty, based on approved sample warranty, to the
Engineer, along with final test reports. Ensure Warranty is valid for a minimum of 2 years from the date of
project closeout, showing Client as warranty recipient.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Submit equipment and performance data for air handling units. Provide data that consists of use life, total
static pressure and coil face area classifications, and performance ratings.
Submit all required fabrication and connection drawings and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer
prior to the start of work detailed on these drawings.
Submit drawings and manuals that include a spare parts data sheet, with manufactures recommended stock
levels.
2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Air Handling Unit (AHU)
Provide a central-station type, factory fabricated, and fully assembled air handling unit (AHU). Provide AHU
that includes components and auxiliaries in accordance with AHRI 430. Balance AHU fan and motor to ISO
1940-1-2005.
Ensure the total static pressure and coil face area classification conforms to AMCA 99.
Fans with enlarged outlets are not permitted.
Provide double-width, double-inlet, centrifugal scroll type AHU fan.
2.2.2 Unit Cabinet
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:
1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.
2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.
3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant.
4. Factory Finish for Galvanized-Steel Casings: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after
cleaning and pretreating.
5. Factory Finish for Galvanized-Steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat.
6. Casing Coating: [Thermoplastic vinyl], [Epoxy], [Zinc], [Synthetic resin], [Phenolic]
[Polytetrafluoroethylene], [Vinyl ester], [Hot-dip galvanized], [Powder-baked enamel].
7. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements
in ASHRAE 62.1.
B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, [Type I].

2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal
surface of section panels downstream from, and including, the cooling-coil section.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as
recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-
resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service-air
velocity.
3. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.
C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:
1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall insulated panels of same materials
and thicknesses as casing.
2. Inspection and Access Panels:
a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow
panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.
b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal
components.
3. Access Doors:
a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-
lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-
pressure differential.
b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
c. Fabricate windows in fan section doors of double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety glass with an air
space between panes and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals.
d. Size: At least 24 inches (600 mm) wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of
[72 inches (1800 mm)].
4. Locations and Applications:
a. Fan Section: [Doors and inspection and access panels].

b. Access Section: Doors.
c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panel.
d. Damper Section: [Doors].
e. Filter Section: [Doors] large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters.
f. Mixing Section: Doors.
g. Humidifier Section: Doors.
5. Provide a marine-type, vapor proof service light. Provide 100 watt service light that is wired to an
individual switch. Light requires 230 Volt, single phase, 50 Hertz service that is separate from the main
power to the AHU. Provide a single 230 volt outlet at the light switch.
a. Locations: [Each section accessed with door].

D. Service Platform: [Aluminum], [42 inches (1070 mm)] wide running entire length of unit and located on
service access side, with angle side rails, 4-inch (100-mm) kick plates, and expanded metal floor. Provide
platform with a fixed ladder that extends from the top of the side rail to the floor.
E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports,

designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.
1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to air- handling unit sections,
accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when air-handling unit frame is anchored to
building structure.
F. Mount fans on isolation bases. Internally mount motors on same isolation bases and internally isolate fans
and motors. Install flexible canvas ducts or a vibration absorbent fan discharge seal between fan and casings
to ensure complete isolation. Provide flexible canvas ducts that comply with NFPA 90A.
Weigh fan and motor assembly at air handling unit manufacturer's factory for isolator selection. Statically
and dynamically balance fan section assemblies. Fan section assemblies include fan wheels, shafts,
bearings, drives, belts, isolation bases and isolators. Allow isolators to free float when performing fan
balance. Measure vibration at each fan shaft bearing in horizontal, vertical and axial directions.
Factory install all motors on slide bases to permit adjustment of belt tension.
Provide heavy duty, Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled, 3-phase fan motors, operable at 400 volts, 50 hertz.
Provide high efficiency motors. Refer to specification Section 26 05 70.00 40 HIGH VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT
PROTECTIVE DEVICES and Section 26 05 71.00 40 LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES.
2.2.3 Fans
A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at
maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and
with field-adjustable alignment.
a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of
lubricating oil.
b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed
range.
B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped
cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.
1. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and
accessories.
2. Horizontal-Flanged, Split Housing: Bolted construction.
3. Housing for Supply Fan: Attach housing to fan-section casing with metal-edged flexible duct
connector.

4. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches (146 mm) wide
attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel
sheet or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets; select metal compatible with casing.
a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and
adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.
1) Fabric Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).

2) Fabric Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63
N/mm) in the filling.
3) Fabric Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus
93 deg C).
C. Plenum Fan Housings: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute housing.
D. Backward-Inclined, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width- double-inlet

construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and
backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
E. Forward-Curved, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip curved
forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to
backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
F. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped
blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and
fastened to shaft with set screws.
G. Axial Fans: Fan wheel and housing, straightening-vane section, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or
direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories.
1. Variable-Pitch F a n s : Internally m o u n t e d [ electric], [ electronic] a c t u a t o r , e x t e r n a l l y mounted

positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator.
2. Housings: Galvanized steel.
a. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Flanges.

b. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel designed to straighten
airflow.
H. Fan Shaft Bearings:
1. Prelubricated and Sealed, Ball Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with a rated life of [120,000]
hours according to ABMA 9.
2. Grease-Lubricated, Tapered-Roller Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with double-locking
collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing [with grease lines extended to outside unit] and a rated life
of [120,000] hours according to ABMA 11.
3. Grease-Lubricated Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount
and two-piece, cast-iron housing [with grease lines extended to outside unit].
I. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with [1.3] service factor
based on fan motor.
1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with [5] hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use
with motors larger than [5] hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment
range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.1046-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick, 3/4- inch (20-mm) diamond-
mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.
J. Variable-Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with permanently lubricated bearings.
Variable mechanism terminating in single lever for connection to control actuator with connecting shaft for
second set of variable inlet vanes on double-width fans.
K. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with channel frame and sealed ball bearings, and
[opposed] blades constructed of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, with blades linked out of air
stream to single control lever.
L. Internal Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's
standard[ restrained] vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of [1 inch (25
mm)].
1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, internal mounting frame and attachment
to fans, fan housings, motors, casings, accessories, and other fan section components with
reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when fan-mounting frame and air-handling-unit mounting frame are
anchored to building structure.
M. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and
connections specified in electrical Sections.
5. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.
N. Variable Frequency Controllers:
1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to
provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by adjusting output
voltage and frequency.
2. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 80 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes.
3. Unit Operating Requirements:
a. Input ac voltage tolerance of [380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10] percent.

b. Input frequency tolerance of 06/11 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
c. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 50 Hz, full load.
d. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
e. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base load
current for 3 seconds.
f. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.

g. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
4. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.
5. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
a. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

b. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
c. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
d. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
e. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
6. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
a. Input transient protection by means of surge protection device (SPD).

b. Under-voltage a n d overvoltage trips; inverter over-temperature, overload, and overcurrent
trips.
c. Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, [Class 20]
performance.
d. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural
frequency of the combination.
e. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
f. Loss-of-phase protection.
g. Reverse-phase protection.
h. Short-circuit protection.
i. Motor over-temperature fault.
7. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power
after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Bidirectional
auto-speed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and
returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
8. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent m o t o r f r o m re-energizing after a p o w e r interruption
until motor has stopped.
9. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum
torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
10. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output
frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.
11. Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:
a. Power on.
b. Run.
c. Overvoltage.
d. Line fault.
e. Overcurrent.
f. External fault.
12. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual-
speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
13. Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door
and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
a. Output frequency (Hertz).

b. Motor speed (rpm).

c. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
d. Motor current (amperes).
e. Motor torque (percent).
f. Fault or alarming status (code).
g. Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).
h. DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
i. Set-point frequency (Hertz).
j. Motor output voltage (volts).
14. Control Signal Interface:
a. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6
programmable digital inputs.
b. Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speed-setting input signals from
the control system:
1) 0 to 10-V dc.
2) 0-20 or 4-20 mA.
3) Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
4) Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. 5)
RS485.
6) Keypad display for local hand operation.
c. Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can
be programmed to any of the following:
1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Output current (load).
3) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
4) Motor torque (percent).
5) Motor speed (rpm).
6) Set-point frequency (Hertz).
d. Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for
remote indication of the following:
1) Motor running.
2) Set-point speed reached.
3) Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
4) High- or low-speed limits reached.
15. Communications: RS485 interface allows VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop
LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be programmed via BMS
control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.
16. Integral Disconnecting Means: [NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker] with lockable handle.
17. Accessories:
a. Devices s h a l l b e factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise indicated.

b. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy- duty type.

c. Standard Displays:
1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Set-point frequency (Hertz).
3) Motor current (amperes).
4) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
5) Motor torque (percent).
6) Motor speed (rpm).
7) Motor output voltage (volts).
2.2.4 Drain Pans
Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including
coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward
drain connection.
Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face [to comply with ASHRAE 62.1].
Depth: A minimum of 80 mm deep.
Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil, with
minimum 80 millimeter deep drip pans for each tiered coil bank.
Extend top pan 300 millimeter beyond face of coil, and extend bottom pan not less than 600 millimeter
beyond face of coil. Where more than two pans are used, make pan extension proportional. Make adequate
supports from the same type material as pans or hot-dip galvanized angle iron with isolation at interface.
Use 0.85 millimeter AISI Type 304 corrosion-resistant steel for pan material, with silver-soldered joints.
Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
Minimum size of drain opening is 50 millimeter. Pipe pan to drain.
Extend integral cabinet drain pan under all areas where condensate is collected and make watertight with
welded or brazed joints, piped to drain. Provide corrosion protection in condensate collection area, and
insulate against sweating. Provide minimum 2.0 millimeter sheet metal, except that 1.6 millimeter double-
drain-pan construction is acceptable.
Provide cooling coil ends that are enclosed by cabinet and are factory insulated against sweating or drain to
a drain pan.
Provide drain pans that are double pan construction, thermally isolated from the exterior casing with 25.4
millimeter thick fiberglass insulation. Provide drain pans that slope to drain and drain substantially dry by
gravity alone when drains are open.
Provide pans that have a double slope to the drain point.

Drain pans shall be designed to minimize the risk of legionella.
2.2.5 Blow-Through AHU
Fit blow-through AHU with pressure equalizing baffles.

2.2.6 Coils
2.2.6.1 Coil Section
Provide coil section that encases cooling coils and drain pipes. Arrange coils for horizontal air flow. Provide
intermediate drain pans for multiple coils installation. Completely enclose coil headers with the insulated
casing with only connections extended through the cabinet.
The air velocity across the cooling coil shall not exceed 2.75 m/sec.
2.2.6.2 Coil Pressure and Temperature Ratings
Provide coils that are designed for the following fluid operating pressures and temperatures:
SERVICE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
Hot Water 289 Pa 121 degrees C
Chilled Water 289 Pa 4 degrees C
Provide coils that are air-pressure tested under water at the following minimum pressures:
SERVICE PRESSURE
Water (hot and chilled) 289 Pa
2.2.6.3 Coil Casings
Provide coils that are factory tested, dehydrated, vacuum tested, purged with inert gas, and sealed prior to
shipment to the job site.
Provide stainless steel casings. Provide cast iron, brass, or copper coil headers. Fit water coil headers with
6.35 millimeter ops spring-loaded plug drains and vent petcocks. Provide automatic air vents with ball type
isolation valves for each coil piped to the drain pan.
Refrigerant Cooling coil
Provide refrigerant distributor that is suitable for the thermostatic expansion valve recommended by
the manufacturer for the service and capacity specified or indicated. Ensure arrangement is
capable of stable operation down to 40 percent or less of design capacity.
2.2.6.4 Drainable Coils
Provide self-draining coils that have a drain point at the end of every tube and are pitched to that point.
Drain provisions include: drained headers; U-bends with integral plugs; or nonferrous plugs in cast-iron
headers. Provide tubes that drain substantially dry by gravity alone when drains and vents are open.

2.2.6.5 Eliminators
Provide eliminators that are SMACNA three-break, hooked-edge design, constructed of reinforced 1.52
millimeter galvanized steel with assembled brazed joints. Provide easily removable eliminator sections for
cleaning from side of the air handling unit without causing partial or complete disassembly of the Air
Handler Unit casing.
2.2.7 Filters
2.2.7.1 Filter Housing
Provide factory fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings. Provide filter
sections that have filter guides and full height, double wall, hinged and removable access doors for filter
removal. Provide air sealing gaskets to prevent air bypass around filters. Provide visible identification on
media frames showing model number and airflow direction. Where a filter bank is indicated or required,
provide a means of sealing to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. Ensure filters perform in accordance with
ASHRAE 52.2.
2.2.7.2 Replaceable Air Filters
Select filters conforming to UL 900, Class 1, and; when cleaned, do not contribute fuel when attacked by
flame and emit only negligible amount of smoke. Provide permanent frames with replaceable media, 25.4
millimeter thickness, and size as indicated.
2.2.7.3 Disposable Cartridge Air Filters
UL 900, Class 2, UL classified, and factory assembled. Provide media of ultra-fine glass fibers having 50-55
percent average dust spot efficiencies with maximum final resistance 19 millimeter water gauge and
maximum face velocity of 152.4 meter per minute. Construct filter frame of 1.21 millimeter galvanized steel
or aluminum with welded or riveted joints. Caulk or gasket entire assembly to prevent air leakage around
frames. Ensure minimum efficiency of filter is 60 percent per ASHRAE 52.2
2.2.7.4 Outside Air Filters
The factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported cartridges for removal of
particulate matter in air conditioning, heating, and ventilating systems. Provide the extended surface type
filter units fabricated for disposal when the dust-load limit is reached as indicated by maximum (final)
pressure drop.
Filter Classification: UL approved for Class 1 or 2 conforming to UL 900.
Filter Grades, Nominal Efficiency and Application:
a. Grade B: 80-85 percent nominal efficiency outfitter
b. Grade D: 25-30 percent nominal efficiency prefilter
Filter Media: Grade B Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type: Provide media that is composed of high density glass
fibers or other suitable fibers. Fastening methods used to maintain pleat shape, seal aluminum separators
in a proper enclosing frame to ensure no air leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.

Grade D Type: Provide media that is composed of synthetic/natural fibers. Bond a metal grid backing to the
air leaving side of the media to maintain uniform pleat shape and stability for proper airflow and maximum
dust loading. Provide a media frame that is constructed of high strength moisture resistant fiber or
beverage board. Bond the pleated media pack on all four edges to ensure no air leakage of the life of the
filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
Filter Efficiency and Arrestance: Determine efficiency and arrestance of filters in accordance with ASHRAE
52.2 Standard Atmospheric dust spot efficiency and synthetic dust weight arrestance that is not less than
the following:
Initial Average Average

Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency
(Percent) (Percent) (Percent)
Grade B 58 79 98
Grade D Less than 20 22 89
Maximum initial and final resistance, inches of water gauge, for each filter cartridge when operated at 152.4
meter per minute face velocity:
Initial Resistance Final Resistance
Grade B,
0.60 1.00
Rigid Pleated
Grade D,
0.32 0.70
50.8 millimeter
Dust Holding Capacity: When tested to 1.00 inch w.g. at 500-feet per minute face velocity, provide a dust
holding capacity from each 24-inch by 24-inch (face area) filter at least equal to the values listed below. For
other filter sizes, provide a dust holding capacity that is proportionally higher or lower.
Grade B, Rigid Pleated 175 grams

Grade D, 50.8 millimeter Deep 150 grams
Grade D, 100.16 millimeter 300 grams
Minimum Media Area: Provide minimum net effective area in square feet for each 24-inch by 24-inch (face
area) filter at 500 feet per minute face velocity of at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes,
provide a net effective media that is proportionally higher or lower.

2.2.7.5 Air Filter Gauges
Provide manometer air filter gauges of the inclined tube differential type, of solid acrylic plastic construction
with built-in level vial and with an adjustable mirror-polished scale. Equip gauges with vent valves for
zeroing and over-pressure safety traps. Ensure the gauge range is adequate for the particular installation.
Provide gauges manufactured by Dwyer or approved equal.
Provide one (1) air filter gauge at each filter bank.
Accessories
Each coil shall be provided with the following accessories:
 Isolating valve
 Balancing valve with by-Pass globe at the main return.
 Modulating control Valve
 Self-Seating Plugs
 Strainer
 Air Vent
2.3 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES
2.3.1 Rotary Wheel
Provide unit that is a factory fabricated and tested assembly for air-to-air energy recovery by transfer of
sensible heat from exhaust air to supply air stream, with device performance according to ASHRAE 84 and
that delivers an energy transfer effectiveness of not less than 85 percent with cross-contamination not in
excess of 0.1 percent of exhaust airflow rate at system design differential pressure, including purging sector
if provided with wheel. Provide exchange media that is chemically inert, moisture-resistant, fire-retardant,
laminated, nonmetallic material which complies with NFPA 90A. Isolate exhaust and supply streams by seals
which are static, field adjustable, and replaceable. Equip chain drive mechanisms with ratcheting torque
limiter or slip-clutch protective device. Fabricate enclosure from galvanized steel and include provisions for
maintenance access. Provide recovery control and rotation failure provisions as indicated.

2.3.2 Heat Pipe
Provide a device that is a factory fabricated, assembled and tested, counterflow arrangement, air-to-air heat
exchanger for transfer of sensible heat between exhaust and supply streams and that delivers an energy
transfer effectiveness not less than that indicated without cross-contamination. Provide heat exchanger
tube core that is 25 mm nominal diameter, seamless aluminum or copper tube with extended surfaces,
utilizing wrought aluminum Alloy 3003 or Alloy 5052, temper to suit. Provide maximum fins per unit length
and number of tube rows as indicated. Provide tubes that are fitted with internal capillary wick, filled with
an ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34, Group 1 refrigerant working fluid, selected for system design temperature range,
and hermetically sealed. Provide heat exchanger frame that is constructed of not less than 1.6 mm
galvanized steel and fitted with intermediate tube supports, and flange connections. Provide tube end-
covers and a partition of galvanized steel to separate exhaust and supply air streams without cross-
contamination and in required area ratio. Provide a drain pan constructed of welded Type 300 series
stainless steel. Provide heat recovery regulation by system face and bypass dampers and related control
system as indicated, or interfacing with manufacturer's standard tilt-control mechanism for summer/winter
operation, regulating the supply air temperature and frost prevention on weather face of exhaust side at
temperature indicated. Coil shall be fitted with pleated flexible connectors.
2.3.3 Desiccant Wheel
Provide counter flow supply, regeneration airstreams, a rotary type dehumidifier designed for continuous
operation, and extended surface type wheel structure in the axial flow direction with a geometry that allows
for laminar flow over the operating range for minimum air pressure differentials. Provide the dehumidifier
complete with a drive system utilizing a fractional-horsepower electric motor and speed reducer assembly
driving the rotor. Include a slack-side tensioner for automatic take-up for belt-driven wheels. Provide an
adsorbing type desiccant material. Apply the desiccant material to the wheel such that the entire surface is
active as a desiccant and the desiccant material does not degrade or detach from the surface of the wheel
which is fitted with full-face, low-friction contact seals on both sides to prevent cross leakage. Provide rotary
structure that has under heat, overheat and rotation fault circuitry. The wheel assembly shall come with a
warranty for a minimum of five years.
2.3.4 Plate Heat Exchanger
Provide energy recovery ventilator unit that is factory-fabricated for indoor installation, consisting of a flat
plate cross-flow heat exchanger, cooling coil, supply air fan and motor and exhaust air fan and motor. The
casing shall be 1 mm G90, galvanized steel, and double wall construction with 25 mm insulation. Provide
fibrous desiccant cross-flow type heat exchanger core capable of easy removal from the unit.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide installation drawings in accordance with referenced standards in this section.
3.1.1 Coordination
Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads, variable frequency drives, control and
electrical requirements.
3.1.2 Temporary Construction Filters
Have temporary construction filters in place during normal building construction whenever the air handling
units are run for general ventilation, building dehumidification, and for other purposes during construction.
Install two (2) layers of blanket filter at a time. Replace temporary construction filters as required during
construction and after completion of duct system cleaning.
After systems have been cleaned and temporary construction filters are removed, and before test and
balance operations are started, install set of final filters. Avoid unnecessary filter loading with construction
dust, do not have final filters in place while general building construction is taking place. Clean permanent
filter bank before testing and balancing.
Perform operation tests on each fire damper in the presence of the Contracting Officer by removing the
fusible link and demonstrating the operation of the damper.
Maximum number of coil rows is four (4). Maximum number of fins per inch is ten (10).
Provide VAV terminal units that are AHRI 880 I-P certified and UL listed.
3.2.1 Vibration Analyzer
Use an FFT analyzer to measure vibration levels. The following characteristics are required: A dynamic
range greater than 70 dB; a minimum of 400 line resolution; a frequency response range of 5 Hz-10 KHz
(300-600000 cpm); the capacity to perform ensemble averaging, the capability to use a Hanning window;
auto-ranging frequency amplitude; a minimum amplitude accuracy over the selected frequency range of
plus or minus 20 percent or plus or minus 1.5 dB.
Use an accelerometer, either stud-mounted or mounted using a rare earth, low mass magnet and sound
disk (or finished surface) with the FFT analyzer to collect data. Ensure the mass of the accelerometer and its
mounting have minimal influence on the frequency response of the system over the selected measurement
range.

3.2.2 Acceptance
Prior to final acceptance, use dial indicator gauges to demonstrate that fan and motor are aligned as
specified.
Prior to final acceptance, verify conformance to specifications using vibration analysis. Ensure maximum
vibration levels are .075 in/sec at 1 times run speed and at fan/blade frequency, and .04 in/sec at other
multiples of run speed.
3.2.3 AHU Testing
Conduct performance test and rate AHU and components in accordance with AMCA 211, AMCA 300, and
ASHRAE 51. Provide AHU ratings in accordance with AHRI 430.
Provide final test reports to the Contracting Officer. Provide reports with a cover letter/sheet clearly marked
with the System name, Date, and the words "Final Test Reports - Forward to the Systems
Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
Perform air handling unit start-up in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
3.3.1 Operation and Maintenance
Submit operation and maintenance manuals prior to testing the air handling units. Update and resubmit
data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion.
3.3.2 Acceptance
With Warranty and final test reports, provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name,
date, and the words "Equipment Warranty" - "Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring
Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23 81 00 00
UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of this spec section extends from packaged units through-the-wall room air-conditioners and
split room air-conditions, work is indicated by requirements of this section. Units are hereby defined to
include, but not by way of limitation, refrigeration compressors, direct-expansion coils, filters, fans, and
air-cooled condensers.
B. The types of packaged air-conditioning units required for project include the following:
1. Split room air conditioners.

1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air conditioning (U.S.A.) Engineers
IHVE: The Institute of Heating and Ventilation Engineers (U.K.)
ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ARI: Air Conditioning Refrigeration Institute (U.S.A.)
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS: American Welding Society
UL: Underwriter Laboratories (U.S.A.)
SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association, Vienna
BSI: British Standard Institute – CP: Code of Practice
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
CIBSE: The Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers - UK
HVCA: Heating and Ventilation Contractor’s Association, U.K.
prevail
Mechanical Specifications 23 81 00 00 - 1 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air-conditioners, of types, sizes and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the applicable provisions of NFPA Stds. 70, 90A and 90B, pertaining to
construction and installation of self-contained air conditioning units, or applicable BS standard.
C. Flame-Smoke Rating: Except as otherwise indicated, provide self-contained air conditioning unit thermal
insulation with flame-spread rating of 25 or less, fuel-contributed of 50 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less.
D. AMCA Standards: Comply with Air Movement and Control Association standards as applicable to testing
and rating fans, or applicable BS standard.
E. ARI Certification: Provide air conditioning units which comply with Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute standards 210 and 270, ARI 310 and display ARI's certification symbol, or equivalent international
certification.
F. efficiency of motor, heaters, insulation etc. This shall be in compliance with a SHRAE 90.1
G. UL Compliance: Provide air conditioning units whose electrical components have been listed and labeled
by Underwriters Laboratories.
H. Estidama Pearl Rating (1 Pearl)

I. ANSI/ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with installation requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 15: "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration," ANSI/ARI 310, and ASHRAE Standard 90-75 Section 6.3.
J. Instruction of Personnel: At completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish a competent service man
to instruct Employer's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance procedures to be followed.
The instruction shall be given for a total of five (5) full working days, not including time spent trouble-
shooting and adjusting the system as required by this Contract. At Employer's option the instruction
period may be postponed in part or in whole until a later period within the year following the completion
of the Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on packaged air-conditioning units, including drawings showing overall
dimensions of unit, operating weights, and auxiliary equipment.

A. Deliver packaged air conditioning units with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack
components in factory-fabricated protective containers.
B. Handle air conditioning units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not
install-damaged components; replace and return damaged components to air conditioning unit
manufacturer.
C. Store air conditioning units in clear dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
1.6 UNIT SELECTION
-All unit shall be Selected and From the make /brand / Model listed and Accepted by Estidama , All equipment
and mechanical items shall have QCC approval and kit mark
- Air conditioning units to have a minimum seasonal average COP of 3.8.

.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPLIT ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
A. General:
Provide factory-assembled and tested split D/X units as indicated on drawings,

DX unit shall be of reverse cycle heat pump type, suitable for operation at:
B. Cooling Mode
 Min. Ambient DB Temperature = +5º C
 Max Ambient DB Temperature = 46º C
C. Heating Mode
 Min. Ambient DB Temperature = -10º C
D. Refrigerant :
Re-charge unit with, R-134a or R-410 refrigeration gas.
E. Capacity :
Select unit suitable for outdoor and indoor unit locations this shall include proper the compressors,
condensers, evaporator fans, refrigeration.
Provide capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled.
F. Evaporator Fans:
Provide tangential, centrifugal, and permanently lubricated motor bearings.
For ducted units consider the external static pressure of ducts grills louver, dampers... etc.
G. Condenser Fans:
Provide sideward or upward propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.
Fan external static pressure shall consider site conditions and locations

H. Coils:
For evaporator and condenser, provide non-ferrous construction with aluminium plate fins mechanically
bonded to seamless copper tubes; with brazed tubing joints. Circuit evaporator to provide full active face
on minimum cooling step.
I. Compressors:
Provide reverse cycled scroll compressors invertor Type. Provide vibration isolators,
Provide thermal expansion valves, and provide minimum.
J. Safety Controls :
Provide the following controls:
1. Low pressure cutout, manual reset.

2. High pressure cutout, manual reset
K. Refrigerant Piping and Fittings
Refrigerant pipes installed in the field shall consist of copper tubing and recessed solder joint fittings. Tubing
shall be in accordance with ASTM Specification B 88-61 type 'k' hard drawn. fittings shall be wrought copper
or tinned cast brass. Where required for connection to gauges and control devices, tubing not larger than 3/8
inch. O.D. may be type 'k' soft (annealed) with flared tube or double ferrule compression fittings suitable for
high pressure. On all joints in refrigeration piping flux and solder which is recommended by solder type
fittings manufacturer shall be used. Tubing shall be protected against oxidation during silver soldering by use
of dry nitrogen flowing through the tubing.
Accessories for field assembled refrigerant piping systems such as oil separators, liquid receivers, heat
exchangers, dryers, expansion valves, refrigerant strainers, sight glass etc., shall be in accordance with
instructions of the units manufacturers standard practice and specific recommendations.
Drain line shall be of UPVC Pipe –16 bar fitted with dielectric fitting to drain pan.
L. Automatic Temperature Control System
Provide combination thermostat and fan switches to control the room temperature automatically,
provide factory fabricated unit of the same manufacturer of DX-\ having sensor,
M. Electrical :
Provide 220-415V convenience outlet, separately fused, with relay, contactors, indicator lamps, overload
switches for unit service. Provide means for unit power connection through unit cabinet.

N. Accessories :
Provide the following accessories;
O. Time Guard:
Provide time guards to prevent short cycling of compressors.
Examine areas and conditions under which split D/X cooling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
P. Installation of Split D/X Cooling Units
1. General: Install split D/X cooling units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in approved locations, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
2. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-
mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal.
Q. Start - Up
1. Start-up split D/X cooling units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions test controls
and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
2. Balance split D/X unit systems to verify its capacity and balanced delivery of air for each space.
R. Grounding
Provide positive equipment ground for split D/X cooling unit components
S. Refrigerant Pipes Ladders and trays
Ladders and tray shall be of the conventional heavy grade perforated pattern with return edges
manufactured from a minimum 14 SWG. Mild steel. Such tray shall be of galvanized 0.5mm (1/64”) thick.
Wherever the tray is exposed to weather i.e. laid on the roof, it shall be covered with galvanized sheet
steel covers of 20 gauges to protect the pipes from the sun and rain. The tray shall be securely fixed to
purpose made brackets with space behind to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening of nuts. The
tray shall be of sufficient width to take all pipes without crowding and shall allow for possible future
additions to the proportion of 10% of the present requirements.
Each length of tray shall be securely bolted to an adjacent length with sufficient overlap to prevent
sagging and twisting. Normal bend of not less than 450mm shall be used. In all instances where tray is
supported from the structure of the building, specially fabricated galvanized brackets shall be used. The
method of fixing the tray and brackets shall be approved by the

Engineer before installation. Where the tray is required to be fixed horizontally the Contractor shall make
allowance for providing brackets and supports in positions where steel work is not provided. Where the
trays is cut leaving base metal it shall, before installation, be liberally treated by PVC compound from an
aerosol type container Wherever Tee or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made. No
cutting of the tray shall be permitted.
Whenever necessary, the same shall be properly painted with a zinc, rich primer such as ‘galvafroid’ or
similar approved.
Trays shall be manufactured from galvanized steel.

All accessories including bends (vertical and horizontal), intersections, tees, risers and reducing sections
shall be purpose made by the tray manufacturer.
Sections of tray and accessories shall be joined in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Nuts, bolts, washers and other fastenings shall be supplied by the manufacturer and shall
be of compatible materials. Bolts shall have domed or mushroom heads and shall be installed with the
nuts facing away from the pipes.
Trays shall be cut along a line of plain material and not through perforations. Burrs or sharp edges shall be
removed prior to the installation of tray sections or accessories. Holes cut in pipes tray shall be suitably
bushed with grommets.
Where installation conditions necessitate site fabrication, the standards of fabrication and finish shall be
not less than that of standard manufacturers' items.
All items shall be installed to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Mid-span joints shall be located as close as practical to one-quarter of the span distance away from a
support position. Joints at mid-span or directly over supports shall be avoided. Supports shall be provided
within 150mm of all accessories.
Tray shall not be installed across building or structural expansion joints. On horizontal runs the tray shall
be installed with a 20mm gap at the expansion joint. Supports shall be installed within 150mm on either
side of the joint.
Covers shall be of the same material and manufacture as the tray. Joints between covers need not
coincide with joints in the tray or ladder.
Steel trays shall be manufactured from mild steel in accordance with BS 1449: Part 1 or
BS EN 10130/10131/10051 as appropriate. Galvanized components shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS729
after manufacture.
Trays and ladders shall be supported so that the maximum deflection between supports is 1/360 of the
span length.
Any cut or damaged metal shall be made good by first treating the surfaces with a suitable rust-proofing
agent, similar to that used in the original manufacture, and then applying finishes comparable to the
remainder of the surface.

T. Refrigerant trays Supports
Strength of each support including fastening shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied
by a safety factor of at least four or the calculated load plus 90kg whichever is greater, spacing of supports
is not to exceed 1.5m.
Thermal contraction and expansion shall installed for tray runs exceed 52.5m, spacing and gap settings for
expansion connectors shall not exceed recommendations of approved standards.
Make changes in direction of tray with standard tray fittings.

Supports shall be constructed from proprietary framing system components. Unless specified otherwise
all support system members shall be made of the same material as the tray.
All steel components shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS 729 after manufacture. Where an exposed
galvanized surface has been cut or otherwise damaged it shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich
epoxy primer.
Plastic end caps shall be fitted to exposed support channel ends in accessible positions and additionally
elsewhere as specified.
Full details, with illustrations, of all supports and fixing devices shall be submitted before any orders are
placed or manufacturing work put in hand. All supports and fixing devices shall have a factor of safety of
not less than four.
The use of rag bolts, indented bolts, foundation bolts or similar fixings requiring grouting shall not be
permitted.
2.3.3.2 Self-Contained air conditioners Heat Pumps
2.3.3.2.1 General
Provide an air-cooled, factory assembled, weatherproof packaged unit for horizontal airflow. Exterior panels must be
zinc coated galvanized steel phosphatized and painted. All access doors and panels must be hinged with neoprene
gaskets. Unit must be listed, labeled, and classified in accordance with UL 1995. Unit must be rated in accordance with
ANSI/AHRI 340/360. Provide unit with equipment as specified in paragraph UNITARY EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS.
Evaporator or supply fans must be direct drive forward curved centrifugal scroll type. Condenser fans must be
manufacturer's standard for the unit specified and may be either propeller or centrifugal scroll type. Provide unit with a
full factory operating charge of refrigerant. Unit must be 100 percent run tested at the factory. No penetrations are
allowed within the perimeter of the curb in the down flow unit's base pan other than the raised 29 mm high
supply/return openings to provide added water integrity precaution from condensate drain back up.
Provide a belt driven, forward curved centrifugal indoor fan with variable Speed motor sheaves. Thermally protect all
motors. Provide unit with a removable, reversible, double-sloped condensate drain pan. Air conditioners must have a
minimum seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER) of 17, and [a minimum COP of 4

2.3.3.2.2 Casing
Construct exterior casings for the specified unitary equipment of factory phosphatized and painted galvanized steel or
aluminum sheet metal and galvanized or aluminum structural members. Fit casing with lifting provisions, access panels
or doors, fan vibration isolators, electrical control panel, corrosion-resistant components, structural support members,
insulated condensate drip pan and drain, and internal insulation in the cold section of the casing. All access doors and
panels must have neoprene gaskets. Casing must have double-wall, hinged access doors for filters, heating,
return/exhaust air, and supply fan section. Incorporate provisions to permit replacement of major unit components.
Seal penetrations of cabinet surfaces, including the floor. Unit base must be watertight. Fit unit with a drain pan which
extends under all areas where water may accumulate. Fabricate drain pan from Type 30X stainless steel, galvanized steel
with protective coating, or an approved plastic material. Pan insulation must be water impervious. Extent and
effectiveness of the insulation of unit air containment surfaces must prevent, within limits of the specified insulation,
heat transfer between the unit exterior and ambient air, heat transfer between the two conditioned air streams, and
condensation on surfaces. Insulation must conform to ASTM C1071.
2.3.3.2.3 Air-to-Refrigerant Coils
Provide air-to-refrigerant coils with seamless copper tubes of 8 mm minimum diameter with aluminum fins that are
mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Casing must be galvanized steel or aluminum. Avoid contact of dissimilar
metals. Test coils in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and must be suitable for the working pressure
of the installed system. Factory pressure and leak test each coil.
a. Provide separate expansion devices for each compressor circuit. Condensate drain pans must be removable
and double-sloped.
b. Dual compressor units must have intermingled evaporator coils.
c. Condensate drain pans must be removable and double-sloped.
d. Coat condenser and evaporator coil with a uniformly applied epoxy electro deposition, phenolic, or vinyl type
coating to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Apply coating at either the coil or
coating manufacturer's factory. Coating process must ensure complete coil encapsulation. Coating must be
capable of withstanding a minimum 1000 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 using
a 5 percent sodium chloride solution.
2.3.3.2.4 Compressor
Provide direct drive, scroll type compressor. Compressor must have internal over current and over temperature
protection, internal pressure relief, high pressure cutout, rotor lock suction and discharge refrigerant connections,
centrifugal oil pump, vibration isolation, and discharge refrigerant connections. Compressors must have crankcase
heaters. Motor must be suction gas-cooled. Cooling partial load capacity must be provided by a variable speed
compressor.
2.3.3.2.5 Refrigeration Circuit
Refrigerant containing components must comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 and be factory tested, cleaned, dehydrated,
charged, and sealed. Provide refrigerant lines with service pressure tap ports and refrigerant line filter.
all refrigerants to be installed within the project site boundary have an ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero

2.3.3.2.6 Unit Controls
Provide units internally prewired by manufacturer with a 24 volt electromechanical control circuit powered by an
internal transformer. Provide terminal blocks for power wiring and external control wiring. Internally protect unit by
fuses or a circuit breaker in accordance with UL 1995. Units with three-phase power must be equipped with phase
monitoring protection to protect against problems caused by phase loss, phase imbalance and phase reversal.
a. Provide unit with microprocessor controls to provide all 24V control functions. Control unit by a programmable
electronic thermostat with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day programming capability.
b. Controls must include a control system interface to a BACnet or LonWorks control system, whichever is used by
the control system in the building in which the unit is installed. For BACnet, the control system interface must
meet DDC Hardware requirements of Section 23 09 23.02 BACNET DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND
OTHER BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEMS. For LonWorks, the control system interface must meet DDC Hardware
requirements of Section 23 09 23.01 LONWORKS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER BUILDING
CONTROL SYSTEMS.
2.3.3.2.7 Supply Air Fan
Fans must be Constant speed motors.
Provide supply air plenum fan with backward-curved fan wheel.
2.3.3.2.8 Roof Curb
Provide a roof curb that mates with the unit to provide support and be completely weather tight. Provide curb with
sealing strips to ensure an airtight seal between supply and return openings of the curb and unit. Design curb to allow
ductwork to be directly connected to the curb. The roof curb must be provided by the Manufacturer of the equipment.
2.3.3.2.10 Single Source Power Entry
Provide single source power entry to allow single source power connection to unit and heater combination. Single source
power entry kit includes specific matching heater(s), high voltage terminal blocks, fuse blocks and fuses, cut-to-length
interconnecting wiring, and junction box (if required) to provide power sources with fuse protection as required for both
the unit and accessory heater. The equipment disconnect must be provided by the Manufacturer of the equipment.
2.3.3.2.11 Fully Modulating Economizer
Provide fully modulating economizer to include 0-100 percent fresh air damper, damper drive motor, and solid state
enthalpy control. Control economizer operations by the pre-set position of the enthalpy control. Include a barometric
relief damper with the down flow economizer to provide a pressure operated damper that is gravity closing and
prohibits entrance of outside air on equipment "off" cycle. Economizer dampers must be ultra low-leak type with leakage
rate of one percent based on testing data completed in accordance with AMCA 500-D.
2.3.3.2.13 Low Ambient Control
Provide low ambient control to allow cycling of compressor for cooling operation at low ambient temperatures down to
+5 degrees C.
2.3.3.2.14 Filters
Provide panel and bag filters as per schedules

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which air-conditioning units are to be installed and
notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF THROUGH-THE-WALL AND SPLIT ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Install self-contained air conditioning units and/or split room air conditioning units where shown, in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's written
B. Instructions and recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve
intended purposes.
C. Coordinate with other work, including electrical work as necessary to interface installation of self-
contained air-conditioning units with other work.
D. Condensate shall be drained to the outside or as indicated on plans.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Provide positive equipment ground for self-contained air-conditioning unit components.
3.4 TESTING
A. Upon completion of installation of packaged air conditioners, start-up and test equipment in accordance
with ARI standards, or equivalent BS standard, operate units to demonstrate capability and compliance
with requirements. Where possible, field-correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate
compliance.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 81 43
POOL HEAT PUMP
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
materials, design, fabrication, and erection shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of all
codes, standards or regulations having jurisdiction over the work. In the event of conflict between codes,
standards or regulations, the conflict shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. Works will also adhere
to the standards listed below or the standards resulting from their possible amendment:
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air conditioning (U.S.A.) Engineers
Mechanical Specifications 23 81 43 - 1 Pool Heat Pump

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 POOL HEAT PUMP
The design, construction, materials and finishes of all units shall be suitable for outdoor use in
the locations, climatic and operating conditions indicated in this specification and drawings. The
units shall be started on site by the Manufacturer's qualified technical staff.
Manufacturer’s five -year warranty for compressor(s) in Pool heat pump as specified.
The size of the pool heat pump shall be such that it can brought into the position and sufficient
space for access and manufacturers recommendations space for serving shall be maintained.
The Pool heat pump capacity shall consider all site conditions including , altitude , ambient
temperature, maximum ambient temperature, fouling factors, site louvers ( side and top),
acoustic attenuators ..etc.
The units shall be packaged and fully factory assembled complete with operating and safety
controls and all customary auxiliaries deemed necessary by the manufacturer for the safe,
controlled automatic operations of the equipment.
The Pool heat pump shall be packaged and completely factory assembled.
Wired, charged and tested and consists of an air cooled condenser, an expansion valve, a liquid
cooler and compressors. Installation requires only connection to power and to the Pool system.
Each Pool heat Pump shall consist of one single shell; at least two independent refrigerating
Circuits including compressors, air-cooled condenser, cooler, interconnecting refrigerant piping,
internal wiring of controls, safety devices, and all necessary accessories
The unit shall be pressure-tested, evacuated and fully charged with refrigerant R134a and
include an initial oil charge. After assembly a full run test shall be performer water flowing
through the cooler, to verify that each refrigeration circuit operates correctly.
The unit base and frame shall be of heavy-gauge, galvanized steel, finished with
An air-dry paint
Applicable Standard:
Pool Heat pump shall be rated and certified according to ARI 550/590,
2.2 UNIT SELECTION
All unit shall be Selected and From the make /brand / Model listed and Accepted by Estidama
Compressor (Scroll Type):
Three dimensional, positive-displacement, hermetically sealed design, with suction and

discharge valves, crankcase oil heater and suction strainer. Compressor shall be mounted on
vibration isolators. Rotating parts shall be factory balanced. Lubrication system shall consist of
reversible, positive displacement pump, strainer, oil level sight glass, and oil charging valve.
Capacity control shall be by on-off compressor cycling of single and multiple compressors and
hot gas bypass .

2.3 MOTOR STARTING

1. The motor starting equipment shall limit the starting current of each motor/compressor unit
to 1.8-2.0 times the full load running current,
2. with multi compressor units each compressor must run up to its full speed before the next
compressor can start,
3. Compressor starts shall be limited to (6) per hour,
4. Starters shall incorporate thermal overload devices on each phase with single phasing
protection,
5. The units shall be capable of starting under all ambient and water temperature conditions
likely to occur.
6. Compressors shall be started by Star Delta connection or By Soft Starting frequency
invertors.
2.4 REFRIGERANTS CIRCUIT:
1. Refrigerant: R-134a. Classified as Safety Group Al according to ASHRAE 34 And Estidama (1 pearl)
2. Equipment supplied shall comply with LEED Energy & Atmosphere Credit 4, Enhanced Refrigerant
Management.
3. All refrigerants to be installed within the project site boundary must have an ozone depletion potential
(ODP) of zero
4. Each independent refrigerant circuit shall incorporate all components necessary for the designed
operation including:
a. Liquid line shut-off valve with charging port
b. Compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves.
c. Liquid-line solenoid valve
d. Low side pressure relief device,
e. High side pressure relief valve
f. Removable core filter-drier.
g. Sight glass with moisture indicator
h. Electronic expansion valve.
i. Hot-gas muffler
j. Insulated suction line
k. Oil pressure gauge ,high and low pressure gauges

5. Pool heat Pump manufacturer shall provide an independent circuit for each compressor to provide
maximum redundancy during Pool heat pump operation. If equipment does not have independent circuits
per compressor, manufacturer shall provide owner one spare compressor of each unique size.
6. Discharge lines shall be provided with manual compressor shut-off service valves.
7. Each Pool heat Pump shall have at least two completely independent refrigerant circuits with
maximum two screw compressors per circuit.
8. Full refrigerant charge and oil charge shall be filled in the factory.
9. The system shall include compressor low & high pressure and oil pressure transducers plus manual high
pressure cut-out.
10. Automatic Mild Ambient Control:

A factory installed control maintains system performance at ambient down to (0.0°C). It consists of a
pressure switch shuts off condenser fans when there is a drop in condenser pressure to a predetermined
setting. The condenser fans are restarted when pressure rises above the setting to maintain optimum
condenser pressure range.
2.5 REFRIGERANT AND OIL:

Sufficient volume of dehydrated refrigerant and lubricating oil shall be provided to permit maximum
unit capacity operation before and during tests. Replace refrigerant charge lost during the warranty
period, due to equipment failure, without cost to the owner
2.6 EVAPORATOR
Evaporator shall be direct expansion shell and tube type to optimize efficiency and
refrigerant charge. Tubes shall be high- efficiency, internally and externally enhanced type copper
tubes with 0.035" (0.89 mm) minimum wall thickness at all intermediate tube supports to provide
maximum tube wall thickness at the support area. Each tube shall be roller expanded into the tube
sheets providing a leak proof seal, and be individually replaceable. Independent refrigerant circuits
shall be provided per compressor
Shell and tube design with removable heads and multi refrigerant circuits.
Constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with applicable sections of ASME pressure vessel code
for minimum 235 psig (16 bar) refrigerant side design working pressure and 150 psig (10 bar) liquid side
design working pressure.
Water boxes shall be removable to permit tube cleaning and replacement. Water boxes shall include
liquid nozzle connections suitable for ANSI/ AWWA C-606 couplings, welding, or flanges.
The evaporator shell shall be insulated to a minimum thickness of 38 mm: (K=0.28 w/m °C) with closed
cell insulation suitably protected against weather and mechanical damage complying with ASTM C 534
6_ Provide vent and drain fittings and thermo-statically controlled heaters to protect to 0°F (17.8°C)
ambient temperature in off-cycle

Provide freeze protection down to -20°F (-28°C) ambient temperature. A separate power connection
for evaporator heaters is required and shall be provided by the Contractor. (A 220 volte electric
resistance heater cable is wrapped around the cooler shell, under the insulation, to provide protection
against freeze-up down to ambient of (-28°C). The heater cable is wired into the control circuit which
requires a separate 220 volt power source, thus assuring pool heat pump protection and crankcase
heater operation when the main disconnect switch is opened.)
Connection location: liquid inlet and outlet nozzle connections are located at rear (opposite control
panel) end of unit.
(Water connections shall be grooved for Victaulic couplings.)
The cooler shall be protected by differential pressure switch.
The evaporator shall be designed and stamped in accordance with the European P.E.D / ASME codes
for pressure vessel.
Gland type drain valve with hose union connection shall be provided.
Evaporator performance shall be based on a water velocity not less than 1 m/s (3 fps) nor ,/' more than
4 m/s, and fouling factor of 0.0000176 m2 degrees C.
2.7 AIR COOLED CONDENSER

The condenser coils shall be of 3/8" ail seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to plate
type aluminum fins of max pitch of 16 FPI, ASME UI standards.
Perforated fins shall not be acceptable. Fins thickness shall be 0,14 rim as a minimum.
Fins shall have full self-spacing collars and completely cover the tubes.
Condenser coil shall be factory leak tested at 35 bars.
A separate sub-cooling coil integral with main condenser coil to be provided for each refrigerant
circuit.
Condenser coils shall be U shape.
Condenser coils to be post-coated epoxy dipped condenser micro channel.
Wire Panel: heavy gauge, welded wire mesh coated to resist corrosion, to protect restrict
unauthorized access to internal components.
2.8 CONDENSER FANS
The condenser fans shall be propeller type of the airfoil shape, made of non-corrosive
composite material, placed to have uniform air distribution.
Fans shall be direct driven
Fan speed shall not exceed 920 rpm.
Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced for minimum noise and vibration.
Heavy gauge protection guards are to be provided for each condenser fan.
Construction and rating of fans shall comply with A.M.C.A. Standards
Fan static pressure shall consider site conditions, including side louvers around the condenser
and top louvers installed above the fans.

2.9 CASING
The framework shall be constructed from 6 mm. thickness weld steel sections.
Panels and access doors shall be constructed from 2.5 mm. and 2.0 mm. galvanized sheet steel,
bonderised and given a special tropicalized (epoxy) heat reflecting, corrosion resistant finish to
withstand the climatic temperature, humidity and atmospheric dust conditions indicated in this
Specification to provide a fully weatherproof enclosure for components.
Side panels, safety guards and where necessary top panels shall be removable for inspection.
Panels shall be robust in construction and shall not flex or vibrate during operating of fans and
compressors.
Lifting eyes or facilities for lifting tubes in base frames and sling spreaders if necessary shall be provided
to avoid damaging the equipment during Site lifting activities.
Base frame shall integrate accessible and appropriate rigging points for an easy and safe handling at job
site.
Electrical panels shall be fully mounted and wired in factory, weatherproof and with full opening access
doors.
2.10 NOISE & VIBRATION
Appropriate measure shall be taken to control the noise and vibration form the pool heat pump to the
surroundings. pool heat pump shall be located above a services distribution plant room to provide
extra isolation form sound transmission.
Acoustic attenuating louvers shall be provided to break the direct transmission of the noise and allow
free air movement required for proper pool heat pump rejection.
Based on the selected pool heat pump the sound reduction shall be to the following criteria :-
Frequency (HZ) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Estimated pool heat pump 99 96 97 97 95 91 87 81

transmission
Sound Reduction Indices 5 5 7 12 18 21 16 16
Structure borne noise from the pool heat pump shall be attenuated by constructing a float slab
suspended on the resilient material at the upper roof plant level.
To reduce noise levels at source the pool heat pump shall be fitted with low noise, high efficiency fan
and compressors shall be enclosed in acoustic housings.
To reduce the noise each pool heat pump shall be mounted on spring anti vibration mounts selected
for a minimum static deflection of 50mm. If individual compressors are also mounted on springs the
compatibility of the two mounting systems shall be verified.

2.11 OTHER FEATURES

Each Pool heat pump shall also incorporate the following :-
Oil Pressure Gages.
Refrigerant Pressure Gages.

Compressor Isolating Valves
Condenser Coil Wind Baffles
Compressor Muffler.
Condenser Coil Protection Guards
Corrosion Resistant Coated Coils.
Low Noise and speed Fans (750).
Compressor Attenuating Enclosures.
Power Supply Isolator.
Remote Start / Stop

2.12 CONTROLS
General:
1- Provide automatic control of pool heat pump operation including compressor start/stop and
load/unload anti-recycle timers, condenser fans, evaporator pump, evaporator heater, unit alarm
contacts and run signal contacts.
2- pool heat pump shall automatically reset to normal pool heat pump operation after power failure.
3- Unit operating software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Field programmed set points shall
be retained in lithium battery backed regulated time clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5 years.
4- Alarm contacts shall be provided to remote alert for any unit or system safety fault.
B. Display and Keypad:

1- Provide minimum 80 character liquid crystal display that is both viewable in direct sunlight and
has LED backlighting for night times viewing. Provide one keypad and display panel per pool
heat pump.
2- Display and keypad shall be accessible through display access door without opening main
Control /electrical cabinet doors.
3- Display shall provide a minimum of unit set points, status, electrical data. temperature data,
pressures, safety lockouts and diagnostics without the use of a coded display.
4- Descriptions in English , numeric data in English and Metric units
5- Sealed keypad shall include unit On/Off switch.

C. Programmable Set points (within Manufacturer limits):

Display language, liquid cooling mode, local/ remote control mode, display units mode, system lead/lag
control mode, remote temperature reset, remote current limit, remote sound limit, low ambient
temperature cutout enable/disable, leaving liquid set point and range, maximum remote temperature
reset.
D. Display Data:
liquid leaving and entering temperatures; outside ambient air temperature; lead system, evaporator
pump status; active remote control; compressor suction, discharge, and oil pressures per refrigerant
circuit; compressor discharge, motor, and oil temperatures per refrigerant circuit; saturation
temperatures per refrigerant circuit; compressor speed; condenser fan status; condenser sub cooking
temperature; condenser drain valve percentage open; compressor capacity in percentage of Full Load
Amps; compressor number of starts; run time; operating hours; evaporator heater status; history data
for last ten shutdown faults; history data for last 20 normal (non-fault) shutdowns.
E. Predictive Control Points:

Unit controls shall avoid safety shutdown when operating outside design conditions by optimizing the
pool heat pump controls and cooling load output to stay online and avoid safety limits being reached.
The system shall monitor the following parameters and maintain the maximum cooling output possible
without shutdown of the equipment motor current, suction pressure, discharge pressure, starter
internal ambient temperature, and starter base plate temperature.
F. System Safeties:
Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto-reset shut down if: high discharge pressure
or temperature, low suction pressure, low motor current, high/low differential oil pressure, low
discharge superheat, high motor temperature, system control voltage.
G. Unit Safeties:
Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut down if: high or low ambient temperature, low
leaving liquid temperature, under voltage, flow switch operation. Contractor shall provide flow switch
and wiring per pool heat pump manufacturer requirements...
H. Building Automation System Interface:

pool heat pump to accept 0 to 10 VDC input from BAS (by others) to reset the leaving liquid
temperature or load limit set point or both.
I. Gateway:
Provide communication for Building Automation Systems. including BACnet (MS/TP), Modbus, N2. And
LON
J. Flow Switch:
Vapour proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch, 150 psig (10.3 barg), -20°F to 250°F (-28.9°C to 121.1°C.)
K. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for automatic pool heat pump operation.

Control Requirements:
1. Unit protective functions shall include, but not limited to:
 Loss of water flow / low water temperature
 Evaporator freezing
 Low and high refrigerant pressure
 Reverse rotation
 Compressor starting and running over-current
 Phase loss / phase imbalance and phase reversal
 Loss of oil flow
2. Controls shall have the ability to display, among others, the follo wing readouts and diagnostics:
 Low water temperature protection
 High and low refrigerant pressure protection
 Phase reversal / unbalance / single phasing and over I under voltage protection
 Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature
 Condenser fan sequencing to automatically cycle fans in response to load, expansion valve pressure and
condenser pressure to optimize unit efficiency
 Oil pressure control
3. The unit controller shall utilize the following components to automatically take action to prevent unit
shut down due to abnormal operating conditions which will perform as follows:
 High pressure switch that automatically unloads the compressor to help prevent a high condenser
pressure trip
 Motor load control, set at 95% of compressor RLA that will automatically unload the compressor
to help prevent an over-current trip. Each compressor shall be protected individually
 Low pressure switch that automatically unloads the compressor to help prevent a low evaporator
temperature trip
4. The unit controller shall provide the following operational controls:

 Five minute start-to-start and two minutes stop-to-start to prevent compressor from short cycling
 Pull down limit control of water temperature drop to '1 degree F per minute. This load limit control is
meant to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature to prevent nuisance trip-out
 High ambient unloaded pressure controller that unloads compressors to keep head pressure
under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance trip-outs
5. In any of the above cases, the pool heat pump should keep in operating in an unloaded state and will
continue to produce some water in an attempt to meet the cooling load. However, if the pool heat pump
reaches the trip-out limits, the pool heat pump control will take the pool heat pump off-line for protection
and a manual reset will be required. Once the "near-trip" condition is corrected, the pool heat pump
will return to normal operation and can then produce full load cooling.

Operating Characteristics:
1. Provide low and high ambient temperature control options as required to ensure unit is capable
of operation from 0°F to 125°F (-18°C to 52°C) ambient temperature.
2. Provide capacity control system capable of reducing unit capacity to 10% of full load for 2
compressor units. Compressor shall start 1n unloaded condition. Application of factory installed
hot gas bypass shall be acceptable
Vibration Isolation:
2" Deflection Restrained Spring Isolators: Level adjustable, restrained mounts in rugged welded steel
housing with vertical and horizontal limit stops. Housings shall be designed to withstand a minimum 1.0g
accelerated force in all directions to 2" (50.8 mm.)
2.13 POWER AND ELECTRICAL
1. Power Supply 400VAC 50Hz 3Ph
2. Power/Control Panel:
a. Factory installed and wired NEMA 3R, powder painted steel cabinets with tool lockable,
hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing.
Provide main power connection(s), compressor starters and fan motor contactors, current
overloads, and factory wiring.
b. Panel shall include control display access door.
3. Power Factor:
Provide equipment with power factor correction capacitors as required to maintain a displacement
power factor of 95% at all load conditions.
2.14 CONTROL PANEL
The control panel shall provide signals to the diverter valve at a preset time interval to reverse water flow to
drive the tube brushes down the tubes and then signal the valve to reverse the water flow to drive the brushes
back down the tubes to their original position. The controller shall have the following features as a minimum:
a. Timer to initiate the on-load cleaning cycle.
b. Manual override of preset cleaning cycle.
c. Power-on indicator.
d. Diverter-position indicator.
e. Cleaning-cycle-time adjustment
f. Flow-switch bypass.

2.15 TESTING
Each pool heat pump system shall be field acceptance tested in compliance with its approved field
acceptance test plan and the resulting following field acceptance test report submitted for
approval:
1. heat pump- field acceptance test report
b. Manufacturer's recommended testing: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended

field testing in compliance with the approved test plan. Furnish a factory trained field
representative authorized by and to represent the equipment manufacturer at the
complete execution of the field acceptance testing.
c. Operational test: Conduct a continuous 24 hour operational test for each item of
equipment. Equipment shutdown before the test period is completed shall result in the
test period being started again and run for the required duration. For the duration of the
test period, compile an operational log of each item of equipment. Log required entries
every two hours. Use the test report forms for logging the operational variables.
d. Notice of tests: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended tests and the operational
tests; record the required data using the approved reporting forms. Notify the Engineer in
writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the testing. Within 30 calendar days after
acceptable completion of testing, submit each test report for review and approval.
e. Report forms: Type data entries and writing on the test report forms. Completed test
report forms for each item of equipment shall be reviewed, approved, and signed by the
Contractor's test director. The manufacturer's field test representative shall review,
approve, and sign the report of the manufacturer's recommended test. Signatures shall
be accompanied by the person's name typed.
f. Deficiency resolution: The test requirements acceptably met; deficiencies identified

during the tests shall be corrected in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and corrections retested in order to verify compliance.
2.16 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS
Before each refrigeration system is accepted, tests to demonstrate the general operating characteristics of
all equipment shall be conducted by a registered professional engineer or an approved manufacturer's
start-up representative experienced in system start-up and testing, at such times as directed. Tests shall
cover a period of not less than 72 hours for each system and shall demonstrate that the entire system is
functioning in accordance with the drawings and specifications. Corrections and adjustments shall be
made as necessary and tests shall be re-conducted to demonstrate that the entire system is functioning as
specified. Prior to acceptance, service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and
tightened. Any refrigerant lost during the system startup shall be replaced. If tests do not demonstrate
satisfactory system performance, deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be retested. Tests
shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel
required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor. Field tests shall be coordinated with Section 23
05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.

2.16.2 Test Report
The report shall document compliance with the specified performance criteria upon completion and
testing of the system. The report shall indicate the number of days covered by the tests and any
conclusions as to the adequacy of the system. The report shall also include the following information and
shall be taken at least three different times at outside dry-bulb temperatures that are at least 3 degrees C
apart:
a. Date and outside weather conditions.
b. The load on the system based on the following:
(1) The refrigerant used in the system.

(2) Condensing temperature and pressure.
(3) Suction temperature and pressure.
(4) Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each phase of all motors.
(5) The actual on-site setting of all operating and safety controls.
(6) water pressure, flow and temperature in and out of the pool heat pump.
(7) The position of the capacity-reduction gear, gas supply control valve, fuel oil supply valve at machine
off, one-third loaded, one-half loaded, two-thirds loaded, and fully loaded.
2.17 DEMONSTRATIONS
Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Engineer. The training
period shall consist of a total 48 hours of normal working time and start after the system is functionally
completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field posted instructions shall cover all of the items
contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations of routine
maintenance operations.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 238129
Variable refrigerant flow dx system air-conditioning units
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Variable Refrigerant Flow heat pump / heat recovery as requested in Drawings, units
consisting of separate evaporator-fan (indoor unit) and high power factor (>0.95) variable frequency
drive compressor-condenser components (outdoor unit). Units are designed for exposed or concealed
mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Isolation” for isolation pads, spring isolators, and seismic
restraints.
2. Division 23 Section “Mechanical Insulation" for refrigerant piping insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in
terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Installation detail, piping connection detail, Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: Include Operation and maintenance manuals, including testing and commissioning
procedure.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional req u ir e me n ts o f

VRF / Indoor & Outdoor units and based on the specific system indicated.
B. Provide manufacturer’s data certifying required performance for actual refrigerant pipes height and length.
Mechanical Specifications 23 81 29 - 1 Variable refrigerant flow dx system

Air- conditioning units
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period 5 years from date of substantial operation.

All materials, design, fabrication, and erection shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements
of all codes, standards or regulations having jurisdiction over the work. In the event of conflict
between codes, standards or regulations, the conflict shall be referred to the Owner for resolution.
Works will also adhere to the standards listed below or the standards resulting from their possible
amendment:
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air conditioning (U.S.A.)
Engineers
In case of any contradictions among the above codes and standards. The local codes and standards
shall supersede and prevail

PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
A. System shall be High Ambient type suitable for Gulf States Operation with an outdoor operating
temperature of 52°C.
B. The unit shall be a Variable Refrigerant Flow/Temperature inverter driven heat pump or heat
recovery air conditioner, and shall be composed of multiple indoor units and an outdoor unit
with a distributed refrigeration loop, with electrical components and enclosing cabinets.
C. The indoor and outdoor units shall be properly assembled, internally piped and wired, tested
and charged with R410 refrigerant (for outdoor units) at the factory.
D. All indoor units that are connected to a system must be possible to be independently controlled
depending on the requirements of each room. And shall be connected to the outdoor unit via
control wiring and refrigeration piping network.
E. System’s operation has to be based on pressure sensors and thermostats, which via a specially
developed and designed integrated circuit shall control the frequency of the motor (inverter) of the
compressor by means of varying the compressor’s speed, thus changing refrigerant’s volume and
evaporating temperature according to varying indoor space requirements, and according to ambient
temperature and building’s load profile.
F. Air conditioning units to have a minimum seasonal average COP of 3.8.
G. All refrigerants to be installed within the project site boundary must have an ozone depletion
potential (ODP) of zero
H. All system shall be comply with Estidama Pearl Rating (1 Pearl)
I. The system has to automatically adjust the evaporating and the condensing temperature in
order to always deliver the exact necessary capacity for the building’s load, with the highest
possible efficiency. In parallel, it must be possible to also set a target refrigerant temperature. In
addition, it has to be possible to operate the system with at least three different set refrigerant
temperatures. The adjustment of the evaporating and the condensing temperature will have to be
easily field set, without any optional accessories prior or after the commissioning of the system.

2.2 INDOOR UNITS
2.2.1 General Requirements:
Extremely quiet in operation, long-life washable filters, vibration free Surface area with HI-X Cu piping R 410A
counter-flow design with profiled aluminum fins, Electronic expansion valve with stepping motor, 2000 steps for
precise cooling unit adjustment between 0%- 100%.
2.2.2 Ducted Ceiling Unit:
1. False ceiling duct connection unit.

2. DC Inverter fan with automatic static pressure judgment function. Ensures up to 20% reduction i n t h e
power consumption. And balanced flow distribution on the duct branches.
3. Variable external static pressure from 30 up to 120 Pa.
4. Possibility to change the external static pressure through wired remote control allows optimization of the
supply air volume.
5. Height of the unit must not exceed 330 mm.
6. Radial fan, vibration-free and quiet running. Protected by a thermal contact.
7. Built-in drains pump as a standard up to 650 mm head.
8. Fresh-air admixing can be admixed via a punched aperture.
9. Sound pressure not more than 40 dBA at high speed.
10. Standard air filter: removes airborne dust particles to ensure a steady supply of clean air.
11. Home leave operation saves energy during absence.
12. 3-step air flow control to improve the comfort level.
13. Possibility of bottom and rear suction (Return), Microprocessor temperature control.
14. all unit shall be have thermostat .
2.3 OUTDOOR UNIT
Outdoor units shall have to be manufactured for operating with proper power supply according to site
requirements, and with full inverter compressor(s) per outdoor module.
The noise level - sound pressure - should not exceed 66 dB(A) under laboratory conditions, measured in an
semi-anechoic chamber, at a horizontal distance of 1 meter from the unit and at 1.5 meters height from
the base of the unit.
The outdoor unit must be suitable for outdoor installation. The shell/casing of the unit shall be made of
enameled stainless steel sheet, with polyester thermal powder coating (minimum 70μ) for high protection in
environment near the seaside. The air-cooled heat exchanger of the outdoor unit shall undergo appropriate
treatment for protection and long life efficient operation against atmospheric corrosion. Specifically, the
aluminum fins shall be coated with a layer of acrylic resin and on top covered with a hydrophilic film or any
other material which shall provide minimum 5 to 6 times greater resistance to acid rain and salt corrosion
(e.g. wind in coastal areas ). The bottom of the unit shall have a sheet of stainless steel for protection against
oxidation.
The outdoor unit shall be either one or two compressors in separate shells, so in case one fails it will not be
necessary to shut down the corresponding outdoor, axial fan(s)DC inverter driven, air- cooled heat

exchanger, piping, wiring and automation. The outdoor units shall have factory-installed electronic expansion
valves, oil separator, accumulator at the suction side of the compressor, high & low pressure sensors, DC
inverter motors for the fan(s), protection thermostats, fuses, protection against overcurrent, protection for
overloading of the inverter, liquid and gas stop valves and solenoid valves, timers and all the necessary sensors
and protection equipment to ensure continuous, safe and smooth operation.
The outdoor unit - and consequently the whole system -will keep on operating even if one compressor is
turned off (emergency operation). In case of a multi-outdoor unit system it will be possible to isolate one
module, while the rest of the system will continue to operate even if delivering reduced capacity.
The outdoor units shall incorporate a "Soft Start" technology, to achieve a very low starting current in order to
lower consumption, reduce power requirements of the electrical board and minimize the stress of individual
parts of the outdoor unit (e.g. compressor’s motor).
Taking into consideration that frost/ice build-up on the outdoor heat exchanger is mainly taking place at
ambient temperatures ranging from -7°C to +7°C – depending also on humidity levels – the units should
incorporate a special defrost function that shall guarantee continuous comfort during defrost cycles. Defrost
shall have to take place regularly in order to increase efficiency of the system and protect the outdoor units from
heat exchanger breaking down.
The systems shall also feature a "Hot Start" function in heating to prevent cold drafts from the indoor units
during the start-up period. During Hot Start the louver(s) of indoor units shll have to be at horizontal position,
while the indoor fan shall operate at very low speed (LL: lower than the lowest that can be set by the local
control).
The oil recovery from the piping network and the indoor units has to be achieved by the use of a
microprocessor. The oil shall be recovered at least once every eight hours, via a special oil recovery function,
ensuring smooth operation of compressors constantly, and without the need of external installed oil balancing
line.
To avoid high start-up currents in multi-module systems, the outdoor units should start at different timings and
with different sequence each time, in order also to make sure equitable operating hours, compressors’ strain
and oil quantities in each module of the system.
Outdoor units should necessarily have a specific function and appropriate devices to prevent the refrigerant in
liquid phase to return to the compressor. This ensures the preservation of the proposed by the manufacturer
density of the oil and therefore the adequate lubrication of the compressor. This function is increasing both the
efficiency of the system and extends the lifespan of the compressor.
All outdoor units should have an auto-charge function for adding the necessary amount of refrigerant. This
function is necessary for the systems to meet the standards and specifications set by the manufacturer while
eliminating any possible human error.
In the outdoor units it is preferable to have a 7 segment decimal display, displaying detailed error codes,
stage of a procedure or a function and operating data of the system. This will diminish human errors.
For the commissioning of a system and in order to properly set all necessary data and values for the optimum
operation of it, it is recommended for the starting-up the use of special software provided by the manufacturer
of the system. The establishing of the values and the programming should be possible even offline.

2.3.2 COMPRESSOR
Compressors shall have to be hermetically closed scroll type, manufactured by the same VRF system
manufacturer for greater reliability over time, with integrated motor and sound absorbing jacket. All of them
shall have to have a DC inverter driven motors with the possibility to continuously changing the frequency,
resulting in changing the volumetric refrigerant flow from the compressor.
The motor windings shall have to be specially constructed, in order to achieve the safe and smooth operation to
avoid hazards due to the continuously changing of frequency and voltage. The compressors shall be protected by
an electrical crankcase heater to prevent oil condensation at low ambient temperatures.
The oil supply in the compressor shall have to be on the high pressure side, ensuring
optimum lubrication of all moving parts. The oil pipeline shall be in the center of the crankshaft in order to
transfer the lubricant across the surface of the rotating parts in the direction from the center to the
perimeter.
Compressor shall have a startup timer from frequent start-stops.
2.3.3 Condensing Unit FAN(s)
The fan motor(s) of the outdoor unit shall have to be DC inverter, to more accurately adjust the fan speed and
reduce noise. The DC inverter fan motors shall automatically adjust the rotation speed.
The impeller shall be made of plastic and with a special configuration to achieve greater air flow with quite low
noise level. Outdoor units shall have a protective cover to the fan against accidents and to avoid foreign
objects entering the units. It shall be of special design and construction to minimize the external static pressure
drop of the fan.
Fans shall have a high external static pressure setting in order to reach at least 75 Pa.
In case of an outdoor unit with two fans, then each fan shall be separately ducted.
2.4 System Controls
Each indoor unit shall have wall mounted wired remote controllers. The length of the connecting wiring of the
remote controller to the indoor unit shall be capable to reach 500 meters.
The controller shall have a high resolution LCD, to indicate the various operating parameters of the controlled
indoor unit(s), as well as possible error code. The user shall be able to switch between simple and detailed
mode, by means of displayed parameters. The displayed information to be wording, not symbolic.
The remote controller shall be capable of to independently controlling the louvers of the indoor unit(s), and
any energy saving function and / or sensor related to indoors for increasing either efficiency and/or comfort,
must also be controlled by the remote controller.
The local remote controller shall have an internal memory to store at least the last 9 error codes that might
occur.

It shall be possible to connect, monitor and control at least twelve (12) indoor units on one remote controller.
For each system it should be evident and clearly indicated which indoor unit is the one determining the
operating mode (cooling / heating). Setting and changing this should be possible at any given moment
- even after the first start up– by the user and without having to shut down the whole system or cut off the
power supply indoors.
The controller shall have a built-in room temperature sensor which in cooperation with the built in room air
temperature sensor on the indoor unit to accurately control the operation of the unit.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Control wiring:
A simple 2-wire non-shielded multiplex transmission system links each outdoor unit to multiple indoor units
using one 2-wire, non-polar to simplify the wiring operation.
3.2 Pipes Connection:
Possibility of use either joints or headers, connection sizes must be selected according to the system supplier
recommendation.
3.3 Control:
Individual control for each indoor unit to be synchronized with the outdoor unit operation wired remote
controller with digital display and function buttons and equipped with real time clock to enable weekly and daily
schedules. Possibility to be connected to a centralized controller or to a BMS system
3.4 Pipes:
C1220 type copper tube for refrigerant piping. Units in mm
Pipe Outside Pipe Wall

Diameter Thickness
6.4 0.75
9.5 0.80
12.7 0.80
15.9 1.00
19.1 1.00
22.2 1.00
25.4 1.00
28.6 1.00
34.9 1.30
41.3 1.70

3.5 Installation:
Installation must be according to the system supplier recommendation. Refrigerant:
R-410A.
3.6 INSTALLATION
A. Install units’ level and related plumbing works.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to
building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 100-mm-(4-inch) thick,
reinforced concrete base; 100 mm (4 inches) larger on each side than unit.
D. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.
E. Install compressor-condenser components on equipment supports. Anchor units to supports with

removable, cadmium-plated fasteners in designated location as per drawings.
F. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection
of 25 mm (1 inch).
G. Connect pre charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to
unit.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Section. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be disconnected
without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.

A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to
prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and
retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.9 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents and manufacturer.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the

following:
1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.

2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration Transmission to structure.
END OF SECTION

Division 33 Utilities
33 30 00-1 Sanitary Sewers
33 50 00 SNG -NG Project Specification
33 56 10 Fuel Oil System

DIVISION 33 30 00
SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description
A. The extent of sewerage system, storm water and equipment work is indicated on the drawings and by the
requirements of this section.

Mechanical Specifications 33 30 00 - 1 Sanitary Sewers

prevail
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of sewerage fixtures and equipment of the types, styles
and configurations required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
1.4 Submittals
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data for the equipment including rough-in drawings, templates,
instructions and directions for installation of water and drain piping.
1.5 Product Delivery, Storage And Handling
A. Deliver fixtures individually wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers or wooden crates.
B. Handle fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, chipping, denting, and scoring items; replace and return damaged
units to equipment manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Pipes and Fittings - Materials
2.1.1 Below Ground Drainage and Sewerage System

A. The below ground drainage and Sewerage shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings and shall comply with BS
4660, 5481– EN-1401-1:1998, and where appropriate shall bear the Kitemark.
C. UPVC solvent weld socket seal/lip and lip seal/lip seal shall be used.

slabs.
G. Solvent Cements
H. Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non-pressure pipe work or BS 4346: Part 3 for
pressure pipe work.
I. Sealing Rings
A. Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS2494.
2.1.2 Pumped Drainage and Sewerage System

A. All pumped drainage and Sewerage system shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings and shall comply with
BS 3505 , 3506 class “E” or to DIN 8061, 8062 PN-16, and where appropriate shall bear the Kitemark.
retaining caps. Underground fittings shall be coloured golden brown. Seal retaining caps and seal
rings are black. Rodding eyes shall be provided where required.
C. UPVC rubber seal or solvent type.
E. Transition from higher dia. to lower one shall be made by using level invert taper. Special adaptors
and caulking bush shall be used to join UPVC channels in manhole connections to drainage system.
slabs.
G. Solvent Cements
H. Solvent cements should comply with BS 4346: Part 3 for pressure pipe work.
I. Sealing Rings
J. Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS2494.
2.2 Manholes
2.2.1 General
Manholes shall be provided at all changes in direction, gradient or diameter.
The manholes shall be of the sizes and grades indicated on the Contract drawings and fully comply
with ADDSC regulations and Construction Specification
2.2.2 Cement and Concrete

a) Cement
All cement used in all classes of concrete for drainage and sewerage works, whether above or
below ground level, shall be sulphate resistant cement, complying with BS 4027

b) Granolithic Concrete
Granolithic Concrete shall be mixed using one part by weight of Portland cement to two parts of
clean granite chippings graded as Table 1 of BS 882, to one part of sharp siliceous sand graded as
Table 2 and clear water sufficient to form a stiff but workable mix and provide a dense concrete.
c) Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall consist of sulphate-resisting cement and sand gauged by volume in suitable
boxes in the proportions as proposed by BS standards
Unless otherwise specified cement mortar shall be SRC Class No.1.

The ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or shall be mixed
together dry on a clean wooden stage until the mix is homogeneous in colour. Water shall then
be added through a rose in sufficient quantity to give no more than stiff workability. The Whole
shall then be turned until perfectly mixed.
Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing and shall not be remixed or worked up again after
it has stiffened. Any mortar that has commenced to set shall be removed from the works.
Concrete Classification
CONCRETE CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH APPLICATION

GRADE N/mm2
SRC 30 30 Precast Concrete
SRC 25 25 Normal reinforced concrete,

blinding thrust blocks
SRC 25 25 Mass concrete hard standings
SRC 20 20 Mass concrete, pipeline protection

and surrounds protection to tanking
and hollowing block infill.
MIX PROPORTION FOR CEMENT MORTAR
PROPORTION BY VOLUME FOR CEMENT
Cement Sulphate Resisting Sand Lime
No. 1. 1 2 -
No. 2. 1 3 -
No. 3. 1 5 1
vi) RENDERING TO MANHOLE BEDDING

 Rendering to manhole benching shall comprise a 12mm thick layer of approved epoxy mortar.

2.2.3 Block work Manholes

Block work manholes shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to the dimensions indicated on
Drawings or as directed on site by the Engineer.
The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate resisting cement and shall
comply with the requirements of MOPW Construction Specification
Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.
Each manhole shall be built on a minimum of 75mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25 concrete which shall be laid
on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsold material. If the bed of the excavation is wet, the top surface
of the blinding shall be coated with an approved waterproofing material.
Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ. Mass concrete foundation slabs shall be of concrete Grade 20.
Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of Grade SRC 30.
Internal and external faces of the block work walls shall be finished with 12mm thick SRC mortar rendering Class
1.
All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel fittings shall be painted with
one primer coat and two final coats of black bitumen coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or
equal and approved.
All exterior faces of manhole chambers shall be protected with 1000-gauge polythene membrane with
hardboard protection against damage during backfilling.
Where indicated on the Drainage, manhole cover frames shall be supported on solid precast concrete bricks,
manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete.
Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where manhole access openings are less than the internal dimensions
of the manhole chamber.
The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile manhole covers and frames of the quality specified. The covers in
roads and paved areas
shall be accurately set on precast concrete brickwork to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.
Manhole inverts shall be constructed of half section vitrified clay channels. Half section vitrified clay channel
branch bends shall be used for branch connections. Benching in manholes shall be carefully formed according
to the number, diameter and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The benching in the manholes
shall have vertical sides extending from the verified clay channels at least to the level of the crown of the
highest pipe. The benching shall be sloped towards the channels at gradient of 1 in 10 or as otherwise detailed
on the drawings. The benching shall be rendered with a 12mm thickness of epoxy mortar rendering. The
ends of all pipes entering and leaving the manhole are to carefully cut to shape to suit the internal dimensions
of the manholes, and shall project through on the inside, the benching being
Continued round the pipe to form a fillet.
2.2.4 Precast Concrete Manholes

The base shall be cast in-situ and shall be Grade SRC 20 concrete to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
The whole base including the outside surround to the pipes shall be cast monolithic. Immediately before
concreting, lengths of pipes to be built in shall be surrounded with a layer of cement mortar No. 1.
All chamber and shaft rings of the manholes shall comprise precast Grade SRC 30 concrete units as shown on
the drawings.

The formwork for all precast concrete rings shall be purpose made in mild steel and shall incorporate surface
vibrators of adequate performance to ensure proper compaction of the concrete. The forms must have
provisions for allowing the casting in of the step irons. All precast components for manholes shall be made in
accordance with BS 5911 or equivalent approved standard. Precast concrete components shall immediately
after the removal of forms, be sprayed with an approved curing membrane. Regular spraying with water will
not be an acceptable method of curing.
Where the Contractor does not own forms with surface vibrators for the production of precast concrete
manhole components he may, with the written approval of the Engineer employ an approved method of hand
compaction. If the Engineer gives such written approval, this does not imply acceptance of the quality of the
finished work.
The positions of lifting holes or eyes in precast components are to be approved by the Engineer. Lifting holes are
to be grouted up after construction of the manhole.
2.2.4.1 Step Irons

Step irons are to be positioned in the chamber shaft rings in such manner that the step irons are vertically linear.
The joints at each step iron shall be made water-tight and strong, free from any crack and if found otherwise the
Engineer may reject the precast ring or may instruct the Contractor to take any necessary measures to make the
ring watertight.
The first step iron shall be fixed at a maximum of 600mm below the cover level and the last step iron shall be
fixed at a maximum of 300mm from the top level of the lowest adjacent benching.
Step irons shall be staggered at 300mm centres vertically and horizontally.
All joints between rings or slabs shall be made watertight to the satisfaction of the Engineer with a bituminous
mastic strip sealant as approved. The external face of the joint is to be sealed with epoxy mortar.
A 150mm thick in-situ Grade SRC 20 concrete surround shall be placed around the manhole as shown on the
Drawings.
2.2.4.2 Chamber Rings

Chamber rings shall be manufactured from concrete Grade SRC 30.
Both internal and external surfaces of the chamber rings shall be coated with a solution of bitumen refined from
asphaltic crude oil, the solution having total solids content of approximately 45% and a viscosity corresponding
to a No. 4 for cup time of approximately 30 seconds.
2.2.5 Manhole Covers and Frames

Manhole covers and frames shall be cast/ductile iron covers complying with BS EN 124 and shall be of the sizes
and types as shown on the Contract Drawings.
In general, manhole covers and frames shall be one of three types, as follows, unless otherwise specified.
 Heavy Duty, to BS EN 124 Class D 400

 Medium Duty, to BS EN 124 Class C 250
 Light Duty, to BS EN 124 Class B 125
2.2.5.1 Heavy Duty

All manholes installed in roadways or trafficked areas shall be heavy duty Ductile cover to BS EN
124 Class D 400.
The cover and frame shall be made from ductile iron and the cover shall be of the loosely bolted
double triangular type with three-point suspension to provide stability under load.

2.2.5.2 Medium Duty

All manholes installed external to buildings, Kerb areas of streets and pavements, shall be Class
C 250
The cover and frame shall be of ductile iron and the cover shall be either rectangular or circular
as specified in the Manhole Schedule. Such manholes shall incorporate a single seal between
cover and frame. Following flushing out and testing of the drainage system, the sealing groove
shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.
2.2.5.3 Light Duty

All manholes installed within buildings and not subject to motor vehicles or industrial trolleys
etc. shall be light duty to BS EN 124 Class B 125.
The cover and frame shall be made from grey iron and shall incorporate a double seal between
cover and frame. Following flushing out and testing of the drainage system, the sealing grooves
shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.
In those areas where it is required to accept a tiled floor finish, the manhole covers shall be of
the recessed type. In kitchens, or other areas subject to washing down, manhole covers and
frames shall have stainless steel edging and trim. Double-cover units shall be provided where
specified in the Manhole schedule.
The Contractor shall provide two sets of lifting keys for each type of manhole.
Manhole covers and frames shall be as approved.
2.2.5.4 Recessed Covers

Where manholes installed within tiling or decorative floor finish surroundings, a recessed type
manhole covers shall be installed.
The cover and frame shall be made from galvanized steel cover and frame and shall incorporate
a double seal between cover and frame. Manhole covers shall be fastened to frames by
heavy-duty counter sunk screws. Floor finishing shall be rendered continuously within the
manhole covers to match the surroundings.
Following flushing out and testing of the drainage system, the sealing grooves shall be filled
with neoprene to provide an airtight seal.
In kitchens, or other areas to washing down, manhole covers and frames shall have stainless
steel edging and trim. Double-cover units shall be provided where specified in the Manhole
schedule.
The Contractor shall provide two sets of lifting keys for each type of manhole.
Manhole covers and frames shall be as approved.

Part 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS - WORKMANSHIP

a. Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers
All pipe work shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free movement due to expansion
contraction, vibration or other changes in the system. Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints
and changes in direction Spacing of supports shall be as per manufacturers recommendations.
Vertical stacks shall be adequately supported at the base to stand the total weight of the riser. Under no
circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical pipe work.
High temperature waste pipe work 32mm, 40mm and 50mm shall be supported using stand off two piece clips
screwed to the wall using round head zinc plated wood screws. Pipe clips shall be plastic coated galvanized
mild steel where exposed to view and galvanized mild steel where concealed.
Pipe work 75mm, 100mm and 150mm shall be supported using two piece holder bats screwed to the wall using
round head zinc plated wood screws.
Brackets shall be galvanized steel and be rigid. Where soil and ventilation pipes are suspended from the
underside of slab, they shall be held rigid in position. Single angle iron supports may be used for pipe work up to
500mm from underside of slab. Double angle iron supports shall be used for pipe work 500mm-1000mm from
the underside of the slab. All supports shall be proprietary brand and manufactured from galvanized steel.
Double angle iron braces shall be installed on the both single and double angle iron supports at 6 meter centers
for vertical and horizontal runs of pipe work and anchored as necessary.
Copper waste pipe work shall be supported clear of the structure with cast brackets screwed to the wall using
brass screws. Where exposed to view, bright finish brass hospital brackets shall be used with rawl plugs and
brass screws. Where pipe work is concealed, bright finish brass single pipe ring with BSP female screwed end
and bright finish brass back plate with male screwed end shall be used and fixed to wall using brass screws and
rawl plugs.
b. Rodding Eyes
Rodding and cleaning eyes shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings and as required. Stainless
steel covers to be provided at tiles level.
c. Roof Termination
All soil ventilation pipes shall terminate 300mm above the point of exit from the services duct.
d. Jointing
Joints of PP and shall be “O” ring. Prior to joining, all pipe work, fittings and accessories shall be thoroughly
cleaned. Pipe work shall be cut square, end chamfered and swarf and dust removed. Prior to joining, pipes
and fitting should be checked for correct position and alignment and marked to ensure accurate assembly.
Where “O” ring joints are to be used pipes shall be marked for insertion depth, “O” ring placed in ring seal prior
to application of small quantity of lubricant or petroleum jelly around the chamfered spigot end. The pipe
shall then be inserted into the socket joint and finally adjusted to the correct insertion depth.
Where solvent joints are to be used, special care shall be taken to ensure both spigot and socket are free from
all dirt, grease and swarf. Solvent cement shall then be applied liberally and evenly to both socket and spigot
prior to inserting spigot into socket. The joint shall immediately be cleaned for surplus solvent with a dry cloth
around newly formed joint.
Joint PP to cast iron shall be by means of cast iron caulking bush with sealed ring joint for expansion. This
fitting shall have rubber seal ring for connecting to PP and spigot for connecting to cast iron.

Jointing of W.C. outlet to PP pipe work shall be by means of either a straight or bent connector as required
complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection for W.C. spigot outlet.
e. Laying Rigid Pipe
Each pipe immediately before being laid shall be carefully brushed out and inspected for defects.
Pipe with flexible joints, except where concrete protection is provided as specified hereafter, shall be laid on a
well compacted bed of granular bedding material extending for the full width of the trench and with sufficient
material at the side to permit the pipes to be worked into the granular material and firmly supported to true
line and level. Sufficient space should be left to enable the joints to be made, tested and inspected but the
Contractor shall ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe length is fully supported. After the pipeline has
been tested and approved by the Engineer the trench shall be carefully filled to 300mm above the crown of the
pipe with granular material.
f. Laying Plastic Pipe
All operations involving the laying, bedding, jointing, backfilling etc. of pipes plastic materials shall be strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations subject to the approval of the Engineer.
g. Marker Tape
Marker tape shall be laid 150mm above all sewerage and effluent pressure pipelines. The marker tape shall be
red, non-biodegradable plastic and inscribed with the words “DANGER-NON POTABLE WATER”, in both English
and Arabic and shall be of a type approved by the Engineer. Where specified in the Contract Documents blue
marker tape as above shall be laid above potable water mains and inscribed with the words ‘WATER MAIN” in
both English and Arabic.
h. Setting Out and Pipe Alignment
All pipes and pipelines shall be laid to the lines and depths shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by
the Engineer.
All pipelines shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that, except where otherwise specified, the finished
pipeline is in a straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes. Where shown on the drawings or otherwise
permitted by the Engineer shallow changes of direction shall be achieved by deflection at joints within the
maximum permitted by the manufacturer. Where the angle of the bend required is greater than that
obtainable by joint deflection then manufactured bends of the appropriate degree shall be used.
Manufactured bends shall only be used where shown on the drawings or where otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.
All pipelines forming part of a drainage system shall be laid to the specified lines and levels so that every
pipeline lies in a straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes between successive manholes on the line.
No bends will be permitted other than at manholes.
Every pipe shall be placed in position individually and shall be set out accurately to the line and level required.
All setting out to line and level of both pipelines and individual pipes shall be achieved by methods approved by
the Engineer.
Where pipelines of constant gradient are to be laid, the Contractor shall provide, fix and maintain at such points
as may be directed by the Engineer properly painted sight rails and boning rods of pre-determined
measurements for the boning in of individual pipes to correct alignment. The sight rails shall be situated
vertically over the line of pipes or immediately adjacent to and there shall at no time be less than three sight
rails in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any one gradient.
If the Contractor wishes to propose an alternative method of controlling pipeline alignment, he shall submit his
proposed method to the Engineer for approval.

i. Concrete Protection to Pipelines
All underground drainage pipe work shall be surrounded with 150mm thick Grade SRC 20 sulphate resisting
concrete, along its entire length, in the following locations:
1. All drainage below buildings or structural elements.
2. All drainage with less than 600mm cover

3. Drainage with a cover of between 600mm and 1200mm, where there is vehicular traffic over the
ground above the drain line.
4. Elsewhere as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

The required depths of concrete bed and height of concrete backfill shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Where a concrete bed and surround is specified, a minimum of 75mm blinding of concrete Grade 25 shall first
be laid over the full width of the trench.
The pipes shall be laid, jointed and supported on precast concrete blocks, which shall be separated from the
barrel by 25mm thick timber packing.
After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Engineer the top of the concrete bed shall be
thoroughly cleaned and additional concrete Grade SRC 20 carefully placed and compacted under and around
the pipe to a height of at least 150mm above the crown of the pipe.
Where pipes with flexible joints are to be surrounded, 13mm thick fiber board or polystyrene sheets shall be
fixed at the pipe coupling joint extending for the full cross section of the remaining concrete bed and surround
and accurately cut to fit the profile of the pipe.
j. Pipelines Protection from Extraneous Material
The pipelines shall at all times be kept free of extraneous material and when work is not in progress the open
ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an approved watertight plug or stopper. Claw type plugs or
any type liable to damage the pipe will not be approved.
The Contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately prior to joining and shall swab
all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt, sand or other matter that may contaminate the pipeline.
The entire absence of foreign matter from the completed line shall be a condition precedent to acceptance.
k. Trenches
All trench excavation shall comply fully with all the relevant clauses of MOPW Construction Specifications and
this specification.
Trench depths shall be sufficient to allow the installation of the required pipe bedding, granular or concrete, as
specified. Generally the depth of cover shall not be less than 600mm unless otherwise indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
Trench width shall be in accordance with the following table:
Nominal Pipe Bore (mm) Minimum Width (mm) Maximum Width (mm)
75 400 600
100 430 630

150 490 690
200 560 760
The maximum and minimum widths shall apply from the bottom of the trench to 300mm above the crown of
the pipe.
Should the trench be excavated to a depth greater than is required in the opinion of the Engineer, the
Contractor shall fill in the bottom of the trench to the required depth with concrete or other such materials as
the Engineer may direct.
In the case of trench excavations made in roads, footpaths, verges, central strips or within 5 meters of buildings,
the Contractor will be required to execute the works so as to minimize damage and disturbance. Vertical
trench sides will generally require support by timbering or other suitable means. Under-cutting of trench sides
will not be permitted.
l. Granular Bedding Material for Pipes
Granular bedding material for pipes shall consist of gravel or broken stone and shall be suitable “all in” ballast or
stone.
For pipes up to 1200 millimeters nominal bore the material shall be graded 12 millimeters to 5 millimeters all
passing 12 millimeters and not more than 20 percent passing 5 percent millimeters B.S. sieve.
The minimum thickness of granular material below the barrel of the pipe shall be as follows:
150 millimeters for pipes up to 600 millimeters nominal bore.
200 millimeters for pipes over 600 millimeters nominal bore and up to 1200 millimeters nominal bore.
300 millimeters for pipes over 1200 millimeters nominal bore.
In rock or mixed soils containing rock, boulders, large flints or stones or other irregular hard sports the thickness
of granular fill shall increase by 100 millimeters.
m. Granular Bedding for Plastic Pipes
Granular bedding material for flexible pipes shall consist of coarse graded sand up to 10mm and shall not
contain particles with sharp edges, which could cause damage to the pipes. The minimum thickness of sand
around the barrel of the pipes shall be 100mm.
n. Backfilling Excavation
After compaction of the granular bed and surround or completion of concrete surround, the trench shall be
backfilled using selected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard on objects and builders debris of
greater than 40mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations preceding it has
been completed and shall be layers of 150mm; each fully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power
rammers and vibrators shall be used to compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds
0.5 meters.
o. Insulation
All drainage pipes run above false ceilings should be insulated by fiber glass insulation of a density of 24 kg/m3.

3.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
i. General
A. All drainpipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and the requirements of
the local authorities having jurisdictions.
B. The Engineer shall witness all drainage tests. The Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 24
hours notice of all tests. The Contractor shall also provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner for
each drain section to be tested.
C. The Contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies are available shall set
to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction of the Engineer, and make the necessary
adjustments to ensure correct functioning.
D. After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the Contractor shall
demonstrate its operation at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Tests shall be in
accordance with British Standards BS 6700: 1987.
E. The test shall demonstrate: -
1. That equipment provided complies with the

Specification in all particulars and is of adequate
capacity for its full rates of duty.
2. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite

sufficiently to meet the specified requirements.
3. That all instruments, protection and control devices,

etc., are correctly calibrated and accurate.
4. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.
F. The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the Engineer. The
Employer’s representative and the Engineer shall be at liberty to be present at tests and to participate in
the tests. This shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for carrying out the tests
satisfactorily.
G. The Contractor shall make all the records during the tests and on completion thereof shall provide the
Engineer with a test report and record, both in triplicate. The Contractor shall also provide all test
instruments together with skilled supervision and adequate labor for carrying out the tests.
ii. Proving Tests

a- All under slab, underground drainage, soil and waste system shall be cleaned down and thoroughly
flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipe work system.
b- After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the drainage soil and waste
system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow. And tested by profile test
c- Particular attention shall be given to groups of sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory flow when a
number of fittings are flushed and air not drawn into the system via any trap.
iii. Water Test

a. All drains shall be tested before backfilling, immediately after the drain has been properly laid on the
correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to set. A water test pressure of 1.3m head
above the soffit of the drain shall be applied at the high end, but not more than 2.4m head at the low
end. The test shall be carried out on lengths of drain not less than half the distance between manholes,

all to be agreed with the Engineer on site. The lower end of the drain shall be plugged and the higher end
shall have a standpipe not less than 1.2m high. The drain shall be filled, taking care to eliminate trapped
air. After repair of leakage due to defective pipes, joints and plugs, the drain under test shall be left for
one hour to allow water absorption by pipe and fittings.
b. The loss of water over a period measuring vessel at intervals of ten minutes and noting the quantity of
water required maintaining the original level in the standpipe. For drains up to 300mm diameter, the
water quantity added shall not exceed 0.06 litre per hour per 100 linear meters per millimeter of
nominal bore of the drain under test.
c. All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct bedding cover and selected
backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface complete.
iv. Air Test

A. A gauge in the form of a “U” tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of the length to be
tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall be plugged. Air shall then be
pumped in from the other end of the drain under test until a pressure equal to 100mm of water is
indicated on the gauge. Without further pumping, the pressure shall not fall more than 25mm during a
period of five minutes.
B. Air tests shall be carried out after 3 pm and all pipe work shall be shaded from the sun at all times.
Should an air test fail, a water test shall be carried out as described in this Specification.
3.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING FOR DRAIN PIPES

A. The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for testing. Generally, the whole installation
shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the MOPW
B. Before any test is carried out the Engineer shall be given 24 hours’ notice. All defects located shall be
corrected before further work proceeds and the whole of the section of work affected shall be re-tested.
No section of pipes shall be back-filled before it has been tested.
3.4 TEST FOR STORM WATER

A. Testing shall be carried out before any pipes are hunched or surrounded with concrete. All joints shall be
exposed.
B. Storm water should be tested in section. Short branches connected to main runs shall be tested at the
same time.
C. The length to be tested shall be subjected to a static head pressure of not less than 1.5 M at the highest
point of the section being tested. After sufficient length of time has been allowed for, the absorption
of water into joints, the section under test shall be ‘topped-up’ and the head maintained without
apparent loss for not less than one hour.
3.5 PROFILE TEST

A. A hardwood ball, of an approved profile, shall be drawn through all foul drains from manhole to manhole
and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and W.C.’s are filled. The diameter of the ball or
profile shall differ from the nominal internal diameter of the pipe by not more than 6mm or by not more
than 4% of the nominal internal diameter of the pipe, whichever is the greater difference.
B. During commissioning, all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall be carried out to
ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and that they are free of debris.

3.6 PROTECTION OF WORKS

The installation shall be adequately protected against damage and deterioration when handed over, the
installation shall be in a clean and sound condition. Particular care must be taken during the course of
construction to seal all open ends of pipe work, gullies and soak away with a temporary cover. Wood
shavings or paper will not be accepted for this purpose.
3.7 PAINTING
A. The Contractor shall clean and paint all brackets and supports with two coats of red oxide paint.
B. Exposed pipes in the Kitchen, Bathroom etc. Shall be painted with matching color of the wall to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 33 5 0 00
NATURAL GAS/SNG/LPG DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Natural Gas/SNG System - General Description

1.2 Reference Code
1.4 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Pipework, Valves and Fittings

2.2 Identification and Color Coding
2.3 Flexible Hoses
2.4 Pipe Joints
2.5 Pressure Reducing and Metering
2.6 Hangers and Supports for Natural Gas/SNG
2.7 Gas Leak Detection & Control System
2.8 Data Logging, Recording and Monitoring System
2.9 Basic Design Requirements
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Gas Piping System Installation Requirements

3.2 Pipe Passing Through Walls
3.3 Testing
3.4 Pipe Laying
Mechanical Specifications 33 50 00- 1 Natural Gas/SNG/LPG Distribution

PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract requirements. All works
1.1 Natural Gas /SNG System - General Description
1.2.1 Natural gas/SNG is supplied to the site by the ADNOC Distribution as indicated on the
Drawings.
1.2.2 Gas under pressure is distributed to the Kitchens through piping networks as shown on
drawings.
1.2 Reference Code
1.3.1 All work under this section (Installation and Material) shall conform to the Authority
requirements in addition to the Institution of Gas Engineer G Series document IGE/G/5, unless
otherwise specified hereinafter.
1.4.1 In no contradiction with UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFAETY CODE OF PRACTICE: Codes and standards
applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and United States Codes, The design
codes for the systems will be those of the UK’s Institution of Gas Engineers and Managers
(IGEM). Hybridization with other codes and standards or selective adoption of individual clauses
between codes and standards solely for the purpose of gaining commercial advantage will
not be permitted. Notwithstanding the foregoing, other International Codes and Standards are
also recognized and may be implemented where the IGEM codes do not adequately cover
local conditions etc. within the UAE.
1.4.2 Other recognized standards include the following:
International Standards Organization (ISO)

European Norms - EN British Standards - BS
American National Standards Institute - ANSI
American Society of Mechanical Engineers - ASME
National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
Emirates Authority for Standardization & Metrology – ESMA
1.4.3 Piping designs will be in accordance with the following s t a n d a r d s :
IGE/GM/8 Part 1 Non-domestic meter installations. Flow rate exceeding 6 m3h-1 and inlet
pressure not exceeding 38 bar. Part 1: Design
IGE/GM/8 Part 2 - Non-domestic meter installations. Flow rate exceeding 6 m3h-1 and
inlet pressure not exceeding 38 bar. Part 2: Locations, housings and compounds
IGE/TD/3 – Steel and PE Pipelines for Gas Distribution (and amendments)
IGE/TD/4 - PE and steel gas services and service pipework

IGE/UP/1 – Strength Testing, Tightness Testing and Purging (I & C), MOP ≤ 16 bar IGE/UP/1A -
Strength Testing, Tightness Testing and Purging (I & C), MOP ≤ 40 mbar IGE/UP/1B - Tightness
Testing and Purging (domestic) MOP ≤ 21 mbar
IGE/UP/2 - Installation pipework on industrial and commercial premises
IGE/UP/11 - Gas Installations in Educational Establishments
BS 6891 Specification for installation of low pressure gas pipework of up to 28 mm

(R1) in domestic premises (2nd family gas)
IGEM/G/5 - Gas Installations in Multi- Occupancy Buildings
1.4.4 D/DD/00010/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Villa Installation with underground Pipe from
Property Wall.
1.4.5 D/DD/00011/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Multi-Unit Residential Building.
1.4.6 D/DD/00012/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical 21mbar Villa Meter on Building Wall.
1.4.7 D/DD/00013/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Consumer in Multi-Unit Building.
1.4.8 D/DD/Z9/00014/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Villa Installation with above ground pipe from
Property Wall.
IGE/TD/3 – Steel and PE Pipelines for Gas Distribution (and amendments)
IGE/TD/4 - PE and steel gas services and service pipework
IGE/UP/1 – Strength Testing, Tightness Testing and Purging (I & C), MOP ≤ 16 bar IGE/UP/1A -
Strength Testing, Tightness Testing and Purging (I & C), MOP ≤ 40 mbar IGE/UP/1B - Tightness
Testing and Purging (domestic) MOP ≤ 21 mbar
IGE/UP/2 - Installation pipework on industrial and commercial premises
IGE/UP/11 - Gas Installations in Educational Establishments
BS 6891 Specification for installation of low pressure gas pipework of up to 28 mm

(R1) in domestic premises (2nd family gas)
IGEM/G/5 - Gas Installations in Multi- Occupancy Buildings
D/DD/00010/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Villa Installation with underground Pipe from
Property Wall.
1.4.5 D/DD/00011/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Multi-Unit Residential Building.
1.4.6 D/DD/00012/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical 21mbar Villa Meter on Building Wall.
1.4.7 D/DD/00013/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Consumer in Multi-Unit Building.

1.4.8 D/DD/Z9/00014/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Villa Installation with above ground pipe from
Property Wall.
1.5 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
1.5.1 33 05 10 - General Natural Gas/SNG Requirements

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pipework, Valves and Fittings
2.1.1 Materials
2.1.1.1 All materials used, including non-metallic parts for valve seals, gaskets, diaphragm, etc. shall be
resistant to the action of Natural Gas/SNG under the conditions to which they may be subjected in
service.
2.1.1.1.1 Natural Gas /SNG pipes lines shall be made of steel or EN1057 Half Hard R 250 copper.
2.1.1.1.2 Natural Gas/SNG lines External Pipe Work shall be lines designed to operate at a pressure of
350/75 m bar should be seamless steel and should conform to BS 3601 or equivalent.
2.1.1.1.3 Natural Gas/SNG lines Internal Pipe Work shall be designed to operate below 21 m bar and conform
to BS 6891 (medium or heavy gauge only) or equivalent.
2.1.1.2 All pipeline should be adequately supported and have adequate flexibility to compensate for thermal
expansion, contraction or any other stresses which may occur in the system.
2.1.2 Valves and Fittings
2.1.2.1 Valves and fittings should be made of steel, bronze or forged brass. Cast iron valves and fittings
other than those of modular iron to BS 2789 or equivalent should be used:
2.1.2.2 The seats and valves must be suitable for use with Natural / S N G Gas. The use of fire safe
valves is recommended.
2.1.3 Pressure Gauges
2.1.3.1 Consideration should be given to the provision of pressure gauging devices to indicate service
pressure.
2.2 Identification and Color Coding
Pipelines should be color coded where appropriate in accordance with the relevant section
of the specifications.
2.2.1 Valve Chart Locations
2.2.1.1 Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic Drawings of
piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing its function. Two copies of each
chart, sealed to rigid backboard with clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be mounted
in the building as directed by the Engineer.
2.2.2 Identification of Pipelines and Services
2.2.2.1 General
2.2.2.1.1 Adhesives, sealants, vapor barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content limits.
2.2.2.1.2 All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and operating conditions.

2.2.2.1.3 Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colors with code indications.
2.2.2.1.4 Code indication shall include safety colors and service information. Information shall be given
regarding the nature of the contents of the pipe by using the following systems, individually or in
combination:-
i - Name in Full.
ii - Abbreviation of Name iii
- Chemical Symbol
iv - Appropriate Code Indication Color bands.
2.2.2.2 Legend
2.2.2.2.1 The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification should be by means of
a lettered legend naming the material conveyed by the piping in full or abbreviated form. Arrows
shall be used to indicate the direction of flow.
2.2.2.2.2 The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall be applied close to valves
and adjacent to changes in direction, branches, where pipes pass through walls or floors and as
frequently as needed along straight runs to provide clear and positive indication. Identification
maybe applied by stenciling, tape or markers.
2.2.2.2.3 Pipe marking should be highly visible.
2.2.2.3 The Type & Size of Letters
Outside diameter of Length of color Height of letter pipe or

covering (mm) field (mm) (mm)
(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm (40 to 50)

mm 200 mm 19 mm (65 to 150) mm
300 mm 32 mm
2.2.2.4 Color
2.2.2.4.1 The Color should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a legend. The application of
color bands shall be done by: Painting, Adhesive color bands or equivalent color clips.
2.2.2.4.2 Color reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
2.2.2.5 Color Code Indication for Building Services and Pipelines should be as follows: Color
Code
Basic color Identification
- Natural Gas /SNG - Yellow

2.2.3 Sign and Accessory Fastening
2.2.3.1 Warning and instruction signs, wherever specified or otherwise required, shall be securely fastened
where shown or directed with bolting anchors herein specified for masonry construction or
round head chrome plated brass wood screws and washers for wood construction. Signs shall not
be hung loose on chains or by any other method wherein the sign will be free to move. Sign shall
be installed in a conspicuous well lighted location adjacent to the equipment it refers to and shall
be easily read by occupants in standing position on floor.
2.2.3.2 All accessories such as wrenches specified to be hung on chain adjacent to the equipment
they serve, shall be arranged for stowing in a rigid manner and shall not be hung loose, or
otherwise, that may permit the chain or wrench to move or rattle.
2.2.4 Painting
2.2.4.1 General Requirements
2.2.4.1.1 Surface requiring prime painting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rust, loose scale, oil, grease
and dirt. Use wire brushes and solution for this purpose.
2.2.4.1.2 No painting shall be applied to damp or frosty surfaces in wet, foggy or freezing weather.
2.2.4.1.3 It shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no drops, runs or sagging.
2.2.4.1.4 Shop coated surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and retouched where necessary.
2.2.4.1.5 Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all apparatus and non-
ferrous refrigerant piping.
2.2.4.1.6 All items that have rusted or corroded in storage or in place shall be re-cleaned or
repainted upon request of the Engineer.
2.2.4.1.7 Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on ADNOC Distribution
Guide after being submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
2.2.4.2 Piping
2.2.4.2.1 All un-insulated and unwrapped Ferrous piping (galvanized or non-galvanized) including flanges, bolts
and valves in trench, partitions, below tiles, or underground shall be painted with 2 coats of
emulsified asphalt.
2.2.4.2.2 Paint all exposed (in shafts, above and below false ceiling, on roof, etc.. ) ferrous piping (including
galvanized steel) system components including pipe, fittings, unions, flanges, valves, hangers and
supports as follows before wrapping or insulating the pipes (if applicable).
2.2.4.3.3 Applicable to all other ferrous pipes:
Prime Coat: Red lead Primer, 1.5 to 2.0 mils thick.
2.3 Flexible Hoses
2.3.1 Where flexible hoses are required:

2.3.1.1 The design, materials and construction should be suitable for the grade of NG which they are to
handle. They should be designed to withstand a minimum bursting pressure of four times the
maximum pressure they will carry on service. It is recommended that corrosion resistant braiding
is used.
2.3.1.2 A flexible hose connecting cooking appliance to the installation pipework shall be equipped
with a bayonet fitting incorporating an automatic shut off valve at the upstream end and a
union at the downstream end.
2.4 Pipe Joints
2.4.1 For pipelines operating at pressure of 4.83 bar (483 KPa) gauge and above, pipe joints of over 50 mm
(2.") nominal bore should be welded or welded flanged; those of 50 mm (2") bore and smaller
should preferably be welded or flanged by screwed joints may be used.
2.4.2 Jointing compounds for screwed connections should be resistant to Natural Gas / S N G and should
conform to BS 5292 the use of PTFE tape is preferable but red lead or hemp should never be used.
2.4.3 The fabrication of pipe work by electric arc or gas welding should be carried out in accordance
with BS 2971 or BS 2640 respectively. Only electric arc welding should be used on pipes of 125 mm
(5") nominal bore and larger operating at pressure of 4.83 bar (483 KPa) gauge and above.
2.4.4 Steel butt-welded fittings should be to BS 1965 or equivalent standard and at least of the same
schedule thickness as the pipe for use at or above 4.83 bar (483 KPa) gauge.
2.4.5 Steel socket-welded and screwed fittings and screwed couplings should be to BS 3799 or equivalent
standard for use at or above 4.83 bar (483 KPa) gauge.
2.4.6 Gaskets must be resistant to Natural Gas/SNG; natural rubber should not be used.
2.5 Pressure Reducing and Metering
2.5.1 Where the incoming gas pressure is higher than 1.2 - 4 Bar, 2 stage PRMS shall be provided.
2.5.2 Primary First Stage Meter and Pressure Reducing Assembly
2.5.2.1 The Customer Primary Meter / PRV Assembly shall reduce incoming pressure from 1.2 - 4
Bar to 350 m Bar as 1st Stage Regulation. It shall consist of Pressure Regulating valves with Standby
Leg, containing Emergency Control Valve. Rotary positive displacement meter, Solenoid shut off
valve, safety relief valve, non-return valve, pressure differential across filter, strainer with 20
micron mesh and Isolating valves. All are also as shown on relevant Gas System drawings.
2.5.3 Second Stage Pressure Reducing Assembly
2.5.3.1 The second stage pressure reducing assembly shall reduce incoming pressure from 350 m Bar to 75
m Bar. It shall consist of Pressure Regulating valves with Standby Leg, containing Emergency
Control Valve. Solenoid shut off valve, safety relief valve, non- return valve, pressure differential
across filter, strainer with 20 micron mesh and Isolating valves. All are also as shown on relevant
Gas System drawings.

2.5.4 Consumer Meter and Pressure Reducing Assembly
2.5.4.1 The consumer meter / PRV Assembly shall reduce incoming pressure from 75 m Bar to 21 m Bar. It
shall consist of pressure regulating valve, meter, solenoid shut off valve, emergency control
valve, automatic valve with manual reset, pressure test points and isolating valve. All are also to
be as shown on relevant gas system drawings.
2.5.5 Gas Meter
2.5.5.1 Gas Meter shall be made of joint pressed steel construction without any external soldered joint and
fire resistant body. Steel pipe connection shall be corrosion proof. The index drive shall be by a
magnetic coupling. Measuring chamber shall be free floating minimizing the effect of pressure
oscillations and flow noises. Index cover shall be tamper proof.
2.5.5.2 Meter shall be suitable for remote reading, with reed switch pulse transmitter and roller index with
optical pick up.
2.5.5.3 Gas meter shall comply with ADNOC distribution requirement and specification.
2.6 Hangers and Supports for Natural Gas/SNG
2.6.1 Hangers and Supports, Anchors and Guides - General
2.6.1.1 Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and install
hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to the approval of the Engineer. Do not
use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support weight of pipe, weight of fluid
and weight of pipe insulation.
2.6.1.2 Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the supports or the
structure itself. Secure pipe support, anchors and guides to concrete by means of inserts or if
greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel fishplates embedded in the
concrete.
2.6.1.3 Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and supports.
2.6.1.4 Un-insulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or supports
2.6.1.5 Support piping and tubing at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at all changes in
direction. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 3 mm.
2.6.1.6 Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels, couplings,
brackets and all other components and accessories, to allow installation to freely expand and
contract.
2.6.1.7 Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same level. Trapeze
shall be of steel channel sized to support load and drilled for rod hanger at each end. Provision
should be made to keep the lines in their relative position to each other by the use of either clamps
or clips.
2.6.1.8 For hanger rods on piping 3/8" (10 mm) thru 2" (50 mm) inclusive use 3/8" (10 mm) rods, and for
piping 2 ½" (65 mm) thru 5" (125 mm) use 5/8" (16 mm) rods, and for piping
6"(150 mm) thru 12" (300 mm) use 7/8" (22 mm) rods.

2.6.1.9 Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with special
conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are required other than those
provided in the structure.
2.6.1.10 Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron rests, with pipe
nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is required, provide pipe roll
stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel pipe piers, fasten stands to piers.
2.6.1.11 Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook for pipe located
close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500 lbs (680 Kg)
maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
2.6.2 Horizontal Piping Support Schedule
2.6.2.1 The piping support shall be provided as ADNOC distribution guidelines.
2.7 Gas Leak Detection & Control System
2.7.1 The contractor shall design, supply and install complete gas leak detection & control system in the
following areas, and wherever else required:
a) Kitchen
2.7.2 Central Control Cabinet
2.7.2.1 The cabinet shall be designed for wall mounting. Measuring range shall be 0-100% LEL.
The gas supply shall be closed at 15% LEL. The cabinet shall include flashing alarm light and horn
for 15% LEL and shall be suitable for 220-240 VAC inlet power supply, and
24vdc. The central control cabinet shall be interfaced with the BMS and fire alarm panel.
2.7.3 Gas Leak Detectors
2.7.3.1 Gas leak detectors shall be weather proof in shafts and open areas and explosion proof inside.
2.7.4 Emergency Shut of System
2.7.4.1 The system shall include one set of 24 VDC batteries in a protective box, including battery charger.
2.7.5 Solenoid Valve
2.7.5.1 Solenoid Valve shall be made of brass / stainless steel, suitable for 200 / 220 V AC supply for both
application (normally closed and normally open) as required.
2.8 Data Logging, Recording and Monitoring System
2.8.1 The Contractor shall include and provide hardware and software for computing and automation
of data logging, recording and monitoring of Natural gas/SNG. The systems shall generate gas bills
on automatic bases. The program shall comprise recorder systems for measured values in tariff
recording and monitor system for gas supply and optimization of purchased and consumed
quantities. A comprehensive program of software shall be provided to record data of operation
and disturbances with data recording and transfer by random access memory cards scanners or
modems.

2.8.2 The system shall consist of pulse transmitter Data Memory, read out device and work station with
print out.
2.8.3 Where Fire Command Centre is there, remote (repeater) control panels should be provided to
monitor and override the normal logic or sequence of operations in case of emergency for all Fuel
Gas system.
2.9 Basic Design Requirements
2.9.1 Pipework operating pressure shall depend on load and distance between meter set and point of entry
to a building but shall not exceed 75 mbar.
2.9.2 Maximum pipework operating pressure within the building should be 21 mbar.
2.9.3 Where the external installation pipework operates in excess of 21 mbar (75 mbar max), secondary
pressure regulation should be installed prior to or immediately after pipework entry into a
building (within 2m of the point of entry). Secondary pressure regulator installations shall
incorporate an under pressure shut off device (UPSO) and over pressure shut off device (OPSO)
capabilities.
2.9.4 Pressure loss calculations and friction factor shall be in accordance with the relevant standard.
Equivalent lengths of valves and fittings shall be added to the pipe length.
2.9.5 The internal pipework shall be designed to deliver at least the minimum operating pressure of
all connected appliances.
2.9.6 The external piping shall be designed to comply with IGE/UP/2, IGE/G/5 and IGE/TD/4.
Riser supplying shall operate at a standardized pressure of 350 or 75 mbar.
2.9.7 Velocity should be limited to 20 m/s for unfiltered gas as per IGEM/UP/2.
2.9.8 The minimum pressure in the droppers shall always exceed 67.5 mbar.
2.9.9 The above ground external pipe will be in accordance with Material Specification ADNGD- SSP-586-
12.
2.9.10 The PEX pipe will be completely sleeved with GRP (see Material Specification ADNGD- SSP-574-3 and
574-4) and secured with wall mounted retaining clips.
2.9.11 PEX riser and droppers shall have a maximum diameter of 63mm and minimum diameter of 25mm
2.9.12 PEX pipe shall be jointed and supported using wall mounted crimped fittings. Internal pipework
shall be designed to comply with BS6891 and IGE/G/5:
2.9.13 Pipes and fittings shall be EN 1057 half hard R250 copper in accordance with Material
Specification ADNGD-SSP-586-12.
2.9.14 Minimum diameter of copper pipe shall be 15 mm operates at 21 mbar with a maximum allowable
pressure drop after pressure regulation 1 mbar.
2.9.15 Pipework should not pass through a dwelling other than the one it supplies.
2.9.16 Primary meter set will be located in a suitable wall recess or wall mounted box if it is installed in a
position which is accessible from ground level.

2.9.17 The riser shall be installed on the outside wall of the building preferably in a purpose designed
channel, with no openings to the inside of the building. Vented cladding may be installed over the
riser.
2.9.18 All rooftop piping shall be adequately supported and secured above the roof surface.
2.9.19 All piping shall be clearly marked as natural gas/SNG pipe. Consideration shall be given to the need
to protect pipe from corrosion, deterioration (eg. ultraviolet damage) or mechanical damage.
2.9.20 Provision must be made to mitigate any effects of thermal expansion and contraction.
2.9.21 An isolation valve shall be installed in each dropper just upstream of its entry into the open to sky
duct. Such valves shall be clearly tagged as gas valves.
2.9.22 Purge points shall be installed in suitable locations in the rooftop distribution manifold.
2.9.23 Entry into apartment shall be via a house entry tee or transition fitting.
2.9.24 A consumer emergency control valve followed by a suitable regulator shall be installed in the
individual unit as near as possible to the point of entry. Neither shall be further than 2 metres from
the point of entry. Such valves shall be tagged as emergency control valves. The regulator shall
reduce the gas pressure to 21 mbar.
2.9.25 The regulator should incorporate an under pressure shut off device (UPSO).
2.9.26 A pressure test point shall be fitted downstream of the consumer emergency control valve.
Safety equipment shall be installed as follows:
2.9.26.1 The solenoid valve should be located upstream of the regulator and as close as possible to
the Emergency Control Valve (ECV) and rated for operation at 100 mbar minimum. The solenoid
valve shall be activated by either output from the natural gas /SNG detector or the wall mounted
“on-off” switch.
2.9.26.2 The natural gas /SNG detector shall be positioned at suitable high level location in
accordance with BS6959.
2.9.26.3 Sharp changes in direction of the pipe shall be accomplished using fittings rather than bending
the pipe. Slow bends and offsets may be made by bending the pipe using approved methods only
(bending machine or spring).

2.9.26.4 The pipework shall be fixed to a permanent wall and supported at regular intervals using stand-off
clips.
2.9.26.5 Pipework to each appliance shall terminate with an appropriately anchored fitting.
2.9.26.6 A flexible hose connecting cooking appliance to the installation pipework shall be equipped
with a bayonet fitting incorporating an automatic shut off valve at the upstream end and a union
at the downstream end.
2.9.27 Pipe in Trench
2.9.27.1 Piping in concrete trench between the boundary wall and building wall:
The below ground supply pipe which exit the meter box outlet, and then pass through the
boundary wall shall be HDPE per Material Specification ADNGD-SSP-586.
The pipe passes through the wall via a cored hole shall be through an appropriate corrosion
resistant sleeve.
The annular space between the sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with a non-setting mastic.
2.9.27.2 The below ground piping shall be designed in accordance with IGE/UP/2 the following:
Pipe and fittings will be polyethylene (HDPE 100 SDR 11) in accordance with Material
specifications ADNGD-SSP-586.
Minimum clearances of 400 mm and 250 mm must be maintained between the below ground
pipework and electrical cables and other utilities respectively. Where these minimum
clearances cannot be maintained protective plates should be installed between the PE pipe
and the utilities in question.
The HDPE pipe shall exit the ground protected by GRP sleeve and terminates with an approved
house entry tee (Service Riser Kit – Material Specification ADNGD-SSP-
574-4).
The outside piping shall terminate at a point approximately 1 metre above the finished grade
with the house entry tee or with transition fitting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Gas Piping System Installation Requirements
3.1.1 Gas piping shall not be strained or bent and applications shall not be supported by or
develop any strain or stress on its supply piping.
3.1.2 Gas piping shall not be installed in or on the ground under any building or structure and all
exposed piping shall be kept at least 150 mm above grade or structure.
3.1.3 An accessible shut-off valve shall be installed outside of each appliance and a head of the union
connection thereto, and in addition to any valve on the appliance.

3.1.4 Discharge from relief valves shall be into the open air and shall be at least 1.5 meters
horizontally away from any opening into the building. Use vent pipe to vent it atmosphere.
3.1.5 All lines should be provided with union between two bends and at all critical locations.
3.1.6 Details are to be provided as per Construction Guidelines document ADNGD-SYD- 557.
3.2 Pipe Passing Through Walls
3.2.1 Wherever p i p i n g passes through any building wall or similar structure the hole s h a l l be
cut using a suitable core drill.
3.2.2 A p r o t e c t i v e sleeve s h a l l b e installed. The protective sleeve should be integral to the approved
fitting (e.g. house entry tee) or be separately inserted in the cored hole.
3.2.3 The carrier pipe shall be inserted through this sleeve.
3.2.4 The a n n u l a r space b e t w e e n w a l l a n d s l e e v e s h a l l b e s e a l ed . Where the wall i s

external, the annular space shall be sealed on the internal side only.
3.2.5 The annu lu s between the p ip e and the sleeve shall be sealed with a fire r e s i s t a n t material
so as to prevent the passage of gas.
3.3 Testing
3.3.1 Before the gas piping is finally put in service, and before connecting the appliances, the system
shall be carefully tested to assure that it is gas-tight.
3.3.2 Hydro Test / Pneumatic Test:
3.3.2.1 The piping shall be filled with air or inert gas, but not with any other gas or liquid, to a pressure of
10 psig (70 Kpa) for a 2-hours duration without showing any drop in pressure.
3.3.2.2 All diaphragms or controls known to be incapable of withstanding the test pressure shall be
disconnected.
3.3.3 After piping has been checked, all piping receiving gas shall be fully purged by disconnecting
the pilot piping at the outlet valve of the appliances.
3.3.4 HSE studies shall be carried out by the contractor in accordance to ADNOC distribution guidelines /
requirements in case of routing of gas piping is hazardous.
3.3.5 NDT testing shall be carried out by the contractor in accordance to ADNOC distribution guidelines /
requirements, if required.
3.4 Pipe Laying
3.4.1 The suction /discharge pipe lines shall be placed at 70 cm. depth below the finished ground
level over 10 cm. thick sand bed. After completion of pressure test and wrapping to the pipe line
is finished and approved by the Engineer, a further filling 30 cm. thick with clean sand shall be done
and well compacted (manually). Place 50 x 25 x 5 cm. thick precast concrete slabs over the second
layer of sand only at the location where pipe joints are crossing the road. The rest of the depth of
excavated trench shall be filled with approved quality of gatch material and well compacted similar
to other areas of paving.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 33 56 10
FUEL OIL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section shall cover the furnishing of all materials, labor, equipment and accessories necessary to the
installation of fuel oil system, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
B. The extent of work shall include, but not necessarily limited to, fuel oil piping, storage tanks, pumps, meters,
strainers, couplings, and all related accessories.
Codes and Standards
IFGC International fuel gas Code
prevail
Mechanical Specification 33 56 10 - 1 Fuel Oil System

A. Applicable Codes and Standards: Conform to the requirements of Section 15028, in particular, NFPA 30.
B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fuel oil piping and equipment, of types and sizes
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
C. Tests: Upon completion of works, systems shall be run in presence of the Engineer and proof shall be made that
every system and component is operating in accordance with the drawings and specifications requirements.
D. Corrosion Prevention: Except as otherwise specified herein, equipment fabricated from ferrous metals shall be
treated for prevention of corrosion by a factory coating or paint system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. Submit manufacturer's literature in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010 of these
Specifications.
2. Required data shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:
a. Manufacturer's name and model number.
b. Pumps Performance: Pump curves showing flow, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and net positive
suction head. Motors electrical characteristics.
c. Equipment: Size, capacity, performance, materials and methods of construction, weight, electrical and
mechanical connections, and installation recommendations.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for required fuel oil piping and equipment showing pipe and tube sizes;
plan and elevation of pumps and integral component parts and auxiliary equipment including fittings and piping
connections.
C. Recommended Spare Parts List: Submit list of recommended spare parts for each unit furnished under this
Section. List shall include part numbers, a description of each part, and the price of each part.
A. Equipment shall be delivered with factory-installed shipping skids. Accessories shall be packed in
factory-fabricated fiberboard containers and with plastic end-cap protection on each end of pipe and tube to
prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube.
B. Equipment and piping shall be handled carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finishes.
Damaged equipment shall not be installed. Damaged equipment shall be returned to manufacturer and replaced
by new ones.
C. Equipment and piping shall be stored inside and protected from weather and construction traffic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUEL OIL PIPING PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping products of the size and type indicated. Where not otherwise
indicated, provide products as determined by the Contractor to comply with installation requirements. Provide
sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections.
B. Pipes: Fuel oil piping shall be seamless black steel, ASTM A53 Schedule 40. Underground fuel piping shall be
outside coated in accordance with AWWA C203.
C. Fittings: Buried fittings shall be forged steel socket welding fittings having a working pressure equal or higher
than the above specified pipe. Above ground fittings shall be malleable iron threaded ends up to 50 mm diameter
and forged steel welding type for 65 mm diameter and above.
A. ABOVE GROUND FUEL OIL TANK
Tank shall be constructed of not less than 6 mm. thick welded black steel sheet metal to the capacities indicated
on Drawings, and in accordance with UL standard for steel above ground tanks for flammable and combustible
liquids .UL. 142-1972.
Tank shall be tested for leaks before installation and shall be painted with two coats of red lead oxide or
approved equal, and two coats black bituminous paint, and finished with Silver or White enamel paint.
Tanks shall be mounted on a concrete pad and an angle supported steel base above ground.
The tank shall be complete with the following connections and fittings:
 Screened air vent.
 Fill line from main underground fuel tank complete with isolation valve.
 Over flow line to main underground fuel tank complete with sight glass to indicate over flow.
 Suction line feeder of the steam boilers and hot water boilers complete with isolating valve.
 Return line from steam and hot water boilers.
 Sludge drain valve.
 Protected oil level indicator fixed to the tank (level gauge Cat and Mouse).
 600 mm diameter or rectangular access openings. Each opening is to be fitted with a raised flanged lid
securely hinged to the tank and sealed by gasket to provide tight joint against water admittance.
 Oil storage tank low-level content switch to start the filling pump from main underground tank.
 Alarm to indicate to the building automation system that one hour storage is only remained the daily
tank.
 Very low-level switch to stop the fuel burners and initiate audible alarm.

 High-level switch to stop the feeding pump.
 High-level alarm to indicate the feeding pump did not stop and tank is being overfilled. Alarm signal shall
initiate audible signal. The audible alarm shall be sited immediately adjacent to the oil fill points.
 A second alarm shall send a signal to Building Automation System to warn operator.
B. FILTERS
Dual type oil filters shall be fitted on the inlet side of the pumps.
The filters shall be equipped with a central changeover cock to permit isolation of either filter chamber and allow
flow to continue.
The filters shall be line size, tested to 20.6 bar and shall have gunmetal body and
Covers, stainless steel internals with a stainless steel mesh element and be complete with brass drain plug. The
elements shall be capable of filtration down to 100 microns.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEM
General: Comply with the requirements of Division 15 sections for installation of basic piping materials. Install
piping products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NFPA
30, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping.
Do not install defective piping of fittings. Do no use pipe with threads, which are chipped, stripped or damaged.
Install fuel oil tank with anode in accordance with NFPA 30 and as shown on drawings.
Ground fuel oil piping system electrically within project, and bond to grounding electrode.
Prepare the exterior surfaces for painting by the complete wire brushing for removal of mill scale, rust, welding
slag and other surface contaminants to leave a surface of uniform appearance, suitably roughened to receive the
coating herein
Specified. After tank has been assembled, clean the surfaces of the tank thoroughly from all dirt debris. All
surfaces shall be cleaned to bright metal and entire exposed surface shall receive two coats of coal tar primer and
enamel.
Each coat shall be no less than 0.2 mm thick. Apply coal tar in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Coat all steel tank appurtenances such as hold down rods, turn buckles, etc., as herein specified for tank.
Handle tank in a manner which will preclude damage to the coating by impact
or abrasion. After installation and prior to backfilling, tank shall be pressure-tested and proved tight at 35 Kpa
pressure. Backfill shall be compacted thoroughly with care exercised to avoid damage to the tank’s coating; all
foreign material such as bricks, gravel, etc., shall be thoroughly screened from backfill. Backfill material shall
be thoroughly and mechanically tamped in courses of 30 cm, with care exercised to avoid damage to tank
covering. Backfill must not contain any ash, cinders, ironite, or other corrosive materials.
3.2 PROTECTION OF FUEL OIL PIPING AGAINST CORROSION
Protect metal fuel oil piping in contact with the earth, or other corrosive material, against corrosion. Seal wrap
piping with coal tar saturated wrapping tape over coal-tar epoxy coating having not less than 0.5 mm thickness.
3.3 PROTECTION OF FUEL OIL TANKS AGAINST CORROSION
Protect fuel oil supply tanks against corrosion by installing protective finish or coating as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Repair factory-applied external tank coating by touching-up those surfaces, which were chipped, scratched, or
damaged during transit.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
General: Connect fuel oil piping to equipment in the manner shown and comply with equipment manufacturer's
instructions where not otherwise indicated.

A. Fuel Oil Piping Tightness Test: Prior to initial operation, test fuel oil piping in accordance with NFPA 30.
B. Repair or replace fuel oil piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION

ANNEX
ANNEX 1 MECHANICAL -AL NUDRA SUPPLIERS LIST
ANNEX 2 CORRELATION BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION
Mechanical Specifications Page - 1 Table of Content

Annex 1 ‐ Mechanical Approved Manufacturer and Supplier List
Number Section Name Approved Brand Supplier Phone Fax Mob Address Email Website Notes
1 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression a)Angus Juma AI Majid Est. 04‐2037358 04‐2844601

*Portable Fire Extinguishers & Fire Protection Dept, Dubai
Fire Blankets b)Preussag Bin Jabr Fire & Safety Est. Abu Dhabi 02‐6418284 02‐6415388
c)Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
d)Macron‐Fireater Ltd. AIKAH Establishment, Dubai 04‐3478005 04‐3478006
e)Chubb Fire Corodex Est. (Fire System Div.), Dubai 04‐3472530 04‐3472501
f)Kidde ‐ Thorn Kidde International‐ Dubai 04‐3372498 04‐3375088
g)Mayne Roberts Unisafe Fire Protection, Dubai 04‐3339977 04‐3339358
h)Naffco Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
i)Firex Emirates Fire Fighting Equipment Sharjah 06‐5340300 06‐5340090
j)SFFECO SFFECO, Dubai 04‐8007177 04‐8007178
k)Bristol Corodex Est. (Fire System Div.), Dubai 04‐3472530 04‐3472501
2 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression a)Mason Energy International, Abu Dhabi 02‐6711108 02‐6769669
Expansion Fittings and Loop for Fire a) Crane Co. Tech. Part Co., Dubai 02‐6732200 02‐6730259
Suppression Piping b) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai 04‐3574469 04‐3574479
*Expansion Joints c) Bockington & *Dutco Tennant Dubai *04‐2220186 *04‐2236193
Scott Ltd. *Abu Dhabi *02‐6348495 *02‐ 6316465
d) Proco Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg . 04‐8105105 04‐8105106

Dubai
3 Division 21 ‐Fire Suppression a)Dwyer Westech ‐ Dubai 04‐2994124 04‐2994121
Meter & Gauges for Fire Suppression b)Trerice Westech ‐ Dubai 04‐2994124 04‐2994121
Systems c)Weiss Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
*Pressure Gauges d)Hunter Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg. Dubai 04‐8105105 04‐8105106
e)Brannan Fawaz Refrigeration & NC Co.Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
f)March Super Technical Ent., Dubai 04‐3387111 04‐3383904
g)WIKA Wika ME, Dubai 04‐8839090 04‐8839198
*Flow meters a)Sparling Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
b)Danfoss Haste, Dubai 04‐2223133 04‐2279569
c)Smith meter Inc. Petro Gas Agencies, Abu Dhabi 02‐5553455 02‐5547767
d)Hersey Suwa idi Engr. Group Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
4 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression a) Muller Co Suwaidi Engr. Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
General Duty Valves for Fire b) Angus Juma AI Majid Est. 04‐2037358 04‐2844601
Suppression piping Fire Protection Dept
*Siamese Connection & Dubai
Valves c) Macron‐Fireater Ltd. Corodex Est. 04‐3472530 04‐3472501
(Fire System Div.) Dubai
d) Grinnell Suwaidi Engr. Group Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
e) Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
F)Palter Roemer Unisafe Fire Protection, Dubai 04‐3339977 04‐3339358
G) Naffco Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
h) Aqua Plus Emirates Fire Fighting Equipment Sharjah 06‐5340300 06‐5340090
5 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression a) Grinnel ITT AI Suwaidi Group, 02‐6727488 02‐6779355

Hangers & Supports for Fire Abu Dhabi
Suppression Piping b)Mupro AI Maraj Bldg. Material Dubai 04‐3387133 04‐3387122
*Hangers & Supports c)PHD Manufacturing Metallic Bldg, Materials, Dubai 04‐2894393 04‐2894395
d)Talco Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
e) ANDRE SBM 06‐5579962 06‐5579963
Speciality Building Materials FZC Sharjah
f) Weicco Leminar Air Conditioning Co. 04‐3338700 04‐3339700

Dubai
g) Hiliti Hiliti Gulf Office, Dubai 04‐806 0300 04‐883 5485

h) Anvil Anvil international 052 6799664
6 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression a)Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai 04‐3574469 04‐3574479
Mech. Sound, Vibration, Seismic b) Mason Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
Control for Fire Suppression Piping c) VMC VMC Group Middle East Sharjah, 06‐526 1512 06‐526‐1513
and Equipment
*Vibration Isolation
7 Division 21 ‐Fire Suppression a) Carboline Carboline Middle East. 04‐3470460 04‐3470242

Identification for Fire Suppression Dubai
System b) Jotun Jotun UAE Ltd. ‐ Dubai 04‐3395000 04‐3380666
*Painting c) National
d) Coult
e) Caparol
8 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression Fire a) Nippon Steel Technical Parts Co. 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
Suppression Piping Dubai
*Steel pipes (Galvanized Steel b) Sumitomo Arrow Pipe & Fittings Dubai 04‐8832300 04‐8839055
c) U.S. Steel Co. Trouvay Gauvin Gulf, Dubai 04‐8835848 04‐8835997
d) Van Leeuwen Van Leeuwen Pipe Tube ME Abu Dhabi 02‐6271840 02‐6271244
e)British Steel Corp Asia Electro‐Mech . Co., Dubai 04‐8818383 04‐8815060
Trouvay Gauvin Gulf, Dubai 04‐8835848 04‐8835997
f) Saudi Steel Pipe
g)Seah Steel Corp Asia Electromech. Co. 04‐8818383 04‐8815060
Dubai
h) VM Tubes Trouvay Gauvin Gulf, Dubai 04‐8835848 04‐8835997
i) CPS Techniq International, Dubai 04‐8809890 04‐8809822
j) Zenith Junaid Trading, Dubai 04‐3201694 04‐3267250
k)Surya/Siam Fittings Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
Dubai
I) Sheild Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
9 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression a)Angus Juma AI Majid Est. Fire Protection Dept. Dubai 04‐2037358 04‐2844601

Fire Suppression Valves & Hose 02‐6418284 02‐6415388
Cabinet b) Preussag Bin Jabr Fire & Safety
Est, Abu Dhabi
Corodex Est. 04‐3472530 04‐3472501
c) Macron‐Fireater Ltd. (Fire System Div.)
Dubai
d) Mayne Roberts Unisafe Fire Protection, Dubai 04‐3339977 04‐3339358
e) Norsen Kidde International, Dubai 04‐3372498 04‐3375088
f) Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
g) Naffco Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
h) Firex Emirates Fire Fighting Equipment 06‐5340300 06‐5340090
i) Aqua Plus Emirates Fire Fighting Equipment 06‐5340300 06‐5340090
j) Bristol Corodex Est., Dubai 04‐3472530 04‐3472501
k) SFFECO SFFECO, Dubai 04‐8007177 04‐8007178
10 Division 21 ‐Fire Suppression Wet a) Victaulic Victaulic Middle East, Dubai 04‐8838870 04‐8838860 Attn . Mr.
Pipe Sprinkler System Prueez
*Grooved Pipe Fittings 050‐6672751
b) Grinnel AI Suwaidi Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355

c) Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
d) Shield Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
e) CPS Techniq International, Dubai 04‐8809890 04‐8809822
f) Gruvlock Anvil international 052 6799664
11 *Galvanized Steel Pipes a) Nippon Steel Technical Parts Co. 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
Dubai
b) Sumitomo Arrow Pipe & Fittings 02‐ 6428844 02 ‐ 6423445
Abu Dhabi
c) U.S. Steel Co. Trouvay Gauvin Gulf, Dubai 04‐8835848 04‐8835997
d)Van Leeuwen Van Leeuwen Pipe Tube ME 02‐6271840 02‐6271244
Abu Dhabi,
e)British Steel Corp Asia Electro‐Mech. Co., Dubai 04‐8818383 04‐8815060
f) Saudi Steel Pipe Trouvay Gauvin Gulf, Dubai 04‐8835848 04‐8835997
g) Seah Steel Corp. 04‐8818383 04‐8815060
Asia Electromech. Co.
Dubai
h) VM Tubes Trouvay Gauvin Gulf, Dubai 04‐8835848 04‐8835997

i) CPS 04‐8809890 04‐8809822
Techniq International,Dubai
j) Zenith Junaid Trading , Dubai 04‐3201694 04‐2367250

k) Shield Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
12 *Sprinklers, Alarm Valves a) Grinnell/GEM Suwaidi Engr. Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355

b) Angus Juma AI Majid Est. 04‐2037358 04‐2844601
Fire Fighting Equipment Div.
Dubai
c) Preussag Bin Jabr Fire & Safety 02‐6418284 02‐6415388
Est., Abu Dhabi
d) Reliable Juma AI Majid Est. 04‐2037358 04‐2844601
Fire Fighting Equipment Div.
Dubai
e) Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
f) Globe Unisafe Fire Protection 02‐5511132 02‐ 5515856
Abu Dhabi
g) Central/ Shield Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
h) Best Fire Emirates Fire Fighting Equipment 06‐5340300 06‐5340090
Sharjah
i) Aquaplus Corodex Est. 04‐3472530 04‐3472501
(Fire System Div.), Dubai
13 Division 21 ‐ Fire Suppression a) FIKE Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems b) KIDDE KIDDE, Dubai 04‐ 3372448 04‐ 3375088
*NOVEC (123)
c) FINWAL TELECTRON 02 ‐ 6795333 02 ‐ 6794609
d) TYCO Ab Dh bi
TYCO , Dubai 04 ‐3805252 04 ‐3805251
e) SFFECO SFFECO , Dubai 04‐8007177 04‐8007178
14 Division 21 ‐ Fire Supression Fire a)lngersol ‐ Dresser Danway, Dubai 04‐ 3473700 04‐3473232
Pumps b) Peerless Sterling Fluid Systems, Dubai 04‐8838733 04‐8838735
*Fire Fighting Pumps
c) KSB KSB Middle East 04‐8830455 04‐8807800
d) SPP Sterling Fluid Systems, Dubai 04‐8838733 04‐8838735
e) Aurora AI Mazroui Engg. & Trading Co. 04‐2826070 04‐2865626
f) Ritz Aikah Est., Dubai 04‐3478005 04‐3478006
g)MTP Aqua Plus Emirates Fire Fighting Equipment 06‐5340300 06‐5340090
h)Reddy ‐ Buffaloes Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
i) Armstrong Centaur Security Safety Trading 04‐3961188 04‐3961044
j) NAFFCO D b i
Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
15 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a) Crane Co. Tech . Part Co, Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644

General Duty Valves for Plumbing b) Hattersley Leminar, Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
*Valves (Gate, Globe Ball, Check, etc.)
c) Grinnel Suwaidi Engr.Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
d) Pegler Bin Moosa & Dali, Dubai 04‐3392771 04‐3394921
e) NIBCO Fikhree Pipe, Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
f) Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Trdg . 02‐6219772 02‐6219773
Abu Dhabi
g)Mueller Co. Suwaidi Engr. Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
h)Tecofi Bright Central NC, 06‐559 9006 06‐559 1047
*Balancing Valves a)Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Trdg . 02‐6219772 02‐6219773
Abu Dhabi
b) Crane Co. Tech . Part Co, Dubai 02‐6732200 02‐6730259
c) Hattersley Leminar, Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
d) Tecofi Bright Centra l NC , 06‐5599006 06‐5591047
Sharjah
*Control Valves a) ocv Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
b) Frese Technoflow, Dubai 04‐2862037 04‐2862038
c) FDI Acsys Control System, Dubai 04‐33725100 04‐3370127
*Automatic Air vents a) Crane Co. Tech. Part Co. Abu Dhabi 02‐6732200 02‐6730259
b) Spirax Sarco Tech . Part Co. Abu Dhabi 02‐6732200 02‐6730259
c) Nibco Fikhree Pipe, Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
d)Honey‐well Brauk Mann Honeywell ,Sharjah 06‐5726143 06‐5726165
*Pressure Reducing Valves a)Honey‐well Brauk Mann Honeywell , Sharjah 06‐5726143 06‐5726165

b)Zurn‐Wilkins Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
Dubai
c)Watts Dutco Tennant LLC 04‐2220186 04‐2236193
d) Spirax Sarco Tech . Part Co, Dubai 02‐6732200 02‐6730259
e)Tecofi Bright Central NC 06‐5599006 06‐5591047
Sharjah
f)Zurn SBM 06‐ 5579962 06‐ 5579963
Speciality Building Materials
Sharjah
*Temperature and pressure Relief a)Zurn‐Wilkins Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
Valves b)Honey‐well Brauk Mann Honeywell, Sharjah 06‐5726143 06‐5726165
c)Watts Sarco lnt'l Gen. Trading ‐ Dubai 04‐2942916 04‐2942916
*Expansion Joints/ Flex connections a) Mason Energy International, Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
b) Crane Co. Tech. Part Co., Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
c) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai 04‐3574469 04‐3574479
d) Bockington & Dutco Tennant‐ Dubai 04‐2220186 04‐2236193
Scott Ltd.
e) Proco Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg . 04‐8105105 04‐8105106
Dubai
*Strainers a) Crane Co. Tech. Part Co., Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
b) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
c) Spirax Sarco Tech . Part Co., Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
16 Division 22‐ Plumbing a) Grinnel ITT AI Suwaidi Group, 02‐6727488 02‐6779355

Hanger and Supports for Plumbing Abu Dhabi
Piping
*Hangers & Supports b) Mupro AI Maraj Bldg. Material Dubai 04‐3387133 04‐3387122
c) PHD Manufacturing Metallic Bldg, Materials, 04‐2894393 04‐2894395
Dubai
d) Tolco Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562

e) ANDRE SBM 06‐5579962 06‐5579963
f) Weicco Leminar Air Conditioning Co. 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
Dubai
g) Hilti Hilti Gulf Office, Dubai 04‐806 0300 04‐883 5485

h) Anvil Anvil international 052 6799664
17 15. Division 22‐ Plumbing a)Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai 04‐3574469 04‐3574479
Mech. Sound, Vibration & Seismic b)Mason Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
Control For Plumbing & Equipment c)VMC VMC Group Middle East Sharjah 06‐5261512 06‐5261513
18 16. Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a)Aeroflex Fawaz NC & Ref. Co. Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418

Plumbing Insulation b) Armaflex‐Armstrong Bin Dasmal Gen. Trdg . 04‐3380111 04‐3380112
*Closed cell tube Insulation for Est., Dubai
Water supply pipes
c) ApcoFiex (APCO) Korea Middle East Sharjah 06‐5352098 06‐5352097
d) K‐Fiex Unigulf, Sharjah 06‐5397099 06‐5397088
a) Foster Bin Dasmal Gen. Trdg. 04‐3380111 04‐3380112
Est., Dubai
*Adhesives,
b) Childers Meaptashi Corp., Sharjah 06‐5574756 06‐5574760
Coatings and Sealents
c) Kooltherm Zainab NC‐Dubai 04‐2211694 04‐2214019
for Pipe works
d) Miracle Fawaz NC & Ref. Co. Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
e) Fitco National Plastic & 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
Bldg.Materials‐Sharjah
* Rigid Fiberglass a)Kimmco Kimmco‐Dubai 04‐2967600 04‐2967550
b)lzotoporak Fawaz NC & Ref. Co. Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
c)Arabian Fiber glass Century‐ Dubai 04‐3474858 04‐3474656
d)Knauf Knauf Exceed Insulation Abu Dhabi 02‐5512453 02‐5512451
19 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
Facility Water Distribution Piping b) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co. ‐ Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
*Vacuum Breaker c) Wade Fikree Pipe ‐ Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
*Shock Arrestor a) Zurn Majid Bukatara Trdg., Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999

b) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co. ‐ Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
c) Wade Fikree Pipe ‐ Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
*Water meters a)ABB‐Kent Obaid Humaid AI Tayer , Dubai 04‐2825000 04‐2824901
b) Sensus Dutco Tennant ‐ Dubai 04‐2220186 04‐2236193
c)Hersey Suwaidi Engr. Group Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
d)Badger Meter A. D. Supplies & Comm Services 02‐6767400 02‐6221103
Abu Dhabi
20 Division 22‐ Plumbing a)JRG Sanipex Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg ., Dubai 04‐8105105 04‐8105106

Domestic Water Piping and Fitting b) Wirsbo Bin Aweidha Trade Agencies Dubai 04‐2584660 04‐2584770
*PEX Pipes c) Viega Moh'd. Zainal Faraidooni, Dubai 04‐2694900 04‐2661932
d) Comap Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
e) Alphacan/TA Fittings Juma AI Majid Est. 04‐2851145 04‐2856064
(Comm. Div.), Dubai
f) Unatherm AI Hadhoudh Trdg . Est. Dubai 04‐2673585 04‐2673697
*Copper Pipes (Water supply) a) Yorkshire Mac AI Gurg ‐ Dubai 04‐2661291 04‐2661291
b) Wednesbury Fikree Pipe Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
c) Outokumpu Euroflow, Sharjah 06‐ 5570511 06‐ 5570522
*Grooved Pipe Fittings a) Victaulic Victaulic Middle East, 04‐8838870 04‐8838860
Dubai
b) Grinnel AI Suwaid i Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
c) Viking Viking Arabia,Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
d) Shield Naffco, Dubai 04‐8151111 04‐8151222
e) CPS Techniq International, Dubai 04‐8809890 04‐8809822
*Polypropylene Pipes (PP‐R) for Water a)Aquatherm AI Sahoo Trdg . Est., Dubai 04‐2690156 04‐2625459
Supply b) Coestherm Gulf Eternit Trdg.Co ., Dubai 04‐2857256 04‐2101299
c)George Fischer Hepworth Co., Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
d)Polymutan Khalid AI Mohaisen Trdg. Est. ‐ Dubai 04‐2665536 04‐2668770
e)Sistema Tech. Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials‐Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371710
f)Vestolen AI Zubaidi Trad. Est. , ‐Dubai 04‐2858808 04‐2857772
g)Techno AI Mamalek Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐8804955 04‐8804966
h)Aqua Proof Technology Gen. Trading Sharjah 06‐5327052 06‐5327058
i)Banninger AI Muhaideb Trading, Dubai 04‐3370133 04‐3369061
j)Kekelit SBM 06‐ 5579962 06‐ 5579963
Speciality Building Materials Sharjah
21 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a)Pullen Danway, Dubai 04‐3473700 04‐3473232
Domestic Water Pumps b)lngersoi‐Dresser Danway, Dubai 04‐3473700 04‐3473232
*Pumps (Water supply) c)KSB KSB Middle East Dubai 04‐8830455 04‐8807800
d)Ritz Aikah Est., Dubai 04‐3478005 04‐3478006
e)ITT Bell & Gossit Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg. 04‐8105105 04‐8105106
Dubai
f)PACO Fawaz NC & Ref. Co. Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
g)Aurora AI Mazroui Engg. & Trading Co. Dubai 04‐2826070 04‐2865626
h)Weir Scientechnic ‐Dubai 04‐2666000 04‐2666176
i)Goulds Daff Equipment Supplies‐Dubai 04‐2627444 04‐2627666
j) Biral Jangan Est.Dubai 04‐2208080 04‐2208033
k) Flow Serve Arison Gulf Co. 02‐6222444 02‐6222005
Abu Dhabi
I) SPP AI Sagar Engineering Co., Dubai 04‐2669595 04‐2664686
(DP for stainless steel pumps)
m) ITT Industries Ahmed Ramadan Juma Est. Dubai 04‐3331524 04‐3335774
(Lowara)
n) Grundfos Grundfos Gulf Distributions Dubai 04‐ 2666300,6067300 04‐2661642
22 Division22‐Plumbing Drinking Water a) Bridgestone Solico ‐ Dubai 04‐8801800 04‐8801018
Storage Tanks b)Balmoral Katilink, Dubai 04‐3475444 04‐3475353
*GRP Sectional Tanks c)LG Hitank Leadergrate LLC Dubai 04‐8851976 04‐8851977
d)Thermoset Thermoset, Dubai 04 ‐8852228 04 ‐8852226
23 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a)Kessel Aqua Space Traders Dubai 04‐340 8688 04‐340 8689

Facility Sanitary Sewerage b)MIFAB Aqua Space Traders Dubai, 04‐340 8688 04‐340 8689
c)Saudi Cast SBM 06‐ 5579962 06 ‐ 5579963
Sharjah
*Drainage Accessories;Plastic (Gully a)Hunter National Plastic & Bldg. Materials‐ Sharjah 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
Traps,floor trap, balcony drain, clean b) Hepworth Hepworth Co. 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
out, roof vent cap, roof drain) Dubai
c) Terrain Fikree Pipe Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
d) Marley Sultaco Dubai 04‐3385929 04‐3391842
e) Nicoll Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
*Floor Drain, balcony drain & clean a)SHW Bin Moosa & Dali, Dubai 04‐3392771 04‐3394921
out cover (Stainless Steel) b)Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co. Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
c)Ideal Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
d)DRENO (SBM) SBM 06‐ 5579962 06‐ 5579963
Sharjah
e)Saudi Cast SBM 06‐ 5579962 06‐ 5579963
Sharjah
f)Dallmer Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
Dubai
*Trench Grate & Frame a)Frost Mac AI Gurg ‐ Dubai 04‐2661291 04‐2691067
b)Freedrain Hepworth Co.,Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
c)ACO ACO System FZE,Dubai 04‐8806998 04‐8806997
d)MBBM SBM 06‐5579962 06‐5579963
Speciality Building Materials FZC
Sharjah
*Manhole frames, covers and gratings a)Glynwed Brickhouse ADMMI Abu Dhabi 02‐4081454 02‐4467104
b)Stanton Mac AI Gurg‐Dubai 04‐2661291 04‐2691067
c)Passavant Obaid Humaid AI Tayer‐Dubai 04‐2825000 04‐2824901
d)Selflock Gebal , Abu Dhabi 02‐4464684 02‐4464683
e)Elkington Gatic Ltd. Mac AI Gurg ‐ Dubai 04‐2661291 04‐2691067
f) Aquacast Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
(Recessed Type Gl)
g) Eccles AI Mamalek Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐8804955 04‐8804966
(Recessed Type Gl)
h) MBBM SBM 06‐5579962 06‐5579963
i) Saudi Cast SBM 06‐5579962 06‐ 5579963
24 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a) George Fischer Hepworth Co. ‐ Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping b) Gulf Eternit Gulf Eternit Trdg . Co., Dubai 04‐2857256 04‐2101299
*High Density Polyethylene Pipe c) Dura pipe Fikree pipe ‐ Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
(HOPE d) Bin Mansour Bin Mansour Plastic Factory, Abu Dhabi 02‐5511133 02‐5511134
*UPVC Pipes & Fittings (Gravity) a) Hepworth Hepworth Co. ‐ Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
b) Terrain Fikree Pipe ‐ Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
c) Marley Sultaco‐ Dubai 06‐5759878 06‐5759879
d) National Plastics (Hunter Fittings) National Plastic & Bldg. Materials ‐ Sharjah 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
e) Gulf Eternit!OSMA Gulf Eternit Trdg . Co.‐ Dubai 04‐2857256 04‐2101299
25 Division 22‐ Plumbing a)Flygt INMA ‐ Dubai 04‐2857272 04‐2857512

Package, Submersible Sewerage Pump b)KSB KSB Middle East Dubai 04‐8830455 04‐8807800
Unit c)ABS Ahmed Ramadan Juma Est. Dubai 04‐3331524 04‐3335774
*Submersible Sump Pumps d)Weir Scientechnic ‐ Dubai 04‐2666000 04‐2666176
e)Ritz Aikah Est., Dubai 04‐3478005 04‐3478006
f)Grundfos Grundfos Gulf Distributions Dubai 04‐2666300 04‐2661642
26 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a)Hepworth Hepworth Co. ‐ Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
Facility Storm Drainage b)Terrain Fikree Pipe ‐ Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
*UPVC Pipes & Fittings (Gravity) c)Marley Sultaco ‐ Dubai 06‐5759878 06‐5759879
d) National Plastics (Hunter Fittings National Plastic & Bldg. Materials ‐ Sharjah 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
e) Gulf Eternit!OSMA Gulf Eternit Trdg . Co. 04‐2857256 04‐2101299
Dubai
*Drainage Accessories ;Plastic (Gully a)Hunter National Plastic & Bldg. Materials‐ Sharjah 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
Traps,floor trap, balcony drain, clean b) Hepworth Hepworth Co. ‐ Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
out, roof vent cap, roof drain) c) Terrain Fikree Pipe Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
d) Marley Sultaco ‐ Dubai 04‐3385929 04‐3391842
e) Nicoll Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
*Trench Grate & Frame a)Frost Mac AI Gurg‐ Dubai 04‐2661291 04‐2691067

b)Freedrain Hepworth Co., Dubai 04‐2894670 04‐2894621
c)ACO ACO System FZE, Dubai 04‐8806998 04‐8806997
d)MBBM SBM Speciality 06 ‐ 5579962 06‐ 5579963
Building Materials FZC, Sharjah
*Manhole frames, covers and gratings a) Glynwed Brickhouse AI Semsam Building Materials Dubai 04‐2698464 04‐2696673
b) Stanton Mac AI Gurg‐ Dubai 04‐2661291 04‐2691067
c) Passavant Obaid Humaid AI Tayer Dubai 04‐2825000 04‐2824901
d) Selflock Gebal, Abu Dhabi 02‐4464684 02‐4464683
e) Elkington Gatic Ltd Mac AI Gurg‐ Dubai 04‐2661291 04‐2691067
f) MBBM SBM 06‐ 5579962 06‐ 5579963
Speciality Building Materials FZC, Sharjah
g) Aquacast Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
(Recessed Type Gl)
h) Eccles (Recessed Type Gl) AI Mamalek Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐8804955 04‐8804966
i) Saudi Cast SBM 06 ‐ 5579962 06‐ 5579963
27 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing Section Sump a) Flygt INMA‐ Dubai 04‐2857272 04‐2857512
Pumps b) KSB KSB Middle East Dubai 04‐8830455 04‐8807800
*Submersible Sump Pumps c)ABS Ahmed Ramadan Juma Est. Dubai 04‐3331524 04‐3335774
d)Weir Scientechnic ‐ Dubai 04‐2666000 04‐2666176
e)Ritz Aikah Est., Dubai 04‐3478005 04‐3478006
f)Grundfos Grundfos Gulf Distributions Dubai 04‐2666300 04‐2661642
28 Division 22 ‐ Plumbing a) Ariston Santy General Trdg. Co., Dubai 04‐2821626 04‐2822746
Domestic Water Heaters b) A.O . Smith Hamad R. AI Shamsi Dubai 04‐2666429 04‐2693407
*Electric Water Heaters (Glass lined, c) Sitam Sultaco ‐ Dubai 04‐3385929 04‐3391842
Storage type) d) Zannusi Sarriddine Trading, Abu Dhabi 02‐6776121 02‐6776880
e) Braun Abr AI Mutawasit, 06‐5344417 06‐5344622
Sharjah
f) Hi‐Therm SBM 06‐5579962 06‐5579963
29 Division 22 ‐ Swimming Pool Plumbing a)CERTIKIN
Systems b) AstralPool
(Pumps ,Filters,Dosing, outlt and c) FIBERPOOL
Accossires ) d) RUTHERFORD
30 Division 23 ‐ Heating2 Ventilation and a)Crane Co. Tech. Part Co, Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
Air Conditioning General Duty Valves b)Hattersley AI Amana Trdg. Est., Abu Dhabi 02‐6723787 02‐6727569
for HVAC c)Grinnel Suwaidi Engr.Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
*Valves (Gate, Globe Ball, Check, etc.) d)Pegler Bin Moosa & Dali, Dubai 04‐3392771 04‐3394921
e)NIBCO Fikhree Pipe, Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
f)Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Tradg. Abu Dhbai 02‐6219772 02‐6219773
g)Mueller Co. Suwaidi Engr. Group , Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
h)ecofi Bright Central NC , Sharjah 06‐559 9006 06‐559 1047
*Balancing Valves (Double Regulator) a)Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Tradg . Abu Dhbai 02‐6219772 02‐6219773
b)Crane Co. Tech . Part Co, Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
c)Hattersley AI Amana Trdg. Est., Abu Dhabi 02‐6723787 02‐6727569
d)Tecofi Bright Central NC, Sharjah 06‐5599006 06‐5591047
*Control Valves a)ocv Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
b)Frese Technoflow , Dubai 04‐2821753 04‐2821752
c)FDI Acsys Control System ,Dubai 04‐33725100 04‐3370127
*Automatic A irvents a)Crane Co. Tech . Part Co, Dubai 04‐8 132739 04‐8132644
b)Spirax Sarco Tech. Part Co. Abu Dhabi 02‐6732200 02‐6730259
c)Nibco Fikhree Pipe, Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
d)Honey‐well Brauk Mann Honeywell, Sharjah 06‐5726143 06‐5726165
*PIBCV a)Flow Control Industries (FCI) Independent Technical Solutions Dubai 04‐2392882 04‐2392883
b) Tour & Anderson (TA) TA Hydronics, Dubai 04‐8864 500 04‐8864 600
c)Danfoss Wotex FZE Dubai 04‐8812 080 04‐8812 081
*Temperature and pressure Relief a)Zurn‐Wilkins Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
Valves b)Honey‐well Brauk Mann Honeywell ,Sharjah 06‐5726143 06‐5726165
c)Watts Sarco lnt'l Gen. Trading ‐ Dubai 04‐2942916 04‐2942917
*Strainers a)Crane Co. Tech . Part Co, Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
b)Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg. Materials Dubai 04‐3371710 04‐3371999
c)Spirax Sarco Tech. Part Co, Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
*Expansion Joints/ Flex connections a) Mason Energy International, Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
b) Crane Co. Tech. Part Co. ,Abu Dhabi 02‐6732200 02‐6730259
c)Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai 04‐3574469 04‐3574479
d)Bockington & Scott Ltd Dutco Tennant‐ Dubai 04‐2220186 04‐2236193
e)Proco Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg . Dubai 04‐8105105 04‐8105106
31 Division23‐ a)Grinnel ITT AI Suwaidi Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
Heating,VentilationandAirConditioning b)Mupro AI Maraj Bldg. Material Dubai 04‐3387133 04‐3387122
‐ Hangers and Supports for HVAC c)PHD Manufacturing Metallic Bldg, Materials, Dubai 04‐2894393 04‐2894395
Piping d)Tolco Viking Arabia,Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
*Hangers & Supports e)ANDRE SSM 06‐ 5579962 06 ‐ 5579963
f)Flamco Metallic Bldg, Materials, Dubai 04‐2894393 04‐2894395
g)Weicco Leminar Air Conditioning Co. Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
h)Diamond R‐Hira Trades, Dubai 04‐8848414 04‐8848434
i)Hilti Hilti Gulf Office, Dubai 04‐806 0300 04‐883 5485
j)Anvil Anvil international 052 6799664
32 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)Sound Attenuators ATAI‐Abu Dhabi 02‐6267380 02‐6275248

Air Conditioning Ltd
‐Mech. Sound, Vibration & Seismic
Control for HVAC and Equipment b) Ruskin Titus Ruskin Titus Gulf, Dubai 04‐4213560 04‐4213562
*Sound Attenuators c) Trox Trox Technik ME Office Dubai 04‐3417448 04‐3417449
d) Euro Register Inter Techno Dubai 04‐3354558 04‐2274685
e) Senior Colman Ltd.
*Duct Liner a)Kimmco Kimmco ‐ Dubai 04‐2967600 04‐2967550
b)AFICO Century, Dubai 04‐3474858 04‐3474656
c)Manson Saif Middle East, Dubai 04‐2670909 04‐2675747
*Hangers & Supports a)GrinneiiTT AI Suwaidi Group, Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
b)Mupro AI Maraj Bldg. Material‐ Dubai 04‐3387133 04‐3387122
c)PHD Manufacturing Metallic Bldg, Materials,Dubai 04‐2894393 04‐2894395
d)Tolco Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
e)ANDRE SBM Speciality Building 06‐5579962 06‐5579963
Materials FZC,Sharjah
f)Weicco Leminar Air Conditioning Co. 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
Dubai
g)Hilti Hilti Gulf Office, Dubai 04‐806 0300 04‐883 5485
h)Anvil Anvil international 052 6799664
33 *Vibration Isolation a)Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai 04‐3574469 04‐3574479
b)Mason Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
34 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)Carboline Carboline Middle East ‐ Dubai 04‐3470460 04‐3470242
Air Conditioning b)Jotun Jotun UAE Ltd. ‐ Dubai 04‐3395000 04‐3380666
Section 23 05 53‐ Mechanical
Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment
35 *P i ti
Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)Kimmco Kimmco ‐ Dubai 04‐2967600 04‐2967550
Air Conditioning Section 23 07 00‐ b)lzotoporak Fawaz A/C & Ref. Co. Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
HVAC Insulation c) Arabian Fiber glass Century‐ Dubai 04‐3474858 04‐3474656
*Fibre glass Insulation d)Knauf Knauf Exceed Insulation Abu Dhabi 02‐5512453 02‐5512451
*Duct Liner a)Kimmco Kimmco ‐ Dubai 04‐2967600 04‐2967550
b)AFICO Century, Dubai 04‐3474858 04‐3474656
c)Manson Saif Middle East, Dubai 04‐2670909 04‐2675747
d) Knauf Knauf Exceed Insulation Abu Dhabi 02‐5512453 02‐5512451
*CHW pipe insulation (Polyisocyan a)Kooltherm Zainab A/C ‐ Dubai 04‐2211694 04‐2214019
urate) b)Arabain Insulation Mfg. Ltd. Arabian Insulation Mfg. Ltd. ‐ Sharjah 06‐5334143 06‐5332606
c)CAPE East CAPE East Ltd., Abu Dhabi 02‐5555199 02‐5553229
d)Gulf Cooltherm Gulf Cooltherm Factory, Sharjah 06‐5257776 06‐5257774
*Closed cell tube Insulation a)Aeroflex Fawaz A/C & Ref. Co. Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
(Refrigerant) b)Armaflex‐Armstrong Bin Dasmal Gen . Trdg. Est., Dubai 04‐3380111 04‐3380112
c)ApcoFiex (APCO) Korea Middle East Sharjah 06‐5352098 06‐5352097
d)K‐Fiex Unigulf, Sharjah 06‐5397099 06‐5397088
*Adhesives, Coatings and Sealents a)Foster Bin Dasmal Gen. Trdg. Est., Dubai 04‐3380111 04‐3380112
(For A/C duct and b)Childers Meaptashi Corp, Sharjah 06‐5574756 06‐5574760
Pipe works) c)Kooltherm Zainab A/C Dubai 04‐2211694 04‐2214019
d)Miracle Fawaz A/C & Ref. Co. Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
e)Fitco National Plastic & Bldg.Materials‐ Sharjah 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
f)NAPCO Leminar Air Conditioning Co. Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
36 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)STAEFA‐Siemens Staefa Control System Dubai 04‐3660000 04‐3660500

Air Conditioning Section 23 09 00 ‐ b)Honeywell Honey Well Mid‐East Ltd., Sharjah 06‐5726143 06‐5726165
Instrumentations and Controls for c)lnvensys lnvensys Middle East Dubai 04‐8074700 04‐8074777
HVAC d)Erie Saif Middle East, Dubai 04‐2670909 04‐2675747
*Automatic Controls
*Thermometers a)Dwyer Westech Dubai 04‐2994124 04‐2994121
b)Trerice Westech Dubai 04‐2994124 04‐2994121
c)Weiss Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
d)Hunter Inter Techno Dubai 04‐3354558 04‐2274685
e)Brannan Fawaz Refrigeration & AJC Co. ‐Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
*Pressure Gauges a)Dwyer Westech ‐ Dubai 04‐2994124 04‐2994121
b)Trerice Westech ‐ Dubai 04‐2994124 04‐2994121
c)Weiss Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
d)Hunter lntertechno, Dubai 04‐2285848 04‐2274685
e)Brannan Fawaz Refrigeration & NC‐Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
g)WIKA Wika ME, Dubai 04‐8839090 04‐8839198
*Flow meters a)Sparling Energy International Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
b)Danfoss Haste, Dubai. 04‐2223133 04‐2279569
c)Smith meter Inc. Petro Gas Agencies, Abu Dhabi 02‐5553455 02‐5547767
d)Hersey Suwaidi Engr. Group Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
*Energy BTU Meter a)Kamstrtup Acsys Control Systems Dubai 04‐3375100 04‐3370127
b)Siemens Siemens Building Technologies Dubai 04‐3660000 04‐3660500
c)Elster AI Dayer Group Dubai 04‐2011111 04‐2824901
d)Sontex Saif Middle East, Dubai 04‐2670909 04‐2675747
e)Sensus Dutco Tenant, Dubai 04‐2220186 04‐2236193
f)Landis + Gyr. AI Tayer Eng., Dubai 04‐2825000 04‐2825008
g)Hydrometer Powercon Switchgear Factory Dubai 04‐2675015 04‐2675514
37 Division 23‐ Heating, Ventilation and a) Nippon Steel Technical Parts Co.‐Dubai 04‐8132739 04‐8132644
Air Conditioning ‐ Hydronic Piping b) Sumitomo Arrow Pipe & Fittings Dubai 04‐8832300 04‐8839055
*Steel pipes Seamless (Black Steel) c) Van Leeuwen Van Leeuwen Pipe Tube ME Abu Dhabi, 02‐6271840 02‐6271244
*Copper Pipes (Refrigeration) a) Mueller Europe Leminar, Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
b) Outokumpu Sameer Abbas Gen. Trdg.‐Dubai 04‐2228229 04‐2222090
c) Mettube Cool Ways Sharjah 06‐ 5300735 06‐5300289
Condensate Drain b) Terrain Fikree Pipe ‐ Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
c) Marley Sultaco ‐ Dubai 06‐5759878 06‐5759879
d) National Plastics (Hunter Fittings National Plastic & Bldg. Materials‐ Sharjah 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
e) Gulf Eternit!OSMA Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.‐Dubai 04‐2857256 04‐2101299
38 Division 23‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)Pullen Danway, Dubai 04‐3473700 04‐3473232

Air Conditioning ‐ Hydronic Pumps b)Ingersoi‐Dresser Danway, Dubai 04‐3473700 04‐3473232
*Pumps (Chilled Water) c)KSB KSB Middle East Dubai 04‐8035000 04‐8807800
d)PACO Fawaz A/C & Ref. Co., Dubai 04‐2282733 04‐2229418
e)ITT Bell & Gossit Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg .‐ Dubai 04‐8105105 04‐8105106
f)Aurora AI Mazroui Eng. Trading Co.‐ Dubai 04‐2826070 04‐2865626
g)Flow Serve Arison Gulf Co.,‐Abu Dhabi 02‐5554 144 02‐5554 146
h)SPP AI Sagar Engineering Co‐Dubai 04‐2669595 04‐2664686
i)Grundfos Grundfos Gulf Distributions‐ Dubai 04‐2666300 04‐2661642
j)Pattrson Corodex Agencies, Dubai 04‐347 2910 04‐347 2848
k)TACO Energy International,Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
l)Southern Cross Bright Central NC,Sharjah 06‐559 9006 06‐5591047
*Sealed Type Expansion Tanks a)ITT Bell & Gossitt Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg. Abu Dhabi 02‐ 6219772 02‐6219773
b)Holden & Brooke Danway ,Dubai 04‐3473700 04‐3473232
c)Pillinger Rapid Cool Dubai 04‐2274910 04‐2281227
39 Division 23 ‐Heating, Ventilation and a) Mueller Europe Laminar, Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
Air Conditioning ‐ Refrigerant Piping b) Outokumpu Sameer Abbas Gen. Trdg.‐Dubai 04‐2228229 04‐2222090
*Copper Pipes (Refrigeration) c) Mettube Cool Ways Sharjah 06‐ 5300735 06‐5300289
b) Terrain Fikree Pipe ‐ Dubai 04‐3377911 04‐3375391
c) Marley Sultaco ‐ Dubai 06‐5759878 06‐5759879
d) National Plastics (Hunter Fittings) National Plastic & Bldg. Materials‐ Sharjah 06‐5331830 06‐5335629
e) Gulf Eternit!OSMA Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.‐Dubai 04‐2857256 04‐2101299
40 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a) Metito Metito Overseas, Sharjah 06‐5561818 06‐5564777
Air Conditioning ‐ HVAC Water b) Houseman Corodex Trdg. Est. ‐Dubai 04‐3472900 04‐3474650
Treatment c) Grace Dearborn Silver Fox, Dubai 04‐3476671 04‐3476672
*Chilled Water Chemical Treatment
41 Division 23 ‐ Heating2 Ventilation and a)Nisshin
Air Conditioning b) NKK
HVAC Ducts and Casing c) Kobe
*Gl Sheet for Ducts d) lsokor
e) Lloyds
f) Zenith
g) Gmamco
h) Nippon
i) Sabic Hadeed
j) AGIS
*Hangers & Supports a)GrinneiiTT AI Suwaidi Group,‐Abu Dhabi 02‐6727488 02‐6779355
b) Mupro AI Maraj Bldg. Material Dubai 04‐3387133 04‐3387122
c) PHD Manufacturing Metallic Bldg, Materials,‐Dubai 04‐2894393 04‐2894395
d) Talco Viking Arabia, Dubai 04‐8895561 04‐8895562
e) ANDRE SBM Speciality 06‐5579962 06‐5579963
Building Materials FZC Sharjah
f) Flamco Metallic Bldg, Materials, Dubai 04‐2894393 04‐2894395
g) Weicco Leminar Air Conditioning Co. ‐ Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
h) Diamond R‐Hira Trades, Dubai 04‐8848414 04‐8848434
i)Hiliti Hiliti Gulf Office, Dubai 04‐806 0300 04‐883 5485
j)Anvil Anvil international 052 6799664
*Flexible Ducts (With insulation) a) CCL Dutco Tennant ‐ Dubai 04‐2220186 04‐2236193

b) Safid lntertechno, Dubai 04‐3354558 04‐3353721
c) Atco Meaptashi Crop., Sharjah 06‐5574756 06‐5574760
d) Omniair Unigulf Deve. Dubai 04‐2223697 04‐2281435
42 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a) Trox Trox Technik ME Office Dubai 04‐3417448 04‐3417449
Air Conditioning ‐Air Ducts Accessories b) Ruskin Titus Ruskin Titus Gulf, Dubai 04‐4213560 04‐4213562
*Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, c) Advanced Air Ambiotech Middle East, Dubai 04‐3473703 04‐3476336
Motorized Damper d)Pottorff Energy International, Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
Pressure Relief Dampers e) Gmamco GMAMCO, Dubai 04‐8802334 04‐8802585
f) KBE KBE Gulf,Dubai 04‐2855561 04‐2855447
g) BETA BETA Factory, Dubai 04‐7069777 04‐7069787
(only fire dampers)
43 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)Myson Awazi Gargash ‐ Dubai 04‐2282151 04‐2214180
Air Conditioning ‐ HVAC Fans b)Penn Energy International,Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
*Ventilation Fans (Axial, Centrifugal c)Nuaire Ambience Technology, Dubai 04‐2722393 04‐2723224
roof, smoke, in‐line industrial, etc.) d)Loren Cook Saif Middle East, Dubai 04‐2670909 04‐2675747
e)ILG‐ Coolair Rapid Cool Trading Co. LLC‐Dubai 04‐2274910 04‐2281227
f)Venta‐Axia IMEC, Sharjah 06‐5568366 06‐5568626
g)Greenheck Westech ‐ Dubai 04‐2994124 04‐2994121
h)s & p AI Wasl Engineering Works ., Dubai 04‐2505056 04‐2505059
i)Vectaire Bright Central NC , Sharjah 06‐5599006 06‐5591047
j)Howden Donkin Beta Trdg. Co.‐Dubai 04‐7069777 04‐7069787
k)Rosenberg Bright Central NC‐Dubai 04‐559 9006 04‐559 1047
*Exhaust Fans (Domestic Type) a)Venta‐Axia IMEC, Sharjah 06‐5568366 06‐5568626
b) Helios Energy International, Sharjah 06‐5343477 06‐5343756
c) Vortice Beta Trdg . Co. Dubai 04‐7069777 04‐7069787
d) S&P AI Wasl Engineering Works ., Dubai 04‐2505056 04‐2505059
e) Vectaire Bright Central NC ‐ Sharjah 06‐5599006 06‐5591047
f) Senior Colman Ltd.
44 Division 23 ‐ Heating1 Ventilation and a)Air Master Air Master Eqpt. EM Ajman 06‐7439600 06‐7436700
Air Conditioning ‐Air Outlets and b)Beta Beta Industrial‐Dubai 04‐3331486 04‐3331673
Inlets c)Technalco Technalco‐ UAQ 06‐7665661 06‐7666686
*Air Distribution Outlets d)Best Choice Ind Best Choice Ind. Dubai 04‐3471571 04‐3491671
e)Airtron Airtron, Dubai 04‐2672477 04‐2672330
f)KBE KBE Gulf, Dubai 04‐2855561 04‐2855447
45 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)Vokes Bin Dasmal Gen. Trdg. Est.‐ Dubai 04‐3380111 04‐3380112
Air Conditioning ‐Air Cleaning Devices b)AAF AAF ‐International 04‐3397688 04‐3397881
*Air filters c)Trox Trox Technik ME Office, Dubai 04‐3417448 04‐3417449
46 Division 23 ‐ Heating, Ventilation and a)Carrier Corp. UTS Carrier‐ Dubai 04‐3965455 04‐3967311

Air Conditioning ‐ Decentralized HVAC b)Trane Co. Juma AI Majid Est. (Comm.Div.) Dubai 04‐2851145 04‐2856064
Equipment c)York Corp York A/C & Ref., Dubai 04‐3099 999 04‐3326064
*air handling Units d)Hitachi GIBCA A/C Div.‐ Sharjah 06‐5332925 06‐5337195
e)Mitsubishi ‐ Electric United Electronics Co. Dubai 04‐2277401 04‐2230529
f)Mcqauy/AAF AAF ‐ Mcqauy ‐ Dubai 04‐3397688 04‐3397881
g)Lennox Eros Electrical, Dubai 04‐2666216 04‐2620677
h)Rheem Leminar A/C Co. Dubai 04‐3338700 04‐3339700
i)Mitsubish i Daiya United Electronics Co. Dubai 04‐2277401 04‐2230529
j)Dunham Bush Dunham‐Bush Middle East Dubai 04‐2248231 04‐2248232
*Variable Refrigerant Flow System a)Sanyo AI Futtaim Engineering Dubai 04‐2213600 04‐2211465
c)Hitachi Eros Electricals, Dubai 04‐3385200 04‐3382406
d)Mitsubishi Daiya United Electronics Co. Dubai 04‐2277401 04‐2230529
e)toshiba AI Futtaim Electronics Dubai 04‐2213600 04‐2211465
f)York Corp York NC & Ref. Dubai 04‐3099 999 04‐3326064
g)Trane Co. Juma AI Majid Est. (Comm.Div.) Dubai 04‐2851145 04‐2856064
h)Carrier Corp. UTS Carrier Dubai 04‐3965455 04‐3967311
l)Daikin Juma AI Majid Est. E/M Works ‐ Dubai 04‐2851145 06‐28560644
n)General Electric Juma AI Majid Est. (Comm.Div .) Dubai 04‐2851145 06‐2856064

o)General Elapco, Dubai 04‐2820477 04‐2820462
47 Division 25 ‐ Integrated Automation a)STAEFA‐Siemens Siemens LLC Dubai 04‐3660000 04‐3660630
Facility Controls b)Honeywell Honeywell Building Solution Dubai 04‐4505800 04‐4505900
c)lnvensys lnvensys Middle East. Dubai 04‐8074700 04‐8074777
48 Division 33 ‐ Utilities a)Royal Development,Abu Dhabi 02‐6323236 02‐6337267
LPG Tanks and LPG System b) SER GAS Abu Dhabi 02‐6732626 02‐6732627
*Natural Gas System c) AI Sabha Modern E/M Works Est, 04‐3349567 04‐3371150
Dubai
d) Q Energy, Abu Dhabi 02‐6724477 02‐6724448
49 Division 44 ‐ Pollution Control a)Culligan Culligan lnt'l Dubai 04‐8836612 04‐8836676
Eguipment b) Permutit Vivendi Water Gulf, Sharjah 06‐5570703 06‐5570704
Treatment Plant c) Metito Metito Overseas ,Sharjah 06‐5561818 06‐5564777
*Water Treatment Equipment & d) EMCO EMCO ENGR. INC,Abu Dhabi 02‐6458154 02‐6447270
Accessories
Annex 2 correlation between drawings and specification
Specifciation No. Specifciation Title Drawing Number
00 22 12 Mechanical Works Requirements all drawings
00 22 13 Integrated automation network equipment all drawings
01 91 00 00 40 Commissioning all drawings
21 13 000 Fire Fighting System Drawings from P0201 to P0202
Drawings from P0101 to P0105,,Drawings from P0201 to
22 00 00 Plumbing General Purposes
P0292,P0801to P0807
Mechanical Sound vibration and Seismic
22 05 48.00 all drawings
Control
Drawings from P0101 to P0105,,Drawings from P0201 to
P0292,P0801.
22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps Drawings P0201 to P0205,P0291,P0292P0801to P0807
22 14 29 Sump Pumps Drawings P0101,P0102,P0801
22 51 00 Swimming Pools & Fountains Specifications Drawings P0401,P0491,P0801.
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION,
23 00 00 Drawings from M0101 to M0105,M0191M0192,,P0806,P0807.
AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
23 05 41 Noise And Vibration Control Drawings from M0101 to M0105,M0191M0192,,P0801 to P0806.
23 06 00 s Piping Accessorie
Drawings from M0101 to M0105,M0191M0192,M0201TO
M0204,P0801 to P0807.
23 08 00 commissioning hvac system
M0204,P0801 to P0807.
23 09 13 VALVES
23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System M0601,M0602
ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
23 09 33.00 40 M0601,M0602
FOR HVAC
CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR
23 25 00
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
23 31 13.00 40 METAL DUCTS Drawings from M0101 to M0105,M0191M0192
23 31 14.00 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS Drawings from M0101 to M0105,
23 37 13.00 40 Diffusers, Registers and Grills Drawings from M0101 to M0105,P0807.
Modular Indoor Central‐Station Air Handling
23 73 13.00 40 Drawings M0104,M0191,M0192,P0805
Units
23 81 00 00 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment Drawings M0101,M0102,P0802
23 81 43 Pool Heat Pump P0802,P0491
M0204,P0803,P0804,P0805.
33 30 00 Sanitary Sewers Drawings P0101,P0802
33 50 00 SNG Project Specification P0201,P0202,P0805
33 56 10 Fuel Oil System P0201

Mechanical Specifciation - Rev 01 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Mechanical Specifciation - Rev 01 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Nudra Beach Villas A3, A4

Division 00 Special instruction to bidders

00 22 12 Mechanical Works Requirements

00 22 13 Further Instruction to Mechanical Work Bidders

Division 21 Fire Fighting System

21 13 000 Fire Fighting System-01

Division 23 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)

23 00 00 Air Supply, Distribution,Ventilation And Exhaust Systems

23 31 14.00 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS

23 37 13.00 40 Diffusers, Registers and Grills

Mechanical Specifications Div.00,01,21,22,23,33 /Page - 1 Table of Content

23 73 13.00 40 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units-01

23 81 00 00 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment-1

23 81 43 Pool Heat Pump

23 8129 Variable Refrigerant Flow

33 56 10 Fuel Oil System

Mechanical Specifications Div.00,01,21,22,23,33 /Page - 2 Table of Content

Division 00 Special instruction to bidders

00 22 12 Mechanical Works Requirements

00 22 13 Further Instruction to Mechanical Work Bidders

Mechanical Specifications Div.00 /Page - 1 Table of Content

GENERAL MECHANICAL WORKS REQUIREMENTS

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 1 General Conditions

1.4 External Design Conditions

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 2 General Conditions

1.5 Codes and Standards

ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 3 General Conditions

UAE Guide to Water Supply Regulations 2017 (RSB)

1.7 Equipment Ratings

1.8 Pretender Requirements

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 4 General Conditions

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 5 General Conditions

1.12 Tender Drawings

1.13.1 DRAWING MATERIAL AND SIZE

c. Electronic files shall conform to ISO CAD and Guidelines.

1.13.2 DRAWING FORMAT:

1.13.3 SIZE AND SCALE:

1.13.4 TITLE BLOCK

a. Use the Standard design Title Block for CAD drawings.

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 6 General Conditions

1.13.5 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.13.6 IDENTIFICATION OF DRAWINGS

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 7 General Conditions

b. Amendment Construction Drawings

c. Reissue Construction Drawings

1.13.7 Shop Drawings

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 8 General Conditions

a) Number and title of drawing (s),

 Floor plans 1:50

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 9 General Conditions

1.14 Complete & Finished Work

Complete and commission all work within the contract.

The drawings shall:

a) Indicate sizes and positions of all plant, equipment pipes conduits.

Mechanical Specification 00 22 12 - 10 General Conditions

The manuals shall be encased in loose leaf binders.

The Operating and maintenance manuals of equipment to be provided by equipment VENDORS

The Operating and maintenance manuals of installation system to be provided by Contractor.

The contractor shall be submit the QA/QC hand-over records.

The board shall be plastic with engraved text and drawings.

b- Vol. (2) Factory Inspection and test certificates

c- Vol. (3) Testing and Commissioning Reports